Glenarden Police Department General Orders

Glenarden Chief of Police Philip A. O’Donnell

 

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

The below listed General Orders has not been implemented into standard policies and procedures (NISPP) for the City of Glenarden Police Department;

1. General Order #207 _____ Retiree Concealed Firearms

2. General Order #303 _____ Control Devices

3. General Order #304 _____ Conducted Energy Devices

4. General Order #310 _____ Canines (K-9)

5. General Order #331 _____ Limited English Proficiency Services

6. General Order #333 _____ Biological Samples

7. General Order #334 _____ Chaplains

8. General Order #335 _____ Public Safety Video Surveillance System

9. General Order #339 _____ Native American Graves Protection and Repatriation

10. General Order #402 _____ Roll Call

11. General Order #411 _____ Foreign Diplomatic and Consular Representatives 

12. General Order #413 _____ Immigration Violations

13. General Order #414 _____ Utility Service Emergencies

14. General Order #415 _____ Crisis Intervention Incidents

15. General Order #416 _____ Aircraft Accidents

16. General Order #418 _____ Air Support

17. General Order #420 _____ Criminal Organizations

18. General Order #422 _____ Mobile Audio Video

19. General Order #424 _____ Portable Audio/Video Recorders

20. General Order #426 _____ Bike Patrol

21. General Order #425 _____ Public Recording of Law Enforcement Activity

22. General Order #606 _____ Unmanned Aerial System (UAS) Operations

23. General Order #903 _____ Prison Rape Elimination

24. General Order #1029 ____ Performance History Audits  

 

 

LAW ENFORCEMENT CODE OF ETHICS

As a law enforcement officer, my fundamental duty is to serve the community; to safeguard lives and property; to protect the innocent against deception, the weak against oppression or intimidation and the peaceful against abuse or disorder; and to respect the constitutional rights of all to liberty, equality and justice.

I will keep my private life unsullied as an example to all and will behave in a manner that does not bring discredit to me or to my agency. I will maintain courageous calm in the face of danger, scorn or ridicule; develop self-restraint; and be constantly mindful of the welfare of others. Honest in thought and deed both in my personal and official life, I will be exemplary in obeying the law and the regulations of my department. Whatever I see or hear of a confidential nature or that is confided to me in my official capacity will be kept ever secret unless revelation is necessary in the performance of my duty.

I will never act officiously or permit personal feelings, prejudices, political beliefs, aspirations, animosities or friendships to influence my decisions. With no compromise for crime and with relentless prosecution of criminals, I will enforce the law courteously and appropriately without fear or favor, malice or ill will, never employing unnecessary force or abuse and never accepting gratuities.

I recognize the badge of my office as a symbol of public faith, and I accept it as a public trust to be held so long as I am true to the ethics of police service. I will never engage in acts of corruption or bribery, nor will I condone such acts by other police officers. I will cooperate with all legally authorized agencies and their representatives in the pursuit of justice.

I know that I alone am responsible for my own standard of professional performance and will take every reasonable opportunity to enhance and improve my level of knowledge and competence.

I will constantly strive to achieve these objectives and ideals, dedicating myself before God to my chosen profession . . . law enforcement.

MISSION STATEMENT

Mission Statement

With courage, honor and integrity we protect the rights and dignity of all citizens.  In partnership with our communities, we strive to preserve the peace and provide for a safe environment for all.

Courage

With steadfastness and purpose of mind, we accept the responsibility of overcoming adversity to remain effective, efficient, and responsive to the needs of our communities.

Honor

With distinction and pride, we protect the rights of all citizens equally.

Integrity

We are responsible for our conduct, both professionally and personally. We are honest, fair, and strong character. We hold ourselves accountable to the highest standards of ethical conduct and endeavor to be role models for others.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Blank for Chief’s Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Law Enforcement Code of Ethics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Mission Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Chapter 1 – Law Enforcement Role and Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

100 – Law Enforcement Authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

101 – Chief Executive Officer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

102 – Oath of Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

103 – Policy Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 2 – Organization and Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

200 – Organizational Structure and Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

201 – General Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

202 – Emergency Operations Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

203 – Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

204 – Electronic Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

  1. – Administrative Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
  2. – Supervision Staffing Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
  3. NISPP…………….

Chapter 3 – General Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

300 – Use of Force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

  1. – Use of Force Review Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
  2. – Handcuffing and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

303 – NISPP………………..

304 – NISPP……………..

305 – Officer-Involved Shootings and Deaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

306 – Firearms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

307 – Vehicle Pursuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

308 – Foot Pursuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

309 – Officer Response to Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

310 – NIPP………………….

311 – Domestic Violence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

312 – Search and Seizure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

313 – Child Abuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

314 – Adult Abuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

315 – Discriminatory Harassment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

316 – Missing Persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

317 – Public Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

318 – Victim and Witness Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

319 – Hate Crimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

320 – Standards of Conduct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

321 – Information Technology Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

322 – Report Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

323 – Media Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

  1. – Subpoenas and Court Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
  2. – Outside Agency Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
  3. – Registered Offender Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
  4. – Major Incident Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

328 – Death Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

329 – Identity Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

330 – Private Person’s Arrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

  1. NISPP………….
  2. – Communications with Persons with Disabilities . . . . . . . . . . . 198

333 – NISPP………………

334 – NISPP…………………

  1. NISPP………..
  2. – Child and Dependent Adult Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

337 – Service Animals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

338 – Volunteers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

  1. NISPP……..
  2. – Off-Duty Law Enforcement Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
  3. – Department Use of Social Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Chapter 4 – Patrol Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

400 – Patrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

401 – Racial- or Bias-Based Profiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

402 – NISPP………………….

403 – Crime and Disaster Scene Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

404 – Prince George County . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

405 – Ride-Alongs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

406 – Hazardous Material Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

407 – Hostage and Barricade Incidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

408 – Response to Bomb Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

409 – Mental Health Evaluations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

410 – Citation Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

411 – NISPP………

412 – Rapid Response and Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

413 –  NISPP……………..

414 –  NISPP…………….

415 –  NISPP…………….

416 –  NISPP……………….

417 – Field Training Officers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

418 –  NISPP…………………

419 – Contacts and Temporary Detentions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

420 –  NISPP……………..

421 – Shift Supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

422 –  NISPP………………

423 – Mobile Data Terminal Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

424 –  NISPP…………..

425 –  NISPP……….

426 –  NISPP………………..

427 – Automated License Plate Readers (ALPRs) . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

428 – Homeless Persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

429 – Medical Cannabis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

430 – Medical Aid and Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

431 – First Amendment Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

432 – Civil Disputes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

433 – Suspicious Activity Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Chapter 5 – Traffic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

500 – Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

501 – Traffic Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

502 – Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

503 – Vehicle Tow Hearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

504 – Under the Influence/Impaired Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

505 – Safety Equipment Repair Orders (SERO), Traffic and Parking Citations . . . 386

506 – Disabled Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Chapter 6 – Investigation Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

600 – Investigation and Prosecution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

601 – Sexual Assault Investigations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

602 – Asset Forfeiture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

603 – Informants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

604 – Eyewitness Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

605 – Brady Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

606 –  NISPP……….

607 – Warrant Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Chapter 7 – Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

700 – Department-Owned and Personal Property . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

701 – Personal Communication Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

702 – Vehicle Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

703 – Vehicle Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

704 – Cash Handling, Security and Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Chapter 8 – Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

800 – Crime Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

801 – Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

802 – Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

803 – Records Division (Prince George County PD) . . . . . . . . . . . 466

804 – Records Maintenance and Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

805 – Protected Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

806 – Animal Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

807 – Jeanne Clery Campus Security Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

Chapter 9 – Custody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

900 – Temporary Custody of Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

901 – Temporary Custody of Juveniles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

902 – Custodial Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

903 –  NISPP……………..

Chapter 10 – Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

1000 – Recruitment and Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

1001 – Performance Evaluations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

1002 – Special Assignments and Promotions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

1003 – Grievances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

1004 – Anti-Retaliation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

1005 – Reporting of Arrests, Convictions and Court Orders . . . . . . . . . 539

1006 – Drug- and Alcohol-Free Workplace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

1007 – Sick Leave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

1008 – Communicable Diseases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547

1009 – Smoking and Tobacco Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

1010 – Personnel Complaints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552

1011 – Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

1012 – Body Armor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

1013 – Personnel Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

1014 – Request for Change of Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

1015 – Commendations and Awards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

1016 – Fitness for Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

1017 – Meal Periods and Breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

1018 – Lactation Breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578

1019 – Payroll Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

1020 – Overtime Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

1021 – Outside Employment and Outside Overtime . . . . . . . . . . . 583

1022 – Work-Related Injury and Illness Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . 588

1023 – Personal Appearance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

1024 – Uniforms and Civilian Attire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

1025 – Explorers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

1026 – Conflict of Interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

1027 – Badges, Patches and Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606

1028 – Temporary Modified-Duty Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608

1029 –  NISPP……………

   1030 – Employee Speech, Expression and Social Networking . . . . . . . .                   615

1031 – Workplace Safety and Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

Use of Force Continuum (300).pdf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Law Enforcement Code of Ethics

As a law enforcement officer, my fundamental duty is to serve the community; to safeguard lives and property; to protect the innocent against deception, the weak against oppression or intimidation and the peaceful against abuse or disorder; and to respect the constitutional rights of all to liberty, equality and justice.

I will keep my private life unsullied as an example to all and will behave in a manner that does not bring discredit to me or to my agency. I will maintain courageous calm in the face of danger, scorn or ridicule; develop self-restraint; and be constantly mindful of the welfare of others. Honest in thought and deed both in my personal and official life, I will be exemplary in obeying the law and the regulations of my department. Whatever I see or hear of a confidential nature or that is confided to me in my official capacity will be kept ever secret unless revelation is necessary in the performance of my duty.

I will never act officiously or permit personal feelings, prejudices, political beliefs, aspirations, animosities or friendships to influence my decisions. With no compromise for crime and with relentless prosecution of criminals, I will enforce the law courteously and appropriately without fear or favor, malice or ill will, never employing unnecessary force or abuse and never accepting gratuities.

I recognize the badge of my office as a symbol of public faith, and I accept it as a public trust to be held so long as I am true to the ethics of police service. I will never engage in acts of corruption or bribery, nor will I condone such acts by other police officers. I will cooperate with all legally authorized agencies and their representatives in the pursuit of justice.

I know that I alone am responsible for my own standard of professional performance and will take every reasonable opportunity to enhance and improve my level of knowledge and competence.

I will constantly strive to achieve these objectives and ideals, dedicating myself before God to my chosen profession . . . law enforcement.

Mission Statement

Mission Statement

With courage, honor and integrity we protect the rights and dignity of all citizens.  In partnership with our communities, we strive to preserve the peace and provide for a safe environment for all.

Courage

With steadfastness and purpose of mind, we accept the responsibility of overcoming adversity to remain effective, efficient, and responsive to the needs of our communities.

Honor

With distinction and pride, we protect the rights of all citizens equally.

Integrity

We are responsible for our conduct, both professionally and personally. We are honest, fair, and strong character. We hold ourselves accountable to the highest standards of ethical conduct and endeavor to be role models for others.

Chapter 1 - Law Enforcement Role and Authority

Law Enforcement Authority

  1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to affirm the authority of the members of the Glenarden Police Department to perform their functions based on established legal authority.

  1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to limit its members to only exercise the authority granted to them by law.

  1. PEACE OFFICER POWERS

Certified members of this department are authorized to exercise peace officer powers pursuant to applicable state law (Md. Code CP § 2-102(b); Md. Code PS § 2-412(b)).

  1. AUTHORITY OF THE GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

The authority of officers includes the following:

  1. May make arrests within the jurisdiction of the Glenarden Police Department (Md. Code CP § 2-202):
    1. In compliance with an arrest warrant.
    2. Without a warrant:
      1. When an individual commits or attempts to commit a felony or misdemeanor in the presence or within the view of the officer.
      2. When the officer reasonably believes that an individual is committing a felony or misdemeanor in the presence or within the view of the officer.
      3. When the officer has probable cause to believe that a felony has been committed or attempted, and the individual has committed or attempted to commit the felony, whether or not it was in the presence or within the view of the officer.
  2. May make arrests, conduct investigations and otherwise enforce the laws of Maryland throughout the state, without limitations as to jurisdiction, while acting in accordance with Glenarden Police Department policies and procedures, except for enforcement of the vehicle laws, when (Md. Code CP § 2-102; Md. Code CR § 5-802):
    1. The officer is participating in a joint investigation with officials from another state, federal or local law enforcement unit, at least one of which has local jurisdiction.
    2. The officer is assisting another law enforcement officer.
    3. The officer is acting at the request of a law enforcement officer or a Maryland State Police officer.
    4. An emergency exists.
    5. The officer is in fresh pursuit of a person who (Md. Code CP § 2-301):
      1. Has committed or is reasonably believed by the officer to have committed a felony within the jurisdiction of the Glenarden Police Department.
      2. Has committed a misdemeanor in the presence of the officer within the jurisdiction of the Glenarden Police Department.

An officer who acts outside his/her jurisdiction shall notify the appropriate state or local official as required by state law (Md. Code CP § 2-102(c); Md. Code CR § 5-802(b)).

    1. AUTHORITY OF THE GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

The authority of a special police officer includes:

  1. Within the jurisdiction of the Glenarden Police Department (Md. Code PS § 3-307):
    1. Arresting individuals who trespass or commit offenses on the property described in the application for the special police commission.
    2. Exercising the powers of a police officer on the property described in the application for the special police commission.
    3. Exercising police officer powers in a county or municipal corporation in connection with the care, custody and protection of property for which the Glenarden Police Department has an obligation.
    4. Directing and controlling traffic on public highways and roads in the immediate vicinity of the property described in the application for the special police commission to facilitate the movement of traffic to and from the property, if approved in advance by the Secretary of Maryland State Police.
    5. Arresting or issuing a traffic citation for a violation of the Maryland Vehicle Law or any other state or local traffic law or regulation if the officer has a probationary or permanent appointment as a security officer or member of an industrial police force and has completed the basic training course for police officers as established by the special police commission.
  2. Outside the jurisdiction described in the application for the special police commission (Md. Code PS § 3-307(c)(2)):
    1. While in active pursuit for the purpose of immediate apprehension.
    1. AUTHORITY OF THE GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

The authority of a railroad police officer includes:

  1. Within the jurisdiction of the Glenarden Police Department (Md. Code PS § 3-406):
    1. Arresting individuals who trespass or commit offenses on property owned, leased, operated or controlled by the Glenarden Police Department.
    2. When requested or authorized to act by the executive officer or chief police officer of a county.
    3. When ordered to act by the Governor.
  2. Outside the  jurisdiction  described  in  the  application  for  the  Maryland  Police  Training Commission (MPTC) (Md. Code PS § 3-406(b)(2)):
    1. While in active pursuit of a suspect for the purpose of immediate apprehension.
  3. Outside the  jurisdiction  described  in  the  application  for  the  Maryland  Police  Training Commission (MPTC) (Md. Code PS § 3-406(b)(2)):
    1. Arresting individuals who trespass or commit offenses on property owned, leased, operated or controlled by the Glenarden Police Department.
    2. When requested or authorized to act by the executive officer or chief police officer of a county.
    3. When ordered to act by the Governor.
  4. Outside the  jurisdiction  described  in  the  application  for  the  Maryland  Police  Training Commission (MPTC) (Md. Code PS § 3-406(b)(2)):
    1. While in active pursuit of a suspect for the purpose of immediate apprehension.
    1. AUTHORITY OF THE GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Officers of the Glenarden Police Department have the same powers as sheriff’s constables, police officers and other peace officers possess within their respective jurisdictions and may execute arrest warrants throughout Maryland (Md. Code PS § 2-412(b)).

Officers may act within the limits of this department when:

  1. In pursuit of a criminal suspect.
  2. In search of a criminal or suspect wanted for a crime committed outside of the limits of this department or when interviewing or seeking to interview a witness or supposed witness to the crime.
  3. A crime is committed in the presence of the officer and the arrested party must be immediately transferred to the custody of the local law enforcement agency having jurisdiction.
  4. Requested to act by the Chief of Police.
  5. Ordered by the Governor of Maryland to act within this department.
  6. Enforcing the motor vehicle laws of the state, except in Baltimore City.
  7. In Baltimore City while enforcing Title 23 of the Transportation Article.
  8. In any building or place when ordered by either the Maryland President of the Senate or the Speaker of the House of Delegates to guard the safety of legislators or the integrity of the legislative process.
  9. Acting to protect the safety of an elected state official.
  10. In the municipal corporations of Somerset County.
  11. Enforcing the laws related to child pornography in accordance with Md. Code CR § 11-207.
  12. Participating in a joint investigation with officials from another state, federal or local law enforcement agency, at least one of which has local jurisdiction, and when:
    1. Assisting a law enforcement officer.
    2. Acting at the request of a local law enforcement officer.
    3. An emergency exists that calls for immediate action to protect the health, safety, welfare or property from actual or threatened harm or from an unlawful act.
    4. Acting in accordance with regulations adopted by the Secretary of Maryland State Police to implement this item.
  13. Conducting  investigations  relating  to  or  otherwise  enforcing  unauthorized  access  to computer and related material in accordance with Md. Code CR § 7-302.
  14. Conducting an investigation of suspected homicides or inmates in accordance with Md. Code CS § 9-602.1.
    1. INTERSTATE PEACE OFFICER POWERS

Peace officer powers may be extended to other states:

  1. As applicable under interstate compacts, memorandums of understanding or mutual aid agreements in compliance with the laws of each state.
  2. When an officer enters the following states as follows:
    1. In Delaware, while in the pursuit of a person believed to have committed a felony, a misdemeanor or a violation of the motor vehicle code (11 Del. C. § 1932).
    2. In the District of Columbia, while in pursuit of a person who has committed a felony or who the pursuing officer has reasonable grounds to believe has committed a felony (D.C. Code § 23-903).
    3. In Pennsylvania, while in fresh pursuit of a person in order to arrest him/her (42 Pa. Cons. Stat. § 8922).
    4. In Virginia while in fresh pursuit of a person to arrest him/her for committing a felony (Va. Code § 19.2-79).
    5. In West Virginia while in fresh pursuit of a person to arrest him/her for committing a felony (W. Va. Code § 62-11-1).
    1. FEDERAL PEACE OFFICER POWERS

Any federal law enforcement officer has jurisdiction regarding federal buildings, grounds and property pursuant to 18 USC § 13 and 40 USC § 1315.

A federal law enforcement officer has the same authority to make arrests and serve search and seizure warrants as a law enforcement officer of Maryland when (Md. Code CP § 2-104):

  1. The federal law enforcement officer is participating in a joint investigation with officials from a state or local law enforcement unit.
  2. The federal law enforcement officer is rendering assistance to a police officer.
  3. The federal law enforcement officer is acting at the request of a local police officer or a Maryland State Police officer.
  4. An emergency exists.

Any federal law enforcement officer who acts under the authority granted by Maryland shall notify the appropriate state or local official as required pursuant to Md. Code CP § 2-104(c).

100.9.1 UNITED STATES PARK POLICE OFFICERS

A United States park police officer may make arrests, conduct investigation, issue citations and otherwise enforce the laws of the state within areas of the National Park System (Md. Code CP

§ 2-102).

100.10   CONSTITUTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

All members shall observe and comply with every person’s clearly established rights under the United States and Maryland Constitutions.

Chief Executive Officer

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

All law enforcement Chief Executive Officers employed within the State of Maryland are required to meet specific requirements for appointment. This policy provides guidelines for the appointment of the Chief Executive Officer of the Glenarden Police Department, who is required to exercise the powers and duties of the office as prescribed by state law.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department that the Chief of Police meets the minimum standards for exercising his/her authority granted by law.

    1. CHIEF OF POLICE REQUIREMENTS

The Chief of Police of this department, as a condition of employment, shall have successfully completed the course of training prescribed by the Maryland Police Training Commission (MPTC) and be certified pursuant to COMAR 12.04.01.06.

Oath of Office

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to ensure that, when appropriate, oaths are administered to department members.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department that, when appropriate, department members affirm the oath of their office as an expression of commitment to the constitutional rights of those served by the Department and the dedication of its members to their duties.

    1. OATH OF OFFICE

All department members, when appropriate, shall take and subscribe to the required oath or affirmation to the Clerk of the Circuit Court in addition to any other form of oath or affirmation required by the Maryland Constitution, state law or ordinance (Md. Const. Art. I § 9; Md. Code CJ § 2-104; Md. Code PS § 3-309). If a member is opposed to taking an oath, he/she shall be permitted to substitute the word “affirm” for the word “swear.”

    1. MAINTENANCE OF RECORDS

The oath of office shall be filed as prescribed by law (Md. Const. Art. I § 10; Md. Code PS § 3-309).

Policy Manual

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The manual of the Glenarden Police Department is hereby established and shall be referred to as the Policy Manual or the manual. The manual is a statement of the current policies, procedures, rules and guidelines of this department. All members are to conform to the provisions of this manual.

All prior and existing manuals, orders and regulations that are in conflict with this manual are rescinded, except to the extent that portions of existing manuals, orders and other regulations that have not been included herein shall remain in effect where they do not conflict with the provisions of this manual.

    1. POLICY

Except where otherwise expressly stated, the provisions of this manual shall be considered as guidelines. It is recognized that the work of law enforcement is not always predictable and that circumstances may arise which warrant departure from these guidelines. It is the intent of this manual to be viewed from an objective standard, taking into consideration the sound discretion entrusted to members of this department under the circumstances reasonably available at the time of any incident.

    1. DISCLAIMER

The provisions contained in the Policy Manual are not intended to create an employment contract nor any employment rights or entitlements. The policies contained within this manual are for the internal use of the Glenarden Police Department and shall not be construed to create a higher standard or duty of care for civil or criminal liability against the Town, its officials or members. Violations of any provision of any policy contained within this manual shall only form the basis for department administrative action, training or discipline. The Glenarden Police Department reserves the right to revise any policy content, in whole or in part.

    1. AUTHORITY

The Chief of Police shall be considered the ultimate authority for the content and adoption of the provisions of this manual and shall ensure compliance with all applicable federal, state and local laws. The Chief of Police or the authorized designee is authorized to issue General Orders, which shall modify those provisions of the manual to which they pertain. General Orders shall remain in effect until such time as they may be permanently incorporated into the manual.

    1. DEFINITIONS

The following words and terms shall have these assigned meanings, unless it is apparent from the content that they have a different meaning:

Adult – Any person 18 years of age or older (Md. Code CJ § 3-8A-01).

APS – Adult Protective Services.

Town – The Town of Prince George County.

Non-sworn – Employees and volunteers who are not sworn peace officers.

CJIS – Maryland Criminal Justice Information System.

COMAR – Maryland Code of Regulations (Example: COMAR 10.38.03.02).

Custodian of Records – The authorized person having physical custody and control of the records of the Department (Md. Code GP § 4-101).

Department/GPD – The Glenarden Police Department.

DJS – Maryland Department of Juvenile Services.

DPSCS – Maryland Department of Public Safety and Correctional Services.

Employee – Any person employed by the Department.

Manual – The Glenarden Police Department Policy Manual.

May – Indicates a permissive, discretionary or conditional action.

Md. Code – Maryland Annotated Codes (Example: Md. Code PS § 1-301). Following are abbreviations for sections of the Maryland Annotated Codes referenced in this Policy Manual:

  • CJ – Courts and Judicial Procedure
  • CL – Commercial Law
  • CP – Criminal Procedure
  • CR – Criminal Law
  • CS – Correctional Services
  • ED – Education
  • EL – Election Law
  • ET – Estates and Trusts
  • FL – Family Law
  • GP – General Provisions
  • HG – Health – General
  • HS – Human Services
  • IL – Insurance Law
  • LE – Labor and Employment
  • LG – Local Government
  • NR – Natural Resources
  • PS – Public Safety
  • SG – State Government
  • SP – State Personnel and Pensions
  • TG – Tax – General
  • TR – Transportation

Md. Const. – Maryland Constitution (Example: Md. Const. Art. IV §44).

MDOT – Maryland Department of Transportation.

MEMA – Maryland Emergency Management Agency.

Member – Any person employed or appointed by the Glenarden Police Department, including:

  • Full- and part-time employees
  • Sworn peace officers
  • Reserve, auxiliary officers
  • Non-sworn employees
  • Volunteers

METERS – Maryland Electronic Telecommunications Enforcement Resource System.

MPTC – Maryland Police Training Commission.

MSP – Department of Maryland State Police.

MVA – Motor Vehicle Administration.

OAG – Maryland Office of the Attorney General.

Officer – Those employees, regardless of rank, who are sworn members of the Glenarden Police Department.

On-duty    A  member’s  status  during  the  period  when  he/she  is  actually  engaged  in  the performance of his/her assigned duties.

Order – A written or verbal instruction issued by a superior.

Rank – The title of the classification held by an officer.

Shall or will – Indicates a mandatory action.

Should – Indicates a generally required or expected action, absent a rational basis for failing to conform.

Supervisor – A person in a position of authority that may include responsibility for hiring, transfer, suspension, promotion, discharge, assignment, reward or discipline of other department members, directing the work of other members or having the authority to adjust grievances. The

supervisory exercise of authority may not be merely routine or clerical in nature but requires the use of independent judgment.

The term “supervisor” may also include any person (e.g., officer-in-charge, lead or senior worker) given responsibility for the direction of the work of others without regard to a formal job title, rank or compensation.

When there is only one department member on-duty, that person may also be the supervisor, except when circumstances reasonably require the notification or involvement of the member’s off-duty supervisor or an on-call supervisor.

    1. ISSUING THE POLICY MANUAL

An electronic version of the Policy Manual will be made available to all members on the department network for viewing and printing. No changes shall be made to the manual without authorization from the Chief of Police or the authorized designee.

Each member shall acknowledge that he/she has been provided access to and has had the opportunity to review the Policy Manual and General Orders. Members shall seek clarification as needed from an appropriate supervisor for any provisions that they do not fully understand.

    1. PERIODIC REVIEW OF THE POLICY MANUAL

The Chief of Police will ensure that the Policy Manual is periodically reviewed and updated as necessary.

    1. REVISIONS TO POLICIES

All revisions to the Policy Manual will be provided to each member on or before the date the policy becomes effective. Each member will be required to acknowledge that he/she has reviewed the revisions and shall seek clarification from an appropriate supervisor as needed.

Members are responsible for keeping abreast of all Policy Manual revisions.

Each Lieutenant will ensure that members under his/her command are aware of any Policy Manual revision.

All department members suggesting revision of the contents of the Policy Manual shall forward their written suggestions to their Lieutenants, who will consider the recommendations and forward them to the command staff as appropriate.

Chapter 2 - Organization and Administration

Organizational Structure and Responsibility

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy establishes the organizational structure of the Department and defines general responsibilities of department members.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department will implement and maintain an organizational structure that provides clear and identifiable roles for command, control and guidance of the Department. Each position and assignment should have clearly identified responsibilities and a defined chain of command.

    1. COMMAND PROTOCOL
      1. SUCCESSION OF COMMAND

The Chief of Police exercises command over all members of the Glenarden Police Department. During planned absences, the Chief of Police will designate a Lieutenant to serve as the acting Chief of Police.

Except when designated as above, the order of command authority in the absence or unavailability of the Chief of Police is as follows:

  1. Operations Services Lieutenant
  1. Investigative Services Lieutenant
  1. Administration Lieutenant
  1. On-duty Shift Supervisor
      1. UNITY OF COMMAND

The principles of unity of command ensure efficient supervision and control within the Department. Generally, each member shall be accountable to one supervisor at any time for a given assignment or responsibility. Except where specifically delegated authority may exist by policy or special assignment (e.g., Canine, Bicycle Patrol), any supervisor may temporarily direct any subordinate if an operational necessity exists.

200.4 AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILITY

Each member will be assigned duties and responsibilities. Each member is delegated the authority necessary to effectively execute those responsibilities. Each member will also be held accountable for the appropriate application of that delegated authority.

General Orders

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for issuing General Orders.

    1. POLICY

General Orders will be used to modify policies of the Glenarden Police Department when an immediate need to adapt a policy or procedure exists, in order to best meet the mission of the Department. Applicable memorandums of understanding/collective bargaining agreements and other alternatives should be considered before a General Order is issued.

    1. PROTOCOL

General Orders will be incorporated into the Policy Manual, as required, upon approval. General Orders will modify existing policies or create a new policy as appropriate and will be rescinded if incorporated into the manual.

The Administration Lieutenant or the authorized designee should ensure that all  General Orders are disseminated appropriately. General Orders should be numbered consecutively and incorporate the year of issue. All members will be notified when a General Order is rescinded or has been formally adopted into the Policy Manual.

    1. RESPONSIBILITIES
      1. COMMAND STAFF

Command staff shall periodically review General Orders to determine whether they should be formally incorporated into the Policy Manual, and, as appropriate, will recommend necessary modifications to the Chief of Police.

      1. AGENCYHEAD

Only the Chief of Police or the authorized designee may approve and issue General Orders.

201.5   ACCEPTANCE OF DIRECTIVES

All members shall be provided access to the General Orders. Each member shall acknowledge that he/she has been provided access to, and has had the opportunity to review the General Orders. Members shall seek clarification as needed from an appropriate supervisor for any provisions they do not fully understand.

Emergency Operations Plan

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy clarifies the role of the Glenarden Police Department and responsibilities of its members pertaining to large scale emergencies and the Maryland Emergency Management Agency (MEMA) operating under the State of Maryland Emergency Operations Core Plan.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department will prepare for large scale emergencies within and outside its jurisdiction through planning and mutual cooperation with other agencies.

The Town Emergency Operations Plan complies with the State of Maryland’s Emergency Operations Core Plan, as part of the Comprehensive Emergency Management Program (Md. Code PS § 14-109; Md. Code PS § 14-110). This plan provides guidance for Town emergency operations within and outside its borders as may be required.

    1. ACTIVATING THE EMERGENCY OPERATIONS PLAN

The Emergency Operations Plan can be activated in a number of ways. For the Glenarden Police Department, the Chief of Police or the highest ranking on-duty supervisor may activate the local Emergency Operations Plan in response to a major emergency.

The declaration of a local state of emergency may only be made by the Town’s principal executive officer or the appointee if required by the circumstances. Such a declaration activates the jurisdiction’s response (if not already activated) and recovery plan (Md. Code PS §14-111; Md. Code PS § 14-403).

Upon activation of the plan, the Chief of Police or the authorized designee should contact MEMA to assist with mutual aid response from local, state and federal law enforcement agencies (Md. Code PS §14-701; Md. Code PS §14-801; Md. Code PS § 14-601; Md. Code CP § 2-105).

202.3.1 RECALL OF PERSONNEL

In the event that the Emergency Operations Plan is activated, all employees of the Glenarden Police Department are subject to immediate recall to service. Employees may also be subject to recall during extraordinary circumstances as deemed necessary by the Chief of Police or the highest ranking on-duty supervisor.

Failure to promptly respond to an order to report for duty may result in discipline.

    1. LOCATION OF THE EMERGENCY OPERATIONS PLAN

Copies of the Emergency Operations Plan are available in Administration, the Shift Supervisor’s office and the Communications Center. All supervisors should familiarize themselves with the Emergency Operations Plan and the roles members will play when the plan is implemented. The Administration Lieutenant should ensure that department members are familiar with the roles they will play when the plan is implemented.

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

Emergency Operations Plan

 

    1. EMERGENCY OPERATIONS PLAN REVIEW

The Chief of Police or the authorized designee shall review the Emergency Operations Plan at least once every two years and ensure that the plan conforms to any revisions made by the National Incident Management System (NIMS). The Chief of Police or the authorized designee should appropriately address any needed revisions.

    1. TRAINING

The Department should provide annual training on the Emergency Operations Plan for all supervisors and other appropriate personnel. All supervisors should familiarize themselves with the Emergency Operations Plan and personnel responsibilities when the plan is implemented. Training should incorporate a full or partial exercise, tabletop or command discussion.

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Training

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy establishes general guidelines for how training is to be identified, conducted and documented. This policy is not meant to address all specific training endeavors or identify every required training topic.

    1. POLICY

The Department shall administer a training program that will meet the standards of federal, state, local and the Maryland Police Training Commission (MPTC) training requirements. It is a priority of this department to provide continuing education and training for the professional growth and development of its members.

    1. OBJECTIVES

The objectives of the training program are to:

  1. Enhance the level of law enforcement service to the public.
  2. Increase the technical expertise and overall effectiveness of department members.
  3. Provide for continued professional development of department members.
  4. Ensure compliance with MPTC rules and regulations concerning law enforcement training.
    1. TRAINING PLAN

It is the responsibility of the Training Coordinator to develop, review, update and maintain a training plan and to ensure that mandated basic, in-service and department-required training is completed by all members as needed or required. The training plan should include the anticipated costs associated with each type of training, including attendee salaries and backfill costs. The plan should include a systematic and detailed method for recording and logging of all training for all members.

While updates and revisions may be made to any portion of the training plan at any time it is deemed necessary, the Training Coordinator shall review the entire training plan on an annual basis.

The plan will include information on curriculum, training material, training facilities and scheduling. The plan will address federal, state and department-required, minimum-mandated training of officers and other members.

203.4.1   GOVERNMENT-MANDATED TRAINING

The following lists, while not all inclusive, identify training that is required under state and federal laws and regulations.

(a) Federally mandated training:

    1. National Incident Management System (NIMS) training.
  1. State-mandated training:
    1. MPTC-approved Police Entry Level Training Program or, when applicable, the Comparative Compliance Training Course and successfully pass the licensing examination before being issued a peace officer’s license (COMAR 12.04.01.09).
    2. MPTC-approved entrance-level firearms training and qualification (COMAR 12.04.02.04).
    3. No less than 80 hours of field training approved by the Department (COMAR 12.04.01.17).
    4. No less than 18 hours of MPTC-approved training annually (COMAR 12.04.01.12).
    5. Annual MPTC-approved firearms training and qualification (COMAR 12.04.02.08).
    6. Promotion of an officer to a first-line, or higher, supervisor position requires successful completion of MPTC-approved supervisor training no more than two years preceding, or one year after, the promotion.
    7. Promotion of an officer to a first-line, or higher, administrator position requires successful completion of MPTC-approved administrator training no more than two years preceding, or one year after, the promotion.
    8. If MPTC-approved supervisor training has not previously been completed, supervisor training shall also be completed within the same timeline.
    9. Completion of MPTC-approved training program on life-saving techniques, including CPR, every two years (Md. Code PS § 3-207; COMAR 12.04.01.12).
    10. The proper level and use of force (Md. Code PS § 3-207).
    11. Sensitivity to cultural and gender diversity (Md. Code PS § 3-207).
    12. Issues related to individuals with physical, intellectual, developmental and psychiatric disabilities (Md. Code PS § 3-207).
  2. Locally mandated training (including county or city).
    1. TRAINING COMMITTEE

The Training Coordinator may establish a Training Committee, on a temporary or as-needed basis, which will assist with identifying training needs.

The Training Committee should be comprised of at least three members, with the senior ranking member of the committee acting as the chairperson. Committee members should be selected based on their abilities at post-incident evaluation and at assessing related training needs. The Training Coordinator may remove or replace members of the committee at his/her discretion.

The Training Committee should review certain incidents to determine whether training would likely improve future outcomes or reduce or prevent the recurrence of the undesirable issues related to an incident. Specific incidents the Training Committee should review include, but are not limited to:

  1. Any incident involving the death or serious injury of a member.
  1. Incidents involving a high risk of death, serious injury or civil liability.
  1. Incidents identified by the Department to determine possible training needs.

The Training Committee should convene on a regular basis as determined by the Training Coordinator, to review the identified incidents. The committee shall determine by consensus whether a training need exists and then submit written recommendations of its findings to the Training Coordinator. The recommendation should not identify specific facts of any incidents, such as identities of members involved or the date, time and location of the incident but should focus on the type of training being recommended.

The Training Coordinator will consider the recommendations of the committee and determine what training should be addressed, taking into consideration the mission of the Department and the available resources. Training recommendations as determined by the Training Coordinator shall be submitted to the command staff for review.

    1. TRAINING ATTENDANCE
  1. All members assigned to attend training shall attend as scheduled unless previously excused by their immediate supervisors. Excused absences should be limited to:
    1. Court appearances.
    2. Previously approved vacation or time off.
    3. Illness or medical leave.
    4. Physical limitations preventing the member’s participation.
    5. Emergency situations or department necessity.
  2. Any member who is unable to attend training as scheduled shall notify his/her supervisor as soon as practicable but no later than one hour prior to the start of training and shall:
    1. Document his/her absence in a memorandum to his/her supervisor.
    2. Make arrangements through his/her supervisor or the Training Coordinator to attend the required training on an alternate date.

Members assigned to participate in DTBs shall only use the login credentials assigned to them by the Training Coordinator. Members should not share their passwords with others and should frequently change their passwords to protect the security of the system. After each session, members should log off the system to prevent unauthorized access. The content of the DTBs is copyrighted material and shall not be shared with others outside of the Department.

Members who are assigned to participate in the DTB program should complete each DTB at the beginning of their shift or as otherwise directed by their supervisors. Members should not allow uncompleted DTBs to build up over time, and may be required to complete DTBs missed during extended absences (e.g., vacation, medical leave) upon returning to duty. Although the DTB system can be accessed from any Internet-enabled computer, members shall only take DTBs as part of their on-duty assignment, unless directed otherwise by a supervisor.

Supervisors will be responsible for monitoring the progress of those under their command to ensure compliance with this policy.

    1. TRAINING RECORDS

The Training Coordinator is responsible for the creation, filing and storage of all training records. Training records shall be retained in accordance with the established records retention schedule.

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

                                   Policy Manual

 

Electronic Mail

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the proper use and application of the electronic mail (email) system provided by the Department.

    1. POLICY

Glenarden Police Department members shall use email in a professional manner in accordance with this policy and current law, remaining aware that emails are subject to public disclosure under the Maryland Public Information Act (Md. Code GP § 4-101 et seq.).

    1. PRIVACY EXPECTATION

Members forfeit any expectation of privacy with regard to emails accessed, transmitted, received or reviewed on any department technology system (see the Information Technology Use Policy for additional guidance).

    1. RESTRICTIONS ON USE OF EMAIL

Messages transmitted over the email system are restricted to official business activities, or shall only contain information that is essential for the accomplishment of business-related tasks or for communications that are directly related to the business, administration or practices of the Department.

Sending derogatory, defamatory, obscene, disrespectful, sexually suggestive, and harassing or any other inappropriate messages on the email system is prohibited and may result in discipline.

Email messages addressed to the entire Department are only to be used for official business- related items that are of particular interest to all users. In the event that a member has questions about sending a particular email communication, the member should seek prior approval from a supervisor in his/her chain of command. It is a violation of this policy to transmit a message under another member’s name or email address or to use the password of another to log into the system unless directed to do so by a supervisor. Members are required to log off the network or secure the workstation when the computer is unattended. This added security measure will minimize the potential misuse of a member’s email, name or password. Any member who believes his/her password has become known to another person shall change their password immediately.

    1. EMAIL RECORD MANAGEMENT

Email may, depending upon the individual content, be a public record under the Maryland Public Information Act and must be managed in accordance with the established records retention schedule and in compliance with state law (Md. Code SG § 10-610; COMAR 14.18.02.04).

Electronic Mail

 

The Custodian of Records shall ensure that email messages are retained and recoverable as outlined in the Records Maintenance and Release Policy.

Administrative Communications

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy sets forth the manner in which the Department communicates significant changes to its membership, such as promotions, transfers, hiring and appointment of new members, separations, individual and group awards and commendations, or other changes in status. This policy also provides guidelines for the professional handling of electronic and non-electronic administrative communications from the Department.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department will appropriately communicate significant events within the organization to its members. Both electronic and non-electronic administrative communications will be professional in appearance and comply with the established letterhead, signature and disclaimer guidelines, as applicable.

    1. PERSONNELORDERS

Memorandums may be issued periodically by the Chief of Police or the authorized designee to announce and document promotions, transfers, military leave of absence, hiring and appointment of new members, reinstatements, separations, individual and group awards and commendations, or other changes in status.

    1. CORRESPONDENCE

To ensure that the letterhead and name of the Department are not misused, all official external correspondence shall be on department letterhead. All department letterhead shall bear the signature element of the Chief of Police. Official correspondence and use of letterhead requires approval of a supervisor. Department letterhead may not be used for personal purposes.

Official internal correspondence shall be on the appropriate department electronic or non- electronic memorandum forms.

Electronic correspondence shall contain the sender’s department-approved signature and electronic communications disclaimer language.

    1. SURVEYS

All surveys made in the name of the Department shall be authorized by the Chief of Police or the authorized designee.

    1. OTHER COMMUNICATIONS

General Orders and other communications necessary to ensure the effective operation of the Department shall be issued by the Chief of Police or the authorized designee (see the General Orders Policy).

Supervision Staffing Levels

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines to ensure that proper supervision is available to meet the needs of the Department and members throughout all Prince George County PDs.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department will ensure that proper supervision is available to meet the needs of its members and to achieve the goals of the Department. The needs of its members should be balanced with the needs of the Department for flexibility and discretion in assigning members to meet supervisory needs. While balance is desirable, the paramount concern is to meet the needs of the Department.

    1. MINIMUM SUPERVISION STAFFING LEVELS

Minimum staffing levels should be established by the Lieutenants for each Prince George County PD and work group. The supervision staffing levels should support proper supervision, span of control, compliance with any collective bargaining agreements or memorandums of understanding and activity levels to meet the needs of members and the goals of the Department.

206.3.1   TEMPORARY SUPERVISORS

In order to accommodate training and other unforeseen circumstances, a qualified lower-ranking member may be used as a temporary supervisor in place of a regularly assigned supervisor.

Retiree Concealed Firearms

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for the issuance, denial, suspension or revocation of Glenarden Police Department identification cards under the Law Enforcement Officers’ Safety Act (LEOSA) (18 USC § 926C).

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to provide identification cards to qualified former or retired officers as provided in this policy.

    1. LEOSA

The Chief of Police may issue an identification card for LEOSA purposes to any qualified former officer of this department who (18 USC § 926C(c)):

  1. Separated from service in good standing from this department as an officer.
  2. Before such separation, had regular employment as a law enforcement officer for an aggregate of 10 years or more or, if employed as a law enforcement officer for less than 10 years, separated from service after completing any applicable probationary period due to a service-connected disability as determined by this department.
  3. Has not been disqualified for reasons related to mental health.
  4. Has not entered into an agreement with this department where the officer acknowledges that he/she is not qualified to receive a firearm qualification certificate for reasons related to mental health.
  5. Is not prohibited by federal law from receiving or possessing a firearm.
      1. LEOSA IDENTIFICATION CARD FORMAT

The LEOSA identification card should contain a photograph of the former officer and identify him/ her as having been employed as an officer.

If the Glenarden Police Department qualifies the former officer, the LEOSA identification card or separate certification should indicate the date the former officer was tested or otherwise found by the Department to meet the active duty standards for qualification to carry a firearm.

      1. AUTHORIZATION

Any qualified former law enforcement officer, including a former officer of this department, may carry a concealed firearm under 18 USC § 926C when he/she is:

  1. In possession of photographic identification that identifies him/her as having been employed as a law enforcement officer, and one of the following:
    1. An indication from the person’s former law enforcement agency that he/she has, within the past year, been tested or otherwise found by the law enforcement agency

to meet agency-established active duty standards for qualification in firearms training to carry a firearm of the same type as the concealed firearm.

    1. A certification, issued by either the state in which the person resides or by a certified firearms instructor who is qualified to conduct a firearms qualification test for active duty law enforcement officers within that state, indicating that the person has, within the past year, been tested or otherwise found to meet the standards established by the state or, if not applicable, the standards of any agency in that state.
  1. Not under the influence of alcohol or another intoxicating or hallucinatory drug or substance.
  2. Not prohibited by federal law from receiving a firearm.
  3. Not in a location prohibited by Maryland law or by a private person or entity on his/her property if such prohibition is permitted by Maryland law.

207.4   FORMER OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES

A former officer with a card issued under this policy shall immediately notify the Shift Supervisor of his/her arrest or conviction in any jurisdiction, or that he/she is the subject of a court order, in accordance with the Reporting of Arrests, Convictions and Court Orders Policy.

The retiree is responsible for obtaining the proper handgun training and qualification for active law enforcement officers. The retiree may obtain handgun certification and a LEOSA certification card from the Maryland Police Training Commission (MPTC).

207.4.1 RESPONSIBILITIES UNDER LEOSA

In order to obtain or retain a LEOSA identification card, the former officer shall:

  1. Sign a waiver of liability of the Department for all acts taken related to carrying a concealed firearm, acknowledging both his/her personal responsibility as a private person for all acts taken when carrying a concealed firearm as permitted by LEOSA and also that these acts were not taken as an employee or former employee of the Department.
  2. Remain subject to all applicable Department policies and federal, state and local laws.
  3. Demonstrate good judgment and character commensurate with carrying a loaded and concealed firearm.
  4. Successfully pass an annual criminal history background check indicating that he/she is not prohibited by law from receiving or possessing a firearm.
    1. FIREARM QUALIFICATIONS

The Range master may provide former officers from this department an opportunity to qualify. Written evidence of the qualification and the weapons used will be provided and will contain the date of the qualification. The Range master will maintain a record of the qualifications and weapons used.

    1. MARYLAND RETIRED LAW ENFORCEMENT OFFICER IDENTIFICATION CARD

The Chief of Police shall provide a retiring officer with an identification card within 45 days after the officer’s retirement if the officer (Md. Code PS § 3-513):

  1. Retired in good standing for reasons other than mental instability.
  2. Before retirement, was certified by the MPTC, had statutory powers of arrest in Maryland and completed an applicable probationary period.
  3. Pays a fee set by the Glenarden Police Department (not to exceed $20).

Upon request, any officer who retired prior to Oct. 1, 2015, shall be issued an identification card if the criteria set forth above are satisfied.

207.6.1   MARYLAND RETIRED LAW ENFORCEMENT OFFICER IDENTIFICATION CARD FORMAT

A Maryland retired law enforcement officer identification card shall be in the form approved by the MPTC and include the information specified in Md. Code PS § 3-513.

207.7   DENIAL, SUSPENSION OR REVOCATION

A LEOSA identification card may be denied or revoked upon a showing of good cause as determined by the Department. In the event that an identification card is denied, suspended or revoked, the former officer may request a review by the Chief of Police. The decision of the Chief of Police is final.

Chapter 3 - General Operations
  1. Maintaining liaison with command staff and functional supervisors.
  1. Maintaining liaison with other agency canine coordinators.
  1. Maintaining accurate records to document canine activities.
  1. Recommending and overseeing the procurement of equipment and services for the teams of handlers and canines.
  2. Scheduling all canine-related activities.
  1. Ensuring  the  canine  teams  are  scheduled  for  continuous  training  to  maximize  their capabilities.
    1. REQUESTS FOR CANINE TEAMS

Members within the Department are encouraged to freely solicit the use of a canine. Requests for a canine team from outside of the Operations Services Prince George County PD shall go through the canine coordinator or the Shift Supervisor.

      1. OUTSIDE AGENCY REQUEST

The Shift Supervisor or the canine coordinator must approve all requests for canine assistance from outside agencies, subject to the following provisions:

  1. Canine teams shall not be used for any assignment that is not consistent with this policy.
  1. The handler shall have the ultimate authority to decline the use of the canine for any specific assignment.
  2. Calling out canine teams that are off-duty is discouraged.
  1. It shall be the responsibility of the canine handler to coordinate with outside agency personnel in order to minimize the risk of unintended injury.
  2. It shall be the responsibility of the canine handler to complete all necessary reports or as directed.
      1. PUBLIC DEMONSTRATION

All public requests for a canine team shall be approved by the canine coordinator prior to making any commitment. The canine coordinator is responsible for obtaining resources and coordinating involvement in the demonstration to include proper safety protocols. Handlers shall not demonstrate any apprehension work to the public unless authorized to do so by the canine coordinator.

310.6   APPREHENSION GUIDELINES

A canine may be used to locate and apprehend a suspect if the canine handler reasonably believes that the individual has either committed, is committing or threatening to commit any serious offense and if any of the following conditions exist:

  1. There is a reasonable belief the suspect poses an imminent threat of violence or serious harm to the public, any officer or the handler.
  2. The suspect is physically resisting or threatening to resist arrest and the use of a canine reasonably appears to be necessary to overcome such resistance.
  3. The suspect is believed to be concealed in an area where entry by other than the canine would pose a threat to the safety of officers or the public.

It is recognized that situations may arise that do not fall within the provisions set forth in this policy. Such events require viewing the totality of the circumstances and the use of an objective reasonableness standard to review the decision to use a canine.

Absent a reasonable belief that a suspect has committed, is committing or threatening to commit a serious offense, mere flight from a pursuing officer shall not serve as good cause for the use of a canine to apprehend a suspect.

Use of a canine to locate and apprehend a suspect wanted for a lesser criminal offense than those identified above requires approval from the Shift Supervisor. Absent a change in circumstances that present an imminent threat to officers, the canine or the public, such application should be conducted on-leash or under such conditions that the canine will not bite or otherwise injure the individual, if located.

In all applications, once the suspect has been located and no longer reasonably appears to represent a threat or risk of escape, the canine should be placed in a down-stay position or be otherwise secured as soon as it becomes reasonably practicable.

      1. PREPARATION FOR DEPLOYMENT

Prior to the use of a canine to search for or apprehend any suspect, the canine handler and/or the supervisor on-scene shall carefully consider all pertinent information reasonably available at the time. The information should include, but is not limited to:

  1. The nature and seriousness of the suspected offense.
  1. Whether violence or weapons were used or are anticipated.
  1. The degree of resistance or threatened resistance, if any, the suspect has shown.
  1. The suspect’s known or perceived age.
  1. The potential for injury to officers or the public caused by the suspect if the canine is not utilized.
  2. Any potential danger to the public and/or other officers at the scene if the canine is released.
  1. The potential for the suspect to escape or flee if the canine is not utilized.

As circumstances permit, the canine handler should make every reasonable effort to communicate and coordinate with other involved members to minimize the risk of unintended injury.

The handler will evaluate each situation and determine if the use of a canine is feasible and reasonable, and shall have the authority to decline the use of the canine. A supervisor who is sufficiently apprised of the situation may prohibit deploying the canine.

      1. WARNINGS AND ANNOUNCEMENTS

Unless it would otherwise increase the risk of injury or escape, a clearly audible warning to announce that a canine will be released if the suspect does not surrender shall be made prior to releasing a canine. If feasible, other members should be in a location opposite the warning to verify that the announcement could be heard. If available, warnings given in other languages should be used as necessary.

The canine handler, when practicable, shall first advise the supervisor of his/her decision if a warning is not given prior to releasing the canine.In the event of an apprehension, the handler shall document in any related report how the warning was given and, if none was given, the reasons why.

      1. REPORTING DEPLOYMENTS, BITES AND INJURIES

Whenever a canine deployment results in a bite or causes injury to an intended suspect, a supervisor shall be promptly notified and the injuries documented in a canine use report. The injured person shall be treated by emergency medical services personnel at the scene and transported to an appropriate medical facility as necessary. The deployment and injuries should also be included in any related incident or arrest report.

Any unintended bite or injury caused by a canine during deployment, operations, training, presentations, or under any other circumstances while on- or off-duty shall be promptly reported to the canine coordinator. Unintended bites or injuries caused by a canine should be documented in an administrative report, not in a canine use report.

If an individual alleges an injury, either visible or not visible, a supervisor shall be notified and both the individual’s injured and uninjured areas shall be photographed as soon as practicable after tending to the immediate needs of the injured party. Photographs shall be retained as evidence in accordance with current department evidence procedures. The photographs shall be retained until the criminal proceeding is completed and the time for any related civil proceeding has expired.

The canine coordinator shall complete the Maryland Animal-Bite Report and Rabies Quarantine Agreement Form and make it available to the local health officer within 24 hours (COMAR 10.06.02.05).

310.7   NON-APPREHENSION GUIDELINES

Because canines have senses far superior to those of humans, they may be effectively utilized to track or search for non-criminals (e.g., lost children, individuals who may be disoriented or in need of medical attention). In such circumstances it will be necessary for the handler to evaluate the conditions and ability of the canine in order to determine the feasibility of such an application.

  1. Absent a change in circumstances that present an imminent threat to officers, the canine or the public, such applications should be conducted on-leash or under such conditions that the canine will not bite or otherwise injure the individual, if located.
  2. Unless otherwise directed by a supervisor, assisting members should take direction from the handler in order to minimize interference with the canine.
  3. Throughout the deployment of the canine in such circumstances, the handler should give periodic verbal assurances that the canine will not bite or hurt the individual.
  4. Once the individual has been located, the canine should be placed in a down-stay or otherwise secured as soon as it becomes reasonably practicable.
      1. ARTICLE DETECTION

A canine trained to find objects or property related to a person or crime may be used to locate or identify articles. A canine should search in a manner that prevents unintended bites or injuries.

      1. CONTROLLED DANGEROUS SUBSTANCE DETECTION

A canine trained in the detection of controlled dangerous substances (CDS) may be used in accordance with current law and under certain circumstances, including:

  1. The search of vehicles, buildings, bags and other articles.
  1. Assisting in the search for CDS during a search warrant service.
  1. Obtaining a search warrant by using the CDS-detection trained canine in support of probable cause.

A CDS-detection trained canine will not be used to search a person for CDS unless the canine is trained to passively indicate the presence of CDS.

      1. BOMB/EXPLOSIVE DETECTION

Because of the high risk of danger to the public and officers when a bomb or other explosive device is suspected, the use of a canine team trained in explosive detection may be warranted. When available, an explosive-detection canine team may be used in accordance with current law and under certain circumstances, including:

  1. Assisting in the search of a building, structure, area, vehicle or article where an actual or suspected explosive device has been reported or located.
  2. Assisting with searches at transportation facilities and vehicles (e.g., buses, airplanes and trains).
  3. Preventive searches at special events, VIP visits, official buildings and other restricted areas. Searches of individuals should remain minimally intrusive and shall be strictly limited to the purpose of detecting explosives.
  4. Assisting in the search of scenes where an explosion has occurred and an explosive device or secondary explosive device is suspected.

At no time will an explosive-detection trained canine be used to render a suspected device safe or clear.

    1. HANDLER SELECTION

The minimum qualifications for the assignment of canine handler include:

  1. An officer who is currently off probation.
  2. Residing in an adequately fenced, single-family residence (minimum 5-foot high fence with locking gates).
  3. A garage that can be secured and accommodate a canine vehicle.
  4. Living within 30 minutes travel time from the Prince George County Town limits.
  5. Agreeing to be assigned to the position for a minimum of three years.

  310.9 HANDLER RESPONSIBILITIES

The canine handler shall ultimately be responsible for the health and welfare of the canine and shall ensure that the canine receives proper nutrition, grooming, training, medical care, affection and living conditions.

The canine handler will be responsible for the following:

  1. Except as required during appropriate deployment, the handler shall not expose the canine to any foreseeable and unreasonable risk of harm.
  2. The handler shall maintain all department equipment under his/her control in a clean and serviceable condition.
  3. When not in service, the handler shall maintain the canine vehicle in a locked garage, away from public view.
  4. When a handler is off-duty for an extended number of days, the assigned canine vehicle should be stored at the Glenarden Police Department facility.
  5. Handlers shall permit the canine coordinator to conduct spontaneous on-site inspections of affected areas of their homes as well as their canine vehicles to verify that conditions and equipment conform to this policy.
  6. Any changes in the living status of the handler that may affect the lodging or environment of the canine shall be reported to the canine coordinator as soon as possible.
  7. When off-duty, the canine shall be in a kennel provided by the Town at the home of the handler. When a canine is kenneled at the handler’s home, the gate shall be secured with a lock. When off-duty, the canine may be let out of the kennel while under the direct control of the handler.
  8. The canine should be permitted to socialize in the home with the handler’s family for short periods of time and under the direct supervision of the handler.
  9. Under no circumstances will the canine be lodged at another location unless approved by the canine coordinator or Shift Supervisor.
  10. When off-duty, the handler shall not involve the canine in any law enforcement activity or official conduct unless approved in advance by the canine coordinator or Shift Supervisor.
  11. Whenever a canine handler is off-duty for an extended number of days, it may be necessary to temporarily relocate the canine. In those situations, the handler shall give reasonable notice to the canine coordinator so that appropriate arrangements can be made.

310.9.1 CANINE IN PUBLIC AREAS

The canine should be kept on a leash when in areas that allow access to the public. Exceptions to this rule would include specific law enforcement operations for which the canine is trained.

  1. A canine shall not be left unattended in any area to which the public may have access.
  2. When the canine vehicle is left unattended, all windows and doors shall be secured in such a manner as to prevent unauthorized access to the dog. The handler shall also ensure that the unattended vehicle remains inhabitable for the canine.
    1. HANDLER COMPENSATION

The canine handler shall be available for call-out under conditions specified by the canine coordinator. The canine handler shall be compensated for time spent in the care, feeding, grooming and other needs of the canine in accordance with the Fair Labor Standards Act (FLSA), and according to the terms of the collective bargaining agreement or memorandum of understanding between the handler and the Town (29 USC § 207).

    1. CANINE INJURY AND MEDICAL CARE

In the event that a canine is injured, or there is an indication that the canine is not in good physical condition, the injury or condition will be reported to the canine coordinator or Shift Supervisor as soon as practicable and appropriately documented.

All medical attention shall be rendered by the designated canine veterinarian, except during an emergency where treatment should be obtained from the nearest available veterinarian. All records of medical treatment shall be maintained in the handler’s personnel file.

    1. TRAINING

Before assignment in the field, each canine team shall be trained and certified to meet current recognized and approved certification standards. Cross-trained canine teams or those canine teams trained exclusively for the detection of CDS and/or explosives also shall be trained and certified to meet current nationally recognized standards or other recognized and approved certification standards established for their particular skills

The canine  coordinator  shall   be   responsible   for   scheduling   periodic   training   for all department members in order to familiarize them with how to conduct themselves in the presence of department canines.

All canine training should be conducted while on-duty unless otherwise approved by the canine coordinator or Shift Supervisor.

      1. CONTINUED TRAINING

Each canine team shall thereafter be recertified to a current nationally recognized standard or other recognized and approved certification standards on an annual basis. Additional training considerations are as follows:

  1. Canine teams should receive training as defined in the current contract with the Glenarden Police Department canine training provider.
  2. Canine handlers are encouraged to engage in additional training with approval of the canine coordinator.
  3. To ensure that all training is consistent, no handler, trainer or outside vendor is authorized to train to a standard that is not reviewed and approved by this department.
      1. FAILURE TO SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETE TRAINING

Any canine team failing to graduate or obtain certification shall not be deployed in the field for tasks the team is not certified to perform until graduation or certification is achieved. When reasonably practicable, pending successful certification, the canine handler shall be temporarily reassigned to regular patrol duties.

      1. TRAINING RECORDS

All canine training records shall be maintained in the canine handler’s and the canine’s training file.

      1. TRAINING AIDS

Training aids are required to effectively train and maintain the skills of canines. Officers possessing, using or transporting controlled dangerous substances or explosives for canine training purposes must comply with federal and state requirements regarding the same. Alternatively, the Glenarden Police Department may work with outside trainers with the applicable licenses or permits.

      1. CONTROLLED DANGEROUS SUBSTANCE TRAINING AIDS

Officers acting in the performance of their official duties may possess or transfer controlled dangerous substances for the purpose of narcotics-detection canine training in compliance with state and federal laws (21 USC § 823(f)). The Chief of Police or the authorized designee may authorize a member to seek a court order to allow controlled dangerous substances seized by the Glenarden Police Department to be possessed by the member or a narcotics-detection canine trainer who is working under the direction of this department for training purposes, provided the controlled dangerous substances are no longer needed as criminal evidence.

As an alternative, the Chief of Police or the authorized designee may request from the Drug Enforcement Agency (DEA) narcotics training aids.

These procedures are not required if the canine handler uses commercially available synthetic substances that are not controlled narcotics.

      1. CONTROLLED DANGEROUS SUBSTANCE PROCEDURES

Due to the responsibilities and liabilities involved with possessing readily usable amounts of controlled dangerous substances and the ever-present danger of the canine’s accidental ingestion of these controlled dangerous substances, the following procedures shall be strictly followed:

  1. All controlled dangerous substance training samples shall be weighed and tested prior to dispensing to the individual canine handler or trainer.
  2. The weight and test results shall be recorded and maintained by this department.
  3. Any person possessing controlled dangerous substance training samples pursuant to court order or DEA registration shall maintain custody and control of the controlled dangerous substances and shall keep records regarding any loss of, or damage to, those controlled dangerous substances.All controlled dangerous substance training samples will be inspected, weighed and tested quarterly. The results of the quarterly testing shall be recorded and maintained by the canine coordinator with a copy forwarded to the dispensing agency.
  4. All controlled dangerous substance training samples will be stored in locked, airtight and watertight cases at all times, except during training. The locked cases shall be secured in the trunk of the canine handler’s assigned patrol vehicle during transport and stored in an appropriate locked container. There are no exceptions to this procedure.
  5. The canine coordinator shall periodically inspect every controlled dangerous substance training sample for damage or tampering and take any appropriate action.
  6. Any unusable controlled dangerous substance training samples shall be returned to the Property and Evidence Section or to the dispensing agency.
  7. All controlled dangerous substance training samples shall be returned to the dispensing agency upon the conclusion of the training or upon demand by the dispensing agency.
      1. EXPLOSIVE TRAINING AIDS

Officers may possess, transport, store or use explosives or destructive devices in compliance with state and federal laws (18 USC § 842; 27 CFR 555.41).

Explosive training aids designed specifically for canine teams should be used whenever feasible. Due to the safety concerns in the handling and transportation of explosives, inert or non-hazardous training aids should be employed whenever feasible. The use of explosives or destructive devices for training aids by canine teams is subject to the following:

  1. All explosive training aids, when not in use, shall be properly stored in a secure facility appropriate for the type of materials.
  2. An inventory ledger shall be maintained to document the type and quantity of explosive training aids that are stored.
  3. The canine coordinator shall be responsible to verify the explosive training aids on hand against the inventory ledger once each quarter.
  4. Only members of the canine team shall have access to the explosive training aids storage facility.
  5. A primary and secondary custodian will be designated to minimize the possibility of loss of explosive training aids during and after the training. Generally, the handler will be designated as the primary custodian while the trainer or authorized second person on-scene will be designated as the secondary custodian.
  6. Any lost or damaged explosive training aids shall be promptly reported to the canine coordinator, who will determine if any further action will be necessary. Any loss of explosives will be reported to the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives (ATF).

310.13   LICENSING

Canines and their handlers shall be licensed with the Maryland State Police prior to being used for law enforcement operations. The handler ID card should be carried by the handler whenever the canine is performing any law enforcement-related function. The canine ID tag shall be attached to the canine’s collar and kept on the licensed canine at all times, except when the canine is confined in a kennel or is under the personal charge of the licensed handler. Any change in a canine’s handler requires notification to the Maryland State Police (Md. Code PS § 2-313).

Missing ID cards and ID tags shall be replaced as soon as practicable.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Domestic Violence

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide the guidelines necessary to deter, prevent and reduce domestic violence through vigorous enforcement and to address domestic violence as a serious crime against society. The policy specifically addresses the commitment of the Glenarden Police Department to take enforcement action when appropriate, to provide assistance to victims and to guide officers in the investigation of domestic violence (Md. Code FL § 4-514).

311.1.1   DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Court order – All forms of orders related to domestic violence, that have been issued by a court of this state or another, whether civil or criminal, regardless of whether service has been made.

Domestic violence – Abuse occurring between current or former spouses or cohabitants, persons who have a child in common, or persons currently or formerly involved in a dating relationship (Md. Code FL § 4-701(c)).

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department’s response to incidents of domestic violence and violations of related court orders shall stress enforcement of the law to protect the victim and shall communicate the philosophy that domestic violence is criminal behavior. It is also the policy of this department to facilitate victims’ and offenders’ access to appropriate civil remedies and community resources whenever feasible.

    1. OFFICER SAFETY

The investigation of domestic violence cases often places officers in emotionally charged and sometimes highly dangerous environments. No provision of this policy is intended to supersede the responsibility of all officers to exercise due caution and reasonable care in providing for the safety of any officers and parties involved.

    1. INVESTIGATIONS

The following guidelines shall be followed by officers when investigating domestic violence cases to protect the victim from harm (Md. Code FL § 4-502(a)(2)):

  1. Calls of reported, threatened, imminent or ongoing domestic violence and the violation of any court order are of extreme importance and should be considered among the highest response priorities. This includes incomplete 9-1-1 calls.
  2. When practicable, officers should obtain and document statements from the victim, the suspect and any witnesses, including children, in or around the household or location of occurrence.
  3. Officers should list the full name and date of birth (and school if available) of each child who was present in the household at the time of the offense. The names of other children who may not have been in the house at that particular time should also be obtained for follow-up.
  4. When practicable and legally permitted, video or audio record all significant statements and observations.
  5. All injuries shall be photographed, regardless of severity, taking care to preserve the victim’s personal privacy. Where practicable, photographs should be taken by a person of the same sex. Victims whose injuries are not visible at the time of the incident should be asked to contact the Prince George County PD in the event that the injuries later become visible.
  6. Officers should request that the victim complete and sign an authorization for release of medical records related to the incident when applicable.
  7. If the suspect is no longer at the scene, officers should make reasonable efforts to locate the suspect to further the investigation, provide the suspect with an opportunity to make a statement and make an arrest or seek an arrest warrant if appropriate.
  8. Seize and remove any firearms upon a consent search or in plain view if appropriate and legally permitted. The officer shall provide information to the owner on the process of retaking possession of the firearm. The Department shall then provide safe storage during the pendency of any domestic violence proceeding (Md. Code FL § 4-511).
  9. When completing an incident or arrest report for violation of a court order, officers shall include specific information that establishes that the offender has been served, including the date the offender was served, the name of the agency that served the order and the provision of the order that the subject is alleged to have violated. When reasonably available, the arresting officer should attach a copy of the order to the incident or arrest report.
  10. Officers shall take appropriate enforcement action when there is probable cause to believe an offense has occurred.
  11. Factors that should not be used as sole justification for declining to take enforcement action include:
    1. Marital status of suspect and victim.
    1. Whether the suspect lives on the premises with the victim.
    1. Claims by the suspect that the victim provoked or perpetuated the violence or abuse.
    1. The potential financial or child custody consequences of arrest.
    1. The physical or emotional state of either party.
    1. Use of drugs or alcohol by either party.
    1. Denial that the violence or abuse occurred where evidence indicates otherwise.
    1. A request by the victim not to arrest the suspect.
    2. Location of the incident (public/private).
    1. Speculation that the complainant may not follow through with the prosecution.
    1. The racial, cultural, social, professional position or sexual orientation of the victim or suspect.

311.4.1 IF A SUSPECT IS ARRESTED 

If a suspect is arrested, officers should:

  1. Advised  the victim that there is no guarantee the suspect will remain in coustody.  
  1. Provide the victim’s contact information to the jail staff to enable notification of the victim upon the suspect’s release from jail.
  2. Advised the victim whether any type of court order will be in effect when the suspect is released from jail.
      1. IF NO ARREST IS MADE

If no arrest is made, the officer should:

  1. Advise the parties of any options, including but not limited to:
    1. Voluntary separation of the parties.
    1. Appropriate resource referrals (e.g., counselors, friends, relatives, shelter homes, victim witness assistance).
  1. Document the resolution in a report.
    1. VICTIM ASSISTANCE

Because victims may be traumatized or confused, officers should be aware that a victim’s behavior and actions may be affected.

  1. Victims shall be provided with the department domestic violence information handout, even if the incident may not rise to the level of a crime (Md. Code FL § 4-503).
  2. Victims should also be alerted to any available victim advocates, shelters and community resources.
  3. When an involved person requests law enforcement assistance while removing essential items of personal property, officers shall accompany the person to the family home and stand by while personal clothing and effects are removed (Md. Code FL § 4-502(a)(2)(ii)).
  4. If the victim has sustained injury or complains of pain, officers shall seek medical assistance for the victim as soon as practicable.
  5. Officers should ask the victim whether he/she has a safe place to stay and assist in arranging transportation to an alternate shelter if the victim expresses a concern for his/her safety or if the officer determines that a need exists.
  6. Officers should make reasonable efforts to ensure that any children or dependent adults who are under the supervision of the suspect or victim are being properly cared for.
  7. If appropriate, officers should seek or assist the victim in obtaining an interim protective order.
  8. Use the substitute address if the victim is registered in the state Address Confidentiality Program (Md. Code FL § 4-526(b)).
  9. Prepare a Lethality Assessment Form and advise victim accordingly.
    1. DISPATCH ASSISTANCE

All calls of domestic violence, including incomplete 9-1-1 calls, should be dispatched as soon as practicable.

Dispatchers are not required to verify the validity of a court order before responding to a request for assistance. Officers should request that dispatchers check whether any of the involved persons are subject to the terms of a court order.

    1. FOREIGN COURT ORDERS

Various types of orders may be issued in domestic violence cases. Any foreign court order properly issued by a court of another state, Indian tribe or territory shall be enforced by officers as if it were the order of a court in this state. An order should be considered properly issued when it reasonably appears that the issuing court has jurisdiction over the parties and reasonable notice and opportunity to respond was given to the party against whom the order was issued (18 USC

§ 2265). An otherwise valid out-of-state court order shall be enforced, regardless of whether the order has been properly registered with this state (Md. Code FL § 4-508.1(b)).

    1. VERIFICATION OF COURT ORDERS

Determining the validity of a court order, particularly an order from another jurisdiction, can be challenging. Therefore, in determining whether there is probable cause to make an arrest for a violation of any court order, officers should carefully review the actual order when available, and, where appropriate and practicable:

  1. Ask the subject of the order about his/her notice or receipt of the order, his/her knowledge of its terms and efforts to respond to the order.
  2. Check available records or databases that may show the status or conditions of the order.
  1. Contact the issuing court to verify the validity of the order.
  1. Contact a law enforcement official from the jurisdiction where the order was issued to verify information.

Officers should document in an appropriate report their efforts to verify the validity of an order, regardless of whether an arrest is made. Officers should contact a supervisor for clarification when needed.

311.8.1 COURT-ORDERED SURRENDERED FIREARMS

If a respondent surrenders a firearm to the Department under a temporary or final court order, the officer shall provide the respondent information on the process for retaking possession of the firearm. The officer shall transport and store the firearm in a protective case, if one is available, and in a manner intended to prevent damage to the firearm during the time the protective order is in effect (Md. Code FL § 4-506.1).

311.9 STANDARDS FOR ARRESTS

Officers investigating a domestic violence report should consider the following:

  1. May arrest a person without a warrant if the report to law enforcement was made within 48 hours of the alleged incident and the officer has probable cause to believe that:
    1. The person battered the person’s spouse or another person with whom the person resides;
    2. There is evidence of physical injury; and
    3. Unless the person is arrested immediately, the person:
      1. May not be apprehended.
      2. May cause physical injury or property damage to another.
      3. May tamper with, dispose of, or destroy evidence.
  2. Shall arrest with or without a warrant and take into custody a person who the officer has probable cause to believe is in violation of an interim, temporary or final protective order in effect at the time of the violation (Md. Code FL § 4-509(b)).
  3. Shall arrest, with or without a warrant, and take into custody a person the officer has probable cause to believe is in violation of an order for protection that was issued by a court of another state or a Native American tribe, and that is in effect at the time of the violation if the person seeking the assistance (Md. Code FL § 4-508.1(c)):
    1. Has filed a copy of the order with the District Court or circuit court for the jurisdiction in which the person seeks assistance; or
    2. Displays or presents to the officer a copy of the order that appears valid on its face.

311.9.1   MUTUAL BATTERY

If an officer has probable cause to believe that mutual battery occurred and arrest is necessary, the officer shall consider whether one of the persons acted in self-defense to determine who was the primary aggressor (Md. Code CP § 2-204(b)).

    1. REPORTS AND RECORDS

The Records Division (Prince George County PD) shall provide a copy of the domestic violence report to the victim upon request (Md. Code FL § 4-503.1).

    1. SERVICE OF COURT ORDERS
      1. INTERIM PROTECTIVE ORDER

An officer shall immediately on receipt of a petition and interim protective order, serve them on the respondent named in the order. Immediately after service, the officer shall submit the documents to the Records Division (Prince George County PD) who will make a return of service to the commissioner’s office or, if the Office of the District Court Clerk (Clerk) is open for business, to the Clerk; and within two hours after service of the order, electronically notify the Department of Public Safety and Correctional Services (DPSCS) of the service (Md. Code FL § 4-504.1(g)).

      1. TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE ORDER

An officer shall immediately serve the temporary protective order on the alleged abuser. Immediately after service the officer shall submit the documents to the Records Division (Prince George County PD) who will within two hours after service of the order on the respondent, electronically notify the DPSCS (Md. Code FL § 4-505(b)).

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Search and Seizure

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

Both the federal and state constitutions provide every individual with the right to be free from unreasonable searches and seizures. This policy provides general guidelines for Glenarden Police Department personnel to consider when dealing with search and seizure issues.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to respect the fundamental privacy rights of individuals. Members of this department will conduct searches in strict observance of the constitutional rights of persons being searched. All seizures by this department will comply with relevant federal and state law governing the seizure of persons and property.

The Department will provide relevant and current training to officers as guidance for the application of current law, local community standards and prosecutorial considerations regarding specific search and seizure situations, as appropriate

    1. SEARCHES

The United States Constitution generally provides that a valid warrant is required in order for a search to be valid. There are, however, several exceptions that permit a warrantless search.

Examples of law enforcement activities that are exceptions to the general warrant requirement include, but are not limited to, searches pursuant to the following:

  • Valid consent
  • Incident to a lawful arrest
  • Legitimate community caretaking interests
  • Vehicle searches under certain circumstances
  • Exigent circumstances

Certain other activities are recognized by federal and state courts and by certain statutes as legitimate law enforcement activities that also do not require a warrant. Such activities may include seizure and examination of abandoned property, and observations of activities and property located on open public areas.

Because case law regarding search and seizure is constantly changing and subject to interpretation by the courts, each member of this department is expected to act in each situation according to current training and his/her familiarity with clearly established rights as determined by case law.

Whenever practicable, officers are encouraged to contact a supervisor to resolve questions regarding search and seizure issues prior to electing a course of action.

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT 

Policy Manual

Search and Seizure

 

    1. SEARCH PROTOCOL

Although conditions will vary and officer safety and other exigencies must be considered in every search situation, the following guidelines should be followed whenever circumstances permit:

  1. Members of this department will strive to conduct searches with dignity and courtesy.
  1. Officers should explain to the person being searched the reason for the search and how the search will be conducted.
  2. Searches should be carried out with due regard and respect for private property interests and in a manner that minimizes damage. Property should be left in a condition as close as reasonably possible to its pre-search condition.
  3. In order to minimize the need for forcible entry, an attempt should be made to obtain keys, combinations or access codes when a search of locked property is anticipated.
  4. Whenever practicable, a search should not be conducted by a lone officer. A cover officer should be positioned to ensure safety and should not be involved in the search.
  5. When the person to be searched is of the opposite sex as the searching officer, a reasonable effort should be made to summon an officer of the same sex as the subject to conduct the search. When it is not practicable to summon an officer of the same sex as the subject, the following guidelines should be followed:
    1. Another officer or a supervisor should witness the search.
    1. The officer should not search areas of the body covered by tight-fitting clothing, sheer clothing or clothing that could not reasonably conceal a weapon.
    1. DOCUMENTATION

Officers are responsible to document any search and to ensure that any required reports are sufficient including, at minimum, documentation of the following:

  • Reason for the search
  • Any efforts used to minimize the intrusiveness of any search (e.g., asking for consent or keys)
  • What, if any, injuries or damage occurred
  • All steps taken to secure property
  • The results of the search, including a description of any property or contraband seized
  • If the person searched is the opposite sex, any efforts to summon an officer of the same sex as the person being searched and the identification of any witness officer

Supervisors shall review reports to ensure the reports are accurate, that actions are properly documented and that current legal requirements and department policy have been met.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Child Abuse

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for the investigation of suspected child abuse. This policy also addresses when Glenarden Police Department members are required to notify the Department of Social Services of suspected child abuse.

313.1.1   DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Child – Unless otherwise specified by a cited statute, a child is any person under the age of 18 years.

Child abuse – Any offense or attempted offense involving violence or neglect with a child victim when committed by a person responsible for the child’s care, or by any other household member, or any other act that would mandate notification to a social service agency or law enforcement.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department will investigate all reported incidents of alleged criminal child abuse and ensure the Department of Social Services is notified as required by law.

    1. MANDATORY NOTIFICATION

Members of the Glenarden Police Department shall notify the Department of Social Services when (COMAR 07.02.07.04; Md. Code FL § 5-704(a); Md. Code FL § 5-705(a)):

  1. They receive a report, either oral or in writing, of a known or suspected incident of child abuse or neglect.
  2. They have reason to believe that a child has been subjected to abuse or neglect.

For purposes of notification, abuse or neglect occurs when a child’s mental or physical well-being is at risk because a caregiver either causes a physical or mental injury to a child or fails to properly care for a child.

313.3.1   NOTIFICATION PROCEDURE

Notification should occur as follows (COMAR 07.02.07.04; Md. Code FL § 5-704(b)):

  1. The handling officer shall:
    1. Make an oral report as soon as possible to the local Department of Social Services by telephone (301) 909-2000 or direct communication.
    2. Make an oral report as soon as possible to the Prince George’s County Police Department Child Abuse Unit (301) 772-4930.
    3. Make a written report no later than 48 hours after having reason to believe that a child has been subjected to abuse, and forward a copy to the local State’s Attorney.
  2. The notification, insofar as is reasonably possible, shall include:
    1. The name, age and home address of the child.
    2. The names and ages of other children in the home.
    3. The name and home address of the child’s parent or other person who is responsible for the child’s care.
    4. The whereabouts of the child.
    5. The nature and extent of the abuse or neglect of the child, including any evidence or information concerning possible previous instances of abuse or neglect.
    6. Any other information that would help to determine:
      1. The cause of the suspected abuse or neglect.
      2. The identity of any individual responsible for the abuse or neglect.
    7. In the case of suspected child abuse or neglect involving a mental injury:
      1. A  description  of  the  substantial  impairment  of  the  child’s  mental  or psychological ability to function that is observed and identified.
      2. An explanation of why it is believed the mental injury is attributable to maltreatment or failure to provide proper care and attention.
    1. QUALIFIED INVESTIGATORS

Qualified investigators should be available for child abuse investigations. These investigators should:

  1. Conduct interviews in child appropriate interview facilities.
  1. Be familiar with forensic interview techniques specific to child abuse investigations.
  1. Present all cases of alleged child abuse to the prosecutor for review.
  1. Coordinate  with  other  enforcement  agencies,  social  service  agencies  and  school administrators as needed.
  2. Provide referrals to therapy services, victim advocates, guardians and support for the child and family as appropriate.
  3. Participate in or coordinate with multidisciplinary investigative teams as applicable (COMAR 07.02.07.20; COMAR 07.02.07.21; Md. Code FL § 5-706(f); Md. Code FL § 5-706(g); Md. Code FL § 5-706.2(b)).
    1. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTING

In all reported or suspected cases of child abuse, officers shall write a report even if the allegations appear unfounded or unsubstantiated.

Investigations  and  reports  related  to  suspected  cases  of  child  abuse  should  address,  as applicable:

  1. A thorough and timely investigation and report as required by state law (Md. Code FL

§ 5-706). This should be done by the investigating officer in all circumstances where a suspected child abuse victim is contacted.

  1. The exigent circumstances that existed if officers interview the child victim without the presence of a parent or guardian.
  2. Any  relevant  statements  the  child  may  have  made  and  to  whom  he/she  made  the statements.
  3. If a child is taken into protective custody, the reasons, the name and title of the person making the decision and why other alternatives were not appropriate.
  4. Documentation of any visible injuries or any injuries identified by the child. This should include photographs of such injuries, if practicable.
  5. Whether the child victim is transported for medical treatment or a medical examination.
  6. Whether the victim identifies a household member as the alleged perpetrator, and a list of the names of any other children who may reside in the residence.
  7. Identification of any prior related reports or allegations of child abuse, including other jurisdictions, as reasonably known.
  8. Previous addresses of the victim and suspect.
  9. Other potential witnesses who have not yet been interviewed, such as relatives or others close to the victim’s environment.
  10. Within 24 hours after receiving a report of suspected physical or sexual abuse of a child and within five days after receiving a report of suspected neglect or suspected mental injury of a child, the handling officer shall (COMAR 07.02.07.08; Md. Code FL § 5-706(c); Md. Code FL § 5-706.2(c)):
    1. See the child.
    2. Attempt to have an on-site interview with the child’s caretaker.
    3. Decide on the safety of the child, wherever the child is, and of other children in the household.
    4. Decide on the safety of other children in the care or custody of the alleged abuser.
  11. Seek assistance from the local State’s Attorney as needed (Md. Code FL § 5-706(d)).
  12. Complete an investigation as soon as practicable but not later than the timeframes specified by state law (COMAR 07.02.07.09; Md. Code FL § 5-706(h); Md. Code FL § 5-706.2(d)).

All cases of the unexplained death of a child should be investigated as thoroughly as if it is a case of suspected child abuse (e.g., a sudden or unexplained death of an infant).

    1. PROTECTIVE CUSTODY

Before taking any child into protective custody, the officer should make reasonable attempts to contact the Department of Social Services. Generally, removal of a child from his/her family, guardian or other responsible adult should be left to the child welfare authorities when they are present or have become involved in an investigation.

Generally, members of this department should remove a child from his/her parent or guardian without a court order only when no other effective alternative is reasonably available and immediate action reasonably appears necessary to protect the child. Prior to taking a child into protective custody, the officer should take reasonable steps to deliver the child to another qualified parent or legal guardian, unless it reasonably appears that the release would endanger the child or result in abduction. If this is not a reasonable option, the officer shall ensure that the child is delivered to the Department of Social Services.

Whenever practicable, the officer should inform a supervisor of the circumstances prior to taking a child into protective custody. If prior notification is not practicable, officers should contact a supervisor promptly after taking a child into protective custody.

Children may be temporarily removed from a parent or guardian, without prior approval of the juvenile court, when a representative of the local Department of Social Services has probable cause to believe that the child is in serious and immediate danger (Md. Code FL § 5-709).

313.6.1   SAFE HAVEN LAW

A mother, or a person with the permission of the mother, may relinquish an unharmed newborn within 10 days after birth to an officer when the mother expresses an interest in abandoning the child. As soon as possible, the officer shall take the newborn to a hospital or other facility designated by the Department of Human Resources (Md. Code CJ § 5-641).

    1. INTERVIEWS
      1. PRELIMINARY INTERVIEWS

Absent extenuating circumstances or impracticality, officers should record the preliminary interview with suspected child abuse victims. Officers should avoid multiple interviews with a child victim and should attempt to gather only the information necessary to begin an investigation. When practicable, investigating officers should defer interviews until a person who is specially trained in such interviews is available. Generally, child victims should not be interviewed in the home or location where the alleged abuse occurred.

      1. DETAINING SUSPECTED CHILD ABUSE VICTIMS FOR AN INTERVIEW

An officer should not detain a child involuntarily who is suspected of being a victim of child abuse solely for the purpose of an interview or physical exam without the consent of a parent or guardian unless one of the following applies:

  1. Exigent circumstances exist, such as:
    1. A  reasonable  belief  that  medical  issues  of  the  child  need  to  be  addressed immediately.
    2. A reasonable belief that the child is or will be in danger of harm if the interview or physical exam is not immediately completed.
    3. The alleged offender is the custodial parent or guardian and there is reason to believe the child may be in continued danger.
  2. A court order or warrant has been issued.
    1. MEDICAL EXAMINATIONS

If the child has been the victim of abuse that requires a medical examination, the investigating officer should obtain consent for such examination from the appropriate parent, guardian or agency having legal custody of the child. The officer should also arrange for the child’s transportation to the appropriate medical facility.

In cases where the alleged offender is the custodial parent or guardian and is refusing consent for the medical examination, officers should notify a supervisor before proceeding. If exigent circumstances do not exist or if state law does not provide for officers to take the child for a medical examination, the notified supervisor should consider obtaining a court order for such an examination.

An examination and emergency medical treatment may be provided for a child without parental consent if an officer states a belief that the child has been abused or neglected (COMAR 07.02.07.07(f)(3)).

    1. DRUG-ENDANGERED CHILDREN

A coordinated response by law enforcement and social services agencies is appropriate to meet the immediate and longer-term medical and safety needs of children exposed to the manufacturing, trafficking or use of narcotics.

      1. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES The Prince George County PD supervisor should:
  1. Work with professionals from the appropriate agencies, including the Department of Social Services, other law enforcement agencies, medical service providers and local prosecutors to develop community specific procedures for responding to situations where there are children endangered by their exposure to methamphetamine labs or the manufacture and trafficking of other drugs.
  2. Activate any available interagency response when an officer notifies the Prince George County PD supervisor that the officer has responded to a drug lab or other narcotics crime scene where a child is present or where evidence indicates that a child lives there.
  3. Develop a report format or checklist for use when officers respond to drug labs or other narcotics crime scenes. The checklist will help officers document the environmental, medical, social and other conditions that may affect the child.

(d) Develop a report format or checklist for use when officers respond to drug labs or other narcotics crime scenes. The checklist will help officers document the environmental, medical, social and other conditions that may affect the child.

      1. OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES

Officers responding to a drug lab or other narcotics crime scene where a child is present or where there is evidence that a child lives should:

  1. Document the environmental, medical, social and other conditions of the child using photography as appropriate and the checklist or form developed for this purpose.
  2. Notify the Prince George County PD supervisor so an interagency response can begin.
    1. STATE MANDATES AND OTHER RELEVANT LAWS

Maryland requires or permits the following:

      1. PROCESSING REPORTS AND RECORDS

The handling officer shall ensure that (COMAR 07.02.07.14; Md. Code FL § 5-706(i); Md. Code FL § 5-706 (j)):

  1. A preliminary report of findings of the investigation is submitted to the local State’s Attorney within 10 days after receiving a report of suspected abuse.
  2. A written report of findings of the investigation is submitted to the local State’s Attorney within five business days after the investigation is completed.
      1. RELEASE OF REPORTS

Information related to incidents of child abuse or suspected child abuse are confidential and may only be disclosed pursuant to state law and the Records Maintenance and Release Policy (COMAR 07.02.07.19; Md. Code FL § 5-707).

      1. CHILD FATALITY REVIEW

This department will cooperate with a local or state child death review team (Md. Code FL § 5-706).

      1. HOUSEHOLD ENTRY

Upon request, an officer shall accompany a representative of the Department of Social Services who has been denied entry into a household in which the representative has probable cause to believe that a child is in serious, immediate danger. If necessary, the officer may use reasonable force to enable the representative to gain entry (Md. Code FL § 5-709(b)).

313.11   TRAINING

The Department should provide training on best practices in child abuse investigations to members tasked with investigating these cases. The training should include:

  1. Participating in multidisciplinary investigations, as appropriate.
  1. Conducting forensic interviews.
  2. vailability of therapy services for children and families.
  1. Availability of specialized forensic medical exams.
  1. Cultural competence (including interpretive services) related to child abuse investigations.
  1. Availability of victim advocate or guardian ad litem support.
  1. Recognizing abuse that requires mandatory notification to another agency.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Adult Abuse

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for the investigation and reporting of suspected abuse of certain adults who may be more vulnerable than others. This policy also addresses mandatory notification for Glenarden Police Department members as required by law.

      1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Adult abuse – Any offense or attempted offense involving violence or neglect of an adult victim when committed by a person responsible for the adult’s care, or any other act that would mandate reporting or notification to a social service agency or law enforcement.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department will investigate all reported incidents of alleged adult abuse and ensure proper reporting and notification as required by law.

    1. MANDATORY NOTIFICATION

Members of the Glenarden Police Department shall notify the local Department of Adult Protective Services (APS) when there is reason to believe that an adult who lacks the physical or mental capacity to provide for his/her own daily needs has been subjected to abuse, neglect, self-neglect or exploitation (Md. Code FL § 14-302(a)).

      1. NOTIFICATION PROCEDURE

Notification shall occur as follows (Md. Code FL § 14-302):

  1. The officer investigating the case shall notify the local APS office by telephone, direct communication or in writing as soon as possible.
  2. The investigating officer shall include at least the following information as reasonably known:
    1. The name, age and home address of the adult, including his/her current whereabouts.
    2. The name and home address of the person responsible for the adult’s care.
    1. The nature of the adult’s suspected incapacity.
    1. The nature and extent of the abuse, neglect, self-neglect or exploitation, including any reasonably known evidence or information concerning previous injury that may have resulted from abuse, neglect, self-neglect or exploitation.
    2. Any other information that would help to determine the cause of the suspected abuse, neglect, self-neglect or exploitation, and the identity of any individual responsible for the abuse, neglect, self-neglect or exploitation.
    1. QUALIFIED INVESTIGATORS

Qualified investigators should be available to investigate cases of adult abuse. These investigators should:

  1. Conduct interviews in appropriate interview facilities.
  1. Be familiar with forensic interview techniques specific to adult abuse investigations.
  1. Present all cases of alleged adult abuse to the prosecutor for review.
  1. Coordinate  with  other  enforcement  agencies,  social  service  agencies  and  facility administrators as needed.
  2. Provide referrals to therapy services, victim advocates, guardians and support for the victim and family as appropriate.
  3. Participate in or coordinate with multidisciplinary investigative teams as applicable (COMAR 07.02.16.07(B)).
    1. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTING

All reported or suspected cases of adult abuse require investigation and a report, even if the allegations appear unfounded or unsubstantiated.

Investigations  and  reports  related  to  suspected  cases  of  adult  abuse  should  address,  as applicable:

  1. The overall basis for the contact. This should be done by the investigating officer in all circumstances where a suspected adult abuse victim is contacted.
  2. Any relevant  statements  the  victim  may  have  made  and  to  whom  he/she  made  the statements.
  3. If a person is taken into protective custody, the reasons, the name and title of the person making the decision, and why other alternatives were not appropriate.
  4. Documentation of any visible injuries or any injuries identified by the victim. This should include photographs of such injuries, if practicable.
  5. Whether the victim was transported for medical treatment or a medical examination.
  1. Whether the victim identified a household member as the alleged perpetrator, and a list of the names of any other potential victims or witnesses who may reside in the residence.
  2. Identification of any prior related reports or allegations of abuse, including other jurisdictions, as reasonably known.
  3. Previous addresses of the victim and suspect.
  1. Other potential witnesses who have not yet been interviewed, such as relatives or others close to the victim’s environment.

Any unexplained death of an adult who was in the care of a guardian or caretaker should be considered as potential adult abuse and investigated similarly.

    1. PROTECTIVE CUSTODY

Before taking an adult abuse victim into protective custody when facts indicate the adult may not be able to care for him/herself, the officer should make reasonable attempts to contact APS. Generally, removal of an adult abuse victim from his/her family, guardian or other responsible adult should be left to the welfare authorities when they are present or have become involved in an investigation (Md. Code FL § 14-307)).

Generally, members of this department should remove an adult abuse victim from his/her family or guardian without a court order only when no other effective alternative is reasonably available and immediate action reasonably appears necessary to protect the victim. Prior to taking an adult abuse victim into protective custody, the officer should take reasonable steps to deliver the adult to another qualified legal guardian, unless it reasonably appears that the release would endanger the victim or result in abduction. If this is not a reasonable option, the officer shall ensure that the adult is delivered to APS (Md. Code ET § 13-709(a)).

Whenever practicable, the officer should inform a supervisor of the circumstances prior to taking an adult abuse victim into protective custody. If prior notification is not practicable, officers should contact a supervisor promptly after taking the adult into protective custody.

When adult abuse victims are under state control, have a state-appointed guardian or there are other legal holdings for guardianship, it may be necessary or reasonable to seek a court order on behalf of the adult victim to either remove the adult from a dangerous environment (protective custody) or restrain a person from contact with the adult.

    1. INTERVIEWS
      1. PRELIMINARY INTERVIEWS

Absent extenuating circumstances or impracticality, officers should audio record the preliminary interview with a suspected adult abuse victim. Officers should avoid multiple interviews with the victim and should attempt to gather only the information necessary to begin an investigation. When practicable, investigating officers should defer interviews until a person who is specially trained in such interviews is available.

      1. DETAINING VICTIMS FOR INTERVIEWS

An officer should not detain an adult involuntarily who is suspected of being a victim of abuse solely for the purpose of an interview or physical exam without his/her consent or the consent of a guardian unless one of the following applies:

  1. Exigent circumstances exist, such as:
    1. A  reasonable  belief  that  medical  issues  of  the  adult  need  to  be  addressed immediately.
    2. A reasonable belief that the adult is or will be in danger of harm if the interview or physical exam is not immediately completed.
    3. The alleged offender is a family member or guardian and there is reason to believe the adult may be in continued danger.
  1. A court order or warrant has been issued.
    1. MEDICAL EXAMINATIONS

When an adult abuse investigation requires a medical examination, the investigating officer should obtain consent for such examination from the victim, guardian, agency or entity having legal custody of the adult. The officer should also arrange for the adult’s transportation to the appropriate medical facility.

In cases where the alleged offender is a family member, guardian, agency or entity having legal custody and is refusing to give consent for the medical examination, officers should notify a supervisor before proceeding. If exigent circumstances do not exist or if state law does not provide for officers to take the adult for a medical examination, the supervisor should consider other government agencies or services that may obtain a court order for such an examination.

    1. DRUG-ENDANGERED VICTIMS

A coordinated response by law enforcement and social services agencies is appropriate to meet the immediate and longer-term medical and safety needs of an adult abuse victim who has been exposed to the manufacturing, trafficking or use of narcotics.

      1. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES The Prince George County PD supervisor should:
  1. Work with professionals from the appropriate agencies, including APS, other law enforcement agencies, medical service providers and local prosecutors to develop community specific procedures for responding to situations where there are adult abuse victims endangered by exposure to methamphetamine labs or the manufacture and trafficking of other drugs.
  2. Activate any available interagency response when an officer notifies the Prince George County PD supervisor that he/she has responded to a drug lab or other narcotics crime scene where an adult abuse victim is present or where evidence indicates that an adult abuse victim lives there.
  3. Develop a report format or checklist for use when officers respond to drug labs or other narcotics crime scenes. The checklist will help officers document the environmental, medical, social and other conditions that may affect the adult.
      1. OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES

Officers responding to a drug lab or other narcotics crime scene where an adult abuse victim is present or where there is evidence that an adult abuse victim lives there should:

  1. Document the environmental, medical, social and other conditions of the adult, using photography as appropriate and the checklist or form developed for this purpose.
  2. Notify the Prince George County PD supervisor so an interagency response can begin.
    1. STATE MANDATES AND OTHER RELEVANT LAWS

Maryland requires or permits the following:

      1. RECORDS DIVISION (PRINCE GEORGE COUNTY PD) RESPONSIBILITIES The Records Division (Prince George County PD) is responsible for:
  1. Providing a copy of the adult abuse report to APS as required by law.
  1. Retaining the original adult abuse report with the initial case file.
      1. RELEASE OF REPORTS

Information related to incidents of adult abuse or suspected adult abuse are confidential and may only be disclosed pursuant to state law and the Records Maintenance and Release Policy. However, law enforcement and participating agencies involved in the investigation may share information (Md. Code FL § 14-303(e)).

      1. INVESTIGATION ASSISTANCE

On request of APS or any law enforcement agency, the handling officer shall assist in investigation of adult abuse (Md. Code FL § 14-303(c)).

If, in the course of an investigation, an APS representative believes that an emergency exists, the representative may request law enforcement assistance. Responding officers shall accompany the representative. If the officer believes that an emergency exists as described in Md. Code ET § 13-709(a), the officer shall ensure that the individual is transported to an appropriate health care facility (Md. Code FL § 14-304).

314.11   TRAINING

The Department should provide training on best practices in adult abuse investigations to members tasked with investigating these cases. The training should include:

  1. Participating in multidisciplinary investigations, as appropriate.
  1. Conducting interviews.
  1. Availability of therapy services for adults and families.
  1. Availability of specialized forensic medical exams.
  1. Cultural competence (including interpretive services) related to adult abuse investigations.
  1. Availability of victim advocates or other support.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Discriminatory Harassment

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to prevent department members from being subjected to discriminatory harassment, including sexual harassment and retaliation. Nothing in this policy is intended to create a legal or employment right or duty that is not created by law.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department is an equal opportunity employer and is committed to creating and maintaining a work environment that is free of all forms of discriminatory harassment, including sexual harassment and retaliation. The Department will not tolerate discrimination against a member in hiring, promotion, discharge, compensation, fringe benefits and other privileges of employment. The Department will take preventive and corrective action to address any behavior that violates this policy or the rights and privileges it is designed to protect.

The nondiscrimination policies of the Department may be more comprehensive than state or federal law. Conduct that violates this policy may not violate state or federal law but still could subject a member to discipline.

    1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

      1. DISCRIMINATION

The Department prohibits all forms of discrimination, including any employment-related action by a member that adversely affects an applicant or member and is based on race, color, religion, sex, age, national origin or ancestry, genetic information, disability, military service, sexual orientation and other classifications protected by law.

Discriminatory harassment, including sexual harassment, is verbal or physical conduct that demeans or shows hostility or aversion toward an individual based upon that individual’s protected class. It has the effect of interfering with an individual’s work performance or creating a hostile or abusive work environment.

Conduct that may, under certain circumstances, constitute discriminatory harassment, can include making derogatory comments, crude and offensive statements or remarks, making slurs or off-color jokes, stereotyping, engaging in threatening acts, making indecent gestures, pictures, cartoons, posters or material, making inappropriate physical contact, or using written material or department equipment and/or systems to transmit or receive offensive material, statements or pictures. Such conduct is contrary to department policy and to a work environment that is free of discrimination.

      1. RETALIATION

Retaliation is treating a person differently or engaging in acts of reprisal or intimidation against the person because he/she has engaged in protected activity, filed a charge of discrimination,

participated in an investigation or opposed a discriminatory practice. Retaliation will not be tolerated.

      1. SEXUAL HARASSMENT

The Department prohibits all forms of discrimination and discriminatory harassment, including sexual harassment. It is unlawful to harass an applicant or a member because of that person’s sex.

Sexual harassment includes, but is not limited to, unwelcome sexual advances, requests for sexual favors or other verbal, visual or physical conduct of a sexual nature when:

  1. Submission to such conduct is made either explicitly or implicitly as a term or condition of employment, position or compensation.
  2. Submission to, or rejection of, such conduct is used as the basis for any employment decisions affecting the member.
  3. Such conduct has the purpose or effect of substantially interfering with a member’s work performance or creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive work environment.
      1. ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS

Discrimination and discriminatory harassment do not include actions that are in accordance with established rules, principles or standards, including:

  1. Acts or omission of acts based solely upon bona fide occupational qualifications under the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission and the Maryland Commission on Civil Rights guidelines.
  2. Bona fide requests or demands by a supervisor that a member improve his/her work quality or output, that the member report to the job site on time, that the member comply with Town or department rules or regulations, or any other appropriate work-related communication between supervisor and member.
    1. RESPONSIBILITIES

This policy applies to all department members, who shall follow the intent of these guidelines in a manner that reflects department policy, professional law enforcement standards and the best interest of the Department and its mission.

Members are encouraged to promptly report any discriminatory, retaliatory or harassing conduct or known violations of this policy to a supervisor. Any member who is not comfortable with reporting violations of this policy to his/her immediate supervisor may bypass the chain of command and make the report to a higher ranking supervisor or manager. Complaints may also be filed with the Chief of Police, the Director of Human Services or the Town Administrator.

Any member who believes, in good faith, that he/she has been discriminated against, harassed, subjected to retaliation, or who has observed harassment, discrimination or retaliation, is encouraged to promptly report such conduct in accordance with the procedures set forth in this policy.

Supervisors and managers receiving information regarding alleged violations of this policy shall determine if there is any basis for the allegation and shall proceed with resolution as stated below.

      1. QUESTIONS OR CLARIFICATION

Members with questions regarding what constitutes discrimination, sexual harassment or retaliation are encouraged to contact a supervisor, manager, the Chief of Police, Director of Human Services or the Town Administrator for further information, direction or clarification.

      1. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES

The responsibilities of each supervisor and manager shall include, but are not limited to:

  1. Continually monitoring the work environment and striving to ensure that it is free from all types of unlawful discrimination, including harassment or retaliation.
  2. Taking prompt, appropriate action within their work units to avoid and minimize the incidence of any form of discrimination, harassment or retaliation.
  3. Ensuring that their subordinates understand their responsibilities under this policy.
  1. Ensuring that members who make complaints or who oppose any unlawful employment practices are protected from retaliation and that such matters are kept confidential to the extent possible.
  2. Making a timely determination regarding the substance of any allegation based upon all available facts.
  3. Notifying the Chief of Police or Director of Human Services in writing of the circumstances surrounding any reported allegations or observed acts of discrimination, harassment or retaliation no later than the next business day.
      1. SUPERVISOR’S ROLE

Because of differences in individual values, supervisors and managers may find it difficult to recognize that their behavior or the behavior of others is discriminatory, harassing or retaliatory. Supervisors and managers shall be aware of the following:

  1. Behavior of supervisors and managers should represent the values of the Department and professional law enforcement standards.
  2. False or mistaken accusations of discrimination, harassment or retaliation can have negative effects on the careers of innocent members.

Nothing in this section shall be construed to prevent supervisors or managers from discharging supervisory or management responsibilities, such as determining duty assignments, evaluating or counseling members or issuing discipline in a manner that is consistent with established procedures.

    1. INVESTIGATION OF COMPLAINTS

Various methods of resolution exist. During the pendency of any such investigation, the supervisor of the involved member should take prompt and reasonable steps to mitigate or eliminate any continuing abusive or hostile work environment. It is the policy of the Department that all complaints of discrimination, retaliation or harassment shall be fully documented and promptly and thoroughly investigated.

      1. SUPERVISORY RESOLUTION

Members who believe they are experiencing discrimination, harassment or retaliation should be encouraged to inform the individual that his/her behavior is unwelcome, offensive, unprofessional or inappropriate. However,  if  the  member  feels  uncomfortable,  threatened  or  has  difficulty expressing his/her concern, or if this does not resolve the concern, assistance should be sought from a supervisor or manager who is a rank higher than the alleged transgressor.

      1. FORMAL INVESTIGATION

If the complaint cannot be satisfactorily resolved through the supervisory resolution process, a formal investigation will be conducted. The person assigned to investigate the complaint will have full authority to investigate all aspects of the complaint. Investigative authority includes access to records and the cooperation of any members involved. No influence will be used to suppress any complaint and no member will be subject to retaliation or reprisal for filing a complaint, encouraging others to file a complaint or for offering testimony or evidence in any investigation.

Formal investigation of the complaint will be confidential to the extent possible and will include, but not be limited to, details of the specific incident, frequency dates of occurrences and names of any witnesses. Witnesses will be advised regarding the prohibition against retaliation, and that a disciplinary process, up to and including termination, may result if retaliation occurs.

Members who believe they have been discriminated against, harassed or retaliated against because of their protected status are encouraged to follow the chain of command but may also file a complaint directly with the Chief of Police, Director of Human Services or the Town Administrator.

      1. ALTERNATIVE COMPLAINT PROCESS

No provision of this policy shall be construed to prevent any member from seeking legal redress outside the Department. Members who believe that they have been harassed, discriminated or retaliated against are entitled to bring complaints of employment discrimination to federal, state and/or local agencies responsible for investigating such allegations. Specific time limitations apply to the filing of such charges. Members are advised that proceeding with complaints under the provisions of this policy does not in any way affect those filing requirements.

315.6 DOCUMENTATION OF COMPLAINTS

All complaints or allegations shall be thoroughly documented on the appropriate forms and in a manner designated by the Chief of Police. The outcome of all reports shall be:

  1. Approved by the Chief of Police, the Town Administrator or the Director of Human Services, depending on the ranks of the involved parties.
  2. Maintained in accordance with the established records retention schedule.

315.6.1   NOTIFICATION OF DISPOSITION

The complainant and/or victim will be notified in writing of the disposition of the investigation and the actions taken to remedy or address the circumstances giving rise to the complaint.

315.7   TRAINING

All new members shall be provided with a copy of this policy as part of their orientation. The policy shall be reviewed with each new member. The member shall certify by signing the prescribed form that he/she has been advised of this policy, is aware of and understands its contents and agrees to abide by its provisions during his/her term with the Department.

All members shall receive annual training on the requirements of this policy and shall certify by signing the prescribed form that they have reviewed the policy, understand its contents and agree that they will continue to abide by its provisions.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Missing Persons

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidance for handling missing person investigations.

      1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

At risk – A missing child who meets any of the following conditions (Md. Code FL § 9-402):

  1. The child has not been the subject of a prior missing persons report.
  2. The child suffers from a mental or physical handicap or illness.
  3. The disappearance is of a suspicious or dangerous nature.
  4. The person filing the report has reason to believe that the missing child may have been abducted.
  5. The child has previously been the subject of a child abuse report filed with the state or a local law enforcement agency.
  6. The missing child is under 17 years of age.
  7. The missing child has not been located within 12 hours of the initial report.

Missing child – A person under the age of 18 who is the subject of a missing person report filed with a law enforcement agency in Maryland and whose location is unknown (Md. Code FL § 9-401).

Missing person – Any person who is reported missing to law enforcement when that person’s location is unknown.

Missing person networks – Databases or computer networks that are available to law enforcement and are suitable for obtaining information related to missing person investigations. This includes the National Crime Information Center (NCIC), the Maryland Center for Missing and Unidentified Persons (MCMUP) and the Maryland Electronic Telecommunications Enforcement Resource System (METERS).

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department does not consider any report of a missing person to be routine and assumes that the missing person is in need of immediate assistance until an investigation reveals otherwise. Priority shall be given to missing person cases over property- related cases. Members will initiate an investigation into all reports of missing persons, regardless of the length of time the person has been missing.

    1. REQUIRED FORMS AND DNA COLLECTION KITS

The Prince George County PD supervisor shall ensure the following forms and kits are developed and available:

  • The State of Maryland Missing Person Report (SOMMPR) form
  • Missing person investigation checklist that provides investigation guidelines and resources that could be helpful in the early hours of a missing person investigation
  • Missing person school notification form
  • Medical records release form
  • Maryland State Police DNA collection kits
    1. ACCEPTANCE OF REPORTS

Any member encountering an individual who wishes to report a missing person or runaway shall render assistance without delay. This can be accomplished by accepting the report via telephone or in-person and initiating the investigation. Those members who do not take such reports or who are unable to give immediate assistance shall promptly dispatch or alert a member who can take the report (Md. Code FL § 9-402(e); Md. Code PS § 3-601).

A report shall be accepted in all cases and regardless of where the person was last seen, where the person resides or any question of jurisdiction.

When taking a missing person report, department members shall use the SOMMPR form (Md. Code PS § 3-602).

    1. INITIAL INVESTIGATION

Officers or other members conducting the initial investigation of a missing person should take the following investigative actions, as applicable:

  1. Respond to a dispatched call as soon as practicable.
  2. Interview the reporting party and any witnesses to determine whether the person qualifies as a missing person and, if so, whether the person may be at risk.
  3. Notify a supervisor immediately if there is evidence that a missing person is either at risk or may qualify for a public alert, or both (see the Public Alerts Policy).
  4. Broadcast a “Be on the Look-Out” (BOLO) bulletin if the person is under 17 years of age or there is evidence that the missing person is at risk. The BOLO should be broadcast as soon as practicable but in no event more than one hour after determining the missing person is under 17 years of age or may be at risk.
  5. Ensure that entries are made into the appropriate missing person networks, as follows:
    1. Immediately, when the missing person is at risk.
    2. In all other cases, as soon as practicable, but not later than 12 hours from the time of the initial report (Md. Code FL § 9-402(c)).
  6. Complete the appropriate report forms accurately and completely and initiate a search as applicable under the facts.
  7. Collect and/or review:
    1. A photograph and fingerprint card of the missing person, if available.
    2. A voluntarily provided biological sample of the missing person, if available (e.g., toothbrush, hairbrush).
    3. Any documents that may assist in the investigation, such as court orders regarding custody.
    4. Any other evidence that may assist in the investigation, including personal electronic devices (e.g., cell phones, computers).
  8. When circumstances permit and if appropriate, attempt to determine the missing person’s location through his/her telecommunications carrier.
  9. Contact the appropriate agency if the report relates to a missing person report previously made to another agency and that agency is actively investigating the report. When this is not practicable, the information should be documented in an appropriate report for transmission to the appropriate agency. If the information relates to an at-risk missing person, the member should notify a supervisor and proceed with reasonable steps to locate the missing person.
  10. If the person qualifies for a Silver Alert, contact the Maryland State Police as soon as practicable.
    1. REPORT PROCEDURES AND ROUTING

Members  should  complete  all  missing  person  reports  and  forms  promptly  and  advise  the appropriate supervisor as soon as a missing person report is ready for review.

      1. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES

The responsibilities of the supervisor shall include, but not be limited to:

  1. Reviewing and approving missing person reports upon receipt.
    1. The reports should be promptly sent to the Records Division (Prince George County PD).
  1. Ensuring resources are deployed as appropriate.
  1. Initiating a command post as needed.
  1. Ensuring applicable notifications and public alerts are made and documented.
  1. Ensuring that records have been entered into the appropriate missing person networks.
  1. Taking  reasonable  steps  to  identify  and  address  any  jurisdictional  issues  to  ensure cooperation among agencies.
    1. If the case falls within the jurisdiction of another agency, the supervisor should facilitate transfer of the case to the agency of jurisdiction.
      1. RECORDS DIVISION (PRINCE GEORGE COUNTY PD) RESPONSIBILITIES

The responsibilities of the Records Division (Prince George County PD) receiving member shall include, but not be limited to:

  1. As soon as reasonable under the circumstances, notifying and forwarding a copy of the report to the agency of jurisdiction for the missing person’s residence in cases where the missing person is a resident of another jurisdiction.
  2. Notifying and forwarding a copy of the report to the agency of jurisdiction where the missing person was last seen.
  3. Notifying and forwarding a copy of the report to the agency of jurisdiction for the missing person’s intended or possible destination, if known.
  4. Forwarding a copy of the report to the Prince George County PD.
  5. Coordinating with the NCIC Terminal Contractor for Maryland to have the missing person record in the NCIC computer networks updated with additional information obtained from missing person investigations (42 USC § 5780).
    1. PRINCE GEORGE COUNTY PD FOLLOW-UP

In addition to completing or continuing any actions listed above, the investigator assigned to a missing person investigation:

  1. Shall coordinate the investigation with the Maryland State Police if a missing child has not been located within 24 hours and there is reason to believe the child may be located in another jurisdiction (Md. Code FL § 9-402(d)).
  2. Should ensure that the missing person’s school is notified within 10 days if the missing person is a juvenile.
    1. The notice shall be in writing and should also include a photograph.
    2. The investigator should meet with school officials as appropriate to stress the importance of including the notice in the child’s student file, along with the investigator’s contact information if the school receives a call requesting the transfer of the missing child’s files to another school.
  3. Should recontact the reporting party and/or other witnesses within 30 days of the initial report and within 30 days thereafter to keep them informed, as appropriate, and to determine if any additional information has become available.
  4. Should consider contacting other agencies involved in the case to determine if any additional information is available.
  5. Shall verify and update MCMUP, METERS, NCIC and any other applicable missing person networks within 30 days of the original entry into the networks and every 30 days thereafter until the missing person is located (42 USC § 5780).
  6. Should continue to make reasonable efforts to locate the missing person and document these efforts at least every 30 days.
  7. Shall maintain a close liaison with state and local child welfare systems and the National Center for Missing and Exploited Children (NCMEC) if the missing person is under the age of 21 and shall promptly notify NCMEC when the person is missing from a foster care family home or childcare institution (42 USC § 5780).
  8. Should make appropriate inquiry with the Medical Examiner.
  9. Should obtain and forward medical and dental records, photos, X-rays and biological samples, as applicable.
  10. Shall attempt to obtain the most recent photograph for persons under 18 years of age if it has not been obtained previously and forward the photograph to the Department of State Police and enter the photograph into applicable missing person networks (42 USC § 5780).
  11. Should consider making appropriate entries and searches in the National Missing and Unidentified Persons System (NamUs).
  12. In the case of an at-risk missing person or a person who has been missing for an extended time, should consult with a supervisor regarding seeking federal assistance from the FBI and the U.S. Marshals Service (28 USC § 566).
    1. WHEN A MISSING PERSON IS FOUND

When any person reported missing is found, the assigned investigator shall document the location of the missing person in the appropriate report, notify the relatives and/or reporting party, as appropriate, and other involved agencies and refer the case for additional investigation if warranted.

The Records Division (Prince George County PD) should ensure that, upon receipt of information that a missing person has been located, the following occurs:

  1. Notification is made to the Maryland State Police.
  1. A missing child’s school is notified.
  1. Entries are made in the applicable missing person networks.
  1. When a person is at risk, the fact that the person has been found should be reported within 24 hours to MCMUP, METERS and NCIC.
  2. Notification shall be made to any other law enforcement agency that took the initial report or participated in the investigation.

316.8.1   UNIDENTIFIED PERSONS

Members investigating a case of an unidentified person who is deceased or a living person who cannot assist in identifying him/herself should:

  1. Obtain a complete description of the person.
  2. Enter the unidentified person’s description into the NCIC Unidentified Person File.
  1. Use available resources, such as those related to missing persons, to identify the person.
    1. CASE CLOSURE

The Prince George County PD supervisor may authorize the closure of a missing person case after considering the following:

  1. Closure is appropriate when the missing person is confirmed returned or evidence matches an unidentified person or body.
  2. If the missing person is a resident of Prince George County or this department is the lead agency, the case should be kept under active investigation for as long as the person may still be alive. Exhaustion of leads in the investigation should not be a reason for closing a case.
  3. If this department is not the lead agency, the case can be made inactivate if all investigative leads have been exhausted, the lead agency has been notified and entries are made in the applicable missing person networks, as appropriate.
  4. A missing person case should not be closed or reclassified because the person would have reached a certain age or adulthood or because the person is now the subject of a criminal or civil warrant.
    1. TRAINING

Subject to available resources, the Training Coordinator should ensure that members of this department whose duties include missing person investigations and reports receive training that includes:

  1. The initial investigation:
    1. Assessments and interviews
    2. Use of current resources, such as Mobile Audio Video (MAV)
    3. Confirming missing status and custody status of minors
    4. Evaluating the need for a heightened response
    5. Identifying the zone of safety based on chronological age and developmental stage
  2. Briefing of department members at the scene.
  3. Identifying NCIC Missing Person File categories (e.g., disability, endangered, involuntary, juvenile and catastrophe).
  4. Verifying the accuracy of all descriptive information.
  5. Initiating a neighborhood investigation.
  6. Investigating any relevant recent family dynamics.
  7. Addressing conflicting information.
  8. Key investigative and coordination steps.
  9. Managing a missing person case.
  10. Additional resources and specialized services.
  11. Update procedures for case information and descriptions.
  12. Preserving scenes.
  13. Internet and technology issues (e.g., Internet use, cell phone use).
  14. Media relations.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Public Alerts

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for alerting the public to important information and soliciting public aid when appropriate.

    1. POLICY

Public alerts may be employed using the Emergency Alert System (EAS), local radio, television and press organizations and other groups to notify the public of incidents, or enlist the aid of the public, when the exchange of information may enhance the safety of the community. Various types of alerts may be available based upon each situation and the alert system’s individual criteria.

    1. RESPONSIBILITIES
      1. MEMBER RESPONSIBILITIES

Members of the Glenarden Police Department should notify their supervisor, Shift Supervisor or Prince George County PD supervisor as soon as practicable upon learning of a situation where public notification, a warning or enlisting the help of the media and the public could assist in locating a missing person, apprehending a dangerous person or gathering information.

      1. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A supervisor apprised of the need for a public alert is responsible to make the appropriate notifications based upon the circumstances of each situation. The supervisor shall promptly notify the Chief of Police, the appropriate Lieutenant and the Press Information Officer when any public alert is generated.

The supervisor in charge of the investigation to which the alert relates is responsible for the following:

  1. Updating alerts.
  1. Canceling alerts.
  1. Ensuring all appropriate reports are completed.
  1. Preparing an after-action evaluation of the investigation to be forwarded to the Lieutenant.
    1. AMBER™ ALERTS

AMBER™ Alerts are used to provide a statewide system for the rapid dissemination of information regarding abducted children.

      1. CRITERIA

The following criteria are utilized to determine if an AMBER Alert should be issued:

  1. There is confirmation that the child has been abducted.
  1. The child is under the age of 18.
  2. The circumstances surrounding the abduction indicate that the child is in danger of serious bodily harm or death.
  3. There is enough descriptive information about the child, abductor and/or suspect’s vehicle to believe an immediate broadcast alert will help.
  4. The child is believed to still be in the broadcast area.
  1. The child’s name and other critical elements have been entered into the National Crime Information Center (NCIC).
      1. PROCEDURE

After verifying a report that a child has been abducted and is in danger of serious bodily harm, the supervisor in charge of the investigation shall:

  1. Immediately notify the field supervisor.
  1. After confirming that the AMBER Alert criteria have been met, the field supervisor shall contact the Maryland State Police (MSP) headquarters duty officer and request an AMBER Alert activation.
  2. Provide all necessary information to the MSP Missing Child Recovery Unit.
  1. Be prepared to follow up the verbal request with a written request made via fax to the MSP headquarters duty officer.
    1. BLUE ALERTS

Blue Alerts™ are used to provide a statewide system for the rapid dissemination of information regarding a violent criminal who has seriously injured or killed a local, state or federal law enforcement officer (Md. Code PS § 3-605).

      1. CRITERIA

The following criteria are utilized to determine if a Blue Alert should be issued:

  1. An officer must have been killed or seriously injured by an offender.
  1. It has been determined that the offender poses a serious risk or threat to the public and other law enforcement personnel.
  2. A detailed description of the offender’s vehicle, vehicle tag or partial tag must be available for broadcast to the public.
      1. PROCEDURE

The following are the procedures for a Blue Alert:

  1. Upon confirmation of the Blue Alert criteria, the supervisor in charge of the investigation shall recommend activation of the Blue Alert to the MSP.
  2. Once this department apprehends a missing offender who is the subject of a Blue Alert, the supervisor in charge of the investigation shall immediately notify the MSP and any law

enforcement agency that filed the report resulting in the Blue Alert that the missing offender has been apprehended (Md. Code PS § 3-605).

    1. SILVER ALERTS

Silver Alerts are used to provide a statewide system for the rapid dissemination of information regarding a missing person who has a cognitive disorder (Md. Code PS § 3-604).

      1. CRITERIA

The following criteria are utilized to determine if a Silver Alert should be issued:

  1. The whereabouts of a person at least 60 years old is unknown.
  1. The person suffers a cognitive impairment, including a diagnosis of Alzheimer’s disease or dementia to the extent that the individual requires assistance from a caregiver.
  2. The disappearance poses a credible threat to the health and safety of the person due to age, health, mental or physical disability, and environment or weather conditions, as determined by this department.
  3. The person is traveling in a vehicle and there is enough descriptive information about the missing person and the vehicle to issue an alert.
  4. The Department has already activated a local or regional alert by contacting media outlets in the jurisdiction and the missing person has been entered into NCIC.
      1. PROCEDURE

The following are the procedures for a Silver Alert:

  1. Upon confirmation of the Silver Alert criteria, the supervisor in charge of the investigation shall contact the MSP headquarters duty officer and request a Silver Alert.
  2. Once the Department confirms that the missing person has been located, the supervisor in charge of the investigation shall notify the MSP that the missing person has been located.
    1. LOCAL MEDIA ALERTS
      1. CRITERIA

A local media alert should be used for the rapid dissemination of information to assist in finding a missing person regardless of whether the criteria for a state alert are met.

      1. PROCEDURE

Regardless of whether a public alert is activated, the following procedures to alert the media and other local law enforcement agencies should be followed:

  1. The PIO will prepare an initial press release that includes all available information that might aid in locating a child, suspect or missing person, such as:
    1. The person’s identity, age and description.
    2. A photograph, if available.
    1. Pertinent vehicle description.
    1. Details regarding the location of the incident, last known direction of travel and potential destinations, if known.
    2. The name and contact number of the PIO or other authorized media liaison.
    1. A contact number for the public to call with leads or information.
  1. The press release should be faxed to local television and radio stations.
  1. The information in the press release should also be forwarded to local law enforcement agencies.
  2. The activating official or other individual responsible for making notifications shall prepare and fax  to the previously  described locations,  follow-up  press  releases  with  updates regarding the search and investigation, or immediately upon locating the person identified in the public alert.

The  PIO  is  responsible  for  providing  relevant  updates  to  the  supervisor  in  charge  of  the investigation.

    1. YELLOW ALERTS

Yellow Alerts are used to provide a statewide system for the rapid dissemination of information regarding a suspect in a hit-and-run involving serious injury or death (Md. Code PS § 3-606).

      1. CRITERIA

The following criteria are utilized to determine if a Yellow Alert should be issued:

  1. The whereabouts of a person suspected of leaving the scene of an accident involving serious bodily injury or death are unknown (Md. Code TR § 27-113).
  2. The suspect’s vehicle can be described, including any information about the vehicle’s license plate number.
      1. PROCEDURE

The following are the procedures for a Yellow Alert:

  1. Upon confirmation of the Yellow Alert criteria, the supervisor in charge of the investigation shall contact the MSP headquarters duty officer and request a Yellow Alert.
  2. Once the Department confirms that the vehicle or suspect has been located, the supervisor in charge of the investigation shall notify the MSP.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Victim and Witness Assistance

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to ensure that crime victims and witnesses receive appropriate assistance, that they are provided with information from government and private resources, and that the agency meets all related legal mandates (Md. Code CP § 11-1001 et seq.).

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department is committed to providing guidance and assistance to the victims and witnesses of crime. The employees of the Glenarden Police Department will show dignity, respect, courtesy, sensitivity, compassion and understanding for victims and witnesses and will make reasonable efforts to provide the support and information identified in this policy.

    1. CRIME VICTIM LIAISON

The Chief of Police may appoint a member of the Department to serve as the crime victim liaison. The crime victim liaison will be the point of contact for individuals requiring further assistance or information from the Glenarden Police Department regarding benefits from crime victim resources. This person shall also be responsible for maintaining compliance with all legal mandates related to crime victims and/or witnesses.

318.3.1 DNA PROFILE INFORMATION

The crime victim liaison shall ensure that a system is in place to provide victims of violent crime who have made a written request for notice of DNA profile information with the following (Md. Code CP § 11-104):

  1. Whether an evidentiary DNA profile is obtained from evidence in the case
  2. When a DNA profile developed in the case is entered into the statewide DNA database system
  3. When a confirmed match or hit on the DNA profile is received
    1. CRIME VICTIMS AND WITNESSES

Officers on first contact shall provide all victims or victim’s representative with the applicable victim information handout (Md. Code CP § 11-104).

Officers should never guarantee a victim’s safety from future harm but should take reasonable safety precautions and make practical safety suggestions to victims who express fear of future harm or retaliation (Md. Code CP § 11-1002(b)(4)).

Officers should provide a separate area away from suspects or the family and friends of suspects during an investigation and should never guarantee that a person qualifies as a victim for the purpose of compensation or restitution but should direct him/her to the proper written department material or available victim resources (Md. Code CP § 11-1002).

Officers should investigate allegations of witness intimidation and take enforcement action when lawful and reasonable.

    1. VICTIM AND WITNESS INFORMATION

The Administration Lieutenant shall ensure that victim and witness information handouts are available and current while meeting appropriate standards.

These handouts should include information regarding (Md. Code CP § 11-1002):

  1. Shelters and other community resources for victims of domestic violence.
  2. Crisis  intervention  help,  including  medical  treatment,  creditor  intervention  services, counseling or other social services.
  3. Community resources for victims of sexual assault.
  4. Assurance that sexual assault victims will not incur out-of-pocket expenses for forensic medical exams (42 USC § 3796gg).
  5. Contact information for the Maryland Sex Offender Alert Line.
  6. An advisement that a person who was arrested may be released on bond or some other form of release and that the victim should not rely upon an arrest as a guarantee of safety.
  7. A clear explanation of relevant court orders and how they can be obtained.
  8. Available compensation for qualifying victims of crime (Md. Code CP § 11-916).
  9. VINE® information (Victim Information and Notification Everyday), including the telephone number and whether this free service is available to allow victims to check on an offender’s custody status and to register for automatic notification when a person is released from jail.
  10. Notice regarding U visa and T visa application processes.
  11. Resources available for victims of identity theft.
  12. The victim’s right, upon written request, to the following:
    1. To be kept reasonably informed of the arrest of a suspect and closing of the case.
    2. Which office to contact for information about the case.
    3. For victims of a violent crime, to be notified and updated on matters related to a suspect’s DNA profile pursuant to Md. Code CP § 11-104.
  13. The right to have stolen or other property promptly returned and, upon written request, should have the property promptly returned when evidentiary requirements for prosecution can be satisfied by other means, unless there is a compelling law enforcement reason for keeping it.
  14. A place for the officer’s name, badge number and any applicable case or incident number.
  15. How a victim may keep his/her address confidential (Md. Code FL § 4-522; Md. Code SG

§ 7-303).

  1. Maryland  Electronic  Courts  (MDEC)  system  for  requesting  and  receiving  notices electronically, if applicable (Md. Code CP § 11-104).
  2. How to request information regarding an unsolved case (Md. Code CP § 11-104).

318.5.1 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION

The Department, on request of the state, may withhold the address or telephone number of the victim, victim’s representative or witness to a felony before the trial or adjudicatory hearing in a juvenile delinquency proceeding, unless a judge determines that good cause has been shown for the release of the information (Md. Code CP § 11-205).

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Hate Crimes

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide members of this department with guidelines for identifying and investigating incidents and crimes that may be motivated by hatred or other bias.

319.1.1   DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Hate crime – A crime motivated by prejudice based on the actual or perceived race, color, religion, national origin, gender, sexual orientation, gender identity, disability or homelessness of the victim

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department recognizes and places a high priority on the rights of all individuals guaranteed under the state and federal constitutions and incorporated in state and federal law.

    1. PREVENTION AND PREPARATION

While it is recognized that not all crime can be prevented, this department is committed to taking a proactive approach to preventing and preparing for likely hate crimes by:

  1. Making an affirmative effort to establish contact with persons and groups within the community who are likely targets of hate crimes, and forming networks that address prevention and response.
  2. Providing victim assistance, community follow-up or identifying available resources.
  1. Educating community and civic groups about hate crime laws.
    1. INVESTIGATIONS

Whenever any member of this department receives a report of a suspected hate crime or other activity that reasonably appears to involve a potential hate crime, the following should occur:

  1. Assigned  officers should  promptly  contact  the  victim,  witness  or  reporting  party  to investigate the matter further, as circumstances may dictate.
  2. A supervisor should be notified of the circumstances as soon as practicable.
  3. Once the in-progress aspect of any such situation has been stabilized (e.g., treatment of victims or arrest of suspects at the scene), the assigned officers should take reasonable steps to preserve evidence that establishes a possible hate crime.
  4. Based upon available information, officers should take appropriate action to mitigate further injury or damage to potential victims or the community.
  5. Depending on the situation, the assigned officers or supervisor may request assistance from investigators or other resources.

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT 

Policy Manual

Hate Crimes

 

  1. The assigned officers should interview available witnesses, victims and others to determine what circumstances, if any, indicate that the situation may involve a hate crime.
  2. The assigned officers should make reasonable efforts to assist the victim by providing available information on local assistance programs and organizations as required by the Victim and Witness Assistance Policy.
  3. The assigned officers should include all available evidence indicating the likelihood of a hate crime in the relevant reports. All related reports should be clearly marked “Hate Crime.”
  4. The assigned officers and supervisor should take reasonable steps to ensure that any such situation does not escalate further and should provide information to the victim regarding legal aid protective order through the courts or Town Attorney.

319.4.1 PRINCE GEORGE COUNTY PD RESPONSIBILITIES

If a hate crime case is assigned to the Prince George County PD, the assigned investigator will be responsible for:

  1. Coordinating further investigation with the Town Attorney and other appropriate law enforcement agencies.
  2. Maintaining contact with the victim and other involved individuals, as needed.
  1. Maintaining statistical data and tracking of suspected hate crimes, as indicated or required by state law.

319.5   TRAINING

All members of this department should receive training on hate crime recognition and investigation.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Standards of Conduct

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy establishes standards of conduct that are consistent with the values and mission of the Glenarden Police Department and are expected of all department members. The standards contained in this policy are not intended to be an exhaustive list of requirements and prohibitions but they do identify many of the important matters concerning conduct. In addition to the provisions of this policy, members are subject to all other provisions contained in this manual, as well as any additional guidance on conduct that may be disseminated by this department or a member’s supervisors and any other rules or regulations applicable to employees of Prince George County.

    1. POLICY

The continued employment or appointment of every member of this department shall be based on conduct that reasonably conforms to the guidelines set forth herein. Failure to meet the guidelines set forth in this policy, whether on- or off-duty, may be cause for disciplinary action.

    1. DIRECTIVES AND ORDERS

Members shall comply with lawful directives and orders from any department supervisor or person in a position of authority, absent a reasonable and bona fide justification.

      1. UNLAWFUL OR CONFLICTING ORDERS

Supervisors shall not knowingly issue orders or directives that, if carried out, would result in a violation of any law or department policy. Supervisors should not issue orders that conflict with any previous order without making reasonable clarification that the new order is intended to countermand the earlier order.

No member is required to obey any order that appears to be in direct conflict with any federal law, state law or local ordinance. Following a known unlawful order is not a defense and does not relieve the member from criminal or civil prosecution or administrative discipline. If the legality of an order is in doubt, the affected member shall ask the issuing supervisor to clarify the order or shall confer with a higher authority. The responsibility for refusal to obey rests with the member, who shall subsequently be required to justify the refusal.

Unless it would jeopardize the safety of any individual, members who are presented with a lawful order that is in conflict with a previous lawful order, department policy or other directive shall respectfully inform the issuing supervisor of the conflict. The issuing supervisor is responsible for either resolving the conflict or clarifying that the lawful order is intended to countermand the previous lawful order or directive, in which case the member is obliged to comply. Members who are compelled to follow a conflicting lawful order after having given the issuing supervisor the opportunity to correct the conflict, will not be held accountable for disobedience of the lawful order or directive that was initially issued.

The person countermanding the original order shall notify, in writing, the person issuing the original order, indicating the action taken and the reason.

      1. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES

Supervisors and managers are required to follow all policies and procedures and may be subject to discipline for:

  1. Failure to be reasonably aware of the performance of their subordinates or to provide appropriate guidance and control.
  2. Failure to promptly and fully report any known misconduct of a member to his/her immediate supervisor or to document such misconduct appropriately or as required by policy.
  3. Directing a subordinate to violate a policy or directive, acquiesce to such a violation, or being indifferent to any such violation by a subordinate.
  4. Using an unequal or disparate exercise of authority toward any member for malicious or other improper purpose.
    1. GENERAL STANDARDS

Members shall conduct themselves, whether on- or off-duty, in accordance with the United States and Maryland Constitutions and all applicable laws, ordinances and rules enacted or established pursuant to legal authority.

Members shall familiarize themselves with policies and procedures and are responsible for compliance with each. Members should seek clarification and guidance from supervisors in the event of any perceived ambiguity or uncertainty.

Discipline may be initiated for any good cause. It is not mandatory that a specific policy or rule violation be cited to sustain discipline. This policy is not intended to cover every possible type of misconduct.

    1. CAUSES FOR DISCIPLINE

The following are illustrative of causes for disciplinary action. This list is not intended to cover every possible type of misconduct and does not preclude the recommendation of disciplinary action for violation of other rules, standards, ethics and specific action or inaction that is detrimental to efficient department service, including:

      1. LAWS, RULES AND ORDERS
  1. Violation of, or ordering or instructing a subordinate to violate any policy, procedure, rule, order, directive, requirement or failure to follow instructions contained in department or Town manuals.
  2. Disobedience of any legal directive or order issued by any department member of a higher rank.
  3. Violation of federal, State, local or administrative laws, rules or regulations.
      1. ETHICS
  1. Using or disclosing one’s status as a member of the Glenarden Police Department in any way that could reasonably be perceived as an attempt to gain influence or authority for non-department business or activity.
  2. The wrongful or unlawful exercise of authority on the part of any member for malicious purpose, personal gain, willful deceit or any other improper purpose.
  3. The receipt or acceptance of a reward, fee or gift from any person for service incident to the performance of the member’s duties (lawful subpoena fees and authorized work permits excepted).
  4. Acceptance of fees, gifts or money contrary to the rules of this department and/or laws of the State.
  5. Offer or acceptance of a bribe or gratuity.
  1. Misappropriation or misuse of public funds, property, personnel or services.
  1. Any other failure to abide by the standards of ethical conduct.
      1. DISCRIMINATION, OPPRESSION OR FAVORITISM

Discriminating against, oppressing or providing favoritism to any person because of age, race, color, creed, religion, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, national origin, ancestry, marital status, physical or mental disability, medical condition or other classification protected by law, or intentionally denying or impeding another in the exercise or enjoyment of any right, privilege, power or immunity, knowing the conduct is unlawful.

      1. RELATIONSHIPS
  1. Unwelcome solicitation of a personal or sexual relationship while on-duty or through the use of one’s official capacity.
  2. Engaging in on-duty sexual activity including, but not limited to, sexual intercourse, excessive displays of public affection or other sexual contact.
  3. Establishing or maintaining an inappropriate personal or financial relationship, as a result of an investigation, with a known victim, witness, suspect or defendant while a case is being investigated or prosecuted, or as a direct result of any official contact.
  4. Associating with or joining a criminal gang, organized crime and/or criminal syndicate when the member knows or reasonably should know of the criminal nature of the organization. This includes any organization involved in a definable criminal activity or enterprise, except as specifically directed and authorized by this department.
  5. Associating on a personal, rather than official basis with persons who demonstrate recurring involvement in serious violations of state or federal laws after the member knows, or

reasonably should know of such criminal activities, except as specifically directed and authorized by this department.

      1. ATTENDANCE
  1. Leaving the job to which the member is assigned during duty hours without reasonable excuse and proper permission and approval.
  2. Unexcused or unauthorized absence or tardiness.
  1. Excessive absenteeism or abuse of leave privileges.
  1. Failure to report to work or to place of assignment at time specified and fully prepared to perform duties without reasonable excuse.
      1. UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS, DISCLOSURE OR USE
  1. Unauthorized and inappropriate intentional release of confidential or protected information, materials, data, forms or reports obtained as a result of the member’s position with this department.
  2. Disclosing to any unauthorized person any active investigation information.
  1. The use of any information, photograph, video or other recording obtained or accessed as a result of employment or appointment to this department for personal or financial gain or without the express authorization of the Chief of Police or the authorized designee.
  2. Loaning, selling, allowing unauthorized use, giving away or appropriating any Glenarden Police Department badge, uniform, identification card or department property for personal use, personal gain or any other improper or unauthorized use or purpose.
  3. Using department resources in association with any portion of an independent civil action. These resources include, but are not limited to, personnel, vehicles, equipment and non- subpoenaed records.
      1. EFFICIENCY
  1. Neglect of duty.
  1. Unsatisfactory work performance including, but not limited to, failure, incompetence, inefficiency or delay in performing and/or carrying out proper orders, work assignments or the instructions of supervisors without a reasonable and bona fide excuse.
  2. Concealing, attempting to conceal, removing or destroying defective or incompetent work.
  1. Unauthorized sleeping during on-duty time or assignments.
  1. Failure to notify the Department within 24 hours of any change in residence address, contact telephone numbers or marital status.
      1. PROFESSIONALISM
  1. Failure to disclose or misrepresenting material facts or making any false or misleading statement on any application, examination form or other official document, report or form, or during the course of any work-related investigation.
  2. The falsification of any work-related records, making misleading entries or statements with the intent to deceive or the willful and unauthorized removal, alteration, destruction and/or mutilation of any department record, public record, book, paper or document.
  3. Failure to participate in, or giving false or misleading statements, or misrepresenting or omitting material information to a supervisor or other person in a position of authority, in connection with any investigation or in the reporting of any department-related business.
  4. Being untruthful or knowingly making false, misleading or malicious statements that are reasonably calculated to harm the reputation, authority or official standing of this department or its members.
  5. Disparaging remarks or conduct concerning duly constituted authority to the extent that such conduct disrupts the efficiency of this department or subverts the good order, efficiency and discipline of this department or that would tend to discredit any of its members.
  6. Unlawful gambling or unlawful betting at any time or any place. Legal gambling or betting under any of the following conditions:
    1. While on department premises.
    1. At any work site, while on-duty or while in uniform, or while using any department equipment or system.
    2. Gambling activity undertaken as part of an officer’s official duties and with the express knowledge and permission of a direct supervisor is exempt from this prohibition.
  1. Improper political activity including:
    1. Unauthorized attendance while on-duty at official legislative or political sessions.
    1. Solicitations, speeches or distribution of campaign literature for or against any political candidate or position while on-duty, on department property or while in any way representing him/herself as a member of this department, except as expressly authorized by Town policy, the collective bargaining agreement or memorandum of understanding, or the Chief of Police (Md. Code PS § 3-102(a)(2)).
  1. Engaging in political activities during assigned working hours except as expressly authorized by Town policy, the collective bargaining agreement or memorandum of understanding, or the Chief of Police (Md. Code PS § 3-102(a)(2)).
  2. Any act on- or off-duty that tends to bring discredit to this department.
      1. CONDUCT
  1. Failure of any member to promptly and fully report activities on his/her part or the part of any other member where such activities resulted in contact with any other law enforcement agency or that may result in criminal prosecution or discipline under this policy.
  2. Unreasonable and unwarranted force to a person encountered or a person under arrest.
  1. Exceeding lawful peace officer powers by unreasonable, unlawful or excessive conduct.
  1. Unauthorized or unlawful fighting, threatening or attempting to inflict unlawful bodily harm on another.
  2. Engaging in horseplay that reasonably could result in injury or property damage.
  1. Discourteous, disrespectful or discriminatory treatment of any member of the public or any member of this department or the Town.
  2. Use of obscene, indecent, profane or derogatory language while on-duty or in uniform.
  1. Criminal, dishonest, or disgraceful conduct, whether on- or off-duty, that adversely affects the member’s relationship with this department.
  2. Unauthorized possession of, loss of, or damage to department property or the property of others, or endangering it through carelessness or maliciousness.
  3. Attempted or actual theft of department property; misappropriation or misuse of public funds, property, personnel or the services or property of others; unauthorized removal or possession of department property or the property of another person.
  4. Activity that is incompatible with a member’s conditions of employment or appointment as established by law or that violates a provision of any collective bargaining agreement or memorandum of understanding to include fraud in securing the appointment or hire.
  5. Initiating any civil action for recovery of any damages or injuries incurred in the course and scope of employment or appointment without first notifying the Chief of Police of such action.
  6. Any other on- or off-duty conduct which any member knows or reasonably should know is unbecoming a member of this department, is contrary to good order, efficiency or morale, or tends to reflect unfavorably upon this department or its members.
      1. SAFETY
  1. Failure to observe or violating department safety standards or safe working practices.
  1. Failure to maintain current licenses or certifications required for the assignment or position (e.g., driver’s license, first aid).
  2. Unsafe firearm or other dangerous weapon handling to include loading or unloading firearms in an unsafe manner, either on- or off-duty.
  3. Carrying, while on the premises of the work place, any firearm or other lethal weapon that is not authorized by the member’s appointing authority.
  4. Unsafe or improper driving habits or actions in the course of employment or appointment.
  1. Any personal action contributing to a preventable traffic accident, or other unsafe or improper driving habits or actions in the course of employment or appointment.
  2. Concealing or knowingly failing to report any on-the-job or work-related accident or injury as soon as practicable but within 24 hours.
      1. INTOXICANTS
  1. Reporting for work or being at work while intoxicated or when the member’s ability to perform assigned duties is impaired due to the use of alcohol, medication or drugs, whether legal, prescribed or illegal.
  2. Possession or use of alcohol at any work site or while on-duty, except as authorized in the performance of an official assignment. A member who is authorized to consume alcohol is not permitted to do so to such a degree that it may impair on-duty performance
  3. Unauthorized possession, use of, or attempting to bring a controlled substance, illegal drug or non-prescribed medication to any work site.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Information Technology Use

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for the proper use of department information technology resources, including computers, electronic devices, hardware, software and systems.

      1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Computer system – All computers (on-site and portable), electronic devices, hardware, software, and resources owned, leased, rented or licensed by the Glenarden Police Department that are provided for official use by its members. This includes all access to, and use of, Internet Service Providers (ISP) or other service providers provided by or through the Department or department funding.

Hardware – Includes, but is not limited to, computers, computer terminals, network equipment, electronic devices, telephones, including cellular and satellite, pagers, modems or any other tangible computer device generally understood to comprise hardware.

Software – Includes, but is not limited to, all computer programs, systems and applications including “shareware.” This does not include files created by the individual user.

Temporary file, permanent file or file – Any electronic document, information or data residing or located, in whole or in part, on the system including, but not limited to, spreadsheets, calendar entries, appointments, tasks, notes, letters, reports, messages, photographs or videos.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department that members shall use information technology resources, including computers, software and systems, that are issued or maintained by the Department in a professional manner and in accordance with this policy.

    1. PRIVACY EXPECTATION

Members forfeit any expectation of privacy with regard to emails, texts or anything published, shared, transmitted or maintained through file-sharing software or any Internet site that is accessed, transmitted, received or reviewed on any department computer system.

The Department reserves the right to access, audit and disclose, for whatever reason, any message, including attachments, and any information accessed, transmitted, received or reviewed over any technology that is issued or maintained by the Department, including the department e- mail system, computer network or any information placed into storage on any department system or device. This includes records of all keystrokes or web-browsing history made at any department computer or over any department network. The fact that access to a database, service or website requires a user name or password will not create an expectation of privacy if it is accessed through department computers, electronic devices or networks.

Although the Department may not require access to a member’s personal accounts, it may require a member to disclose a user name, password, or other means for accessing non-personal accounts or services that provide access to department computer or information systems (Md. Code LE § 3-712(b)).

    1. RESTRICTED USE

Members shall not access computers,  devices,  software  or  systems  for  which  they  have not received prior authorization or the required training. Members shall immediately report unauthorized access or use of computers, devices, software or systems by another member to their supervisors or Shift Supervisors.

Members shall not use another person’s access passwords, logon information and other individual security data, protocols and procedures unless directed to do so by a supervisor.

      1. SOFTWARE

Members shall not copy or duplicate any copyrighted or licensed software except for a single copy for backup purposes, in accordance with the software company’s copyright and license agreement.

To reduce the risk of a computer virus or malicious software, members shall not install any unlicensed or unauthorized software on any department computer. Members shall not install personal copies of any software on any department computer.

When related to criminal investigations, software program files may be downloaded only with the approval of the information systems technology (IT) staff and with the authorization of the Chief of Police or the authorized designee.

No member shall knowingly make, acquire or use unauthorized copies of computer software that is not licensed to the Department while on department premises, computer systems or electronic devices. Such unauthorized use of software exposes the Department and involved members to severe civil and criminal penalties.

Introduction of software by members should only occur as a part of the automated maintenance or update process of department- or Town-approved or installed programs by the original manufacturer, producer or developer of the software. Any other introduction of software requires prior authorization from IT staff and a full scan for malicious attachments.

      1. HARDWARE

Access to technology resources provided by or through the Department shall be strictly limited to department-related activities. Data stored on or available through department computer systems shall only be accessed by authorized members who are engaged in an active investigation, assisting in an active investigation, or who otherwise have a legitimate law enforcement or department-related purpose to access such data. Any exceptions to this policy must be approved by a supervisor.

      1. INTERNET USE

Internet access provided by or through the Department shall be strictly limited to department- related activities. Internet sites containing information that is not appropriate or applicable to department use and which shall not be intentionally accessed include, but are not limited to, adult forums, pornography, gambling, chat rooms, and similar or related Internet sites. Certain exceptions may be permitted with the express approval of a supervisor as a function of a member’s assignment. Downloaded information from the Internet shall be limited to messages, mail and data files.

      1. OFF-DUTY USE

Members shall only use technology resources provided by the Department while on-duty or in conjunction with specific on-call assignments unless specifically authorized by a supervisor. This includes the use of telephones, cell phones, texting, email or any other “off-the-clock” work-related activities. This also applies to personally owned devices that are used to access department resources.

Refer to the Personal Communication Devices Policy for guidelines regarding off-duty use of personally owned technology.

    1. PROTECTION OF SYSTEMS AND FILES

All members have a duty to protect the computer system and related systems and devices from physical and environmental damage and are responsible for the correct use, operation, care and maintenance of the computer system.

Members shall ensure department computers and access terminals are not viewable by persons who are not authorized users. Computers and terminals should be secured, users logged off and password protections enabled whenever the user is not present. Access passwords, logon information and other individual security data, protocols and procedures are confidential information and are not to be shared. Password length, format, structure and content shall meet the prescribed standards required by the computer system or as directed by a supervisor and shall be changed at intervals as directed by IT staff or a supervisor.

It is prohibited for a member to allow an unauthorized user to access the computer system at any time or for any reason. Members shall promptly report any unauthorized access to the computer system or suspected intrusion from outside sources (including the Internet) to a supervisor.

    1. INSPECTION AND REVIEW

A supervisor or the authorized designee has the express authority to inspect or review the computer system, all temporary or permanent files, related electronic systems or devices, and any contents thereof, whether such inspection or review is in the ordinary course of his/her supervisory duties or based on cause.

Reasons for inspection or review may include, but are not limited to, computer system malfunctions, problems or general computer system failure, a lawsuit against the Department

involving one of its members or a member’s duties, an alleged or suspected violation of any department policy, request for disclosure of data, or a need to perform or provide a service.

The IT staff may extract, download, or otherwise obtain any and all temporary or permanent files residing or located in or on the department computer system when requested by a supervisor or during the course of regular duties that require such information.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT 

Policy Manual

 

Report Preparation

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidance to those members of the Department who complete investigations and reports as a part of their duties.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department that members shall act with promptness and efficiency in the preparation and processing of all reports. Reports shall document sufficient information to refresh the member’s memory and shall provide enough detail for follow-up investigation and successful prosecution.

    1. EXPEDITIOUS REPORTING

An incomplete report, unorganized reports or reports that are delayed without supervisory approval are not acceptable. Reports shall be processed according to established priorities or to a special priority made necessary under exceptional circumstances.

    1. REPORT PREPARATION

Reports should be sufficiently detailed for their purpose and free from errors prior to submission and approval. It is the responsibility of the member to complete and submit all reports taken during the shift before going off-duty unless permission to hold the report has been approved by a supervisor. Generally, reports requiring prompt follow-up action on active leads or arrest reports where the suspect remains in custody should not be held.

All reports shall accurately reflect the identity of the persons involved, all pertinent information seen, heard or assimilated by any other sense, and any actions taken. Members shall not suppress, conceal or distort the facts of any reported incident, nor shall any member make a false report orally or in writing. Generally, the reporting member’s opinions should not be included in reports unless specifically identified as such.

      1. HANDWRITTEN OR TYPED REPORTS

County, state and federal agency forms may be block printed unless the requirement for typing is apparent. Supervisors may require block printing or typing of reports of any nature for department consistency.

Handwritten reports must be prepared legibly. If the report is not legible, the submitting member will be required by the reviewing supervisor to promptly make corrections and resubmit the report.

In general, the narrative portion of reports where an arrest is made or when there is a long narrative should be typed or dictated. Members who dictate reports shall use appropriate grammar, as the content is not the responsibility of the typist.

Members who generate reports on computers are subject to all requirements of this policy.

      1. ELECTRONIC SIGNATURES

The Glenarden Police Department has established an electronic signature procedure for use by all members of the Glenarden Police Department. The Operations Services Lieutenant shall be responsible for maintaining the electronic signature system, ensuring that each member creates a unique, confidential password for his/her electronic signature and that the use of electronic signatures otherwise complies with the law (Md. Code CL § 21-106).

  1. Members may only use their electronic signatures for official reports or other official communications.
  2. Each member shall be responsible for the security and use of his/her electronic signature and shall promptly notify a supervisor if the electronic signature has or may have been compromised or misused.
    1. REQUIRED REPORTING

In all of the following situations, members shall complete reports using the appropriate department- approved forms and reporting methods, unless otherwise approved by a supervisor.

The reporting requirements are not intended to be all-inclusive. A member may complete a report if he/she deems it necessary or as directed by a supervisor.

      1. CRIMINAL ACTIVITY

When a member responds to a call for service, or as a result of self-initiated activity becomes aware of any activity where a crime has occurred, the member shall document the incident regardless of whether a victim desires prosecution.

Activity to be documented in a written report includes:

  1. All arrests
  2. All felony crimes
  3. Non-felony incidents involving threats or stalking behavior
  4. Situations covered by separate policy. These include:
    1. Use of Force Policy
    2. Domestic Violence Policy
    3. Child Abuse Policy
    4. Adult Abuse Policy
    5. Hate Crimes Policy
    6. Suspicious Activity Reporting Policy
  5. All misdemeanor crimes where the victim desires a report

Misdemeanor crimes where the victim does not desire a report shall be documented using the department-approved alternative reporting method (e.g., dispatch log).

      1. NON-CRIMINAL ACTIVITY

Non-criminal activity to be documented includes:

  1. Any found property or found evidence.
  1. All protective custody and welfare detentions.
  1. Any time a person is reported missing, regardless of jurisdiction (see the Missing Persons Policy).
  2. Suspicious incidents that may indicate a potential for crimes against children or that a child’s safety is in jeopardy.
  3. Suspicious incidents that may place the public or others at risk.
  1. Any use of force by members of this department against any person (see the Use of Force Policy).
  2. Any firearm discharge (see the Firearms Policy).
  1. Any time a member points a firearm at any person.
  1. Any traffic accidents above the minimum reporting level (see the Traffic Accidents Policy).
  1. Whenever the member believes the circumstances should be documented or at the direction of a supervisor.
      1. MISCELLANEOUS INJURIES

Any injury that is reported to this department shall require a report when:

  1. The injury is a result of drug overdose.
  1. There is an attempted suicide
  1. The injury is major or serious, and potentially fatal.
  1. The circumstances surrounding the incident are suspicious in nature and it is desirable to document the event.
      1. DEATHS

Death investigations require specific investigation methods, depending on the circumstances. They should be handled in accordance with the Death Investigation Policy. The handling member should notify and apprise a supervisor of the circumstances surrounding the incident to determine how to proceed. The following incidents shall be appropriately investigated and documented:

  1. Unattended deaths (no physician or qualified hospice care during the period preceding death).
  2. Sudden, accidental or suspicious deaths.
  1. Homicide or suspected homicide.
  2. Found dead bodies or body parts.
  1. Found dead bodies or body parts.
      1. TOWN PERSONNEL OR PROPERTY

Incidents involving Town personnel or property shall require a report when:

  1. An injury occurs as the result of an act of a Town employee or on Town property.
  1. There is damage to Town property or equipment.
    1. ALTERNATIVE REPORTING FOR VICTIMS

Reports that may be submitted by the public via online or other self-completed reporting processes include:

  1. Lost property.
  2. Misdemeanor thefts of property, other than firearms or materials threatening to public safety, when there is no suspect information or serial number or ability to trace the item.
    1. Misdemeanor thefts of cellular telephones may be reported even though they have a serial number.
  3. Misdemeanor vandalism with no suspect information and no hate crime implications.
  4. Vehicle burglaries with no suspect information or evidence.
  5. Stolen vehicle attempts with no suspect information or evidence.
  6. Annoying telephone calls with no suspect information.
  7. Identity theft without an identifiable suspect.
  8. Online or email fraud solicitations without an identifiable suspect and if the financial loss classifies the crime as a misdemeanor.
  9. Hit-and-run vehicle accidents with no suspect or suspect vehicle.
  10. Supplemental property lists.

Members at the scene of one of the above incidents should not refer the reporting party to an alternative means of reporting without authorization from a supervisor. Members may refer victims to online victim assistance programs (e.g., the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) website for identity theft; the Internet Crime Complaint Center (IC3) website for computer crimes).

    1. REVIEW AND CORRECTIONS

Supervisors shall review reports for content and accuracy. If a correction is necessary, the reviewing supervisor should complete a correction form stating the reasons for rejection.

The original report and the correction form should be returned to the reporting member for correction as soon as practicable. It shall be the responsibility of the originating member to ensure that any report returned for correction is processed in a timely manner.

      1. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS

Reports that have been approved by a supervisor and submitted to the Records Division (Prince George County PD) for filing and distribution shall not be modified or altered except by way of a supplemental report.

Reviewed reports that have not yet been submitted to the Records Division (Prince George County PD) may be corrected or modified by the authoring member only with the knowledge and authorization of the reviewing supervisor.

322.8   TEMPORARY DETENTION OR INVESTIGATIVE STOP SEARCHES

Any temporary detention or investigative stop that results in a search requires the department performing the search to file a written report with this department within 24 hours of the incident. The report shall be completed using the form prescribed by the Secretary of Public Safety and Correctional Services and shall include:

  1. The name of the person searched.
  2. The circumstances surrounding and reasons for the search or seizure.

The Records Division (Prince George County PD) is required to deliver copies of all forms completed for this purpose to the Secretary of the State Police (Md. Code CR § 4-206(c)).

  GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Media Relations

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidelines for the release of official department information to the media. It also addresses coordinating media access to scenes of disasters, criminal investigations, emergencies and other law enforcement activities.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to protect the privacy rights of individuals, while releasing non-confidential information to the media regarding topics of public concern. Information that has the potential to negatively affect investigations will not be released.

    1. RESPONSIBILITIES

The ultimate authority and responsibility for the release of information to the media shall remain with the Chief of Police. In situations not warranting immediate notice to the Chief of Police and in situations where the Chief of Police has given prior approval, Lieutenants, Shift Supervisors and designated Press Information Officers (PIOs) may prepare and release information to the media in accordance with this policy and applicable laws regarding confidentiality.

    1. PROVIDING ADVANCE INFORMATION

To protect the safety and rights of department members and other persons, advance information about planned actions by law enforcement personnel, such as movement of persons in custody or the execution of an arrest or search warrant, should not be disclosed to the media, nor should media representatives be invited to be present at such actions except with the prior approval of the Chief of Police.

Any exceptions to the above should only be considered for the furtherance of legitimate law enforcement purposes. Prior to approving any exception, the Chief of Police will consider, at a minimum, whether the release of information or the presence of the media would unreasonably endanger any individual or prejudice the rights of any person or is otherwise prohibited by law.

    1. MEDIA REQUESTS

Any media request for information or access to a law enforcement incident shall be referred to the PIO, or if unavailable, to the first available supervisor. Prior to releasing any information to the media, members shall consider the following:

  1. At no time shall any member of this department make any comment or release any official information to the media without prior approval from a supervisor or the PIO.
  2. In situations involving multiple agencies or government departments, every reasonable effort should be made to coordinate media releases with the authorized representative of each involved agency prior to the release of any information by this department.
  3. Under no circumstance should any member of this department make any comment to the media regarding any law enforcement incident not involving this department without prior approval of the Chief of Police. Under these circumstances the member should direct the media to the agency handling the incident.
    1. ACCESS

Authorized media representatives shall be provided access to scenes of disasters, criminal investigations, emergencies and other law enforcement activities as required by law.

Access by the media is subject to the following conditions:

  1. The media representative shall produce valid media credentials that shall be prominently displayed at all times while in areas otherwise closed to the public.
  2. Media representatives should be prevented from interfering and may be removed for interfering with emergency operations and criminal investigations.
    1. Based upon available resources, reasonable effort should be made to provide a safe staging area for the media that is near the incident and that will not interfere with emergency or criminal investigation operations. All information released to the media should be coordinated through the PIO or other designated spokesperson.
  3. Media interviews with individuals who are in custody should not be permitted without the approval of the Chief of Police and the express written consent of the person in custody.
  4. No member of this department who is under investigation shall be subjected to media visits or interviews without the consent of the involved member.
      1. CRITICAL OPERATIONS

A critical incident or tactical operation should be handled in the same manner as a crime scene, except the media should not be permitted within the inner perimeter of the incident, subject to any restrictions as determined by the supervisor in charge. Department members shall not jeopardize a critical incident or tactical operation in order to accommodate the media. All comments to the media shall be coordinated through a supervisor or the PIO.

      1. TEMPORARY FLIGHT RESTRICTIONS

Whenever the presence of media or other aircraft pose a threat to public or member safety or significantly hamper incident operations, the field supervisor should consider requesting a Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR). All requests for a TFR should be routed through the Shift Supervisor. The TFR request should include specific information regarding the perimeter and altitude necessary for the incident and should be requested through the appropriate control tower. If the control tower is not known, the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) should be contacted (14 CFR 91.137).

323.7   CONFIDENTIAL OR RESTRICTED INFORMATION

It shall be the responsibility of the PIO to ensure that confidential or restricted information is not inappropriately released to the media (see the Records Maintenance and Release and Personnel Records policies). When in doubt, authorized and available legal counsel should be consulted prior to releasing any information.

323.7.1   EMPLOYEE INFORMATION

The identities of officers involved in shootings or other critical incidents may only be released to the media upon the consent of the involved officer or upon a formal request filed and processed in accordance with the Maryland Public Information Act (see the Records Maintenance and Release Policy).

Any requests for copies of related reports or additional information not contained in the information log (see the Information Log section in this policy), including the identity of officers involved in shootings or other critical incidents, shall be referred to the PIO, the Custodian of Records, or if unavailable, the Shift Supervisor. Such requests will be processed in accordance with the provisions of the Maryland Public Information Act (see the Records Maintenance and Release Policy).

323.8 RELEASE OF INFORMATION

The Department may routinely release information to the media without receiving a specific request. This may include media releases regarding critical incidents, information of public concern, updates regarding significant incidents or requests for public assistance in solving crimes or identifying suspects. This information may also be released through the department website or other electronic data sources.

323.8.1   INFORMATION LOG

The Department will maintain a daily information log of significant law enforcement activities. Log entries shall only contain information that is deemed public information and not restricted or confidential by this policy or applicable law. Upon request, the log entries shall be made available to media representatives through the Shift Supervisor.

The daily information log will generally include:

  1. The date, time, location, case number, type of crime, extent of injury or loss, and names of individuals involved in crimes occurring within this jurisdiction, unless the release of such information would endanger the safety of any individual, jeopardize the successful completion of any ongoing investigation or is confidential (e.g., juveniles or certain victims).
  2. The date, time, location, case number, name, birth date and charges for each person arrested by this department, unless the release of such information would endanger the safety of any individual, jeopardize the successful completion of any ongoing investigation or is confidential (e.g., juveniles).
  3. The time and location of other significant law enforcement activities or requests for service with a brief summary of the incident.

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy establishes the guidelines for department members who must appear in court. It will allow the Glenarden Police Department to cover any related work absences and keep the Department informed about relevant legal matters.

    1. POLICY

Glenarden Police Department members will respond appropriately to all subpoenas and any other court ordered appearances.

    1. SUBPOENAS

Only department members authorized to receive a subpoena on behalf of the department or any of its members may do so.

      1. SPECIAL NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

Any member who is subpoenaed to testify, agrees to testify or provides information on behalf or at the request of any party other than the Town Attorney or the prosecutor shall notify his/her immediate supervisor without delay regarding:

  1. Any civil case where the Town or one of its members, as a result of his/her official capacity, is a party.
  2. Any civil case where any other city, county, state or federal unit of government or a member of any such unit of government, as a result of his/her official capacity, is a party.
  3. Any criminal proceeding where the member is called to testify or provide information on behalf of the defense.
  4. Any  civil  action  stemming  from  the  member’s  on-duty  activity  or  because  of  his/her association with the Glenarden Police Department.
  5. Any personnel or disciplinary matter when called to testify or to provide information by a government entity other than the Glenarden Police Department.

The supervisor will then notify the Chief of Police and the appropriate prosecuting attorney as may be indicated by the case. The Chief of Police should determine if additional legal support is necessary.

No member shall be retaliated against for testifying in any matter.

      1. CIVIL SUBPOENA

The Department will compensate members who appear in their official capacity on civil matters arising out of their official duties, as directed by the current collective bargaining agreement or memorandum of understanding.

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

Subpoenas and Court Appearances

 

The Department should seek reimbursement for the member’s compensation through the civil attorney of record who subpoenaed the member.

      1. OFF-DUTY RELATED SUBPOENAS

Members receiving valid subpoenas for off-duty actions not related to their employment or appointment will not be compensated for their appearance. Arrangements for time off shall be coordinated through their immediate supervisors.

    1. FAILURE TO APPEAR

Any member who fails to comply with the terms of any properly served subpoena or court ordered appearance may be subject to discipline. This includes properly served orders to appear that were issued by a state administrative agency.

    1. STANDBY

To facilitate standby agreements, members are required to provide and maintain current information on their addresses and contact telephone numbers with the Department.

If a member on standby changes his/her location during the day, the member shall notify the designated department member of how he/she can be reached. Members are required to remain on standby until released by the court or the party that issued the subpoena.

    1. COURTROOM PROTOCOL

Members must be punctual when appearing in court and shall be prepared to proceed immediately with the case for which they are scheduled to appear.

Members shall dress in the department uniform or business attire.

Members shall observe all rules of the court in which they are appearing and shall remain alert to changes in the assigned courtroom where their matter is to be heard.

      1. TESTIMONY

Before the date of testifying, the subpoenaed member shall request a copy of relevant reports and become familiar with the content in order to be prepared for court.

324.7 OVERTIME APPEARANCES

When a member appears in court on his/her off-duty time, he/she will be compensated in accordance with the current collective bargaining agreement or memorandum of understanding.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Outside Agency Assistance

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidance to members when requesting or responding to a request for mutual aid or when assisting another law enforcement agency.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to promptly respond to requests for assistance by other law enforcement agencies, subject to available resources and consistent with the applicable laws and policies of this department.

    1. ASSISTING OUTSIDE AGENCIES

Generally, requests for any type of assistance from another agency should be routed to the Shift Supervisor’s office for approval. In some instances, a memorandum of understanding or other established protocol may exist that eliminates the need for approval of individual requests.

When another law enforcement agency requests assistance from this department, the Shift Supervisor may authorize, if available, an appropriate number of personnel to assist. Members are reminded that their actions when rendering assistance must conform with applicable laws and be consistent with the policies of this department.

Officers may respond to a request for emergency assistance, however, they shall notify a supervisor of their activity as soon as practicable.

Arrestees may be temporarily detained by this department until arrangements for transportation are made by the outside agency. Probation violators who are temporarily detained by this department will not ordinarily be booked at this department. Only in exceptional circumstances, and subject to supervisor approval, will this department provide transportation of arrestees to other facilities on behalf of another agency. When transportation assistance is rendered, a report shall be prepared and submitted by the handling member unless otherwise directed by a supervisor.

325.3.1   INITIATED ACTIVITY

Any on-duty officer who engages in law enforcement activities of any type that are not part of a mutual aid request and take place outside the jurisdiction of the Glenarden Police Department shall notify his/her supervisor or the Shift Supervisor and the Communications Center as soon as practicable. This requirement does not apply to special enforcement details or multi-agency units that regularly work in multiple jurisdictions.

    1. REQUESTING OUTSIDE ASSISTANCE

If assistance is needed from another agency, the member requesting assistance should, if practicable, first notify a supervisor. The handling member or supervisor should direct assisting personnel to where they are needed and to whom they should report when they arrive.

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

Outside Agency Assistance

 

The requesting member should arrange for appropriate radio communication capabilities, if necessary and available, so that communication can be coordinated between assisting personnel.

    1. REPORTING REQUIREMENTS

Incidents of outside assistance or law enforcement activities that are not documented in a crime report shall be documented in a general case report or as directed by the Shift Supervisor.

    1. MANDATORY SHARING

Equipment and supplies purchased with federal funds or grants that require such equipment and supplies be shared with other agencies should be documented and updated as necessary by the Administration Lieutenant or the authorized designee.

The documentation should include:

  1. The conditions relative to sharing.
  1. The training requirements for:
    1. The use of the supplies and equipment.
    1. The members trained in the use of the supplies and equipment.
  1. Any other requirements for use of the equipment and supplies.

Copies of the documentation should be provided to the Communications Center and the Shift Supervisor to ensure use of the equipment and supplies is in compliance with the applicable sharing agreements.

The Training Coordinator should maintain documentation that the appropriate members have received the required training.

 GLEARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Registered Offender Information

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy establishes guidelines by which the Glenarden Police Department will address issues associated with certain offenders who are residing in the jurisdiction, and how the Department will disseminate information and respond to public inquiries for information about registered offenders.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to identify and monitor registered offenders living within this jurisdiction and to take reasonable steps to address the risks those persons may pose.

    1. REGISTRATION

The Prince George County PD supervisor shall establish a process to reasonably accommodate registration of offenders. The process should rebut any allegation on the part of the offender that the registration process was too confusing, burdensome or difficult for compliance. If it is reasonable to do so, an investigator assigned to related investigations should conduct the registration in order to best evaluate any threat the person may pose to the community. Those assigned to register offenders should receive appropriate training regarding the registration process.

Upon conclusion of the registration process, the investigator shall ensure that the registration information is provided to the following as soon as possible but not later than 3 working days following registration (Md. Code CP § 11-708; Md. Code CP § 11-709):

  1. The Department of Public Safety and Correctional Services.
    1. Updated registrations including digital images, notification of intent to leave US or to obtain temporary lodging or to be absent from the offender’s permanent residence or locations where the offender habitually lives any changes in the offender’s residence, vehicle or license plate information, email or internet identifiers, phone numbers, employment, legal name, should also be sent to the Department.
  1. The county superintendent, as defined in § 1-101 of the Education Article, and all nonpublic primary and secondary schools in the county within 1 mile of where the offender is to reside or habitually live or where an offender who is not a resident of Maryland is a transient or will work or attend school.
  2. The local law enforcement unit in each county where the offender will reside, habitually live or will work or attend school.
  3. The campus police agency of an institution of higher education in the State, or the local law enforcement that has primary jurisdiction for the campus if the campus does not have its

own police agency, if the offender is enrolled in or carries on employment at, or is expecting to enroll in or carry on employment at the institution.

  1. The police department, if any, of a municipal corporation if the offender:
    1. Is to reside or habitually live in the municipal corporation.
    1. Escapes from a facility but resided or habitually lived in the municipal corporation before being committed to the custody of a supervising authority.
    2. Changes addresses to another place of residence within the municipal corporation.

The investigator may also notify any child care facility or recreation facilities, any faith institution and any other organizations that serve children and others vulnerable to sex offenders who victimize children that are located within the community in which the offender is to reside, habitually live, work or attend school.

The Prince George County PD supervisor shall establish procedures to provide notification to any person the Department deems necessary to protect the person from a specific offender (Md. Code CP § 11-718).

The refusal of a registrant to provide any of the required information or complete the process should initiate a criminal investigation for failure to register (Md. Code CP § 11-721).

      1. CONTENTS OF REGISTRATION

Sex offender registration statements shall include at least (Md. Code CP § 11-705(2); Md. Code CP § 11-706):

  1. The offender’s full name and any aliases, former names, names by which the offender has been known, traditional names given by family or clan under ethnic or tribal tradition.
  2. All addresses and places where the offender resides or habitually lives.
  3. The name and address of each of the offender’s employers of each location where the offender performs employment duties, if that location differs from the address of the employer.
  4. The name and address of the offender’s schools.
  5. A description of the crime for which the registrant was convicted and date and jurisdiction of conviction.
  6. Any e-mail addresses, computer log-in or screen names or identities, instant-messaging identities, and electronic chat room identities that the offender has used.
  7. The offender’s Social Security or purported Social Security number.
  8. The offender’s date of birth, purported dates of birth, and place of birth.
  9. All identifying factors, including a physical description.
  10. A copy of the offender’s passport or immigration papers.
  11. Information regarding any professional licenses the offender holds.
  12. The license plate number, registration number, and description of any vehicle, owned or regularly operated by the offender and addresses or locations where the vehicles are kept.
  13. All telephone numbers used by the offender.
  14. A copy of the offender’s valid driver’s license or identification card.
  15. Fingerprints and palm prints.
  16. The criminal history of the offender.
  17. A current digital image of the offender.
  18. The offender’s signature and the date of the signature.
  19. Any other information required by the Department or Glenarden Police Department.

If the person is a sexually violent predator, the registration statement shall also include any anticipated future residences, if known at the time of registration and documentation of treatment received for a mental abnormality or personality disorder.

If the offender has not submitted a sample for inclusion in the statewide DNA database system of the Department of State Police Crime Laboratory, a sample should be obtained as provided in the Biological Sample policy and provided to the statewide DNA database system of the Department of State Police Crime Laboratory (Md. Code CP § 11-708).

326.3.2 NOTICE TO REGISTERING OFFENDER When an offender registers, the investigator shall:

  1. Give written notice and explain the registration and update requirements to the offender, including:
    1. The duties of a registrant when the registrant changes residence address in this State or changes the county in which the registrant habitually lives;
    2. The duties of a registrant under Md. Code CP § 11-705;
    1. The requirement for a sex offender to register in person with the local law enforcement unit of each county where the sex offender will reside or habitually live or where the sex offender who is not a resident of this State is a transient or will work or attend school;
    2. The requirement that if the registrant changes residence address, employment, or school enrollment to another state that has a registration requirement, the registrant shall register with the designated law enforcement unit or sex offender registration unit of that state within 3 days after the change; and
    3. Obtain a statement signed by the registrant acknowledging that the supervising authority explained the requirements of this subtitle and gave written notice of the requirements to the registrant.
    1. MONITORING OF REGISTERED OFFENDERS

The Prince George County PD supervisor should establish a system to periodically, and at least once annually, verify that a registrant remains in compliance with his/her registration requirements after the initial registration. This verification should include:

  1. Efforts to confirm residence using an unobtrusive method, such as an Internet search or drive-by of the declared residence.
  2. Review of information on the Maryland Department of Public Safety and Correctional Services Registered Sex Offender Website.
  3. Contact with a registrant’s parole or probation officer.

Any discrepancies should be reported to the registering law enforcement agency and the Maryland State Sex Offender Unit.

The Prince George County PD supervisor should also establish a procedure to routinely disseminate information regarding registered offenders to Glenarden Police Department members, including timely updates regarding new or relocated registrants.

    1. DISSEMINATION OF PUBLIC INFORMATION

Members will not unilaterally make a public notification advising the community of a particular registrant’s presence in the community. Members who identify a significant risk or other public safety issue associated with a registrant should promptly advise their supervisor. The supervisor should evaluate the request and forward the information to the Chief of Police if warranted. A determination will be made by the Chief of Police, with the assistance of legal counsel as necessary, whether such a public alert should be made.

Members of the public requesting information on registrants should be provided the Maryland Department of Public Safety and Correctional Services Sex Offender Registry or the Glenarden Police Department’s website.

The Records Division (Prince George County PD) shall release local registered offender information to residents in accordance with Md. Code CP § 11-716 and in compliance with a Maryland Public Information Act request.

326.5.1 RELEASE NOTIFICATIONS

Registrant information that is released should include notification that:

  1. The offender registry includes only those persons who have been required by law to register and who are in compliance with the offender registration laws. It does not include juvenile

registrants whose information is confidential and only accessible to law enforcement (Md. Code CP § 11-704.1(c)).

  1. The information is provided as a public service and may not be current or accurate.
  1. Persons should not rely solely on the offender registry as a safeguard against offenses in their communities.
  2. The crime for which a person is convicted may not accurately reflect the level of risk.
  1. Anyone who uses information contained in the registry to harass registrants or commit any crime may be subject to criminal prosecution.

326.6 INTERNAL DISSEMINATION OF INFORMATION

As soon as possible but not later than 3 working days after receiving notice of registration or change in registration information from another local law enforcement unit, the Department shall send a copy of the notice to the commander of each precinct or district in which the offender resides, habitually lives, works or attends school (Md. Code CP § 11-709).

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Major Incident Notification

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidance to members of the Glenarden Police Department in determining when, how and to whom notification of major incidents should be made.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department recognizes that certain incidents should be brought to the attention of supervisors or other specified personnel of this department to facilitate the coordination of activities and ensure that inquiries from the media and the public may be properly addressed.

    1. CRITERIA FOR NOTIFICATION

Most situations where the media show a strong interest are also of interest to the Chief of Police, the affected Lieutenant and the Town. The following list of incident types is provided as a guide for notification and is not intended to be all inclusive:

  • Officer-involved shooting, whether on- or off-duty (see the Officer-Involved Shootings and Deaths Policy for special notification)
  • Homicides, suspicious deaths or deaths related to law enforcement activity
  • Crimes  of  unusual  violence  or  circumstances  that  may  include  hostages,  barricaded persons, home invasions, armed robbery or sexual assaults
  • At risk missing children or endangered missing adults
  • In-custody deaths
  • Aircraft, train, boat or other transportation accidents with major damage and/or injury or death
  • Traffic accidents with fatalities or severe injuries
  • Death of a prominent Prince George County official
  • Significant injury or death to a member of the Department, whether on- or off-duty
  • Arrest of a member of the Department or prominent Prince George County official
  • Equipment failures, utility failures and incidents that may affect staffing or pose a threat to basic police services
  • Any other incident, which has or is likely to attract significant media attention
    1. SHIFT SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES

The Shift Supervisor is responsible for making the appropriate notifications. The Shift Supervisor shall make reasonable attempts to obtain as much information on the incident as possible before

Glenarden Police Department

Policy Manual

Major Incident Notification

 

notification, and shall attempt to make the notifications as soon as practicable. Notification should be made by using the call notification protocol posted in the Communications Center.

      1. COMMAND STAFF NOTIFICATION

In the event an incident occurs as identified in the Criteria for Notification section above, the Chief of Police shall be notified along with the affected Lieutenant and the Investigative Services Lieutenant if that Prince George County PD is affected.

      1. INVESTIGATOR NOTIFICATION

If the incident requires that an investigator respond from home, the immediate supervisor of the appropriate detail shall be notified, who will then contact the appropriate investigator.

      1. PRINCE GEORGE COUNTY TRAFFIC UNIT NOTIFICATION

In the event of a major injury or traffic fatality, the Prince George County Traffic Unit supervisor shall be notified, who will then contact the appropriate investigator. The Prince George County Traffic Unit supervisor will notify the Traffic Officer.

      1. PRESS INFORMATION OFFICER

After members of the command staff have been notified, the Press Information Officer shall be called if it appears the media may have a significant interest in the incident.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Death Investigation

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for situations where officers initially respond to and investigate the circumstances of a deceased person.

Some causes of death may not be readily apparent and some cases differ substantially from what they appear to be initially. The thoroughness of death investigations and use of appropriate resources and evidence gathering techniques is critical.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to respond, document and investigate incidents where a person is deceased. Investigations involving the death of a person, including those from natural causes, accidents, workplace incidents, suicide and homicide, shall be initiated, investigated and properly documented.

    1. INVESTIGATION CONSIDERATIONS

Emergency medical services shall be called in all suspected death cases unless death is obvious (e.g., decapitated, decomposed).

A supervisor shall be notified as soon as possible to assist and provide appropriate personnel and resources. The on-scene supervisor should determine whether follow-up investigation is required and notify the Investigative Services Prince George County PD Commander as necessary. The Shift Supervisor will make notification to command staff in accordance with the Major Incident Notification Policy.

      1. REPORTING

All incidents involving a death shall be documented on the appropriate form.

      1. MEDICALEXAMINERJOP REQUEST

Officers are not authorized to pronounce death unless they are also Medical Examiners, Deputy Medical Examiners or appointed Medical Examiner investigators. The Medical Examiner shall be called in all sudden or unexpected deaths or deaths due to other than natural causes. State law requires that the Medical Examiner and the State’s Attorney for the county where the body was found be notified and given the known facts concerning the time, place, manner and circumstances of the death in any of the following cases (Md. Code HG § 5-309):

  1. If the death occurred:
    1. By violence.
    1. By suicide.
    1. By casualty.
    1. Suddenly, if the deceased was in apparent good health or unattended by a physician.
    2. In any suspicious or unusual manner.
  1. If the death of a human fetus:
    1. Occurred before the complete expulsion or extraction of the fetus from the mother when the mother was not attended by a physician at or after the delivery, regardless of the duration of the pregnancy.
      1. SEARCHING DEAD BODIES
  1. The Medical Examiner, his/her assistant and authorized investigators are generally the only persons permitted to move, handle or search a dead body.
  2. An officer may make a reasonable search of an individual who it is reasonable to believe is dead, or near death, for the purpose of identification or for information identifying the individual as an anatomical donor. If a donor document is located, the Medical Examiner or his/her assistant shall be promptly notified.
  3. The Medical Examiner, with the permission of the Department, may take property, objects or articles found on the deceased or in the immediate vicinity of the deceased that may be necessary for conducting an investigation to determine the identity of the deceased or the cause or manner of death.
  4. Should exigent circumstances indicate to an officer that any other search of a known dead body is warranted prior to the arrival of the Medical Examiner or his/her assistant, the investigating officer should first obtain verbal consent from the Medical Examiner or his/her assistant when practicable.
  5. Whenever reasonably possible, a witness, preferably a relative to the deceased or a member of the household, should be requested to remain nearby the scene and available to the officer pending the arrival of the Medical Examiner or his/her assistant. The name and address of this person shall be included in the narrative of the death report.
  6. Whenever personal effects are removed from the body of the deceased by the Medical Examiner or his/her assistant, a receipt shall be obtained. This receipt shall be attached to the death report.
      1. SUSPECTED HOMICIDE

If the initially assigned officer suspects that the death involves a homicide or other suspicious circumstances, the officer shall take steps to protect the scene. The Prince George County PD shall be notified to determine the possible need for an investigator to respond to the scene.

If the on-scene supervisor, through consultation with the Shift Supervisor or Prince George County PD supervisor is unable to determine the manner of death, the investigation shall proceed as though it is a homicide.

The investigator assigned to investigate a homicide or death that occurred under suspicious circumstances may, with the approval of his/her supervisor, request the Medical Examiner to conduct physical examinations and tests, and to provide a report.

      1. EMPLOYMENT-RELATED DEATHS OR INJURIES

Any member of this department who responds to and determines that a death, serious illness or serious injury has occurred as a result of an accident at or in connection with the victim’s employment should ensure that the regional Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) office is notified of all pertinent information.

    1. UNIDENTIFIED DEAD BODY

If the identity of a dead body cannot be established, the handling officer will request from the Medical Examiner a unique identifying number for the body. The number shall be included in any report.

    1. DEATH NOTIFICATION

When reasonably practicable, and if not handled by the Medical Examiner’s Office, notification to the next-of-kin of the deceased person shall be made, in person, by the officer assigned to the incident. If the next-of-kin lives in another jurisdiction, a law enforcement official from that jurisdiction shall be requested to make the personal notification.

If a deceased person has been identified as a missing person, this department shall attempt to locate family members and inform them of the death and location of the deceased missing person’s remains. All efforts to locate and notify family members shall be recorded in appropriate reports.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Identity Theft

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for the investigation of identity theft.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to effectively investigate cases of identity theft.

    1. ACCEPTANCE OF REPORTS

A report should be taken any time a person residing within the jurisdiction of the Glenarden Police Department reports that he/she has been a victim of identity theft. This includes:

  1. Taking a report even if the location of the crime is outside the jurisdiction of this department or has not been determined.
  2. Providing the victim with department information, as set forth in the Victim and Witness Assistance Policy and encourage the individual to review the material, and assist with any questions.

A report should also be taken if a person living outside the department jurisdiction reports an identity theft that may have been committed or facilitated within this jurisdiction (e.g., use of a post office box in Prince George County to facilitate the crime).

    1. FOLLOW-UP INVESTIGATION

Members of this department presented with the crime of identity theft shall prepare and file a report and provide a copy to the person making the report when (Md. Code CR § 8-304):

  1. The person resides in any part of the county.
  2. The crime occurred in any part of the county.

A member investigating a case of identity theft should ensure that each case is referred to the appropriate agency if it is determined that this department should not be the investigating agency (e.g., an identity theft ring working from out of state). The victim should be advised that the case is being transferred to the agency of jurisdiction for investigation. The investigating member should also ensure that appropriate entries are made into related databases that have been authorized for department use.

    1. IDENTITY THEFT PASSPORT

Upon request by a person who is the victim of identity theft, Records Division (Prince George County PD) staff shall submit an application for an identity theft passport and a copy of the person’s identity theft report to the Attorney General (Md. Code CR § 8-305(c)).

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

Identity Theft

 

An application for an identity theft passport and any supporting documents are not public records and may not be released except to another law enforcement agency.

329.5.1 ACCEPTANCE OF IDENTITY THEFT PASSPORT

Officers have discretion whether to accept or reject an identity theft passport that an individual presents to help prevent his/her arrest or detention when another person has committed an offense and used the individual’s personal identifying information. In determining whether to accept or reject an identity theft passport presented to this department, the officer may consider the surrounding circumstances and available information regarding the offense of identity fraud against the person (Md. Code CR § 8-305(f)).

Private Person’s Arrest

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidance for the handling and acceptance of a private person’s arrest.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to accept a private person’s arrest only when legal and appropriate.

    1. ARRESTS BY PRIVATE PERSON

A private person may arrest another under the following circumstances:

  1. An arrest without a warrant varies based on the nature of the crime.
  1. If the crime is a felony, a private person can make an arrest if:
    1. A felony is being committed in the private person’s presence.
    1. A felony has in fact been committed and the private person making the arrest has probable cause to believe the individual arrested has committed the felony, whether or not in the private person’s presence.
  1. If the crime is a misdemeanor, a private person can make an arrest if the misdemeanor amounts to a breach of the peace and is committed in the private person’s presence or view.
    1. OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES

An officer confronted with a person claiming to have made a private person’s arrest should determine whether or not such an arrest would be lawful.

If the officer determines that the private person’s arrest is unlawful, the officer should:

  1. Take  no  action  to  further  detain  or  restrain  the  arrested  individual,  unless  there  is independent justification for continuing a detention.
  2. Advise the parties that the arrest will not be accepted but the circumstances will be documented in a report.
  3. Document the incident, including the basis for refusing to accept custody of the individual.

Whenever an officer determines that a private person’s arrest is justified, the officer may take the individual into custody and proceed in the same manner as with any other arrest.

    1. PRIVATE PERSON’S ARREST FORM

The arresting person should be asked to complete and sign a private person’s arrest form. If the person fails or refuses to do so, the arrested individual should be released, unless the officer has a lawful reason, independent of the private person’s arrest, to take the individual into custody and determines an arrest is appropriate.

Limited English Proficiency Services

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidance to members when communicating with individuals with limited English proficiency (LEP) (42 USC § 2000d).

331.1.1   DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Authorized interpreter – A person who has been screened and authorized by the Department to act as an interpreter and/or translator for others.

Interpret or interpretation – The act of listening to a communication in one language (source language) and orally converting it to another language (target language), while retaining the same meaning.

Limited English proficient (LEP) – Any individual whose primary language is not English and who has a limited ability to read, write, speak or understand English. These individuals may be competent in certain types of communication (e.g., speaking or understanding) but still be LEP for other purposes (e.g., reading or writing). Similarly, LEP designations are context-specific; an individual may possess sufficient English language skills to function in one setting but these skills may be insufficient in other situations.

Qualified bilingual member – A member of the Glenarden Police Department, designated by the Department, who has the ability to communicate fluently, directly and accurately in both English and another language. Bilingual members may be fluent enough to communicate in a non-English language but may not be sufficiently fluent to interpret or translate from one language into another.

Translate or translation – The replacement of written text from one language (source language) into an equivalent written text (target language).

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to reasonably ensure that LEP individuals have meaningful access to law enforcement services, programs and activities, while not imposing undue burdens on its members (see generally Md. Code SG § 10-1101 et seq.).

The Department will not discriminate against or deny any individual access to services, rights or programs based upon national origin or any other protected interest or right.

    1. LEP COORDINATOR

The Chief of Police shall delegate certain responsibilities to an LEP coordinator. The coordinator shall be appointed by and directly responsible to the Operations Services Lieutenant or the authorized designee.

The responsibilities of the coordinator include, but are not limited to:

  1. Coordinating and implementing all aspects of the Glenarden Police Department’s LEP services to LEP individuals.
  2. Developing procedures that will enable members to access LEP services, including telephonic interpreters, and ensuring the procedures are available to all members.
  3. Ensuring that a list of all qualified bilingual members and authorized interpreters is maintained and available to each Shift Supervisor and Dispatch Supervisor. The list should include information regarding the following:
    1. Languages spoken
    1. Contact information
    1. Availability
  1. Ensuring signage stating that interpreters are available free of charge to LEP individuals is posted in appropriate areas and in the most commonly spoken languages.
  2. Reviewing existing and newly developed documents to determine which are vital documents and should be translated, and into which languages the documents should be translated.
  3. Annually assessing demographic data and other resources, including contracted language services utilization data and community-based organizations, to determine if there are additional documents or languages that are appropriate for translation.
  4. Identifying standards and assessments to be used by this department to qualify individuals as qualified bilingual members or authorized interpreters.
  5. Periodically reviewing efforts of this department in providing meaningful access to LEP individuals, and, as appropriate, developing reports, new procedures, or recommending modifications to this policy.
  6. Receiving and responding to complaints regarding department LEP services.
  1. Ensuring appropriate processes are in place to provide for the prompt and equitable resolution of complaints and inquiries regarding discrimination in access to department services, programs and activities.
    1. FOUR-FACTOR ANALYSIS

Since there are many different languages that members could encounter, the Department will utilize the four-factor analysis outlined in the U.S. Department of Justice (DOJ) Guidance to Federal Financial Assistance Recipients, available at the DOJ website, to determine which measures will provide meaningful access to its services and programs. It is recognized that law enforcement contacts and circumstances will vary considerably. This analysis, therefore, must remain flexible and will require an ongoing balance of the following four factors, which are:

  1. The number or proportion of LEP individuals eligible to be served or likely to be encountered by department members, or who may benefit from programs or services within the jurisdiction of this department or a particular geographic area.
  2. The frequency with which LEP individuals are likely to come in contact with department members, programs or services.
  3. The nature and importance of the contact, program, information or service provided.
  1. The cost of providing LEP assistance and the resources available.
    1. TYPES OF LEP ASSISTANCE AVAILABLE

Glenarden Police Department members should never refuse service to an LEP individual who is requesting assistance, nor should they require an LEP individual to furnish an interpreter as a condition for receiving assistance. The Department will make every reasonable effort to provide meaningful and timely assistance to LEP individuals through a variety of services.

The Department will utilize all reasonably available tools, such as language identification cards, when attempting to determine an LEP individual’s primary language.

LEP individuals may choose to accept department-provided LEP services at no cost or they may choose to provide their own. Department-provided LEP services may include, but are not limited to, the assistance methods described in this policy.

    1. WRITTEN FORMS AND GUIDELINES

Vital documents or those that are frequently used should be translated into languages most likely to be encountered. The LEP coordinator will arrange to make these translated documents available to members and other appropriate individuals, as necessary.

    1. AUDIO RECORDINGS

The Department may develop audio recordings of important or frequently requested information in a language most likely to be understood by those LEP individuals who are representative of the community being served.

    1. QUALIFIED BILINGUAL MEMBERS

Bilingual members may be qualified to provide LEP services when they have demonstrated through established department procedures a sufficient level of skill and competence to fluently communicate in both English and a non-English language. Members utilized for LEP services must demonstrate knowledge of the functions of an interpreter/translator and the ethical issues involved when acting as a language conduit. Additionally, bilingual members must be able to communicate technical and law enforcement terminology, and be sufficiently proficient in the non-English language to perform complicated tasks, such as conducting interrogations, taking statements, collecting evidence or conveying rights or responsibilities.

When a qualified bilingual member from this department is not available, personnel from other Town departments, who have been identified by the Department as having the requisite skills and competence, may be requested.

    1. AUTHORIZED INTERPRETERS

Any person designated by the Department to act as an authorized interpreter and/or translator must have demonstrated competence in both English and the involved non-English language, must have an understanding of the functions of an interpreter that allows for correct and effective translation, and should not be a person with an interest in the department case or investigation involving the LEP individual. A person providing interpretation or translation services may be required to establish the accuracy and trustworthiness of the interpretation or translation in a court proceeding.

Authorized interpreters must pass a screening process established by the LEP coordinator which demonstrates that their skills and abilities include:

  1. The competence and ability to communicate information accurately in both English and in the target language.
  2. Knowledge, in both languages, of any specialized terms or concepts peculiar to this department and of any particularized vocabulary or phraseology used by the LEP individual.
  3. The ability to understand and adhere to the interpreter role without deviating into other roles, such as counselor or legal adviser.
  4. Knowledge of the ethical issues involved when acting as a language conduit.
      1. SOURCES OF AUTHORIZED INTERPRETERS

The Department may contract with authorized interpreters who are available over the telephone. Members may use these services with the approval of a supervisor and in compliance with established procedures.

Other sources may include:

  • Qualified bilingual members of this department or personnel from other Town departments.
  • Individuals employed exclusively to perform interpretation services.
  • Contracted in-person interpreters, such as state or federal court interpreters, among others.
  • Interpreters from other agencies who have been qualified as interpreters by this department, and with whom the Department has a resource-sharing or other arrangement that they will interpret according to department guidelines.
      1. COMMUNITY VOLUNTEERS AND OTHER SOURCES OF LANGUAGE ASSISTANCE

Language assistance may be available from community volunteers who have demonstrated competence in either monolingual (direct) communication and/or in interpretation or translation (as noted in above), and have been approved by the Department to communicate with LEP individuals.

Where qualified bilingual members or other authorized interpreters are unavailable to assist, approved community volunteers who have demonstrated competence may be called upon when appropriate. However, department members must carefully consider the nature of the contact and the relationship between the LEP individual and the volunteer to ensure that the volunteer can provide neutral and unbiased assistance.

While family or friends of an LEP individual may offer to assist with communication or interpretation, members should carefully consider the circumstances before relying on such individuals. For example, children should not be relied upon except in exigent or very informal and non-confrontational situations.

    1. CONTACT AND REPORTING

While all law enforcement contacts, services and individual rights are important, this department will utilize the four-factor analysis to prioritize service to LEP individuals so that such services may be targeted where they are most needed, according to the nature and importance of the particular law enforcement activity involved.

Whenever any member of this department is required to complete a report or when other documentation, and interpretation services are provided to any involved LEP individual, such services should be noted in the related report. Members should document the type of interpretation services utilized and whether the individual elected to use services provided by the Department or some other identified source.

    1. RECEIVING AND RESPONDING TO REQUESTS FOR ASSISTANCE

The Glenarden Police Department will take reasonable steps and will work with the Personnel Department to develop in-house language capacity by hiring or appointing qualified members proficient in languages representative of the community being served.

331.11.1 EMERGENCY CALLS TO 9-1-1

Department members will make every reasonable effort to promptly accommodate LEP individuals utilizing 9-1-1 lines. When a 9-1-1 call-taker receives a call and determines that the caller is an LEP individual, the call-taker shall quickly determine whether sufficient information can be obtained to initiate an appropriate emergency response. If language assistance is still needed, the language is known and a qualified bilingual member is available in the Communications Center, the call shall immediately be handled by the qualified bilingual member.

If a qualified bilingual member is not available or the call-taker is unable to identify the caller’s language, the call-taker will contact the contracted telephone interpretation service and establish a three-way call between the call-taker, the LEP individual and the interpreter.

Dispatchers will make every reasonable effort to dispatch a qualified bilingual member to the assignment, if available and appropriate. While 9-1-1 calls shall receive top priority, reasonable efforts should also be made to accommodate LEP individuals seeking routine access to services and information by utilizing the resources listed in this policy.

    1. FIELD ENFORCEMENT

Field enforcement will generally include such contacts as traffic stops, pedestrian stops, serving warrants and restraining orders, crowd/traffic control and other routine field contacts that may involve LEP individuals. The scope and nature of these activities and contacts will inevitably vary. Members and/or supervisors must assess each situation to determine the need and availability of language assistance to all involved LEP individuals and utilize the methods outlined in this policy to provide such assistance.

Although not every situation can be addressed in this policy, it is important that members are able to effectively communicate the reason for a contact, the need for information and the meaning or consequences of any enforcement action. For example, it would be meaningless to request consent to search if the officer is unable to effectively communicate with an LEP individual.

If available, officers should obtain the assistance of a qualified bilingual member or an authorized interpreter before placing an LEP individual under arrest.

    1. INVESTIGATIVE FIELD INTERVIEWS

In any situation where an interview may reveal information that could be used as the basis for arrest or prosecution of an LEP individual and a qualified bilingual member is unavailable or lacks the skills to directly communicate with the LEP individual, an authorized interpreter should be used. This includes interviews conducted during an investigation with victims, witnesses and suspects. In such situations, audio recordings of the interviews should be made when reasonably possible. Identification and contact information for the interpreter (e.g., name, address) should be documented so that the person can be subpoenaed for trial if necessary.

If an authorized interpreter is needed, officers should consider calling for an authorized interpreter in the following order:

  • An authorized department member or allied agency interpreter
  • An authorized telephone interpreter
  • Any other authorized interpreter

Any Miranda warnings shall be provided to suspects in their primary language by an authorized interpreter or, if the suspect is literate, by providing a translated Miranda warning card.

The use of an LEP individual’s bilingual friends, family members, children, neighbors or bystanders may be used only when a qualified bilingual member or authorized interpreter is unavailable and there is an immediate need to interview an LEP individual.

    1. CUSTODIAL INTERROGATIONS

Miscommunication during custodial interrogations may have a substantial impact on the evidence presented in a criminal prosecution. Only qualified bilingual members or, if none is available or appropriate, authorized interpreters shall be used during custodial interrogations. Miranda warnings shall be provided to suspects in their primary language by the qualified bilingual member or an authorized interpreter.

In order to ensure that translations during custodial interrogations are accurately documented and are admissible as evidence, interrogations should be recorded whenever reasonably possible. See guidance on recording custodial interrogations in the Investigation and Prosecution Policy.

    1. BOOKINGS

When gathering information during the booking process, members should remain alert to the impediments that language barriers can create. In the interest of the arrestee’s health and welfare, the safety and security of the facility, and to protect individual rights, it is important that accurate medical screening and booking information be obtained. Members should seek the assistance of a qualified bilingual member whenever there is concern that accurate information cannot be obtained or that booking instructions may not be properly understood by an LEP individual.

    1. COMPLAINTS

The Department shall ensure that LEP individuals who wish to file a complaint regarding members of this department are able to do so. The Department may provide an authorized interpreter or translated forms, as appropriate. Complaints will be referred to the LEP coordinator.

Investigations into such complaints shall be handled in accordance with the Personnel Complaints Policy. Authorized interpreters used for any interview with an LEP individual during an investigation should not be members of this department.

Any notice required to be sent to an LEP individual as a complaining party pursuant to the Personnel Complaints Policy should be translated or otherwise communicated in a language- accessible manner.

    1. COMMUNITY OUTREACH

Community outreach programs and other such services offered by this department are important to the ultimate success of more traditional law enforcement duties. This department will continue to work with community groups, local businesses and neighborhoods to provide equal access to such programs and services.

    1. TRAINING

To ensure that all members who may have contact with LEP individuals are properly trained, the Department will provide periodic training on this policy and related procedures, including how to access department-authorized telephonic and in-person interpreters and other available resources.

The Training Coordinator shall be responsible for ensuring new members receive LEP training. Those who may have contact with LEP individuals should receive refresher training at least once every two years thereafter. The Training Coordinator shall maintain records of all LEP training provided, and will retain a copy in each member’s training file in accordance with the established records retention schedule.

331.18.1 TRAINING FOR AUTHORIZED INTERPRETERS

All members on the authorized interpreter list must successfully complete prescribed interpreter training. To complete interpreter training successfully, an interpreter must demonstrate proficiency in and ability to communicate information accurately in both English and in the target language, demonstrate knowledge in both languages of any specialized terms or phraseology, and understand and adhere to the interpreter role without deviating into other roles, such as counselor or legal adviser.

Members on the authorized interpreter list must receive refresher training annually or they will be removed from the authorized interpreter list. This annual training should include language skills competency (including specialized terminology) and ethical considerations.

The Training Coordinator shall be responsible for coordinating the annual refresher training and will maintain a record of all training the interpreters have received.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Communications with Persons with Disabilities

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidance to members when communicating with individuals with disabilities, including those who are deaf or hard of hearing, have impaired speech or vision, or are blind.

      1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Auxiliary aids – Tools used to communicate with people who have a disability or impairment. They include, but are not limited to, the use of gestures or visual aids to supplement oral communication; a notepad and pen or pencil to exchange written notes; a computer or typewriter; an assistive listening system or device to amplify sound; a teletypewriter (TTY) or videophones (video relay service or VRS); taped text; qualified readers; or a qualified interpreter.

Disability or impairment – A physical or mental impairment that substantially limits a major life activity, including hearing or seeing, regardless of whether the disabled person uses assistive or adaptive devices or auxiliary aids. Individuals who wear ordinary eyeglasses or contact lenses are not considered to have a disability (42 USC § 12102).

Qualified interpreter – A person who is able to interpret effectively, accurately and impartially, both receptively and expressively, using any necessary specialized vocabulary. Qualified interpreters include oral interpreters, transliterators, sign language interpreters and intermediary interpreters.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to reasonably ensure that people with disabilities, including victims, witnesses, suspects and arrestees have equal access to law enforcement services, programs and activities. Members must make efforts to communicate effectively with individuals with disabilities.

The Department will not discriminate against or deny any individual access to services, rights or programs based upon disabilities.

    1. AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES (ADA) COORDINATOR

The Chief of Police shall delegate certain responsibilities to an ADA coordinator (28 CFR 35.107). The coordinator shall be appointed by and directly responsible to the Operations Services Lieutenant or the authorized designee.

The responsibilities of the coordinator include, but are not limited to:

  1. Working with the Town ADA coordinator regarding the Glenarden Police Department’s efforts to ensure equal access to services, programs and activities.
  2. Developing reports, new procedures, or recommending modifications to this policy.
  3. Acting as a liaison with local disability advocacy groups or other disability groups regarding access to department services, programs and activities.
  4. Ensuring that a list of qualified interpreter services is maintained and available to each Shift Supervisor and Dispatch Supervisor. The list should include information regarding the following:
    1. Contact information
    1. Availability
  1. Developing procedures that will enable members to access auxiliary aids or services, including qualified interpreters, and ensure the procedures are available to all members.
  2. Ensuring signage is posted in appropriate areas, indicating that auxiliary aids are available free of charge to individuals with disabilities.
  3. Ensuring appropriate processes are in place to provide for the prompt and equitable resolution of complaints and inquiries regarding discrimination in access to department services, programs and activities.
    1. FACTORS TO CONSIDER

Because the nature of any law enforcement contact may vary substantially from one situation to the next, members of this department should consider all information reasonably available to them when determining how to communicate with an individual with a disability. Members should carefully balance all known factors in an effort to reasonably ensure people who are disabled have equal access to services, programs and activities. These factors may include, but are not limited to:

  1. Members should not always assume that effective communication is being achieved. The fact that an individual appears to be nodding in agreement does not always mean he/she completely understands the message. When there is any doubt, members should ask the individual to communicate back or otherwise demonstrate his/her understanding.
  2. The nature of the disability (e.g., deafness or blindness vs. hard of hearing or low vision).
  1. The nature of the law enforcement contact (e.g., emergency vs. non-emergency, custodial vs. consensual contact).
  2. The availability of auxiliary aids. The fact that a particular aid is not available does not eliminate the obligation to reasonably ensure access. However, in an emergency, availability may factor into the type of aid used.
    1. INITIAL AND IMMEDIATE CONSIDERATIONS

Recognizing  that  various  law  enforcement  encounters  may  be  potentially  volatile  and/or emotionally charged, members should remain alert to the possibility of communication problems.

Members should exercise special care in the use of all gestures, and verbal and written communication to minimize initial confusion and misunderstanding when dealing with any individual with known or suspected disabilities.

In a non-emergency situation, when a member knows or suspects an individual requires assistance to effectively communicate, the member shall identify the individual’s choice of auxiliary aid or service.

The individual’s preferred communication method must be honored unless another effective method of communication exists under the circumstances (28 CFR 35.160).

Factors to consider when determining whether an alternative method is effective include:

  1. The methods of communication usually used by the individual.
  1. The nature, length and complexity of the communication involved.
  1. The context of the communication.

In emergency situations involving an imminent threat to the safety or welfare of any person, members may use whatever auxiliary aids and services that reasonably appear effective under the circumstances. This may include, for example, exchanging written notes or using the services of a person who knows sign language but is not a qualified interpreter, even if the person who is deaf or hard of hearing would prefer a qualified sign language interpreter or another appropriate auxiliary aid or service. Once the emergency has ended, the continued method of communication should be reconsidered. The member should inquire as to the individual’s preference and give primary consideration to that preference.

If an individual who is deaf, hard of hearing or has impaired speech must be handcuffed while in the custody of the Glenarden Police Department, consideration should be given, safety permitting, to placing the handcuffs in the front of the body to facilitate communication using sign language or writing.

    1. TYPES OF ASSISTANCE AVAILABLE

Glenarden Police Department members shall never refuse an available service to an individual with disabilities who is requesting assistance. The Department will not charge anyone to receive auxiliary aids, nor shall they require anyone to furnish their own auxiliary aid or service as a condition for receiving assistance. The Department will make every reasonable effort to provide equal access and timely assistance to disabled individuals through a variety of services.

Disabled individuals may choose to accept department-provided auxiliary aids or services or they may choose to provide their own.

Department-provided auxiliary aids or services may include, but are not limited to, the assistance methods described in this policy.

    1. AUDIO RECORDINGS AND ENLARGED PRINT

The Department may develop audio recordings to assist people who are blind or have a visual impairment with accessing important information. If such a recording is not available, members may read aloud from the appropriate form, for example a personnel complaint form, or provide forms with enlarged print.

    1. QUALIFIED INTERPRETERS

A qualified interpreter may be needed in lengthy or complex transactions (e.g., interviewing a victim, witness, suspect or arrestee), if the individual to be interviewed normally relies on sign language or speechreading (lip-reading) to understand what others are saying. The qualified interpreter should not be a person with an interest in the case or the investigation. A person providing interpretation services may be required to establish the accuracy and trustworthiness of the interpretation in a court proceeding.

Qualified interpreters should be:

  1. Available within a reasonable amount of time but in no event longer than one hour if requested.
  2. Experienced in providing interpretation services related to law enforcement matters.
  1. Familiar with the use of VRS and/or video remote interpreting services.
  1. Certified in either American Sign Language (ASL) or Signed English (SE).
  1. Able to understand and adhere to the interpreter role without deviating into other roles, such as counselor or legal adviser.
  2. Knowledgeable of the ethical issues involved when providing interpreter services.

Members should use department-approved procedures to request a qualified interpreter at the earliest reasonable opportunity, and generally not more than 15 minutes after a request for an interpreter has been made or it is reasonably apparent that an interpreter is needed. No individual who is disabled shall be required to provide his/her own interpreter (28 CFR 35.160).

    1. TTY AND RELAY SERVICES

In situations where an individual without a disability would have access to a telephone (e.g., booking or attorney contacts), members must also provide those who are deaf, hard of hearing or have impaired speech the opportunity to place calls using an available TTY (also known as a telecommunications device for deaf people, or TDD). Members shall provide additional time, as needed, for effective communication due to the slower nature of TTY and TDD communications. The Department will accept all TTY or TDD calls placed by those who are deaf or hard of hearing and received via a telecommunications relay service (28 CFR 35.162). Note that relay services translate verbatim, so the conversation must be conducted as if speaking directly to the caller.

    1. COMMUNITY VOLUNTEERS

Interpreter services may be available from community volunteers who have demonstrated competence in communication services, such as ASL or SE, and have been approved by the Department to provide interpreter services.

Where qualified interpreters are unavailable to assist, approved community volunteers who have demonstrated competence may be called upon when appropriate. However, department members must carefully consider the nature of the contact and the relationship between the individual with the disability and the volunteer to ensure that the volunteer can provide neutral and unbiased assistance.

    1. FAMILY AND FRIENDS

While family or friends may offer to assist with interpretation, members should carefully consider the circumstances before relying on such individuals. The nature of the contact and relationship between the individual with the disability and the person offering services must be carefully considered (e.g., victim/suspect).

Children shall not be relied upon except in emergency or critical situations when there is no qualified interpreter reasonably available.

Adults may be relied upon when (28 CFR 35.160):

  1. There is an emergency or critical situation and there is no qualified interpreter reasonably available.
  2. The person with the disability requests that the adult interpret or facilitate communication and the adult agrees to provide such assistance, and reliance on that adult for such assistance is reasonable under the circumstances.
    1. REPORTING

Whenever any member of this department is required to complete a report or other documentation, and communication assistance has been provided, such services should be noted in the related report. Members should document the type of communication services utilized and whether the individual elected to use services provided by the Department or some other identified source. If the individual’s express preference is not honored, the member must document why another method of communication was used.

All written communications exchanged in a criminal case shall be attached to the report or placed into evidence.

    1. FIELD ENFORCEMENT

Field enforcement will generally include such contacts as traffic stops, pedestrian stops, serving warrants and restraining orders, crowd/traffic control and other routine field contacts that may involve individuals with disabilities. The scope and nature of these activities and contacts will inevitably vary.

The Department recognizes that it would be virtually impossible to provide immediate access to complete communication services to every member of this department. Members and/or supervisors must assess each situation and consider the length, complexity and importance of the communication, as well as the individual’s preferred method of communication when determining the type of resources to use and whether a qualified interpreter is needed.

Although not every situation can be addressed in this policy, it is important that members are able to effectively communicate the reason for a contact, the need for information and the meaning or consequences of any enforcement action. For example, it would be meaningless to verbally request consent to search if the officer is unable to effectively communicate with an individual who is deaf or hard of hearing and requires communications assistance.

If available, officers should obtain the assistance of a qualified interpreter before placing an individual with a disability under arrest. Individuals who are arrested and are assisted by service animals should be permitted to make arrangements for the care of such animals prior to transport.

      1. FIELD RESOURCES

Examples of methods that may be sufficient for transactions, such as checking a license or giving directions to a location or for urgent situations such as responding to a violent crime in progress, may, depending on the circumstances, include such simple things as:

  1. Hand gestures or visual aids with an individual who is deaf, hard of hearing or has impaired speech.
  2. Exchange of written notes or communications.
  1. Verbal communication with an individual who can speechread by facing the individual and speaking slowly and clearly.
  2. Use of computer, word processing, personal communication device or similar device to exchange texts or notes.
  3. Slowly and clearly speaking or reading simple terms to individuals who have a visual or mental impairment.

Members should be aware that these techniques may not provide effective communication as required by law and this policy depending on the circumstances.

    1. CUSTODIAL INTERROGATIONS

In an effort to ensure that the rights of individuals who are deaf, hard of hearing or have speech impairment are protected during a custodial interrogation, this department will provide interpreter services before beginning an interrogation, unless exigent circumstances exist or the individual has made a clear indication that he/she understands the process and desires to proceed without an interpreter. The use of a video remote interpreting service should be considered, where appropriate, if a live interpreter is not available. Miranda warnings shall be provided to suspects who are deaf or hard of hearing by a qualified interpreter or by providing a written Miranda warning card.

In order to ensure that communications during custodial investigations are accurately documented and are admissible as evidence, interrogations should be recorded whenever reasonably possible. See guidance on recording custodial interrogations in the Investigation and Prosecution Policy.

    1. ARRESTS AND BOOKINGS

If an individual with speech or hearing disabilities is arrested, the arresting officer shall use department-approved procedures to provide a qualified interpreter at the place of arrest or booking as soon as reasonably practicable, unless the individual indicates that he/she prefers a different auxiliary aid or service or the officer reasonably determines another effective method of communication exists under the circumstances.

When gathering information during the booking process, members should remain alert to the impediments that often exist when communicating with those who are deaf, hard of hearing, who have impaired speech or vision, are blind, or have other disabilities. In the interest of the arrestee’s health and welfare, the safety and security of the facility and to protect individual rights, it is important that accurate medical screening and booking information be obtained. If necessary, members should seek the assistance of a qualified interpreter whenever there is concern that accurate information cannot be obtained or that booking instructions may not be properly understood by the individual.

Individuals who require and possess personally owned communication aids (e.g., hearing aids, cochlear processors) should be permitted to retain them while in custody.

    1. COMPLAINTS

The Department shall ensure that individuals with disabilities who wish to file a complaint regarding members of this department are able to do so. The Department may provide a qualified interpreter or forms in enlarged print, as appropriate. Complaints will be referred to the ADA coordinator.

Investigations into such complaints shall be handled in accordance with the Personnel Complaints Policy. Qualified interpreters used during the investigation of a complaint should not be members of this Department.

    1. COMMUNITY OUTREACH

Community outreach programs and other such services offered by this department are important to the ultimate success of more traditional law enforcement duties. This department will continue to work with community groups, local businesses and neighborhoods to provide equal access to such programs and services.

    1. TRAINING

To ensure that all members who may have contact with disabled individuals are properly trained, the Department will provide periodic training that should include:

  1. Awareness and understanding of this policy and related procedures, related forms and available resources.
  2. Procedures for accessing qualified interpreters and other available resources.
  1. Working with in-person and telephone interpreters and related equipment.

The Training Coordinator shall be responsible for ensuring new members receive training related to interacting with individuals who have disabilities, including those who are deaf, hard of hearing, who have impaired speech or vision, or are blind. Those who may have contact with such individuals should receive refresher training at least once every two years thereafter. The Training Coordinator shall maintain records of all training provided, and will retain a copy in each member’s training file in accordance with the established records retention schedule.

332.18.1   CALL-TAKER TRAINING

Emergency call-takers shall be trained in the use of TTY equipment protocols for communicating with individuals who are deaf, hard of hearing or who have speech impairments. Such training and information should include:

  1. The requirements of the ADA and Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act for telephone emergency service providers.
  2. ASL syntax and accepted abbreviations.
  1. Practical instruction on identifying and processing TTY or TDD calls, including the importance of recognizing silent TTY or TDD calls, using proper syntax, abbreviations and protocol when responding to TTY or TDD calls.
  2. Hands-on experience in TTY and TDD communications, including identification of TTY or TDD tones.

Training should be mandatory for all the Communications Center members who may have contact with individuals from the public who are deaf, hard of hearing or have impaired speech. Refresher training should occur every six months.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Biological Samples

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidelines for the collection of biological samples from those individuals required to provide samples upon conviction or arrest for certain offenses. This policy does not apply to biological samples collected at a crime scene or taken from an individual in conjunction with a criminal investigation, including voluntary samples. Nor does it apply to biological samples collected from those required to register, for example, as sex offenders.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department will assist in the expeditious collection of required biological samples from arrestees during booking in accordance with the laws of this state and with as little reliance on force as practicable (COMAR 29.05.01.04(B)).

    1. ARRESTEES AND OFFENDERS SUBJECT TO BIOLOGICAL SAMPLE COLLECTION

A biological sample shall be collected from an individual who is charged with a crime of violence or an attempt to commit a crime of violence, or burglary or an attempt to commit burglary (Md. Code PS § 2-504(a)(3)). An individual convicted of a felony or a violation of Md. Code CR § 6-205 or Md. Code CR § 6-206 shall have a biological sample collected at the time of sentence, or on intake to a correctional facility, or as a condition of probation (Md. Code PS § 2-504(a)(1)). These samples are generally collected by correctional staff.

    1. PROCEDURE

At the time of collection of the biological sample, the Department must notify the individual that the biological record may be expunged and the biological sample destroyed in accordance with Md. Code PS § 2-511 (Md. Code PS § 2-504(a)(3)(ii)).

When an arrestee or offender is required to provide a biological sample, a designated and trained member shall obtain the sample in accordance with this policy (Md. Code PS § 2-504(c)). A second biological sample shall be taken if needed to obtain sufficient biological data for the statewide DNA data base system or if ordered by a court (Md. Code PS § 2-504(e).

333.4.1 COLLECTION

The following steps should be taken to collect a sample:

  1. Verify the identity of the arrestee or offender and that the individual is required to provide a sample pursuant to state law (COMAR 29.05.01.04(K)).
  2. Verify that a biological sample has not been previously collected from the arrestee or offender by querying the statewide DNA database. There is no need to obtain a biological sample if one has been previously obtained (COMAR 29.05.01.04(B)(4)).
  3. Use the designated collection kit to perform the collection, following directions and taking steps to avoid cross contamination (COMAR 29.05.01.04(J).

333.5   USE OF FORCE TO OBTAIN SAMPLES

If an arrestee or offender refuses to cooperate with the sample collection process, members should attempt to identify the reason for refusal and seek voluntary compliance. Reasonable force may be used in the collection of samples as authorized by court order or approval of legal counsel and only with the approval of a supervisor (COMAR 29.05.01.04(C)).

Methods to consider when seeking voluntary compliance include contacting:

  1. The individual’s parole or probation officer, when applicable.
  1. The prosecuting attorney to seek additional charges against the individual for failure to comply or to otherwise bring the refusal before a judge.
  2. The judge at the individual’s next court appearance.
  1. The individual’s attorney.
  1. A chaplain.
  1. Another custody facility with additional resources, where the individual can be transferred to better facilitate sample collection.
  2. A  supervisor  who  may  be  able  to  authorize  custodial  disciplinary  actions  to  compel compliance, if any are available.

The supervisor shall review and approve any plan to use reasonable force and be present to document the process.

333.5.1   VIDEO RECORDING

A video recording should be made any time force is used to obtain a biological sample. The recording should document all persons participating in the process, in addition to the methods and all force used during the collection. The recording should be part of the investigation file, if any, or otherwise retained in accordance with the established records retention schedule.

    1. LEGAL MANDATES AND RELEVANT LAWS

Immediately after a biological sample is obtained it shall be placed in the kit provided, sealed, and within 24 hours, transported or mailed to the Forensic Sciences Division of the Department of State Police Crime Laboratory (COMAR 29.05.01.04(M). Possession of, or access to, individually identifiable biological information contained in the statewide DNA data base system or statewide DNA repository is confidential and may not be willfully disclosed in any manner to a person or agency not entitled to receive the information.

A member may not, without authorization, willfully obtain individually identifiable biological information from the statewide DNA data base system or statewide DNA repository (Md. Code PS § 2-512).

    1. REPORTING

The Records Division (Prince George County PD) shall make the following reports:

  1. To the Department of State Police on or before January 31, the information for the preceding calendar year necessary to compile statistical information as required by Md. Code PS § 2-513.
  2. To the Governor’s Office of Crime Control and Prevention on or before April 1 of every even numbered year, the status of crime scene DNA collection and analysis for the preceding year pursuant to Md. Code PS § 2-514.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Chaplains

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy establishes the guidelines for Glenarden Police Department chaplains to provide counseling or emotional support to members of the Department, their families and members of the public.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department shall ensure that department chaplains are properly appointed, trained and supervised to carry out their responsibilities without financial compensation.

    1. ELIGIBILITY

Requirements for participation as a chaplain for the Department may include, but are not limited to:

  1. Being above reproach, temperate, prudent, respectable, hospitable, able to teach, be free from addiction to alcohol or other drugs, and excessive debt.
  2. Managing their households, families and personal affairs well.
  1. Having a good reputation in the community.
  1. Successful completion of an appropriate level background investigation.
  1. A minimum of five years of successful counseling experience.
  1. Possession of a valid driver’s license.

The Chief of Police may apply exceptions for eligibility based on organizational needs and the qualifications of the individual.

    1. RECRUITMENT, SELECTION AND APPOINTMENT

The Glenarden Police Department shall endeavor to recruit and appoint only those applicants who meet the high ethical, moral and professional standards set forth by this department.

All applicants shall be required to meet and pass the same pre-employment procedures as department personnel before appointment.

      1. RECRUITMENT

Chaplains should be recruited on a continuous and ongoing basis consistent with department policy on equal opportunity and non-discriminatory employment. A primary qualification for participation in the application process should be an interest in and an ability to assist the Department in serving the public. Chaplain candidates are encouraged to participate in ride-alongs with department members before and during the selection process.

      1. SELECTION AND APPOINTMENT

Chaplain candidates shall successfully complete the following process prior to appointment as a chaplain:

  1. Submit the appropriate written application.
  1. Include a recommendation from their employer or volunteer program.
  1. Interview with the Chief of Police and the chaplain coordinator.
  1. Successfully complete an appropriate-level background investigation.
  1. Complete an appropriate probationary period as designated by the Chief of Police.

Chaplains are volunteers and serve at the discretion of the Chief of Police. Chaplains shall have no property interest in continued appointment. However, if a chaplain is removed for alleged misconduct, the chaplain will be afforded an opportunity solely to clear his/her name through a liberty interest hearing, which shall be limited to a single appearance before the Chief of Police or the authorized designee.

    1. IDENTIFICATION AND UNIFORMS

As representatives of the Department, chaplains are responsible for presenting a professional image to the community. Chaplains shall dress appropriately for the conditions and performance of their duties. Uniforms and necessary safety equipment will be provided for each chaplain. Identification symbols worn by chaplains shall be different and distinct from those worn by officers through the inclusion of “Chaplain” on the uniform and not reflect any religious affiliation.

Chaplains will be issued Glenarden Police Department identification cards which must be carried at all times while on-duty. The identification cards will be the standard Glenarden Police Department identification cards with the exception that “Chaplain” will be indicated on the cards. Chaplains shall be required to return any issued uniforms or department property at the termination of service. Chaplains shall conform to all uniform regulations and appearance standards of this department.

    1. CHAPLAIN COORDINATOR

The Chief of Police shall delegate certain responsibilities to a chaplain coordinator. The coordinator shall be appointed by and directly responsible to the Administration Lieutenant or the authorized designee.

The chaplain coordinator shall serve as the liaison between the chaplains and the Chief of Police. The function of the coordinator is to provide a central coordinating point for effective chaplain management within the Department, and to direct and assist efforts to jointly provide more productive chaplain services. Under the general direction of the Chief of Police or the authorized designee, chaplains shall report to the chaplain coordinator and/or Shift Supervisor.

The chaplain coordinator may appoint a senior chaplain or other designee to assist in the coordination of chaplains and their activities.

The responsibilities of the coordinator or the authorized designee include, but are not limited to:

  1. Recruiting, selecting and training qualified chaplains.
  1. Conducting chaplain meetings.
  1. Establishing and maintaining a chaplain callout roster.
  1. Maintaining records for each chaplain.
  1. Tracking and evaluating the contribution of chaplains.
  1. Maintaining a record of chaplain schedules and work hours.
  1. Completing and disseminating, as appropriate, all necessary paperwork and information.
  1. Planning periodic recognition events.
  1. Maintaining liaison with other agency chaplain coordinators.

An evaluation of the overall use of chaplains will be conducted on an annual basis by the coordinator.

    1. DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Chaplains assist the Department, its members and the community, as needed. Assignments of chaplains will usually be to augment the Operations Services Prince George County PD. Chaplains may be assigned to other areas within the Department as needed. Chaplains should be placed only in assignments or programs that are consistent with their knowledge, skills, abilities and the needs of the Department.

All chaplains will be assigned to duties by the chaplain coordinator or the authorized designee.

Chaplains may not proselytize or attempt to recruit members of the Department or the public into a religious affiliation while representing themselves as a chaplain with this department unless the receiving person has solicited spiritual guidance or teaching. If there is any question as to the receiving person’s intent, chaplains should verify that the person is desirous of spiritual counseling or guidance before engaging in such discussion.

Chaplains may not accept gratuities for any service, or any subsequent actions or follow-up contacts that were provided while functioning as a chaplain for the Glenarden Police Department.

      1. COMPLIANCE

Chaplains are volunteer members of the Department, and except as otherwise specified within this policy, are required to comply with the Volunteers Policy and other applicable policies.

      1. OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES
  1. Chaplains will be scheduled to be on-call for a period of seven consecutive days during each month, beginning on Monday and ending on the following Sunday.
  2. Generally, each chaplain will serve with Glenarden Police Department personnel a minimum of eight hours per month.
  3. At the end of each watch the chaplain will complete a chaplain shift report and submit it to the Chief of Police or the authorized designee.
  4. Chaplains shall be permitted to ride with officers during any shift and observe Glenarden Police Department operations, provided the Shift Supervisor has been notified and has approved the activity.
  5. Chaplains shall not be evaluators of members of the Department.
  1. In responding to incidents, a chaplain shall never function as an officer.
  1. When responding to in-progress calls for service, chaplains may be required to stand-by in a secure area until the situation has been deemed safe.
  2. Chaplains shall serve only within the jurisdiction of the Glenarden Police Department unless otherwise authorized by the Chief of Police or the authorized designee.
  3. Each chaplain shall have access to current department member rosters, addresses, telephone numbers, duty assignments and other information that may assist in his/her duties. Such information will be considered confidential and each chaplain will exercise appropriate security measures to prevent distribution of the data.
      1. ASSISTING DEPARTMENTOFFICE MEMBERS

The responsibilities of a chaplain related to department members include, but are not limited to:

  1. Assisting in making notification to families of members who have been seriously injured or killed and, after notification, responding to the hospital or home of the member.
  2. Visiting sick or injured members in the hospital or at home.
  1. Attending and participating, when requested, in funerals of active or retired members.
  1. Serving as a resource for members when dealing with the public in incidents, such as accidental deaths, suicides, suicidal subjects, serious accidents, drug and alcohol abuse and other such situations that may arise.
  2. Providing counseling and support for members and their families.
  1. Being alert to the needs of members and their families.
      1. ASSISTING THE DEPARTMENTOFFICE

The responsibilities of a chaplain related to the Department include, but are not limited to:

  1. Assisting members in the diffusion of a conflict or incident, when requested.
  1. Responding to natural and accidental deaths, suicides and attempted suicides, family disturbances and any other incident that in the judgment of the Shift Supervisor or supervisor aids in accomplishing the mission of the Department.
  2. Responding to all major disasters, such as natural disasters, bombings and similar critical incidents.
  3. Being on-call and, if possible, on-duty during major demonstrations or any public function that requires the presence of a large number of department members.
  4. Attending department and academy graduations, ceremonies and social events and offering invocations and benedictions, as requested.
  5. Participating in in-service training classes.
  1. Willingness to train others to enhance the effectiveness of the Department.
      1. ASSISTING THE COMMUNITY

The duties of a chaplain related to the community include, but are not limited to:

  1. Familiarity with the role of law enforcement in the community.
  1. Providing an additional link between the community, other chaplain coordinators and the Department.
  2. Providing liaison with various civic, business and religious organizations.
  1. Promptly facilitating requests for representatives or leaders of various denominations.
  1. Assisting the community in any other function as needed or requested.
  1. Making referrals in cases where specialized attention is needed or in cases that are beyond the chaplain’s ability to assist.
      1. CHAPLAIN MEETINGS

All chaplains are required to attend scheduled meetings. Any absences must be satisfactorily explained to the chaplain coordinator.

    1. PRIVILEGED COMMUNICATIONS

No person who provides chaplain services to members of the Department may work or volunteer for the Glenarden Police Department in any capacity other than that of chaplain.

Department chaplains shall be familiar with state evidentiary laws and rules pertaining to the limits of the clergy-penitent, psychotherapist-patient and other potentially applicable privileges and shall inform members when it appears reasonably likely that the member is discussing matters that are not subject to the privileged communications. In such cases, the chaplain should consider referring the member to a non-department counseling resource.

No chaplain shall provide counsel to or receive confidential communications from any Glenarden Police Department member concerning an incident personally witnessed by the chaplain or concerning an incident involving the chaplain.

    1. TRAINING

The Department will establish a minimum number of training hours and standards for department chaplains. The training, as approved by the Training Coordinator, may include:

  • Stress management
  • Death notifications
  • Symptoms of post-traumatic stress
  • Burnout for members of law enforcement and chaplains
  • Legal liability and confidentiality
  • Ethics
  • Responding to crisis situations
  • The law enforcement family
  • Substance abuse
  • Suicide
  • Officer injury or death
  • Sensitivity and diversity

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Public Safety Video Surveillance System

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidance for the placement and monitoring of department public safety video surveillance, as well as the storage and release of the captured images.

This policy only applies to overt, marked public safety video surveillance systems operated by the Department. It does not apply to mobile audio video systems, covert audio video systems or any other image capturing devices used by the Department.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department operates a public safety video surveillance system to complement its anti-crime strategy, to effectively allocate and deploy personnel, and to enhance public safety and security in public areas. Cameras may be placed in strategic locations throughout the Town to detect and deter crime, to help safeguard against potential threats to the public, to help manage emergency response situations during natural and man-made disasters and to assist Town officials in providing services to the community. Video surveillance in public areas will be conducted in a legal and ethical manner while recognizing and protecting constitutional standards of privacy.

    1. OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES

Only department-approved video surveillance equipment shall be utilized. Members authorized to monitor video surveillance equipment should only monitor public areas and public activities where no reasonable expectation of privacy exists. The Chief of Police or the authorized designee shall approve all proposed locations for the use of video surveillance technology and should consult with and be guided by legal counsel as necessary in making such determinations.

      1. PLACEMENT AND MONITORING

Camera placement will be guided by the underlying purpose or strategy associated with the overall video surveillance plan. As appropriate, the Chief of Police should confer with other affected Town divisions and designated community groups when evaluating camera placement. Environmental factors, including lighting, location of buildings, presence of vegetation or other obstructions should also be evaluated when determining placement.

Cameras shall only record video images and not sound. Recorded images may be used for a variety of purposes, including criminal investigations and monitoring of activity around high value or high threat areas. The public safety video surveillance system may be useful for the following purposes:

  1. To prevent, deter and identify criminal activity.
  1. To target identified areas of gang and narcotics complaints or activity.
  1. To respond to critical incidents.
  2. To assist in identifying, apprehending and prosecuting offenders.
  1. To document officer and offender conduct during interactions to safeguard the rights of the public and officers.
  2. To augment resources in a cost effective manner.
  1. To monitor pedestrian and vehicle traffic activity.

Images from each camera should be recorded in a manner consistent with the underlying purpose of the particular camera. Images should be transmitted to monitors installed in the Shift Supervisor’s office and the Communications Center. When activity warranting further investigation is reported or detected at any camera location, the available information should be provided to responding officers in a timely manner. The Shift Supervisor or trained the Communications Center personnel are authorized to adjust the cameras to more effectively view a particular area for any legitimate public safety purpose.

The Chief of Police may authorize video feeds from the public safety video surveillance system to be forwarded to a specified location for monitoring by other than police personnel, such as allied government agencies, road or traffic crews, fire or emergency operations personnel.

Unauthorized recording, viewing, reproduction, dissemination or retention is prohibited.

      1. CAMERA MARKINGS

All public areas monitored by public safety surveillance equipment shall be marked in a conspicuous manner with appropriate signs to inform the public that the area is under police surveillance. Signs should be well lit, placed appropriately and without obstruction to ensure visibility.

      1. INTEGRATION WITH OTHER TECHNOLOGY

The Department may elect to integrate its public safety video surveillance system with other technology to enhance available information. Systems such as gunshot detection, incident mapping, crime analysis, license plate recognition, facial recognition and other video-based analytical systems may be considered based upon availability and the nature of department strategy.

The Department should evaluate the availability and propriety of networking or otherwise collaborating with appropriate private sector entities and shall evaluate whether the use of certain camera systems, such as pan-tilt-zoom systems, and video enhancement or other analytical technology, requires additional safeguards.

    1. VIDEO SUPERVISION

Supervisors should monitor video surveillance access and usage to ensure members are within department policy and applicable laws. Supervisors should ensure such use and access is appropriately documented.

      1. VIDEO LOG

A log should be maintained at all locations where video surveillance equipment is located. The log should be used to document all persons not assigned to the monitoring locations who have been given access to view or monitor images provided by the video surveillance cameras. The logs should, at a minimum, record the:

  1. Date and time access was given.
  1. Name and agency of the person being given access to the images.
  1. Name of person authorizing access.
  1. Identifiable portion of images viewed.
      1. PROHIBITED ACTIVITY

Public safety video surveillance systems will not intentionally be used to invade the privacy of individuals or observe areas where a reasonable expectation of privacy exists.

Public video surveillance equipment shall not be used in an unequal or discriminatory manner and shall not target individual characteristics including, but not limited to race, ethnicity, national origin, religion, disability, gender or sexual orientation.

Video surveillance equipment shall not be used to harass, intimidate or discriminate against any individual or group.

335.5   STORAGE AND RETENTION OF MEDIA

All downloaded media shall be stored in a secure area with access restricted to authorized persons. A recording needed as evidence shall be copied to a suitable medium and booked into evidence in accordance with established evidence procedures. All actions taken with respect to retention of media shall be appropriately documented.

The type of video surveillance technology employed and the manner in which recordings are used and stored will affect retention periods. The recordings should be stored and retained in accordance with the established records retention schedule (Md. Code SG § 10-610; COMAR 14.18.02.04).

335.5.1   EVIDENTIARY INTEGRITY

All downloaded and retained media shall be treated in the same manner as other evidence. Media shall be accessed, maintained, stored and retrieved in a manner that ensures its integrity as evidence, including strict adherence to chain of custody requirements. Electronic trails, including encryption, digital masking of innocent or uninvolved individuals to preserve anonymity, authenticity certificates and date and time stamping shall be used as appropriate to preserve individual rights and to ensure the authenticity and maintenance of a secure evidentiary chain of custody.

    1. RELEASE OF VIDEO IMAGES

All recorded video images gathered by the public safety video surveillance equipment are for the official use of the Glenarden Police Department.

Requests for recorded video images from the public or the media shall be processed in the same manner as requests for department public records.

Requests for recorded images from other law enforcement agencies shall be referred to the Shift Supervisor for release in accordance with a specific and legitimate law enforcement purpose.

Recorded video images that are the subject of a court order or subpoena shall be processed in accordance with the established department subpoena process.

    1. VIDEO SURVEILLANCE AUDIT

The Chief of Police or the authorized designee will conduct an annual review of the public safety video surveillance system. The review should include an analysis of the cost, benefit and effectiveness of the system, including any public safety issues that were effectively addressed or any significant prosecutions that resulted, and any systemic operational or administrative issues that were identified, including those related to training, discipline or policy.

The results of each review shall be appropriately documented and maintained by the Chief of Police or the authorized designee and other applicable advisory bodies. Any recommendations for training or policy should be promptly addressed.

    1. TRAINING

All department members authorized to operate or access public video surveillance systems shall receive appropriate training. Training should include guidance on the use of cameras, interaction with dispatch and patrol operations and a review regarding relevant policies and procedures, including this policy. Training should also address state and federal law related to the use of video surveillance equipment and privacy.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Child and Dependent Adult Safety

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidelines to ensure that children and dependent adults are not left without appropriate care in the event their caregiver or guardian is arrested or otherwise prevented from providing care due to actions taken by members of this department. This policy does not address the actions to be taken during the course of a child abuse or dependent adult investigation. These are covered in the Child Abuse and Adult Abuse policies.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of this department to mitigate, to the extent reasonably possible, the stressful experience individuals may have when their parent or caregiver is arrested. The Glenarden Police Department will endeavor to create a strong, cooperative relationship with local, state and community-based social services to ensure an effective, collaborative response that addresses the needs of those affected.

    1. PROCEDURES DURING AN ARREST

When encountering an arrest or prolonged detention situation, officers should make reasonable attempts to determine if the arrestee is responsible for children or dependent adults. In some cases this may be obvious, such as when children or dependent adults are present. However, officers should inquire if the arrestee has caregiver responsibilities for any children or dependent adults who are without appropriate supervision. The following steps should be taken:

  1. Inquire about and confirm the location of any children or dependent adults.
  1. Look for evidence of children and dependent adults. Officers should be mindful that some arrestees may conceal the fact that they have a dependent for fear the individual may be taken from them.
  2. Consider inquiring of witnesses, neighbors, friends and relatives of the arrestee as to whether the person is responsible for a child or dependent adult.

Whenever reasonably possible, officers should consider reasonable alternatives to arresting a parent, guardian or caregiver in the presence of his/her child or dependent adult. Whenever it is safe to do so, officers should allow the parent or caregiver to assure children or dependent adults that they will be provided care. If this is not safe or if the demeanor of the parent or caregiver suggests this conversation would be non-productive, the officer at the scene should explain the reason for the arrest in age-appropriate language and offer reassurance to the child or dependent adult that he/she will receive appropriate care.

      1. AFTER AN ARREST

Whenever an arrest is made, the officer should take all reasonable steps to ensure the safety of the arrestee’s disclosed or discovered children or dependent adults.

Officers should allow the arrestee reasonable time to arrange for care of children and dependent adults. Temporary placement with family or friends may be appropriate. However, any decision should give priority to a care solution that is in the best interest of the child or dependent adult. In such cases the following guidelines should be followed:

  1. Allow the person reasonable time to arrange for the care of children and dependent adults with a responsible party, as appropriate.
  2. Unless there is evidence to the contrary (e.g., signs of abuse, drug use, unsafe environment), officers should respect the parent or caregiver’s judgment regarding arrangements for care. It is generally best if the child or dependent adult remains with relatives or family friends that he/she knows and trusts because familiarity with surroundings and consideration for comfort, emotional state and safety are important.
    1. Except when an existing court order limits contact, the officer should attempt to locate and place children or dependent adults with the non-arrested parent, guardian or caregiver.
    2. Provide for the immediate supervision of children or dependent adults until an appropriate caregiver arrives.
  3. Notify child protective services or the adult protective services through the local Departments of Social Services, if appropriate.
  4. Notify the field supervisor or Shift Supervisor of the disposition of children or dependent adults.

If children or dependent adults are at school or another known location outside the household at the time of arrest, the arresting officer should attempt to contact the school or other known location and inform the principal or appropriate responsible adult of the caregiver’s arrest and of the arrangements being made for the care of the arrestee’s dependent. The result of such actions should be documented in the associated report.

      1. DURING THE BOOKING PROCESS

During the booking process, the arrestee shall be allowed to make telephone calls to arrange for the care of any child or dependent adult in accordance with the Temporary Custody of Adults Policy.

If an arrestee is unable to arrange for the care of any child or dependent adult through this process, a supervisor should be contacted to determine the appropriate steps to arrange for care. These steps may include additional telephone calls or contacting a local, county or state services agency.

      1. REPORTING
  1. For all arrests where children are present or living in the household, the reporting member will document the following information:
    1. Name
    2. Sex
    1. Sex
    1. Age
    1. How, where and with whom or which agency the child was placed
  1. For all arrests where dependent adults are present or living in the household, the reporting member will document the following information:
    1. Name
    1. Sex
    1. Age
    1. Whether he/she reasonably appears able to care for him/herself
    1. Disposition or placement information if he/she is unable to care for him/herself
      1. SUPPORT AND COUNSELING REFERRAL

If, in the judgment of the handling officers, the child or dependent adult would benefit from additional assistance, such as counseling services, contact with a victim advocate or a crisis response telephone number, the appropriate referral information may be provided.

    1. DEPENDENT WELFARE SERVICES

Whenever an arrestee is unwilling or incapable of arranging for the appropriate care of any child or dependent adult, the handling officer should consider contacting the appropriate welfare service or other department-approved social service agency to determine whether protective custody is appropriate.

Only when other reasonable options are exhausted should a child or dependent adult be transported to the police facility, transported in a marked law enforcement vehicle or taken into formal protective custody.

Under no circumstances should a child or dependent adult be left unattended or without appropriate care.

    1. TRAINING

The Training Coordinator is responsible to ensure that all members of this department who may be involved in arrests affecting children or dependent adults receive approved training on effective safety measures when a parent, guardian or caregiver is arrested.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Service Animals

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide the guidelines necessary to ensure the rights of individuals who use service animals to assist with disabilities are protected in accordance with Title II of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA).

      1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Service animal – A dog that is trained to do work or perform tasks for the benefit of an individual with a disability, including a physical, sensory, psychiatric, intellectual or other mental disability. The work or tasks performed by a service animal must be directly related to the individual’s disability (28 CFR 35.104).

Service animal also includes a miniature horse if the horse is trained to do work or perform tasks for people with disabilities, provided the horse is housebroken, is under the handler’s control, the facility can accommodate the horse’s type, size and weight, and the horse’s presence will not compromise legitimate safety requirements necessary for safe operation of the facility (28 CFR 35.136(i)).

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to provide services and access to persons with service animals in the same manner as those without service animals. Department members shall protect the rights of persons assisted by service animals in accordance with state and federal law.

    1. IDENTIFICATION AND USE OF SERVICE ANIMALS

Some service animals may be readily identifiable. However, many do not have a distinctive symbol, harness or collar.

Service animals may be used in a number of ways to provide assistance, including:

  • Guiding people who are blind or have low vision.
  • Alerting people who are deaf or hard of hearing.
  • Retrieving or picking up items, opening doors or flipping switches for people who have limited use of their hands, arms or legs.
  • Pulling wheelchairs.
  • Providing physical support and assisting with stability and balance.
  • Doing work or performing tasks for persons with traumatic brain injury, intellectual disabilities or psychiatric disabilities, such as reminding a person with depression to take medication.
  • Alerting a person with anxiety to the onset of panic attacks, providing tactile stimulation to calm a person with post-traumatic stress disorder, assisting people with schizophrenia to distinguish between hallucinations and reality, and helping people with traumatic brain injury to locate misplaced items or follow daily routines.
    1. MEMBER RESPONSIBILITIES

Service animals that are assisting individuals with disabilities are permitted in all public facilities and areas where the general public is allowed. Department members are expected to treat individuals with service animals with the same courtesy and respect that the Glenarden Police Department affords to all members of the public (28 CFR 35.136).

      1. INQUIRY

If it is apparent or if a member is aware that an animal is a service animal, the individual generally should not be asked any questions as to the status of the animal. If it is unclear whether an animal meets the definition of a service animal, the member should ask the individual only the following questions (28 CFR 35.136(f)):

  • Is the animal required because of a disability?
  • What task or service has the service animal been trained to perform?

If the individual explains that the animal is required because of a disability and has been trained to work or perform at least one task, the animal meets the definition of a service animal and no further questions as to the animal’s status should be asked. The individual should not be questioned about his/her disability nor should the person be asked to provide any license, certification or identification card for the service animal.

      1. CONTACT

Service animals are not pets. Department members should not interfere with the important work performed by a service animal by talking to, petting or otherwise initiating contact with a service animal.

      1. REMOVAL

If a service animal is not housebroken or exhibits vicious behavior, poses a direct threat to the health of others, or unreasonably disrupts or interferes with normal business operations, an officer may direct the handler to remove the animal from the premises. The barking of a dog alone is not a threat nor does a direct threat exist if the person takes prompt, effective action to control the service animal (28 CFR 35.136(b)).

Each incident must be considered individually and past incidents alone are not cause for excluding a service animal. Removal of a service animal may not be used as a reason to refuse service to an individual with disabilities. Members of this department are expected to provide all services as are reasonably available to an individual with a disability, with or without a service animal.

      1. COMPLAINTS

When handling calls of a complaint regarding a service animal, members of this department should remain neutral and should be prepared to explain the ADA requirements concerning service animals to the concerned parties. Businesses are required to allow service animals to accompany their handlers into the same areas that other customers or members of the public are allowed (28 CFR 36.302).

Absent a violation of law independent of the ADA, officers should take no enforcement action beyond keeping the peace. Individuals who believe they have been discriminated against as a result of a disability should be referred to the Civil Rights Division of the U.S. Department of Justice (DOJ).

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Volunteers

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy  establishes the  guidelines  for  Capitol Heights  Police  Department  volunteers  to supplement and assist department personnel in their duties. Trained volunteers are members who can augment department personnel and help complete various tasks.

      1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Active status – A volunteer who provides 144 hours or more of service each year.

Police auxiliary, reserve volunteer program or program – The various activities using volunteers to assist the Glenarden Police Department by performing administrative or technical tasks, or other services in support of the duties or mission of the Department (COMAR 12.04.07.02(B)(6)).

Volunteer – An individual who performs a service for the Department without promise, expectation or receipt of compensation for services rendered. This may include unpaid chaplains, unpaid reserve or auxiliary officers, interns, persons providing administrative support, and youth involved in a law enforcement Explorer Post, among others.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department shall ensure that volunteers are properly appointed, trained and supervised to carry out specified tasks and duties in order to create an efficient department and improve services to the community.

The program supporting the use of volunteers shall meet all the requirements and have been approved as required by law (COMAR 12.04.07.03; COMAR 12.04.07.04).

    1. ELIGIBILITY

Requirements for participation as a volunteer for the Department may include, but are not limited to:

  1. Residency in the Town of Prince George County.
  1. Being at least 18 years of age for all positions other than Explorer.
  1. Being at least 14 years of age for Explorer.
  1. Possession of a valid driver’s license if the position requires vehicle operation.
  1. Possession of liability insurance for any personally owned equipment, vehicles or horses utilized during volunteer work.
  2. No conviction of a felony, any crime of a sexual nature or against children, any crime related to assault or violence, any crime related to dishonesty, or any crime related to impersonating a law enforcement officer.
  3. No conviction of a misdemeanor or gross misdemeanor crime within the past 10 years, excluding petty misdemeanor traffic offenses.
  4. No mental illness or chemical dependency condition that may adversely affect the person’s ability to serve in the position.
  5. Physical requirements reasonably appropriate to the assignment.
  1. A  personal  background  history  and  character  suitable  for  a  person  representing  the Department, as validated by a background investigation.

The Chief of Police may apply exceptions for eligibility based on organizational needs and the qualifications of the individual.

    1. RECRUITMENT, SELECTION AND APPOINTMENT

The Glenarden Police Department shall endeavor to recruit and appoint only those applicants who meet the high ethical, moral and professional standards set forth by this department.

      1. RECRUITMENT

Volunteers should be recruited on a continuous and ongoing basis consistent with department policy on equal opportunity, nondiscriminatory employment. A primary qualification for participation in the application process should be an interest in and an ability to assist the Department in serving the public. Requests for volunteers should be submitted in writing by interested department members to the volunteer coordinator through the requester’s immediate supervisor. A complete description of the volunteer’s duties and a requested time frame should be included in the request. All department members should understand that the recruitment of volunteers is enhanced by creative and interesting assignments. The volunteer coordinator may withhold assignment of any volunteer until such time as the requestor is prepared to make effective use of volunteer resources.

      1. SELECTION

Volunteer candidates shall successfully complete the following process prior to appointment as a volunteer:

  1. Submit the appropriate written application.
  1. Interview with the volunteer coordinator.
  1. Successfully complete an appropriate-level background investigation.
      1. APPOINTMENT

Service as a volunteer with the Department shall begin with an official notice of acceptance or appointment by the Chief of Police or the authorized designee. Notice may only be given by an authorized representative of the Department, who will normally be the volunteer coordinator.

No volunteer should begin any assignment until he/she has been officially accepted for that position and has completed all required screening and paperwork. At the time of final acceptance,

each volunteer should complete all required enrollment paperwork and will receive a copy of the position description and agreement of service with the Department.

All volunteers shall receive a copy of the volunteer orientation materials and shall be required to sign a volunteer agreement.

Volunteers should be placed only in assignments or programs that are consistent with their knowledge, skills, abilities and the needs of the Department.

Volunteers serve at the discretion of the Chief of Police.

    1. IDENTIFICATION AND UNIFORMS

As representatives of the Department, volunteers are responsible for presenting a professional image to the community. Volunteers shall dress appropriately for the conditions and performance of their duties. Uniforms and necessary safety equipment will be provided for each volunteer. Identification symbols worn by volunteers shall be different and distinct from those worn by officers or members of this department through the inclusion of “Volunteer,” “Reserve” or “Auxiliary” on the uniform.

Volunteers will be issued Glenarden Police Department identification cards must be carried at all times while on-duty. The identification cards will be the standard Glenarden Police Department identification cards, with the exception that “Volunteer,” “Reserve” or “Auxiliary” will be indicated on the cards.

    1. PERSONNEL WORKING AS VOLUNTEERS

Qualified regular department personnel, when authorized, may also serve as volunteers. However, this department shall not utilize the services of volunteers in such a way that it would violate employment laws, collective bargaining agreements or memorandums of understanding (e.g., a detention officer participating as a volunteer for reduced or no pay). Therefore, the volunteer coordinator should consult with the Personnel Department prior to allowing regular department personnel to serve in a volunteer capacity (29 CFR 553.30).

    1. VOLUNTEER COORDINATOR

The Chief of Police shall delegate certain responsibilities to a volunteer coordinator. The coordinator shall be appointed by and directly responsible to the Administration Lieutenant or the authorized designee.

The volunteer coordinator shall serve as the liaison between the volunteers and the Chief of Police. The function of the coordinator is to provide a central coordinating point for effective volunteer management within the Department, and to direct and assist efforts to jointly provide more productive volunteer services. Under the general direction of the Chief of Police or the authorized designee, volunteers shall report to the volunteer coordinator and/or Shift Supervisor.

The volunteer coordinator may appoint a senior volunteer or other designee to assist in the coordination of volunteers and their activities.

The responsibilities of the coordinator or the authorized designee include, but are not limited to:

  1. Recruiting, selecting and training qualified volunteers.
  1. Conducting volunteer meetings.
  1. Establishing and maintaining a volunteer callout roster.
  1. Maintaining records for each volunteer.
  1. Tracking and evaluating the contribution of volunteers.
  1. Maintaining a record of volunteer schedules and work hours.
  1. Completing and disseminating, as appropriate, all necessary paperwork and information.
  1. Planning periodic recognition events.
  1. Maintaining liaison with other volunteer-utilizing programs in the community and assisting in community-wide efforts to recognize and promote volunteering.
  2. Maintaining volunteer orientation and training materials, and outlining expectations, policies and responsibilities for all volunteers.

An evaluation of the overall use of volunteers will be conducted on an annual basis by the coordinator.

    1. DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Volunteers assist department personnel as needed. Assignments of volunteers will usually be to augment the Operations Services Prince George County PD. Volunteers may be assigned to other areas within the Department as needed. Volunteers should be placed only in assignments or programs that are consistent with their knowledge, skills, abilities and the needs of the Department.

All volunteers will be assigned to duties by the volunteer coordinator or the authorized designee.

      1. COMPLIANCE

Volunteers shall be required to adhere to all department policies and procedures. A copy of the policies and procedures will be made available to each volunteer upon appointment. The volunteer shall become thoroughly familiar with these policies.

Whenever a rule, regulation or guideline in this Policy Manual refers to regular department personnel, it shall also apply to a volunteer, unless by its nature it is inapplicable.

Volunteers are required by this department to meet department-approved training requirements as applicable to their assignments.

      1. VOLUNTEER MEETINGS

All volunteers are required to attend scheduled meetings. Any absences must be satisfactorily explained to the volunteer coordinator.

338.9 TAS K-SPECIFIC TRAINING

Task-specific training is intended to provide the required instruction and practice for volunteers to properly and safely perform their assigned duties. A volunteer’s training should correspond to his/ her assignment as determined by the volunteer coordinator. Volunteers will be provided with an orientation program to acquaint them with the policies of the Department and law enforcement procedures applicable to their assignments.

Volunteers should receive position-specific training to ensure they have adequate knowledge and skills to complete the required tasks, and should receive ongoing training as deemed appropriate by their supervisors or the volunteer coordinator.

Training should reinforce to volunteers that they shall not intentionally represent themselves as, or by omission infer that they are officers or other full-time members of the Department. They shall always represent themselves as volunteers. All volunteers shall comply with the rules of conduct and with all orders and directives, either oral or written, issued by the Department.

338.9.1   VOLUNTEER TRAINING MATERIALS

Each new volunteer will be issued volunteer training materials. The materials outline the subject matter and skills necessary to properly function as a volunteer with the Glenarden Police Department. The volunteer shall become knowledgeable of the subject matter and proficient with the skills as set forth in the training materials.

338.10   SUPERVISION

Each volunteer must have a clearly identified supervisor who is responsible for direct management of that volunteer. This supervisor will be responsible for day-to-day management and guidance of the work of the volunteer and should be available to the volunteer for consultation and assistance.

Functional supervision of volunteers is the responsibility of the supervisor in charge of the volunteer’s assigned duties. The following are some considerations that supervisors should keep in mind while supervising volunteers:

  1. Take the time to introduce volunteers to members on all levels.
  1. Ensure volunteers have work space and necessary office supplies.
  1. Make sure the work is challenging. Do not hesitate to give volunteers an assignment or task that will tap these valuable resources.

A volunteer may be assigned as a supervisor of other volunteers, provided that the supervising volunteer is under the direct supervision of Glenarden Police Department personnel.

      1. EVALUATIONS

While in training, volunteers should be continuously evaluated using standardized daily and weekly observation reports. A volunteer will be considered a trainee until he/she has satisfactorily

completed training. Volunteers who have completed their training should be evaluated annually using performance dimensions applicable to the duties and authorities granted to that volunteer.

      1. FITNESS FOR DUTY

No volunteer shall report for work or be at work when his/her judgment or physical condition has been impaired due to illness or injury, or by the use of alcohol or drugs, whether legal or illegal.

Volunteers shall report to their supervisors any change in status that may affect their ability to fulfill their duties. This includes, but is not limited to, the following:

  1. Driver’s license
  1. Medical condition
  1. Arrests
  1. Criminal investigations
  1. All law enforcement contacts

338.11 INFORMATION ACCESS

With appropriate security clearance, a volunteer may have access to or be in the vicinity of criminal histories, investigative files or information portals. Unless otherwise directed by a supervisor, the duties of the position or department policy, all such information shall be considered confidential. Only that information specifically identified and approved by authorized members shall be released. Confidential information shall be given only to persons who have a need and a right to know as determined by department policy and supervisory personnel.

A volunteer whose assignment requires the use of, or access to, confidential information will be required to have his/her fingerprints submitted to the Maryland Criminal Justice Information System (CJIS) to obtain clearance. Volunteers working this type of assignment will receive training in data practices and be required to sign a nondisclosure agreement before being given an assignment with the Department. Subsequent unauthorized disclosure of any confidential information verbally, in writing or by any other means by the volunteer is grounds for immediate dismissal and possible criminal prosecution. Volunteers shall not address public gatherings, appear on radio or television, prepare any article for publication, act as correspondents to newspapers or other periodicals, release or divulge any information concerning the activities of the Department, or maintain that they represent the Department in such matters without permission from the proper department personnel.

338.11.1 RADIO AND MDT USAGE

Volunteers shall successfully complete state and federal database access training and radio procedures training prior to using the police radio or MDT and shall comply with all related provisions. The volunteer coordinator should ensure that radio and database access training is provided for volunteers whenever necessary.

338.12   EQUIPMENT

Any property or equipment issued by the Department shall be for official and authorized use only. Any property or equipment issued to a volunteer shall remain the property of the Department and shall be returned at the termination of service.

338.12.1   VEHICLE USE

Any volunteer who operates any vehicle while acting in the capacity of a volunteer shall receive training in safe driving and defensive driving. The specific training and course of study shall be determined by the volunteer coordinator.

Volunteers assigned to duties that require the use of a vehicle must first complete:

  1. A driving safety briefing and department-approved driver safety course.
  1. Verification that the volunteer possesses a valid driver’s license.
  1. Verification that the volunteer carries current vehicle insurance.

The coordinator should ensure that all volunteers receive safety briefing updates and license and insurance verification at least once a year.

When operating department vehicles, volunteers shall obey all rules of the road, including seat belt requirements.

Volunteers should not operate a marked law enforcement vehicle unless there is a prominently placed sign indicating that the vehicle is out of service.

Volunteers are not authorized to operate department vehicles under emergency conditions (lights and siren).

338.13   DISCIPLINARY PROCEDURES/TERMINATION

If a volunteer has a personnel complaint made against him/her or becomes involved in an internal investigation, the matter shall be investigated in compliance with the Personnel Complaints Policy.

Volunteers are considered at-will and may be removed from service at the discretion of the Chief of Police, with or without cause. Volunteers shall have no property interest in their continued appointments. However, if a volunteer is removed for alleged misconduct, the volunteer will be afforded an opportunity solely to clear his/her name through a liberty interest hearing, which shall be limited to a single appearance before the Chief of Police or the authorized designee.

Volunteers may resign from volunteer service with the Department at any time. It is requested that volunteers who intend to resign provide advance notice and a reason for their decision.

338.13.1   EXIT INTERVIEWS

The volunteer coordinator should conduct exit interviews, where possible. These interviews should ascertain why the volunteer is leaving the position and should solicit the volunteer’s suggestions on improving the position. When appropriate, an exit interview should also include a discussion on the possibility of involvement in some other capacity with the Department.

338.14   REPORTING

The volunteer coordinator shall:

  1. Maintain annual records on each volunteer, including (COMAR 12.04.07.07(A)):
    1. Full name.
    2. Social Security number.
    3. The total itemized hours of service worked each month.
    4. Other information the Maryland Police Training Commission (MPTC) or the State Comptroller may require.
  2. Provide to each active status volunteer, no later than February 15 of each year, a written report in the format specified by MPTC, the volunteer’s specific information, including:
    1. The identity of the volunteer
    2. Certification signed by an authorized department member stating that the volunteer is qualified to apply for the subtraction modification under Md. Code TG § 10-208(l)A(2) on the basis that the individual has, between January 1 and December 31 of the preceding year:
      1. Participated in a MPTC-approved program.
      2. Met the requirements of Md. Code TG § 10-208(l)(2) to be considered a qualifying police auxiliary or reserve volunteer.
      3. Met the minimum requirements for active status.
  3. Submit an annual report to MPTC and the State Comptroller by October 1, in the format specified, that includes the annual records for each volunteer collected under COMAR 12.04.07.07(A) from January 1 through December 31 of the preceding year that either (COMAR 12.04.07.07(C)):
  4. Qualified to apply for the subtraction modification established under Md. Code TG

§ 10-208(l).

  1. Otherwise met minimum requirements for active status.
  2. Report any change to the information submitted as part of the original application for MPTC approval or the department program supporting volunteers to the Deputy MPTC Director within 30 days of the effective date (COMAR 12.04.07.06(B)).

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Native American Graves Protection and Repatriation

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy is intended ensure the protection and security of ancient or historic grave sites, including notification of personnel responsible for cultural items, in compliance with the Native American Graves Protection and Repatriation Act (NAGPRA) (25 USC § 3001 et seq.).

339.1.1   DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include (43 CFR 10.2):

Funerary objects and associated funerary objects – Objects that, as part of the death rite or ceremony of a culture, are reasonably believed to have been placed intentionally at the time of death or later with or near individual human remains, or that were made exclusively for burial purposes or to contain human remains.

Native American human remains – The physical remains of the body of a person of Native American ancestry.

Objects of cultural patrimony – Objects having ongoing historical, traditional, or cultural importance that is central to the Native American group or culture itself, and therefore cannot be appropriated or conveyed by any individual, including members of the Native American group or Native Hawaiian organization. Such objects must have been considered inalienable by the Native American group at the time the object was separated from the group.

Sacred objects – Specific ceremonial objects needed by traditional Native American religious leaders for the practice of traditional Native American religions.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department that the protection of Native American human remains, funerary objects, associated funerary objects, sacred objects or objects of cultural patrimony is the responsibility of all members. Such protection includes minimizing destruction, contamination, inadvertent disruption or complicated custody transfer processes.

    1. COMPLIANCE WITH THE NATIVE AMERICAN GRAVES PROTECTION AND REPATRIATION ACT

Upon discovery or arrival upon a scene where it reasonably appears that a Native American grave, human remains, funerary objects, associated funerary objects, sacred objects or objects of cultural patrimony are exposed or otherwise unsecured, members shall secure the site in the same manner as a crime scene. All activity at the scene other than scene preservation activity must cease (43 CFR 10.4).

No photography or video recording may be permitted by the media or any group or individual who may wish to exhibit the remains.

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

Native American Graves Protection and Repatriation

 

Without delay, the appropriate agency or group shall be notified to respond and take control of the scene. These include the following (43 CFR 10.4):

  • Federal land – Appropriate agency at the U.S. Department of the Interior or U.S. Department of Agriculture
  • State land – The Maryland Historical Trust and the Maryland Commission on Indian Affairs (COMAR 34.04.06.01 et seq.)
  • Tribal land – Responsible Indian tribal official
    1. EVIDENCE AND PROPERTY

If the location has been investigated as a possible homicide scene prior to identification as a NAGPRA site, investigators shall work with other appropriate agencies and individuals to ensure the proper transfer and repatriation of any material collected. Members shall ensure that any remains or artifacts located at the site are expediently processed (43 CFR 10.6).

    1. DISPOSITION OF REMAINS

This department shall cooperate with other government agencies, the Maryland Commission on Indian Affairs, the Advisory Committee on Archeology, the Burial Sites and Objects Review Committee and the Maryland Historical Trust to accomplish the appropriate disposition of Native American human remains (COMAR 34.04.06.01 et seq.).

  GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Off-Duty Law Enforcement Actions

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy is intended to provide guidelines for officers of the Glenarden Police Department with respect to taking law enforcement action while off-duty.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department that officers generally should not initiate law enforcement action while off-duty. Officers are not expected to place themselves in unreasonable peril and should first consider reporting and monitoring the activity. However, any officer who becomes aware of an incident or circumstance that he/she reasonably believes poses an imminent threat of serious bodily injury or death, or significant property damage or loss may take reasonable action to minimize or eliminate the threat.

    1. DECISION TO INTERVENE

There is no legal requirement for off-duty officers to take law enforcement action. Officers should consider waiting for on-duty uniformed peace officers to arrive and gather as much accurate intelligence as possible, instead of immediately intervening. However, should an officer decide to intervene, he/she must evaluate whether the action is necessary or desirable, and should take into consideration:

  1. The potential to be misidentified by other peace officers.
  1. The potential to be misidentified by members of the public, who may be armed or who may take action.
  2. The tactical disadvantage of being alone and the possibility of multiple or hidden suspects.
  1. Limited off-duty firearms capabilities and ammunition.
  1. The inability to communicate with responding peace officers.
  1. The lack of equipment, such as body armor, handcuffs or control devices.
  1. Unfamiliarity with the surroundings, including escape routes.
  1. The potential for increased risk to bystanders by confronting a suspect or taking action.

340.3.1 INTERVENTION PROCEDURE

If involvement is reasonably necessary, the officer should attempt to call or have someone else call 9-1-1 to request immediate assistance. If possible, the dispatcher receiving the call should obtain a description of the off-duty officer from the caller and broadcast that information to responding officers.

Whenever practicable, the officer should loudly and repeatedly identify him/herself  as  an officer with the Glenarden Police Department until acknowledged. Official identification should also be displayed when possible.

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

Off-Duty Law Enforcement Actions

 

    1. CONSIDERATIONS

When encountering a non-uniformed officer in public, uniformed officers should wait for acknowledgement by the non-uniformed officer in case he/she is working in an undercover capacity.

      1. NON-SWORN RESPONSIBILITIES

Non-sworn members should not become involved in any law enforcement action while off-duty except to notify the local law enforcement authority and remain at the scene, if safe and practicable.

      1. INCIDENTS OF PERSONAL INTEREST

Department members should refrain from handling incidents of personal interest (e.g., family or neighbor disputes) and should remain neutral. In such circumstances members should call the responsible agency to handle the matter.

340.5   REPORTING

If prior notification to the appropriate local law enforcement agency is not reasonably possible before taking action, the officer shall notify the agency as soon as reasonably practicable. Officers shall cooperate fully with the agency having jurisdiction by providing statements or reports as requested or as appropriate.

Officers shall notify the Shift Supervisor regarding any law enforcement action taken while off- duty. The Shift Supervisor may send a supervisor to the location. The supervisor may request assistance from the Prince George County PD, if deemed appropriate.

The Shift Supervisor shall determine whether a criminal or administrative report should be completed by the involved officer.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Department Use of Social Media

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidelines to ensure that any use of social media on behalf of the Department is consistent with the department mission.

This policy does not address all aspects of social media use. Specifically, it does not address:

  • Personal  use  of  social  media  by  department  members  (see  the  Employee  Speech, Expression and Social Networking Policy).
  • Use of social media in personnel processes (see the Recruitment and Selection Policy).
  • Use of social media as part of a criminal investigation, other than disseminating information to the public on behalf of this department (see the Investigation and Prosecution Policy).

341.1.1   DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Social media – Any of a wide array of Internet-based tools and platforms that allow for the sharing of information, such as the department website or social networking services.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department may use social media as a method of effectively informing the public about department services, issues, investigations and other relevant events.

Department members shall ensure that the use or access of social media is done in a manner that protects the constitutional rights of all.

    1. AUTHORIZED USERS

Only members authorized by the Chief of Police or the authorized designee may utilize social media on behalf of the Department. Authorized members shall use only department-approved equipment during the normal course of duties to post and monitor department-related social media, unless they are specifically authorized to do otherwise by their supervisors.

The Chief of Police may develop specific guidelines identifying the type of content that may be posted. Any content that does not strictly conform to the guidelines should be approved by a supervisor prior to posting. Requests to post information over department social media by members who are not authorized to post should be made through the member’s chain of command.

    1. AUTHORIZED CONTENT

Only content that is appropriate for public release, that supports the department mission and conforms to all department policies regarding the release of information may be posted.

Examples of appropriate content include:

  1. Announcements.
  2. Tips and information related to crime prevention.
  3. Investigative requests for information.
  4. Requests that ask the community to engage in projects that are relevant to the department mission.
  5. Real-time safety information that is related to in-progress crimes, geographical warnings or disaster information.
  6. Traffic information.
  7. Press releases.
  8. Recruitment of personnel.

341.4.1 INCIDENT-SPECIFIC USE

In instances of active incidents where speed, accuracy and frequent updates are paramount (e.g., crime alerts, public safety information, traffic issues), the Press Information Officer or the authorized designee will be responsible for the compilation of information to be released, subject to the approval of the Incident Commander.

341.5   PROHIBITED CONTENT

Content that is prohibited from posting includes, but is not limited to:

  1. Content that is abusive, discriminatory, inflammatory or sexually explicit.
  2. Any information that violates individual rights, including confidentiality and/or privacy rights and those provided under state, federal or local laws.
  3. Any information that could compromise an ongoing investigation.
  4. Any information that could tend to compromise or damage the mission, function, reputation or professionalism of the Glenarden Police Department or its members.
  5. Any information that could compromise the safety and security of department operations, members of the Department, victims, suspects or the public.
  6. Any content posted for personal use.
  7. Any content that has not been properly authorized by this policy or a supervisor.

Any member who becomes aware of content on this department’s social media site that he/she believes is unauthorized or inappropriate should promptly report such content to a supervisor. The supervisor will ensure its removal from public view and investigate the cause of the entry.

341.5.1   PUBLIC POSTING PROHIBITED

Department social media sites shall be designed and maintained to prevent posting of content by the public.

The Department may provide a method for members of the public to contact department members directly.

    1. MONITORING CONTENT

The Chief of Police will appoint a supervisor to review, at least annually, the use of department social media and report back on, at a minimum, the resources being used, the effectiveness of the content, any unauthorized or inappropriate content and the resolution of any issues.

    1. RETENTION OF RECORDS

The Administration Lieutenant should work with the Custodian of Records to establish a method of ensuring that public records generated in the process of social media use are retained in accordance with established records retention schedules.

    1. TRAINING

Authorized members should receive training that, at a minimum, addresses legal issues concerning the appropriate use of social media sites, as well as privacy, civil rights, dissemination and retention of information posted on department sites.

Chapter 4 - Patrol Operations

Patrol

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to define the patrol function and address intraorganizational cooperation and information sharing.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department provides patrol services 24 hours a day, seven days a week and will prioritize responses to requests for emergency services using available resources to enhance the safety of the public and department members.

    1. FUNCTION

Patrol will generally be conducted by uniformed officers in clearly marked law enforcement vehicles in assigned jurisdictional areas of Prince George County. The function of patrol is to respond to calls for assistance and reports of criminal activity, act as a deterrent to crime, enforce state and local laws, identify community needs, provide support and assistance to the community and respond to emergencies.

Patrol services include, but are not limited to:

  1. Responding to emergency calls for service.
  1. Apprehending criminal offenders.
  1. Providing mutual aid and assistance to other agencies for emergency and law enforcement- related activities.
  2. Patrol that is directed at the prevention of criminal acts, traffic violations and collisions, the maintenance of public order and the discovery of hazardous situations or conditions.
  3. Responding to reports of both criminal and non-criminal acts.
  1. Responding to routine calls for service, such as public assistance or public safety.
  1. Traffic direction and control.
  1. Crime prevention activities, such as residential inspections, business inspections and community presentations.
  2. Community-oriented policing and problem-solving activities including the application of resources to improve or resolve specific problems or situations and contacting or assisting members of the public in a positive way.
  3. The application of resources to specific problems or situations within the community that may be improved or resolved by community-oriented policing and problem-solving strategies.

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

Patrol

 

    1. INFORMATION SHARING

To the extent feasible, all information relevant to the mission of the Department should be shared among all Prince George County PDs and specialized units on a timely basis. Members should be provided with opportunities on a regular basis to share information during the daily roll calls and to attend roll calls of other Prince George County PDs or specialized units.

Additionally, information should be shared with outside agencies and the public in conformance with department policies and applicable laws.

    1. CROWDS, EVENTS AND GATHERINGS

Officers may encounter gatherings of people, including, but not limited to, civil demonstrations, civic, social and business events, public displays, parades and sporting events. Officers should monitor such events as time permits in an effort to keep the peace and protect the safety and rights of those present. A patrol supervisor should be notified when it becomes reasonably foreseeable that such an event may require increased monitoring, contact or intervention.

Officers responding to an event or gathering that warrants law enforcement involvement should carefully balance the speech and association rights of those present with applicable public safety concerns before taking enforcement action.

Generally, officers should consider seeking compliance through advisements and warnings for minor violations, and should reserve greater enforcement options for more serious violations or when voluntary compliance with the law is not achieved.

Officers are encouraged to contact organizers or responsible persons to seek voluntary compliance that may address relevant public safety concerns.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Racial- or Bias-Based Profiling

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidance to department members and establishes appropriate controls to ensure that members of the Glenarden Police Department do not engage in racial or bias- based profiling or violate any related laws while serving the community (Md. Code TR § 25-113).

      1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Racial or bias-based profiling – An inappropriate reliance on factors such as race, ethnicity, national origin, religion, sex, sexual orientation, economic status, age, cultural group, disability or affiliation with any other similar identifiable group as a factor in deciding whether to take law enforcement action or to provide service.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department is committed to providing law enforcement services to the community with due regard for the racial, cultural or other differences of those served. It is the policy of this department to provide law enforcement services and to enforce the law equally, fairly and without discrimination toward any individual or group. Race, ethnicity or nationality, religion, sex, sexual orientation, economic status, age, cultural group, disability or affiliation with any other similar identifiable group shall not be used as the basis for providing differing levels of law enforcement service or the enforcement of the law.

    1. RACIAL/BIAS-BASED PROFILING PROHIBITED

Racial or bias-based profiling is strictly prohibited. However, nothing in this policy is intended to prohibit an officer from considering factors such as race or ethnicity in combination with other legitimate factors to establish reasonable suspicion or probable cause (e.g., suspect description is limited to a specific race or group).

    1. MEMBER RESPONSIBILITIES

Every member of this department shall perform his/her duties in a fair and objective manner and is responsible for promptly reporting any known instances of racial or bias-based profiling to a supervisor.

      1. REASON FOR DETENTION

Officers detaining a person shall be prepared to articulate sufficient reasonable suspicion to justify a detention, independent of the individual’s membership in a protected class.

To the extent that written documentation would otherwise be completed (e.g., arrest report, field interview (FI) card), the involved officer should include those facts giving rise to the officer’s reasonable suspicion or probable cause for the detention, as applicable.

Nothing in this policy shall require any officer to document a contact that would not otherwise require reporting.

      1. REPORTING TRAFFIC STOPS

Officers shall not use an individual’s race or ethnicity as the sole justification to initiate a traffic stop. However, this does not alter the authority of an officer to make an arrest, conduct a search or seizure, or otherwise fulfill the officer’s law enforcement obligations (Md. Code CP § 4-101.1(h) (2)).

Each time an officer makes a traffic stop, the officer shall report any information as required in the Safety Equipment Repair Orders (SERO), Traffic and Parking Citations Policy (Md. Code TR

§ 25-113).

    1. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES

Supervisors shall monitor those individuals under their command for any behavior that may conflict with the purpose of this policy and shall handle any alleged or observed violation of this policy in accordance with the Personnel Complaints Policy.

  1. Supervisors should discuss any issues with the involved officer and his/her supervisor in a timely manner.
  2. Supervisors should periodically review Mobile Audio/Video (MAV) recordings, Mobile Data Terminal (MDT) data and any other available resource used to document contact between officers and the public to ensure compliance with this policy.
    1. Supervisors should document these periodic reviews.
    2. Recordings or data that capture a potential instance of racial or bias-based profiling should be appropriately retained for administrative investigation purposes.
  3. Supervisors shall initiate investigations of any actual or alleged violations of this policy.
  4. Supervisors should ensure that no retaliatory action is taken against any member of this department who discloses information concerning racial or bias-based profiling.
    1. STATE REPORTING

The Records Division (Prince George County PD) shall compile and submit the required traffic stop data to the Maryland Statistical Analysis Center no later than March 1 of the following calendar year (Md. Code TR § 25-113(e)).

    1. ADMINISTRATION

The Operations Services Lieutenant shall review the efforts of the Department to prevent racial or bias-based profiling, including traffic stop data, and submit an annual report, including public concerns and complaints, to the Chief of Police. The annual report should not contain any identifying information regarding any specific complaint, member of the public or officer. It should

be reviewed by the Chief of Police to identify any changes in training or operations that should be made to improve service (Md. Code TR § 25-113; Md. Code CP § 4-101.1(h)(3)).

Supervisors should review the annual report and discuss the results with those they are assigned to supervise.

The Operations Services Lieutenant shall also review the annual report generated by the Maryland Statistical Analysis Center analyzing the information submitted by this and other law enforcement agencies (Md. Code TR § 25-113(f)).

    1. TRAINING

Training on racial or bias-based profiling and review of this policy should be conducted as directed by the Training Coordinator.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Roll call

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy discusses the activity of roll call and includes the tasks that should be accomplished during this short period.

    1. POLICY

Roll call is intended to facilitate the accurate flow of information in order to enhance coordination of activities, improve performance and safety, and outline the expected actions of members.

    1. BRIEFING

All Prince George County PDs and specialized units will conduct regular roll call to discuss, disseminate and exchange information among department members, work groups and other organizations. A supervisor generally will conduct roll call. However, the supervisor may delegate this responsibility to a subordinate member in his/her absence or for training purposes.

Roll call should include, but not be limited to:

  1. Providing members with information regarding daily activities, with particular attention given to changes in the status of the following:
    1. Wanted persons.
    1. Crime patterns.
    1. Suspect descriptions.
    1. Intelligence reports and photographs.
    1. Community issues affecting law enforcement.
    1. Major investigations.
  1. Notifying members of changes in schedules and assignments.
  1. Reviewing recent incidents for situational awareness and training purposes.
  1. Providing training on a variety of subjects.
  1. Periodic personnel inspections.

Supervisors should also ensure that all members are informed about General Orders and any recent policy changes.

    1. PREPARATION OF MATERIALS

The member conducting roll call is responsible for preparation of the materials necessary for a constructive roll call.

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

Roll call

 

    1. TRAINING

Roll call training should incorporate short segments on a variety of subjects or topics and may include:

  1. Review and discussion of new or updated policies.
  1. Presentation and discussion of the proper application of existing policy to routine daily activities.
  2. Presentation and discussion of the proper application of existing policy to unusual activities.
  1. Review of recent incidents for training purposes.

Roll call training materials and a curriculum or summary shall be forwarded to the Training Coordinator for inclusion in training records, as appropriate.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Crime and Disaster Scene Integrity

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidance in handling a major crime or disaster.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to secure crime or disaster scenes so that evidence is preserved, and to identify and mitigate the dangers associated with a major crime or disaster scene for the safety of the community and those required to enter or work near the scene.

    1. SCENE RESPONSIBILITY

The first officer at the scene of a crime or major incident is generally responsible for the immediate safety of the public and preservation of the scene. Officers shall also consider officer safety and the safety of those persons entering or exiting the area, including those rendering medical aid to any injured parties. Once an officer has assumed or been assigned to maintain the integrity and security of the crime or disaster scene, it shall be maintained until the officer is properly relieved by a supervisor or other designated person.

    1. FIRST RESPONDER CONSIDERATIONS

The following list generally describes the first responder’s function at a crime or disaster scene. This list is not intended to be all-inclusive, is not necessarily in order and may be altered according to the demands of each situation:

  1. Broadcast  emergency  information,  including  requests  for  additional  assistance  and resources.
  2. Provide for the general safety of those within the immediate area by mitigating, reducing or eliminating threats or dangers.
  3. Locate or identify suspects and determine whether dangerous suspects are still within the area.
  4. Provide first aid to injured parties if it can be done safely.
  1. Evacuate the location safely as required or appropriate.
  1. Secure the inner perimeter.
  1. Protect items of apparent evidentiary value.
  1. Secure an outer perimeter.
  1. Identify potential witnesses.
  1. Start a chronological log noting critical times and personnel allowed access.

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

Crime and Disaster Scene Integrity

 

    1. SEARCHES

Officers arriving at crime or disaster scenes are often faced with the immediate need to search for and render aid to victims, and to determine if suspects are present and continue to pose a threat. Once officers are satisfied that no additional suspects are present and/or there are no injured persons to be treated, those exigent circumstances will likely no longer exist. Officers should thereafter secure the scene and conduct no further search until additional or alternate authority for the search is obtained, such as consent or a search warrant.

403.5.1 CONSENT

When possible, officers should seek written consent to search from authorized individuals. However, in the case of serious crimes or major investigations, it may be prudent to also obtain a search warrant. Consent as an additional authorization may be sought, even in cases where a search warrant has been granted.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Prince George County

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidelines for the specialized support of the Prince George County (PGC) in handling critical field operations where special tactical deployment methods or intense negotiations are beyond the capacity of field officers.

      1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this police include:

Negotiation team – Designated officers, including those in a multijurisdictional team, who are specifically trained and equipped to provide skilled verbal communications to de-escalate or effect surrender in situations where suspects have taken hostages, barricaded themselves or who are suicidal.

Tactical team – Designated officers, including those in a multijurisdictional team, who are specifically trained and equipped to resolve critical incidents that are so hazardous, complex or unusual that they may exceed the capabilities of first responders or investigators. This includes, but is not limited to, hostage taking, barricaded suspects, snipers, terrorist acts and other high-risk incidents. As a matter of department policy, a tactical team may also be used to serve high-risk warrants, both search and arrest, where public and officer safety issues necessitate such use.

    1. POLICY

It shall be the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to maintain a PGC, either internally or through participation in a regional team, comprised of negotiation and tactical teams, and to provide the equipment, manpower and training necessary to maintain such teams. The PGC should develop sufficient resources to perform three basic operational functions:

  1. Command and control.
  1. Containment.
  1. Entry/apprehension/rescue.
    1. CAPABILITIES

This department acknowledges that training needs may vary based on the experience level of team members, team administrators and potential incident commanders. Therefore, with the preservation of innocent human life being paramount, nothing in this policy shall prohibit individual teams from responding to a situation that exceeds their training level due to the exigency of the circumstances.

The various levels of tactical team capability and training are as follows and may fluctuate based upon personnel, training, available equipment, resources and capabilities:

  • Level I – A basic team capable of providing containment and intervention in critical incidents that exceed the training and resources available to line-level officers. This does not include

ad hoc teams of officers that are formed around a specific mission, detail or incident (e.g., active shooter response). Generally 5 percent of the Level I team’s on-duty time should be devoted to training.

  • Level II – An intermediate level tactical team capable of providing containment and intervention. These teams possess tactical capabilities above the Level I teams. These teams may or may not work together on a daily basis, but are intended to respond to incidents as a team. At least 5 percent of the Level II team’s on-duty time should be devoted to training with supplemental training for tactical capabilities above the Level I team.
  • Level III – An advanced level tactical team whose members function on a full-time basis. Generally 25 percent of the Level III team’s on-duty time is devoted to training. Level III teams operate in accordance with contemporary best practices. Such teams possess both skills and equipment to utilize tactics beyond the capabilities of Level I and Level II teams.
    1. MANAGEMENT AND SUPERVISION

Under the direction of the Chief of Police, through the Operations Services Lieutenant, the PGC shall be managed by the appointed PGC Commander. The PGC Commander shall be selected by the Chief of Police upon recommendation of command staff.

      1. TEAM SUPERVISORS

The negotiation team and tactical team will be under the direction of designated team supervisors, who shall be selected by the Chief of Police upon specific recommendation by command staff and the PGC Commander. The primary responsibility of the team supervisors is to oversee the operation of their teams, which includes deployment, training, first-line supervisor participation and other duties as directed by the PGC Commander.

    1. READINESS

An operational readiness assessment should be conducted to determine the type and extent of PGC missions and operations appropriate to this department. The assessment should consider the capabilities, training and limitations of the PGC and should be reviewed annually by the PGC Commander or the authorized designee.

      1. EQUIPMENT INSPECTIONS

The PGC Commander shall appoint a team supervisor to perform operational readiness inspections of all PGC equipment at least quarterly. The result of the inspection will be forwarded to the PGC Commander in writing. The inspections will include personal equipment issued to members of the PGC, operational equipment maintained in the PGC facility and equipment maintained or used in PGC vehicles.

      1. MULTIJURISDICTIONAL OPERATIONS

The PGC, including any relevant specialized teams and supporting resources, should develop protocols, agreements, memorandums of understanding (MOUs) or working relationships to support multijurisdictional or regional responses.

  1. If it is anticipated that multijurisdictional PGC operations will regularly be conducted, multi- agency and multidisciplinary joint training exercises are encouraged should occur.
  2. Members of the Glenarden Police Department PGC shall operate under the policies, procedures and command of the Glenarden Police Department when working in a multi- agency situation.
    1. PROCEDURES

Situations that necessitate the need for a PGC response vary greatly from incident to incident and often demand on-scene evaluation. The guidelines allow for appropriate on-scene decision- making and development of organizational and operational procedures.

      1. ORGANIZATIONAL PROCEDURES

The Department shall develop a separate written set of organizational procedures that should address, at a minimum:

  1. Specific missions the PGC is capable of performing.
  1. PGC organization and function.
  1. Member selection, retention and termination criteria.
  1. Training and required competencies including record production and retention.
  1. Procedures for notification, activation, deactivation and deployment.
  1. Command and control issues, including a clearly defined command structure and dedicated lines of communication.
  2. Multi-agency response.
  1. Out-of-jurisdiction response.
  1. Specialized functions and supporting resources.
      1. OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES

The Department shall develop a separate written set of operational procedures in accordance with the determination of the PGC’s level of capability, using sound risk-reduction practices. The operational procedures should be patterned after the National Tactical Officers Association’s (NTOA) SWAT Standard for Law Enforcement Agencies. Because such procedures are specific to PGC members and outline negotiation, tactical and officer safety issues, they are not included within this policy.

The operational procedures should include, at a minimum:

  1. Designation of members who are responsible for developing an operational or tactical plan prior to, and/or during PGC operations (time permitting).
    1. All PGC members should have an understanding of operational planning.
    1. PGC training should include planning for both spontaneous and planned events.
    1. PGC planning should incorporate medical emergency contingency plans as part of the PGC operational plan.
  1. Plans for mission briefings conducted prior to an operation, unless circumstances require immediate deployment.
    1. When possible, briefings should include the specialized teams, certified tactical dispatchers and other supporting personnel.
  2. Protocols for a sustained operation to be developed that may include relief, rotation of members and augmentation of personnel and resources.
  3. A generic checklist to be worked through prior to initiating a tactical action as a means of conducting a threat assessment to determine the appropriate response and resources necessary, including the use of the PGC.
  4. Roles for the negotiations team and negotiators.
  1. A standard method of determining whether a warrant should be regarded as high risk.
  1. A method for deciding how best to serve a high-risk warrant with all reasonably foreseeable alternatives being reviewed in accordance with risk/benefit criteria prior to selecting the method of response.
  2. Protocols for post-incident scene management, including:
    1. Documentation of the incident.
    1. Transition to investigations and/or other Prince George County PDs.
    1. Debriefing after every deployment of the PGC.
      1. After-action team debriefing provides evaluation and analysis of critical incidents and affords the opportunity for individual and team assessments, helps to identify training needs and reinforces sound risk management practices.
      2. Such debriefing should not be conducted until involved members have had the opportunity to individually complete necessary reports or provide formal statements.
      3. In order to maintain candor and a meaningful exchange, debriefing will generally not be recorded.
      4. When  appropriate,  debriefing  should  include  specialized  teams  and supporting or assisting personnel.
  1. A sound risk management analysis.
  1. Standardization of equipment deployed.
    1. OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES

The following are guidelines for the operational deployment of the PGC. Generally, the tactical team and the negotiation team will be activated together. It is recognized, however, that the teams can be activated independently as circumstances dictate. The tactical team may be used in a situation not requiring the physical presence of the negotiation team, such as warrant service operations. The negotiation team may be used in a situation not requiring the physical presence of the tactical team, such as handling a suicidal person. Operational deployment of the specialized teams shall be at the discretion of the PGC Commander.

      1. APPROPRIATE USE

Incidents that may result in the activation of the PGC include:

  1. Barricaded suspects who refuse an order to surrender.
  1. Incidents where hostages are taken.
  1. Individuals who are threatening suicide and have refused to surrender.
  1. Arrests of potentially armed or dangerous persons.
  1. Any situation that could threaten or undermine the ability of the Department to preserve life, maintain social order, and ensure the protection of persons or property.

Requests by field personnel for assistance from crisis response units from another agency must be approved by the Shift Supervisor. Deployment of the Glenarden Police Department PGC in response to requests by other agencies must be authorized by a Lieutenant.

      1. ON-SCENE DETERMINATION AND NOTIFICATION

The supervisor-in-charge at the scene of a particular event will be designated as the Incident Commander and will assess whether the PGC is to respond to the scene. With input from the Incident Commander, final determination will be made by the Shift Supervisor, who shall then notify the PGC Commander. If the PGC Commander is unavailable, then a specialized team supervisor shall be notified.

The Shift Supervisor should brief the PGC Commander about the incident. Such information should include:

  1. The type of crime involved.
  1. The number of suspects, identity and criminal history.
  1. The known weapons and resources available to the suspect.
  2. If the suspect is in control of hostages and/or barricaded.
  1. Whether contact has been made with the suspect and whether there have been demands.
  1. If potential victims are still within the inner perimeter.
  1. If the suspect has threatened or attempted suicide.
  1. The location of the command post and a safe approach to it.
  1. The extent of any inner or outer perimeter and the number of personnel involved.
  1. Any other assets or resources at the scene including other involved agencies.
  1. Any other important facts critical to the immediate situation.

The PGC Commander or team supervisor shall then follow current callout procedures. A current mobilization list shall be maintained in the Shift Supervisor’s office and the Communications Center by the PGC Commander. The Shift Supervisor will notify the Operations Services Lieutenant as soon as practicable.

      1. FIELD PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES

While waiting for the PGC to respond, field personnel should, if safe, practicable and sufficient resources exist:

  1. Establish an arrest/response team in case the suspect takes action. The response team’s tasks may include:
    1. Taking action to mitigate a deadly threat or behavior either inside or outside the location.
    2. Securing any subject or suspect who may surrender or attempt to escape.
  1. Evacuate any injured persons in the zone of danger.
  1. Evacuate or provide safety instructions to other people in the zone of danger.
  1. Establish an inner and outer perimeter.
  1. Establish a command post outside of the inner perimeter.
  1. Attempt to establish preliminary communication with the suspect. Once the PGC has arrived, all negotiations should generally be halted to allow the negotiation and tactical teams time to organize, position and assume the appropriate roles and responsibilities.
  2. Plan for, and stage, anticipated resources.
      1. ON-SCENE COMMAND RESPONSIBILITIES

Upon arrival of the PGC at the scene, the Incident Commander shall brief the PGC Commander and team supervisors. Upon review, it will be the PGC Commander’s decision, with input from the Incident Commander, whether to deploy the PGC. Once the PGC Commander authorizes deployment, the PGC Commander or the authorized designee will be responsible for the tactical

response and negotiations. The Incident Commander shall continue supervision of the command post operation, outer perimeter security and evacuation, media access and support the PGC. The Incident Commander and PGC Commander or the authorized designee shall maintain direct communication at all times.

      1. COMMUNICATIONS WITH PGC MEMBERS

All persons who are non-PGC members should refrain from any non-emergency contact or interference with any PGC member during active negotiations. PGC operations require the utmost in concentration by involved members and, as a result, no one should interrupt or communicate with PGC members directly. All non-emergency communications shall be channeled through the negotiation team or tactical team supervisor or the authorized designee.

    1. TACTICAL TEAM ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDELINES

The tactical team was established to provide a skilled and trained team for deployment to events that require specialized tactics, in situations where suspects have taken hostages and/or barricaded themselves, and in prolonged or predictable situations where persons who are armed or suspected of being armed pose a danger to themselves or others. The following procedures serve as directives for the administrative operation of the tactical team.

      1. SELECTION OF TACTICAL MEMBERS

Interested PGC members who have completed entry level probation shall submit a change of assignment request to their appropriate Lieutenants, a copy of which will be forwarded to the PGC Commander and other tactical team supervisors. Those qualifying applicants will then be invited to participate in the testing process. The testing process will consist of an oral interview, physical agility, firearm qualification and team evaluation. The order of the tests will be at the discretion of the PGC Commander.

  1. Oral interview: The oral interview will be conducted by individuals selected by the PGC Commander. Applicants will be evaluated by certain criteria, which includes:
    1. Recognized competence and ability, as evidence by performance.
    2. Demonstrated good judgment and understanding of the critical role of a tactical team member.
    3. Special Skills, training or appropriate education as it pertains to this assignment.
    4. Commitment to the PGC, realizing that the additional assignment may necessitate unusual working hours, conditions and training obligations.
  2. Physical agility: The physical agility test is designed to determine the physical capabilities of the applicant as they relate to performance of tactical team-related duties. The test and scoring procedure will be established by the PGC Commander. A minimum qualifying score shall be attained by the applicant to be considered for the position.
  3. Firearm qualification: Candidates will be invited to shoot the PGC basic drill for the handgun. A minimum qualifying score established by the Range master must be attained to qualify.
  4. Team evaluation: Current team members will evaluate each candidate on field tactical skills, teamwork, ability to work under stress, communication skills, judgment and any special skills that could benefit the team.
  5. A list of successful applicants shall be submitted by the PGC Commander to command staff to make the final selection.
      1. TACTICAL TRAINING

Training shall be coordinated by the PGC Commander. The PGC Commander may conduct monthly training exercises that include a review and critique of members and their performance in the exercises, in addition to specialized training. Training shall consist of the following:

  1. Each tactical team member shall perform a physical fitness test twice each year. A minimum qualifying score must be attained by each team member.
  2. Any tactical team member failing to attain the minimum physical fitness qualification score will be notified of the requirement to retest. Within 30 days of the previous physical fitness test date, the member required to qualify shall report to a team supervisor and complete the entire physical fitness test. Failure to qualify after a second attempt may result in non- disciplinary dismissal from the team.
  3. Those who are on vacation, are ill or on light-duty status with a medical professional’s note of approval on the test date shall be responsible for reporting to a team supervisor and taking the test within 30 days of their return to regular duty. Any member who fails to arrange for and perform the physical fitness test within the 30-day period shall be considered as having failed to attain a qualifying score for that test period.
  4. Each tactical team member shall complete the quarterly tactical team handgun qualification course. The qualification course shall consist of the PGC basic drill for the handgun. Failure to qualify will require the team member to seek remedial training from a Range master who has been approved by the PGC Commander. Team members who fail to qualify will not be used in PGC operations until qualified. Team members who fail to qualify must retest within 30 days. Failure to qualify within 30 days, with or without remedial training, may result in dismissal from the team.
  5. Each tactical team member shall complete the quarterly tactical qualification course for any specialty weapon issued to, or used by, the team member during tactical team operations. Failure to qualify will require the team member to seek remedial training from a Range master who has been approved by the PGC Commander. Team members who fail to qualify on their specialty weapon may not utilize the specialty weapon on PGC operations until qualified. Team members who fail to qualify must retest within 30 days. Failure to qualify with specialty weapons within 30 days may result in the team member being removed from the team or permanently disqualified from use of that particular specialty weapon.
      1. TACTICAL TEAM EVALUATION

Continual evaluation of a team member’s performance and efficiency as it relates to the positive operation of the team shall be conducted by the team supervisor. The performance and efficiency level, as established by the team supervisor, will be met and maintained by all tactical team members. Any member of the tactical team who performs or functions at a level less than satisfactory shall be subject to dismissal from the team.

    1. NEGOTIATION TEAM ADMINISTRATIVE GUIDELINES

The negotiation team has been established to provide skilled verbal communicators who will attempt to de-escalate and effect surrender in critical situations where suspects have taken hostages, barricaded themselves or have suicidal tendencies.

The following procedures serve as directives for the administrative operation of the negotiation team.

      1. SELECTION AND NEGOTIATION MEMBERS

Interested department members who have completed entry level probation shall submit a change of assignment request to their appropriate Lieutenants. A copy of the request will be forwarded to the PGC Commander and the negotiation team supervisor. Qualified applicants will then be invited to an oral interview. The oral interview board will consist of the PGC Commander, the negotiation team supervisor and a third person to be selected by the two. Interested members shall be evaluated by certain criterias which includes:

  1. Recognized competence and ability as evidenced by performance.
  1. Demonstrated good judgment and understanding of the critical role of a negotiator and the negotiation process.
  2. Effective communication skills.
  1. Special skills, training or appropriate education as it pertains to the assignment.
  1. Commitment to the PGC, realizing that the assignment may necessitate unusual working hours, conditions and training obligations.

The oral interview board shall submit a list of successful applicants to command staff for final selection.

      1. NEGOTIATION TRAINING

Training shall be coordinated by the PGC Commander. The PGC Commander may conduct monthly training exercises that include a review and critique of members and their performance in the exercises, in addition to specialized training.

A minimum of one training day per quarter will be required to provide the opportunity for role playing and situational training necessary to maintain proper skills. This will be coordinated by the team supervisor.

      1. NEGOTIATION TEAM EVALUATION

Continual evaluation of a team member’s performance and efficiency as it relates to the positive operation of the team shall be conducted by the team supervisor. Performance and efficiency levels, established by the team supervisor, will be met and maintained by all team members. Any member of the negotiation team who performs or functions at a level less than satisfactory shall be subject to dismissal from the team.

    1. UNIFORMS AND EQUIPMENT

PGC specialized teams from this department should wear uniforms that clearly identify them as law enforcement members. It is recognized that certain tactical conditions may require covert movement. Attire may be selected that is appropriate to the specific mission.

      1. EQUIPMENT

PGC specialized teams from this department should be adequately equipped to meet the specific missions identified by the Department.

      1. FIREARMS

Weapons and equipment used by the PGC specialized teams and any supporting resources should be department-issued or approved, including any modifications, additions or attachments.

    1. TRAINING

The PGC Commander shall conduct an annual PGC training needs assessment to ensure that training correlates to the team’s capabilities and department policy.

      1. TRAINING SAFETY

Use of a designated safety officer should be considered for all tactical training.

      1. INITIAL TRAINING

Tactical and negotiation team members and team supervisors should not be deployed until successful completion of a basic PGC course or its equivalent has been approved by this department.

  1. To avoid unnecessary or redundant training, previous training completed by members may be considered equivalent when the hours and content or topics meet or exceed requirements determined by the Department.
  2. Untrained members may be used in a support or training capacity.
      1. UPDATE/REFRESHER TRAINING

Tactical and negotiation team members, team supervisors and certified tactical dispatchers should complete update or refresher training every 24 months.

      1. MANAGEMENT TRAINING

Command and executive personnel are encouraged to attend training for managing the PGC functions at the organizational level. This is to ensure that those who provide active oversight at the scene understand the purpose and capabilities of these specialized teams.

Command personnel who may assume incident command responsibilities should attend a tactical commander or critical incident commander course or its equivalent that has been approved by this department.

      1. SCENARIO-BASED TRAINING

PGC specialized teams should participate in scenario-based training that simulates the critical field operations environment. Such training is an established method of improving performance during an actual deployment.

      1. TRAINING DOCUMENTATION

Individual and team training shall be documented and records maintained by the Training Coordinator. Such documentation shall be maintained in each member’s training file. A separate department PGC training file shall be maintained with documentation and records of all team training.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Ride-Alongs

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for a ride-along with members of the Glenarden Police Department. This policy provides the requirements, approval process, hours of operation and member responsibilities for ride-alongs.

    1. POLICY

Ride-along opportunities will be provided to the members of the public, Town employees and members of this department to observe and experience first-hand various functions of the Glenarden Police Department. The term “ride-along” includes riding as a passenger with an officer on patrol or observing the work day of members engaged in other functions within the Department such as the Communications Center.

    1. ELIGIBILITY

A ride-along is available to Prince George County residents, business owners, students currently attending class in Prince George County and those employed within the Town of Prince George County. Efforts will be made to accommodate all interested persons. However, any applicant may be disqualified without cause from participating.

Factors that may be considered in disqualifying an applicant include, but are not limited to, the following:

  • Being under 15 years of age
  • Prior criminal history
  • Pending criminal action
  • Pending lawsuit against this department or the Town
  • Denial by any supervisor
    1. AVAILABILITY

A ride-along is available most days of the week, from 10:00 a.m. to 11:00 p.m. Exceptions to this schedule may be made as approved by the Chief of Police or Shift Supervisor.

    1. REQUESTS TO PARTICIPATE

Generally, ride-along requests will be maintained and scheduled by the Shift Supervisor. The applicant will complete and sign a ride-along waiver form. If the applicant is under 18 years of age, a parent or guardian must be present to complete the waiver form. Information requested will include a valid state-issued identification card or driver’s license number, birthdate, address and telephone number.

The Shift Supervisor will schedule a date, based on availability, generally one week after the date of application. If approved, a copy of the waiver form will be forwarded to the appropriate Prince George County PD as soon as possible for scheduling considerations.

If the request is denied, a representative of this department will advise the applicant of the denial.

    1. PROCEDURES

Once approved, ride-along applicants will be allowed to participate no more than once every six months. An exception may apply to the following law enforcement-involved participants:

  • Explorers
  • Volunteers
  • Chaplains
  • Glenarden Police Department applicants
  • Any others with approval of the Shift Supervisor
  • Students enrolled in any department-approved dispatcher training course

An effort will be made to ensure that no more than one member of the public will participate in a ride-along during any given time period. Normally, no more than one ride-along participant will be allowed in department vehicles at a given time.

Ride-along requirements for department Explorers are covered in the Explorers Policy.

      1. OFF-DUTY PARTICIPATION

Off-duty members of this department or any other law enforcement agency, and employees of the Town, will not be permitted to participate in a ride-along with on-duty members of this department without the express consent of the Shift Supervisor.

In the event that such participation is permitted, the off-duty department member, other law enforcement agency personnel or Town employee shall not:

  1. Be considered on-duty.
  1. Represent him/herself as a member of this department or any other law enforcement agency.
  2. Participate in any law enforcement activity except as emergency circumstances may require.
      1. CRIMINAL HISTORY CHECK

All ride-along applicants are subject to a criminal history check. The criminal history check may include a local records check and a Maryland Criminal Justice Information System (CJIS) check prior to approval of the ride-along.

      1. SUITABLE ATTIRE

Any person approved to participate in a ride-along or is required to be suitably dressed in a collared shirt, blouse or jacket, slacks and shoes. Sandals, t-shirts, tank tops, shorts and ripped or torn pants are not permitted. Hats and ball caps will not be worn without the express consent of the Shift Supervisor. The Shift Supervisor or a supervisor may refuse a ride-along to anyone who is not dressed appropriately.

405.7   MEMBER RESPONSIBILITIES

The assigned department member shall consider the safety of the ride-along participant at all times. The member shall maintain control over the participant and shall instruct the individual about the conditions that necessarily limit his/her participation. Instructions should include:

  1. The participant will follow the directions of the department member.
  1. The participant will not become involved in any investigation, handling of evidence, discussions with victims or suspects, reading an individual’s criminal history or other protected information, or handling any police department equipment.
  2. Participation may be terminated at any time by the department member if the participant interferes with the performance of the member’s duties.
    1. If the participant is on a ride-along, the member may return the participant to the point the ride originated.
  3. Participants may be allowed to continue a ride-along during the transportation and booking process, provided it does not jeopardize their safety.
  4. Members will not allow participants to be present in any location or situation that would jeopardize the participant’s safety or cause undue stress or embarrassment to a victim or any other member of the public.
  5. Participants who are not law enforcement officers shall not be permitted to accompany the department member into a private residence without the express consent of the resident or other authorized person.

The member assigned to provide a ride-along shall advise the dispatcher that a ride-along participant is present in the vehicle before going into service. An officer with a ride-along participant should use sound discretion when encountering a potentially dangerous situation, such as a high speed pursuit, and if feasible, let the participant out of the vehicle in a well-lit public place. The dispatcher will be advised of the situation and as soon as practicable have another department member respond to pick up the participant at that location. The ride-along may be continued or terminated at this time.

Conduct by a person participating in a ride-along that results in termination of the ride, or is otherwise inappropriate, should be immediately reported to the Shift Supervisor. The member should enter comments regarding the reasons for terminating the ride-along on the waiver form.

Upon completion of the ride-along, the member shall return the waiver form to the Shift Supervisor.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Hazardous Material Response

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

Exposure to hazardous materials presents potential harm to department members and the public. This policy outlines the responsibilities of members who respond to these events and the factors that should be considered while on-scene, including the reporting of exposures and supervisor responsibilities.

      1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Hazardous material – A substance which, by its nature, containment or reactivity, has the capability of inflicting harm during exposure; characterized as being toxic, corrosive, flammable, reactive, an irritant or strong sensitizer and thereby posing a threat to health when improperly managed.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to respond to hazardous material emergencies with due regard for the safety of the public and those members responding to such incidents.

    1. HAZARDOUS MATERIAL RESPONSE

Members may encounter situations involving suspected hazardous materials, such as at the scene of a traffic accident, chemical spill or fire. When members come into contact with a suspected hazardous material, they should take certain steps to protect themselves and other persons.

The fire department is the agency trained and equipped to properly respond and mitigate most incidents involving hazardous materials and biohazards.

Responders should not perform tasks or use equipment without proper training. A responder entering the area may require decontamination before he/she is allowed to leave the scene, and should be evaluated by appropriate technicians and emergency medical services personnel for signs of exposure.

    1. CONSIDERATIONS

The following steps should be considered at any scene involving suspected hazardous materials:

  1. Make the initial assessment of a potentially hazardous material from a safe distance.
  1. Notify the Communications Center, appropriate supervisors, the appropriate fire department and hazardous response units.
    1. Provide weather conditions, wind direction, a suggested safe approach route and any other information pertinent to responder safety.
  2. Wear personal protective gear, being cognizant that some hazardous material can be inhaled.
  3. Remain upwind, uphill and at a safe distance, maintaining awareness of weather and environmental conditions, until the material is identified and a process for handling has been determined.
  4. Attempt to identify the type of hazardous material from a safe distance using optical aids (binoculars or spotting scopes) if they are available. Identification can be determined by:
    1. Placards or use of an emergency response guidebook.
    1. Driver’s statements or shipping documents from the person transporting the material.
    1. Information  obtained  from  any  involved  person  with  knowledge  regarding  the hazardous material. Information should include:
      1. The type of material.
      1. How to secure and contain the material.
      1. Any other information to protect the safety of those present, the community and the environment.
  1. Provide first aid to injured parties if it can be done safely and without contamination.
  1. Make reasonable efforts to secure the scene to prevent access from unauthorized individuals and to protect and identify any evidence.
  2. Begin evacuation of the immediate and surrounding areas, dependent on the material. Voluntary evacuation should be considered; mandatory evacuation may be necessary and will depend on the type of material.
  3. Establish a decontamination area when needed.
  1. Activate automated community notification systems, if applicable.
  1. Notify the county Department of Emergency Services.
    1. REPORTING EXPOSURE

Department members who believe they have been exposed to a hazardous material shall immediately report the exposure to a supervisor. Each exposure shall be documented by the member in an incident report that shall be forwarded via chain of command to the Shift Supervisor as soon as practicable. Should the affected member be unable to document the exposure for any reason, it shall be the responsibility of the notified supervisor to complete the report.

Injury or illness caused or believed to be caused by exposure to hazardous materials shall be reported the same as any other on-duty injury or illness, in addition to a crime report or incident report as applicable.

      1. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES

When a supervisor has been informed that a member has been exposed to a hazardous material, he/she shall ensure that immediate medical treatment is obtained and appropriate action is taken to mitigate the exposure or continued exposure.

To ensure the safety of members, safety equipment is available from supervisors. Safety items not maintained by this department may be available through the appropriate fire department or emergency response team.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Hostage and Barricade Incidents

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for situations where officers have legal cause to contact, detain or arrest a person, and the person refuses to submit to the lawful requests of the officers by remaining in a structure or vehicle and/or by taking a hostage.

The scope of this policy is not intended to address all variables that officers encounter during their initial response or when a hostage or barricade situation has developed. This policy does not require or recommend specific strategies or tactics for resolution as each incident is a dynamic and rapidly evolving event.

      1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Barricade situation – An incident where a person maintains a position of cover or concealment and ignores or resists law enforcement personnel, and it is reasonable to believe the subject is armed with a dangerous or deadly weapon.

Hostage situation – An incident where it is reasonable to believe a person is:

  • Unlawfully held by a hostage-taker as security so that specified terms or conditions will be met.
  • Unlawfully held against his/her will under threat or actual use of force.
    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to address hostage and barricade situations with due regard for the preservation of life and balancing the risk of injury, while obtaining the safe release of hostages, apprehending offenders and securing available evidence.

    1. COMMUNICATION

When circumstances permit, initial responding officers should try to establish and maintain lines of communication with a barricaded person or hostage-taker. Officers should attempt to identify any additional subjects, inquire about victims and injuries, seek the release of hostages, gather intelligence information, identify time-sensitive demands or conditions and obtain the suspect’s surrender.

When available, department-authorized negotiators should respond to the scene as soon as practicable and assume communication responsibilities. Negotiators are permitted to exercise flexibility in each situation based upon their training, the circumstances presented, suspect actions or demands, and the available resources.

      1. EMERGENCY COMMUNICATIONS

Officers may intercept a wire, oral or electronic communication in order to provide evidence if a person has created a barricade situation and there is probable cause to believe a hostage may be involved (Md. Code CJ § 10-402(c)(2)).

If the Chief of Police or a supervising officer has probable cause to believe that a hostage situation is occurring or that a person is barricaded within a structure and poses an immediate threat of physical injury to others, he/she may order the telephone company to interrupt, reroute, divert or otherwise control telephone service involved in the hostage or barricade situation (Md. Code CJ

§ 10-413(c)).

The Chief of Police or supervising officer shall give a written or oral representation of the hostage or barricade situation to the telephone company. If an order is given on the basis of an oral representation, the oral representation shall be followed by a written confirmation within 48 hours (Md. Code CJ § 10-413(e)).

For the purposes of this section, “supervising officer” means an officer as defined in Md. Code CJ § 10-413(g).

The Chief of Police may also designate one or more officers to serve as a hostage and barricade communications specialist responsible for rerouting, diverting or otherwise controlling any telephone communications service involved in a hostage or barricade situation. A hostage and barricade communications specialist shall act only if the telephone company providing service in the area has been contacted and the telephone company (Md. CJ § 10-413(a); Md. CJ § 10-413(d)):

  1. Declines to respond to a request for assistance because of a threat of physical injury to its employees.
  2. Indicates that it will be unable to respond appropriately to the request within a reasonable time.
    1. FIRST RESPONDER CONSIDERATIONS

First responding officers should promptly and carefully evaluate all available information to determine whether an incident involves, or may later develop into, a hostage or barricade situation.

The first responding officer should immediately request a supervisor’s response as soon as it is determined that a hostage or barricade situation exists. The first responding officer shall assume the duties of the supervisor until relieved by a supervisor or a more qualified responder. The officer shall continually evaluate the situation, including the level of risk to officers, to the persons involved and to bystanders, and the resources currently available.

The handling officer should brief the arriving supervisor of the incident, including information about suspects and victims, the extent of any injuries, additional resources or equipment that may be needed, and current perimeters and evacuation areas.

      1. BARRICADE SITUATION

Unless circumstances require otherwise, officers handling a barricade situation should attempt to avoid a forceful confrontation in favor of stabilizing the incident by establishing and maintaining lines of communication while awaiting the arrival of specialized personnel and trained negotiators. In the interim, the following options, while not all-inclusive or in any particular order, should be considered:

  1. Ensure injured persons are evacuated from the immediate threat area if it is reasonably safe to do so. Request medical assistance.
  2. Assign personnel to a contact team to control the subject should he/she attempt to exit the building, structure or vehicle, and attack, use deadly force, attempt to escape or surrender prior to additional resources arriving.
  3. Request additional personnel, resources and equipment as needed (e.g., canine team, air support).
  4. Provide responding emergency personnel with a safe arrival route to the location.
  1. Evacuate uninjured persons in the immediate threat area if it is reasonably safe to do so.
  1. Attempt or obtain a line of communication and gather as much information on the subject as possible, including weapons, other involved parties, additional hazards or injuries.
  2. Establish an inner and outer perimeter as circumstances require and resources permit to prevent unauthorized access.
  3. Evacuate bystanders, residents and businesses within the inner and then outer perimeter as appropriate. Check for injuries, the presence of other involved subjects, witnesses, evidence or additional information.
  4. Determine  the  need  for  and  notify  the  appropriate  persons  within  and  outside  the Department, such as command officers and the Press Information Officer.
  5. If necessary and available, establish a tactical or exclusive radio frequency for the incident.
  1. Establish a command post.
      1. HOSTAGE SITUATION

Officers presented with a hostage situation should attempt to avoid a forceful confrontation in favor of controlling the incident in anticipation of the arrival of specialized personnel and trained hostage negotiators. However, it is understood that hostage situations are dynamic and can require that officers react quickly to developing or changing threats. The following options, while not all-inclusive or in any particular order, should be considered:

  1. Ensure injured persons are evacuated from the immediate threat area if it is reasonably safe to do so. Request medical assistance.
  2. Assign personnel to a contact team to control the subject should he/she attempt to exit the building, structure or vehicle, and attack, use deadly force, attempt to escape or surrender prior to additional resources arriving.
  3. Establish a rapid response team in the event it becomes necessary to rapidly enter a building, structure or vehicle, such as when the suspect is using deadly force against any hostages (see the Rapid Response and Deployment Policy).
  4. Assist hostages or potential hostages to escape if it is reasonably safe to do so. Hostages should be kept separated, if practicable, pending further interview.
  5. Request additional personnel, resources and equipment as needed (e.g., canine team, air support).
  6. Provide responding emergency personnel with a safe arrival route to the location.
  1. Evacuate uninjured persons in the immediate threat area if it is reasonably safe to do so.
  1. Coordinate pursuit or surveillance vehicles and control of travel routes.
  1. Attempt or obtain a line of communication and gather as much information about the suspect as possible, including any weapons, victims and their injuries, additional hazards, other involved parties and any other relevant intelligence information.
  2. Establish an inner and outer perimeter as resources and circumstances permit to prevent unauthorized access.
  3. Evacuate bystanders, residents and businesses within the inner and then outer perimeter as appropriate. Check for injuries, the presence of other involved subjects, witnesses, evidence or additional information.
  4. Determine the need for and notify the appropriate persons within and outside the Department, such as command officers and the Press Information Officer.
  5. If necessary and available, establish a tactical or exclusive radio frequency for the incident.
    1. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES

Upon being notified that a hostage or barricade situation exists, the supervisor should immediately respond to the scene, assess the risk level of the situation, establish a proper chain of command and assume the role of Incident Commander until properly relieved. This includes requesting Prince George County (PGC) response if appropriate and apprising the PGC Commander of the circumstances. In addition, the following options, listed here in no particular order, should be considered:

  1. Ensure injured persons are evacuated and treated by medical personnel.
  1. Ensure the completion of necessary first responder responsibilities or assignments.
  1. Request crisis negotiators, specialized assignment members, additional department members, resources or equipment as appropriate.
  2. Establish a command post location as resources and circumstances permit.
  1. Designate assistants who can help with intelligence information and documentation of the incident.
  2. If it is practicable to do so, arrange for video documentation of the operation.
  1. Consider contacting utility and communication providers when restricting such services (e.g., restricting electric power, gas, telephone service).
  2. Ensure adequate law enforcement coverage for the remainder of the Town during the incident. The supervisor should direct nonessential personnel away from the scene unless they have been summoned by the supervisor or the Communications Center.
  3. Identify a media staging area outside the outer perimeter and have the department Press Information Officer or a designated temporary media representative provide media access in accordance with the Media Relations Policy.
  4. Identify the need for mutual aid and the transition or relief of personnel for incidents of extended duration.
  5. Debrief personnel and review documentation as appropriate.
    1. PGC RESPONSIBILITIES

It will be the PGC Commander’s decision, with input from the Incident Commander, whether to deploy the PGC during a hostage or barricade situation. Once the PGC Commander authorizes deployment, the PGC Commander or the authorized designee will be responsible for the tactical response and negotiations. The Incident Commander shall continue supervision of the command post operation, outer perimeter security and evacuation, media access and support for the PGC. The Incident Commander and the PGC Commander or the authorized designees shall maintain direct communications at all times.

    1. REPORTING

Unless otherwise relieved by a supervisor or Incident Commander, the handling officer at the scene is responsible for completion and/or coordination of incident reports.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Response to Bomb Calls

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines to assist members of the Glenarden Police Department in their initial response to incidents involving explosives, explosive devices, explosion/ bombing incidents or threats of such incidents. Under no circumstances should these guidelines be interpreted as compromising the safety of first responders or the public. When confronted with an incident involving explosives, safety should always be the primary consideration.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to place a higher priority on the safety of persons and the public over damage or destruction to public or private property.

    1. RECEIPT OF BOMB THREAT

Department members receiving a bomb threat should obtain as much information from the individual as reasonably possible, including the type, placement and alleged detonation time of the device.

If the bomb threat is received on a recorded line, reasonable steps should be taken to ensure that the recording is preserved in accordance with established department evidence procedures.

The member receiving the bomb threat should ensure that the Shift Supervisor is immediately advised and informed of the details. This will enable the Shift Supervisor to ensure that the appropriate personnel are dispatched, and, as appropriate, the threatened location is given an advance warning.

    1. GOVERNMENT FACILITY OR PROPERTY

A bomb threat targeting a government facility may require a different response based on the government agency.

      1. AGENCYNAME FACILITY

If the bomb threat is against the Glenarden Police Department facility, the Shift Supervisor will direct and assign officers as required for coordinating a general building search or evacuation of the police department, as he/she deems appropriate.

      1. OTHER MUNICIPAL FACILITY OR PROPERTY

If the bomb threat is against a municipal facility within the jurisdiction of the Glenarden Police Department that is not the property of this department, the appropriate agency will be promptly informed of the threat. Assistance to the other entity may be provided as the Shift Supervisor deems appropriate.

      1. FEDERAL BUILDING OR PROPERTY

If the bomb threat is against a federal building or property, the Federal Protective Service should be immediately notified. The Federal Protective Service provides a uniformed law enforcement response for most facilities, which may include use of its Explosive Detector Dog teams.

408.5 PRIVATE FACILITY OR PROPERTY

When a member of this department receives notification of a bomb threat at a location in the Town of Prince George County, the member receiving the notification should obtain as much information as reasonably possible from the notifying individual, including:

  1. The location of the facility.
  1. The nature of the threat.
  1. Whether the type and detonation time of the device is known.
  1. Whether the facility is occupied, and if so, the number of occupants currently on-scene.
  1. Whether the individual is requesting police assistance at the facility.
  1. Whether there are any internal facility procedures regarding bomb threats in place, such as:
    1. No evacuation of personnel and no search for a device.
    1. Search for a device without evacuation of personnel.
    1. Evacuation of personnel without a search for a device.
    1. Evacuation of personnel and a search for a device.

The member receiving the bomb threat information should ensure that the Shift Supervisor is immediately notified so that he/she can communicate with the person in charge of the threatened facility.

408.5.1 ASSISTANCE

The Shift Supervisor should be notified when police assistance is requested. The Shift Supervisor will make the decision whether the Department will render assistance and at what level. Information and circumstances that indicate a reasonably apparent, imminent threat to the safety of either the facility or the public may require a more active approach, including police control over the facility.

Should the Shift Supervisor determine that the Department will assist or control such an incident, he/she will determine:

  1. The appropriate level of assistance.
  2. The plan for assistance.
  3. Whether to evacuate and/or search the facility.
  4. Whether to involve facility staff in the search or evacuation of the building.
    1. The person in charge of the facility should be made aware of the possibility of damage to the facility as a result of a search.
    2. The safety of all participants is the paramount concern.
  5. The need for additional resources, including:
    1. Notification  and  response,  or  standby  notice,  for  fire  and  emergency  medical services.

Even though a facility does not request police assistance to clear the interior of a building, based upon the circumstances and known threat, officers may be sent to the scene to evacuate other areas that could be affected by the type of threat, or for traffic and pedestrian control.

    1. FOUND DEVICE

When handling an incident involving a suspected explosive device, the following guidelines, while not all inclusive, should be followed:

  1. No known or suspected explosive item should be considered safe regardless of its size or apparent packaging.
  2. The device should not be touched or moved except by the bomb squad or military explosive ordnance disposal team.
  3. Personnel should not transmit on any equipment that is capable of producing radio frequency energy within the evacuation area around the suspected device. This includes the following:
    1. Two-way radios
    1. Cell phones
    1. Other personal communication devices
  1. The appropriate bomb squad or military explosive ordnance disposal team should be summoned for assistance.
  2. The largest perimeter reasonably possible should initially be established around the device based upon available personnel and the anticipated danger zone.
  3. A safe access route should be provided for support personnel and equipment.
  1. Search the area for secondary devices as appropriate and based upon available resources.
  1. Consider evacuation of buildings and personnel near the device or inside the danger zone and the safest exit route.
  2. Promptly relay available information to the Shift Supervisor including:
    1. The time of discovery.
    1. The exact location of the device.
    1. A full description of the device (e.g., size, shape, markings, construction).
    2. The anticipated danger zone and perimeter.
    1. The areas to be evacuated or cleared.
    1. EXPLOSION/BOMBING INCIDENTS

When an explosion has occurred, there are multitudes of considerations which may confront the responding officers. As in other catastrophic events, a rapid response may help to minimize injury to victims, minimize contamination of the scene by gathering crowds, or minimize any additional damage from fires or unstable structures.

      1. CONSIDERATIONS

Officers responding to explosions, whether accidental or a criminal act, should consider the following actions:

  1. Assess the scope of the incident, including the number of victims and extent of injuries.
  1. Request additional personnel and resources, as appropriate.
  1. Assist with first aid.
  1. Identify and take appropriate precautions to mitigate scene hazards, such as collapsed structures, bloodborne pathogens and hazardous materials.
  2. Assist with the safe evacuation of victims, if possible.
  1. Establish an inner perimeter to include entry points and evacuation routes. Search for additional or secondary devices.
  2. Preserve evidence.
  1. Establish an outer perimeter and evacuate if necessary.
  1. Identify witnesses.
      1. NOTIFICATIONS

When an explosion has occurred, the following people should be notified as appropriate:

  • Fire department
  • Regional bomb squad
  • Additional department personnel, such as investigators and forensic services
  • Field supervisor
  • Shift Supervisor
  • Other law enforcement agencies, including local, state or federal agencies, such as the FBI and the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives (ATF)
  • Other government agencies, as appropriate

408.8 CROWD CONTROL

Only authorized members with a legitimate need should be permitted access to the scene. Spectators and other unauthorized individuals should be restricted to a safe distance as is reasonably practicable given the available resources and personnel.

408.8.1 PRESERVATION OF EVIDENCE

As in any other crime scene, steps should immediately be taken to preserve the scene. The Shift Supervisor should assign officers to protect the crime scene area, which could extend over a long distance. Consideration should be given to the fact that evidence may be imbedded in nearby structures or hanging in trees and bushes.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Mental Health Evaluations

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidelines for when officers may place a person under temporary custody for an involuntary mental health hold at an appropriate facility.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to protect the public and individuals through legal and appropriate use of the mental health hold process.

    1. AUTHORITY

An officer may take a person into temporary custody for transfer to an appropriate facility if the person has a mental disorder and the person presents a danger to the life or safety of him/herself or others.

409.3.1   VOLUNTARY EVALUATION

If officers encounter an individual who may qualify for a mental health hold they may inquire as to whether desires to voluntarily be evaluated at an appropriate facility. If the individual so desires, the officers should (Md. Code HG § 10-609):

  1. Transport the individual to an appropriate facility that is able to conduct the evaluation and admit the person pursuant to a mental health hold.
  2. If at any point the individual changes his/her mind regarding voluntary evaluation, the officers should proceed with the involuntary emergency mental evaluation, if appropriate.
  3. Document  the  circumstances  surrounding  the  individual’s  desire  to  pursue  voluntary evaluation and/or admission.
    1. CONSIDERATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Any officer handling a call involving a person who qualifies for a mental health hold should personally observed the individual or his/her behavior indicating that the individual has a mental disorder and presents a danger to the life or safety of him/herself or others. The officer may also use other pertinent information, including observations and information from other credible sources, in making a determination regarding a petition emergency evaluation (Md. Code HG § 10-622(a); Md. Code HG § 10-622(b)).

The officer who makes the decision to petition for an emergency evaluation shall complete and sign the petition which will include all of the pertinent observations by the officer or other interested persons.

If the individual is taken into temporary custody from another person who is the petitioner for an emergency evaluation, the officer shall explain to the petitioner the meaning, content and seriousness of the petition (Md. Code HG § 10-622(d)).

Mental health holds and placements should be preferred over arrest for individuals with mental health issues who are suspected of committing minor crimes or creating other public safety issues.

    1. TRANSPORTATION

An officer shall transport an individual with an emergency evaluation to the nearest emergency facility when the officer has a petition that (Md. Code HG § 10-624(a)(1)):

  1. Has been endorsed by a court within the last five days.
  1. Is signed an submitted by a physician, psychologist, clinical social worker, licensed clinical professional counselor, clinical nurse specialist in psychiatric and mental health nursing, psychiatric nurse practitioner, licensed clinical marriage and family therapist, health officer or designee of a health officer, or a peace officer.

When transporting any individual for a mental health hold, the transporting officer should have the Communications Center notify the receiving facility of the estimated time of arrival, the level of cooperation of the individual and whether any special medical care is needed.

Officers may transport individuals in the patrol vehicle and shall secure them in accordance with the Handcuffing and Restraints Policy. Should the detainee require transport in a medical transport vehicle and the safety of any person, including the detainee, requires the presence of an officer during the transport, Shift Supervisor approval is required before transport commences.

    1. TRANSFER TO APPROPRIATE FACILITY

Upon arrival at the facility, the officer will escort the individual into a treatment area designated by a facility staff member. If the individual is not seeking treatment voluntarily, the officer should provide the staff member with the written application for a mental health hold and remain present to provide clarification of the grounds for detention, upon request.

Should a physician determine that the individual transported to the facility is violent, and requests that an officer be present, an officer is required to remain at the facility (Md. Code HG § 10-624(a)).

The officer shall complete a Return of Service by Peace Officer Form (CC-DC 27), as appropriate, and have the facility sign the form.

    1. DOCUMENTATION

The officer shall complete the following forms for evaluation and treatment, provide the forms to the facility staff member assigned to the individual and retain a copy for inclusion in the case report:

  • Petition for Emergency Evaluation Form (CC-DC 13)
  • Certification by Peace Officer Form (CC-DC 14)
  • Order for Emergency Evaluation of an Arrested Individual (DC 15)
  • Return of Service by Peace Officer Form (CC-DC 27)

The officer should provide a verbal summary to any evaluating staff member regarding the circumstances leading to the involuntary detention. The officer shall include in the narrative sections of the Petition for Emergency Evaluation and the Incident Report the facts, observations and information known to the officer, or provided by others, that the individual is suffering from a mental disorder and warrants the issuance of the Petition for Emergency Evaluation, including:

  • Symptoms of mental disorder
  • Dangerous behavior
  • History of mental disorder psychiatric hospitalization or treatment
  • Statements made by the individual

409.7.1 CONFIDENTIALITY

Records relating to mental health evaluations are confidential and the contents may not be divulged, by subpoena or otherwise, except by order of the court on good cause shown or as allowed by law (Md. Code HG § 10-630).

    1. CRIMINAL OFFENSES

Officers investigating an individual who is suspected of committing a minor criminal offense and who is being taken into custody on a mental health hold should resolve the criminal matter by issuing a citation to appear in court at a later date and release as appropriate.

When an individual who may qualify for a mental health hold has committed a criminal offense that would normally result in an arrest and transfer to a jail facility, the officer should:

  1. Arrest the individual when there is probable cause to do so.
  2. Notify the appropriate supervisor of the facts supporting the arrest and the facts that would support the mental health hold.
  3. Facilitate the individual’s transfer to jail.
  4. Thoroughly document in the related reports the circumstances that indicate the individual may qualify for a mental health hold.

In the supervisor’s judgment, the individual may be arrested or booked and transported to the appropriate mental health facility. The supervisor should consider the seriousness of the offense, the treatment options available, the ability of this department to regain custody of the individual, department resources (e.g., posting a guard) and other relevant factors in making this decision.

The court may issue emergency evaluations for arrested individuals and, unless the court directs otherwise, an officer shall stay with the arrested individual until he/she is either admitted to an appropriate facility, or is returned to the court or an appropriate jail (Md. Code HG § 10-626(c)).

If the arrested individual does not meet the requirements for involuntary admission, the examining physician shall send a brief report of the evaluation to the court and the officer shall return the

arrested individual, the court order and the report of the examining physician to the court. If the court is not in session, the officer shall take the arrested individual to an appropriate jail and, before the end of the next day that the court is in session, return the individual and the report of the examining physician to the court (Md. Code HG § 10.626(d)).

    1. FIREARMS AND OTHER WEAPONS

Whenever an individual is taken into custody for a mental health hold, the handling officers should seek to determine if the individual owns or has access to any firearm or other deadly weapon. Officers should consider whether it is appropriate and consistent with current search and seizure law under the circumstances to seize any such firearms or other dangerous weapons (e.g., safekeeping, evidence, consent).

Officers are cautioned that a search warrant may be needed before entering a residence or other place to search, unless lawful, warrantless entry has already been made (e.g., exigent circumstances, consent). A warrant may also be needed before searching for or seizing weapons.

The handling officers should further advise the individual of the procedure for the return of any firearm or other weapon that has been taken into custody.

    1. TRAINING

This department will endeavor  to provide  department-approved  training  on  interaction  with mentally disabled persons, mental health holds and crisis intervention.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Citation Releases

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide members of the Glenarden Police Department with guidance on when to release adults who are suspected offenders on a citation for a criminal offense, rather than having the person held in custody for a court appearance or released on bail.

Additional release restrictions may apply to those detained for domestic violence, as outlined in the Domestic Violence Policy.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department will consider its resources and its mission of protecting the community when exercising any discretion to release suspected offenders on a citation, when authorized to do so.

    1. RELEASE

An officer shall charge a suspected offender by citation as follows (Md. Code CP § 4-101(c):

  1. Any misdemeanor or local ordinance violation that does not carry a penalty of imprisonment.
  1. Any  misdemeanor  or  local  ordinance  violation  for  which  the  maximum  penalty  of imprisonment is 90 days or less.
  2. Possession of marijuana.

410.3.1  ARREST AND RELEASE

An officer who has grounds to make a warrantless arrest for an offense that may be charged by citation may (Md. Code CP § 4-101(c)(3)):

  1. Issue a citation in lieu of making the arrest.
  1. Make the arrest and subsequently issue a citation in lieu of continued custody.
    1. PROHIBITIONS

The release of a suspected offender on a citation is not permitted when the misdemeanor or local ordinance violation involves any of the following (Md. Code CP § 4-101(c)(1):

  1. Failure to comply with a peace order under Md. Code CJ § 3-1508.
  2. Failure to comply with a protective order under Md. Code FL § 4-509.
  3. Violation of a condition of pretrial or post trial release while charged with a sexual crime against a minor under Md. Code CP § 5-213.1.
  4. Possession of an electronic control device after conviction of a drug felony or crime of violence under Md. Code CR § 4-109(b).
  5. Violation of an out-of-state domestic violence order under Md. Code FL § 4-508.1.

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

Citation Releases

 

  1. Abuse or neglect of an animal under Md. Code CR § 10-604.

See the Domestic Violence Policy for release restrictions related to those investigations.

    1. CONSIDERATIONS

An officer may charge a defendant by citation provided (Md. Code CP § 4-101(c)(2)):

  1. The officer is satisfied with the defendant’s evidence of identity.
  1. The officer reasonably believes that the defendant will comply with the citation.
  1. The officer reasonably believes that the failure to charge on a statement of charges will not pose a threat to public safety.
  2. The defendant is not subject to arrest for another criminal charge arising out of the same incident.
  3. The defendant complies with all lawful orders by the officer
    1. CITATION REPORTING REQUIREMENTS

Officers charging by citation shall report the following information on the Maryland Uniform Complaint and Citation Form consistent with the procedures developed by the Maryland Police Training Commission (MPTC) and the Maryland Statistical Analysis Center (Md. Code CP § 4-101.1):

  1. The date, location and time of the issuance of the citation.
  2. The offense charged.
  3. The gender of the offender.
  4. The date of birth of the offender.
  5. The street address, state, ZIP code and, if available, the county of residence of the offender.
  6. The race or ethnicity of the offender as:
    • Asian
    • Black
    • Hispanic
    • White
    • Other

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Foreign Diplomatic and Consular Representatives

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidelines to ensure that members of the Glenarden Police Department extend appropriate privileges and immunities to foreign diplomatic and consular representatives in accordance with international law.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department respects international laws related to the special privileges and immunities afforded foreign diplomatic and consular representatives assigned to the United States.

All foreign diplomatic and consular representatives shall be treated with respect and courtesy, regardless of any privileges or immunities afforded them.

    1. CLAIMS OF IMMUNITY

If a member comes into contact with a person where law enforcement action may be warranted and the person claims diplomatic or consular privileges and immunities, the member should, without delay:

  1. Notify a supervisor.
  1. Advise the person that his/her claim will be investigated and he/she may be released in accordance with the law upon confirmation of the person’s status.
  2. Request the person’s identification card, either issued by the U.S. Department of State (DOS), Office of the Chief of Protocol, or in the case of persons accredited to the United Nations, by the U.S. Mission to the United Nations. These are the only reliable documents for purposes of determining privileges and immunities.
  3. Contact the DOS Diplomatic Security Command Center at 571-345-3146 or toll free at 866-217-2089, or at another current telephone number and inform the center of the circumstances.
  4. Verify the immunity status with DOS and follow any instructions regarding further detention, arrest, prosecution and/or release, as indicated by the DOS representative. This may require immediate release, even if a crime has been committed.

Identity or immunity status should not be presumed from the type of license plates displayed on a vehicle. If there is a question as to the status or the legitimate possession of a Diplomat or Consul license plate a query should be run via the National Law Enforcement Telecommunications System (NLETS), designating “US” as the state.

    1. ENFORCEMENT ACTION

If the DOS is not immediately available for consultation regarding law enforcement action, members shall be aware of the following:

  1. Generally, all persons with diplomatic and consular privileges and immunities may be issued a citation or notice to appear. However, the person may not be compelled to sign the citation.
  2. All persons, even those with a valid privilege or immunity, may be reasonably restrained in exigent circumstances for purposes of self-defense, public safety or the prevention of serious criminal acts.
  3. An impaired foreign diplomatic or consular representative may be prevented from driving a vehicle, even if the person may not be arrested due to privileges and immunities.
    1. Investigations, including the request for field sobriety tests, chemical tests and any other tests regarding impaired driving may proceed but they shall not be compelled.
  4. The following persons may not be detained or arrested, and any property or vehicle owned by these persons may not be searched or seized:
    1. Diplomatic-level staff of missions to international organizations and recognized family members
    2. Diplomatic agents and recognized family members
    1. Members of administrative and technical staff of a diplomatic mission and recognized family members
    2. Career consular officers, unless the person is the subject of a felony warrant
  1. The following persons may generally be detained and arrested:
    1. International organization staff; however, some senior officers are entitled to the same treatment as diplomatic agents.
    2. Support staff of missions to international organizations
    1. Diplomatic  service  staff  and  consular  employees;  however,  special  bilateral agreements may exclude employees of certain foreign countries.
    2. Honorary consular officers
    1. DOCUMENTATION

All contacts with persons who have claimed privileges and immunities afforded foreign diplomatic and consular representatives should be thoroughly documented and the related reports forwarded to DOS.

    1. DIPLOMATIC IMMUNITY

Reference table on diplomatic immunity:

pastedGraphic.png

pastedGraphic_1.png

Notes for diplomatic immunity table:

  1. This table represents general rules. The employees of certain foreign countries may enjoy higher levels of privileges and immunities on the basis of special bilateral agreements.
  2. Reasonable constraints, however, may be applied in emergency circumstances involving self-defense, public safety, or in the prevention of serious criminal acts.
  3. A small number of senior officers are entitled to be treated identically to diplomatic agents.
  4. Note that consul residences are sometimes located within the official consular premises. In such cases, only the official office space is protected from police entry.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Rapid Response and Deployment

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

Violence that is committed in schools, workplaces and other locations by individuals or a group of individuals who are determined to target and kill persons and to create mass casualties presents a difficult situation for law enforcement. The purpose of this policy is to identify guidelines and factors that will assist officers in situations that call for rapid response and deployment.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department will endeavor to plan for rapid response to crisis situations, and to coordinate response planning with other emergency services as well as with those that are responsible for operating sites that may be the target of a critical incident.

Nothing in this policy shall preclude the use of reasonable force, deadly or otherwise, by members of the Department in protecting themselves or others from death or serious injury.

    1. CONSIDERATIONS

When dealing with a crisis situation members should:

  1. Assess the immediate situation and take reasonable steps to maintain operative control of the incident.
  2. Obtain, explore and analyze sources of intelligence and known information regarding the circumstances, location and suspect involved in the incident.
  3. Attempt to attain a tactical advantage over the suspect by reducing, preventing or eliminating any known or perceived threat.
  4. Attempt, if feasible and based upon the suspect’s actions and danger to others, a negotiated surrender of the suspect and release of the hostages.
    1. FIRST RESPONSE

If there is a reasonable belief that acts or threats by a suspect are placing lives in imminent danger, first responding officers should consider reasonable options to reduce, prevent or eliminate the threat. Officers must decide, often under a multitude of difficult and rapidly evolving circumstances, whether to advance on the suspect, take other actions to deal with the threat or wait for additional resources.

If a suspect is actively engaged in the infliction of serious bodily harm or other life-threatening activity toward others, officers should take immediate action, if reasonably possible, while requesting additional assistance.

Officers should remain aware of the possibility that an incident may be part of a coordinated multi- location attack that may require some capacity to respond to other incidents at other locations.

When deciding on a course of action officers should consider:

  1. Whether to advance on or engage a suspect who is still a possible or perceived threat to others. Any advance or engagement should be based on information known or received at the time.
  2. Whether to wait for additional resources or personnel. This does not preclude an individual officer from taking immediate action.
  3. Whether individuals who are under imminent threat can be moved or evacuated with reasonable safety.
  4. Whether the suspect can be contained or denied access to victims.
  1. Whether the officers have the ability to effectively communicate with other personnel or resources.
  2. Whether planned tactics can be effectively deployed.
  1. The availability of rifles, shotguns, shields, breaching tools, control  devices  and  any other appropriate tools, and whether the deployment of these tools will provide a tactical advantage.

In the case of a barricaded or trapped suspect, with no hostages and no immediate threat to others, officers should consider covering escape routes and evacuating persons as appropriate, while summoning and waiting for additional assistance (e.g., special tactics and/or hostage negotiation team response).

    1. PLANNING

The Operations Services Lieutenant should coordinate critical incident planning. Planning efforts should consider:

  1. Identification of likely critical incident target sites, such as schools, shopping centers, entertainment and sporting event venues.
  2. Availability of building plans and venue schematics of likely critical incident target sites.
  1. Communications  interoperability  with  other  law  enforcement  and  emergency  service agencies.
  2. Training  opportunities  in  critical  incident  target  sites,  including  joint  training  with  site occupants.
  3. Evacuation routes in critical incident target sites.
  1. Patrol first-response training.
  1. Response coordination and resources of emergency medical and fire services.
  1. Equipment needs.
  1. Mutual aid agreements with other agencies.
  1. Coordination with private security providers in critical incident target sites.
    1. TRAINING

The Training Coordinator should include rapid response to critical incidents in the training plan. This training should address:

  1. Orientation  to  likely  critical  incident  target  sites,  such  as  schools,  shopping  centers, entertainment and sporting event venues.
  2. Communications  interoperability  with  other  law  enforcement  and  emergency  service agencies.
  3. Patrol first-response training, including patrol rifle, shotgun, breaching tool and control device training.
  4. First aid, including gunshot trauma.
  1. Reality-based scenario training (e.g., active shooter, disgruntled violent worker).

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Immigration Violations

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines to members of the Glenarden Police Department for investigating and enforcing immigration laws.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department that all members make personal and professional commitments to equal enforcement of the law and equal service to the public. Confidence in this commitment will increase the effectiveness of this department in protecting and serving the entire community and recognizing the dignity of all persons, regardless of their immigration status.

    1. VICTIMS AND WITNESSES

To encourage crime reporting and cooperation in the investigation of criminal activity, all individuals, regardless of their immigration status, must feel secure that contacting or being addressed by members of law enforcement will not automatically lead to immigration inquiry and/ or deportation. While it may be necessary to determine the identity of a victim or witness, members shall treat all individuals equally and without regard to race, color or national origin in any way that would violate the United States or Maryland Constitutions.

    1. ENFORCEMENT

An officer may detain an individual when there are facts supporting a reasonable suspicion that the individual entered into the United States in violation of a federal criminal law. Federal authorities shall be notified as soon as possible and the detained individual shall be immediately released if the federal authorities do not want the person held. An officer should not detain any individual, for any length of time, for a civil violation of federal immigration laws or a related civil warrant.

      1. CIVIL VS. CRIMINAL FEDERAL OFFENSES

An individual who enters into the United States illegally has committed a misdemeanor (8 USC

§ 1325(a)). Generally, an alien who initially made a legal entry into the United States but has remained beyond what is a legal period of time has committed a federal civil offense. Reasonable suspicion that a criminal immigration violation has occurred shall not be based on race, color, national origin or any other generalization that would cast suspicion on or stigmatize any person, except to the extent permitted by the United States or Maryland Constitutions. Instead, the totality of circumstances shall be used to determine reasonable suspicion, and shall include factors weighing for and against reasonable suspicion.

Factors that may be considered in determining reasonable suspicion that a criminal immigration violation has occurred may include, but are not limited to:

  1. An admission that the person entered the United States illegally.
  2. Reason to suspect that the person possesses immigration documentation that is forged, altered or otherwise indicative that the person is not legally present in the United States.
  3. While a lack of English proficiency may be considered, it should not be the sole factor in establishing reasonable suspicion. When practicable, reasonable effort should be made to accommodate persons with limited English proficiency.
  4. Other factors based upon training and experience.
      1. IMMIGRATION CHECKS

Immigration status may be determined through any of the following sources:

  1. A law enforcement officer who is authorized by the federal government under 8 USC § 1357 to verify or ascertain an alien’s immigration status (sometimes referred to as a 287(g) certified officer).
  2. Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE).
  1. U.S. Customs and Border Protection (CBP).

An officer shall verify from a 287(g) certified officer, ICE or CBP whether a person’s presence in the United States relates to a federal civil violation or a criminal violation. If the officer has facts that establish probable cause to believe that a person already lawfully detained has committed a criminal immigration offense, he/she may continue the detention and may request ICE or CBP to respond to the location to take custody of the detained person. In addition, the officer should notify a supervisor as soon as practicable. No individual who is otherwise ready to be released should continue to be detained only because questions about the individual’s status are unresolved.

An officer is encouraged to forgo detentions made solely on the basis of a misdemeanor offense when time limitations, availability of personnel, issues of officer safety, communication capabilities or the potential to obstruct a separate investigation outweigh the need for the detention.

      1. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES

When notified that an officer has detained a person and established probable cause to believe the person has violated a criminal immigration offense, the supervisor should:

  1. Confirm that the detained person’s immigration status was properly verified.
  2. Ensure that the detained person is taken into custody when appropriate. Take any additional steps necessary that may include, but are not limited to:
    1. Transfer to federal authorities.
    2. Lawful arrest for a criminal offense or warrant.
    1. ARREST NOTIFICATION TO IMMIGRATION AND CUSTOMS ENFORCEMENT Generally, an officer will not need to notify ICE when booking arrestees at the Town jail. Immigration officials routinely interview suspected undocumented aliens who are booked into

the Town jail on criminal charges. Notification will be handled according to jail operation procedures. No individual who is otherwise ready to be released should continue to be detained solely for the purpose of notition.

    1. ICE REQUEST FOR ASSISTANCE

Requests by ICE, or any other federal agency, for assistance from this department should be directed to a supervisor. The Department may provide available support services, such as traffic control or peacekeeping efforts, to ICE or other federal agencies.

    1. INFORMATION SHARING

No member of this department will prohibit, or in any way restrict, any other member from doing any of the following regarding the citizenship or immigration status, lawful or unlawful, of any individual (8 USC § 1373):

  1. Sending information to, or requesting or receiving such information from ICE.
  2. Maintaining such information in department records.
  3. Exchanging such information with any other federal, state or local government entity.

413.7.1 IMMIGRATION HOLDS

No individual should be held based solely on a federal immigration detainer under 8 CFR 287.7 unless the person has been charged with a federal crime or the detainer is accompanied by a warrant, affidavit of probable cause, or removal order. Notification to the federal authority issuing the detainer should be made prior to the release.

    1. U VISA AND T VISA NON-IMMIGRANT STATUS

Under certain circumstances, federal law allows temporary immigration benefits, known as a U visa, to victims and witnesses of certain qualifying crimes (8 USC § 1101(a)(15)(U)). A law enforcement certification for a U visa may be completed by an officer in order for a U visa to be issued.

Similar immigration protection, known as a T visa, is available for certain qualifying victims of human trafficking (8 USC § 1101(a)(15)(T)). A law enforcement declaration for a T visa may be completed by an officer in order for a T visa to be issued.

Any request for assistance in applying for U visa or T visa status should be forwarded in a timely manner to the Prince George County PD supervisor assigned to oversee the handling of any related case. The Prince George County PD supervisor should:

  1. Consult with the assigned investigator to determine the current status of any related case and whether further documentation is warranted.
  2. Contact the appropriate prosecutor assigned to the case, if applicable, to ensure the certification or declaration has not already been completed and whether a certification or declaration is warranted.
  3. Address the request and complete the certification or declaration, if appropriate, in a timely manner.
    1. The instructions for completing certification and declaration forms can be found on the U.S. Department of Homeland Security (DHS) website.
  4. Ensure that any decision to complete, or not complete, a certification or declaration form is documented in the case file and forwarded to the appropriate prosecutor. Include a copy of any completed form in the case file.
    1. TRAINING

The Training Coordinator shall ensure that all appropriate members receive immigration training.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Utility Service Emergencies

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for addressing Town utility service emergencies. This policy will address calls for service that are directed to the Police Department.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to appropriately respond to Town emergency utility service requests received by this department.

    1. UTILITY SERVICE EMERGENCY

A current contact list of Town personnel to be notified in the event of a utility service emergency should be available in the Communications Center.

      1. WATER LINES

The Town’s responsibility for water lines ends at the water meter; any break or malfunction in the water system from the water meter to a residence or business is the responsibility of the customer. If a water line break occurs on the Town side of the water meter, public works personnel should be notIfied as soon as practicable.

      1. ELECTRICAL LINES

When an electrical power line poses a hazard, a member of this department should be dispatched to the reported location to protect against personal injury or property damage that might be caused by the power line. The fire department, electric company and/or the public works department should be promptly notified, as appropriate.

      1. RESERVOIRS, PUMPS, WELLS

In the event of flooding or equipment malfunctions involving Town reservoirs, pumps or wells, the public works department should be contacted as soon as practicable.

      1. NATURAL GAS LINES

All reports of a possible leak of natural gas or damage to a natural gas line shall promptly be referred to the fire department and the local entity responsible for gas lines. A member of this department should be dispatched to the reported location if it appears that assistance such as traffic control or evacuation is needed.

      1. TRAFFIC SIGNALS

A member of this department should be dispatched upon report of a damaged or malfunctioning traffic signal in order to protect against personal injury or property damage that might occur as the result of the damaged or malfunctioning signal. The member will advise the Communications Center of the problem with the traffic signal. The dispatcher should make the necessary notification to the appropriate traffic signal maintenance agency as soon as practicable. A decision to place a signal on flash should include a consultation with the appropriate traffic signal maintenance agency, unless exigent circumstances exist.

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

Utility Service Emergencies

 

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Crisis Intervention Incidents

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidelines for interacting with those who may be experiencing a mental health or emotional crisis. Interaction with such individuals has the potential for miscommunication and violence. It often requires an officer to make difficult judgments about a person’s mental state and intent in order to effectively and legally interact with the individual.

    1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Person in crisis – A person whose level of distress or mental health symptoms have exceeded the person’s internal ability to manage his/her behavior or emotions. A crisis can be precipitated by any number of things, including an increase in the symptoms of mental illness despite treatment compliance; non-compliance with treatment, including a failure to take prescribed medications appropriately; or any other circumstance or event that causes the person to engage in erratic, disruptive or dangerous behavior that may be accompanied by impaired judgment.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department is committed to providing a consistently high level of service to all members of the community and recognizes that persons in crisis may benefit from intervention. The Department will collaborate, where feasible, with mental health professionals to develop an overall intervention strategy to guide its members’ interactions with those experiencing a mental health crisis. This is to ensure equitable and safe treatment of all involved.

    1. SIGNS

Members should be alert to any of the following possible signs of mental health issues or crises:

  1. A known history of mental illness
  1. Threats of or attempted suicide
  1. Loss of memory
  1. Incoherence, disorientation or slow response
  1. Delusions, hallucinations, perceptions unrelated to reality or grandiose ideas
  1. Depression, pronounced feelings of hopelessness or uselessness, extreme sadness or guilt
  1. Social withdrawal
  1. Manic or impulsive behavior, extreme agitation, lack of control
  1. Lack of fear
  1. Anxiety, aggression, rigidity, inflexibility or paranoia

Members should be aware that this list is not exhaustive. The presence or absence of any of these should not be treated as proof of the presence or absence of a mental health issue or crisis.

    1. COORDINATION WITH MENTAL HEALTH PROFESSIONALS

The Chief of Police should designate an appropriate Lieutenant to collaborate with mental health professionals to develop an education and response protocol. It should include a list of community resources, to guide department interaction with those who may be suffering from mental illness or who appear to be in a mental health crisis.

    1. FIRST RESPONDERS

Safety is a priority for first responders. It is important to recognize that individuals under the influence of alcohol, drugs or both may exhibit symptoms that are similar to those of a person in a mental health crisis. These individuals may still present a serious threat to officers; such a threat should be addressed with reasonable tactics. Nothing in this policy shall be construed to limit an officer’s authority to use reasonable force when interacting with a person in crisis.

Officers are reminded that mental health issues, mental health crises and unusual behavior are not criminal offenses. Individuals may benefit from treatment as opposed to incarceration.

An officer responding to a call involving a person in crisis should:

  1. Promptly assess the situation independent of reported information and make a preliminary determination regarding whether a mental health crisis may be a factor.
  2. Request available backup officers and specialized resources as deemed necessary and, if it is reasonably believed that the person is in a crisis situation, use conflict resolution and de-escalation techniques to stabilize the incident as appropriate
  3. If feasible, and without compromising safety, turn off flashing lights, bright lights or sirens.
  1. Attempt to determine if weapons are present or available.
  1. Take into  account the person’s  mental  and  emotional  state  and  potential  inability  to understand commands or to appreciate the consequences of his/her action or inaction, as perceived by the officer.
  2. Secure the scene and clear the immediate area as necessary
  1. Employ tactics to preserve the safety of all participants.
  1. Determine the nature of any crime.
  1. Request a supervisor, as warranted.
  1. Evaluate any available information that might assist in determining cause or motivation for the person’s actions or stated intentions.
  2. If circumstances reasonably permit, consider and employ alternatives to force.

415.6.1  CONSIDERATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Any officer handling a call involving an individual who may be experiencing a mental health crisis should consider, as time and circumstances reasonably permit (Md. Code HG § 10-622(b)):

  1. Available information that might assist in determining the cause and nature of the individual’s actions or stated intentions.
  2. Community or neighborhood mediation services.
  1. Conflict resolution and de-escalation techniques.
  1. Community or other resources available to assist in dealing with mental health issues.

While these steps are encouraged, nothing in this section is intended to dissuade officers from taking reasonable action to ensure the safety of officers and others.

    1. DE-ESCALATION

Officers should consider that taking no action or passively monitoring the situation may be the most reasonable response to a mental health crisis.

Once it is determined that a situation is a mental health crisis and immediate safety concerns have been addressed, responding members should be aware of the following considerations and should generally:

  • Evaluate safety conditions.
  • Introduce themselves and attempt to obtain the person’s name.
  • Be patient, polite, calm, courteous and avoid overreacting.
  • Speak and move slowly and in a non-threatening manner.
  • Moderate the level of direct eye contact.
  • Remove distractions or disruptive people from the area.
  • Demonstrate active listening skills (i.e., summarize the person’s verbal communication).
  • Provide for sufficient avenues of retreat or escape should the situation become volatile. Responding officers generally should not:
  • Use stances or tactics that can be interpreted as aggressive.
  • Allow others to interrupt or engage the person.
  • Corner a person who is not believed to be armed, violent or suicidal.
  • Argue, speak with a raised voice or use threats to obtain compliance.
    1. INCIDENT ORIENTATION

When responding to an incident that may involve mental illness or a mental health crisis, the officer should request that the dispatcher provide critical information as it becomes available. This includes:

  1. Whether the person relies on drugs or medication, or may have failed to take his/her medication.
  2. Whether there have been prior incidents, suicide threats/attempts, and whether there has been previous police response.
  3. Contact information for a treating physician or mental health professional. Additional resources and a supervisor should be requested as warranted.
    1. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A supervisor should respond to the scene of any interaction with a person in crisis. Responding supervisors should:

  1. Attempt to secure appropriate and sufficient resources.
  1. Closely monitor any use of force, including the use of restraints, and ensure that those subjected to the use of force are provided with timely access to medical care (see the Handcuffing and Restraints Policy).
  2. Consider strategic disengagement. Absent an imminent threat to the public and, as circumstances dictate, this may include removing or reducing law enforcement resources or engaging in passive monitoring.
  3. Ensure that all reports are completed and that incident documentation uses appropriate terminology and language.
  4. Conduct an after-action tactical and operational debriefing, and prepare an after-action evaluation of the incident to be forwarded to the Lieutenant.
  5. Evaluate whether a critical incident stress management debriefing for involved members is warranted.
    1. INCIDENT REPORTING

Members engaging in any oral or written communication associated with a mental health crisis should be mindful of the sensitive nature of such communications and should exercise appropriate discretion when referring to or describing persons and circumstances.

Members having contact with a person in crisis should keep related information confidential, except to the extent that revealing information is necessary to conform to department reporting procedures or other official mental health or medical proceedings.

415.10.1   DIVERSION

Individuals who are not being arrested should be processed in accordance with the Mental Health Evaluations Policy.

    1. NON-SWORN INTERACTION WITH PEOPLE IN CRISIS

Non-sworn or clerical members may be required to interact with persons in crisis in an administrative capacity, such as dispatching, records request, animal control issues.

  1. Members should treat all individuals equally and with dignity and respect.
  2. If a member believes that he/she is interacting with a person in crisis, he/she should proceed patiently and in a calm manner.
  3. Members should be aware and understand that the person may make unusual or bizarre claims or requests.

If a person’s behavior makes the member feel unsafe, if the person is or becomes disruptive or violent, or if the person acts in such a manner as to cause the member to believe that the person may be harmful to him/herself or others, an officer should be promptly summoned to provide assistance.

    1. EVALUATION

The Lieutenant designated to coordinate the crisis intervention strategy for this department should ensure that a thorough review and analysis of the department’s response to these incidents is conducted annually. The report will not include identifying information pertaining to any involved individuals, officers or incidents and will be submitted to the Chief of Police through the chain of command.

    1. TRAINING

In coordination with the mental health community and appropriate stakeholders, the Department will develop and provide comprehensive education and training to all department members to enable them to effectively interact with persons in crisis.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Aircraft Accidents

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide department members with guidelines for handling aircraft accidents.

This policy does not supersede, and is supplementary to applicable portions of the Crime and Disaster Scene Integrity or Hazardous Material Response policies.

      1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Aircraft – Any fixed wing aircraft, rotorcraft, balloon, blimp/dirigible or glider that is capable of carrying a person or any unmanned aerial vehicle other than those intended for non-commercial recreational use.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to provide an appropriate emergency response to aircraft accidents. This includes emergency medical care and scene management.

    1. ARRIVAL AT SCENE

Officers or other authorized members tasked with initial scene management should establish an inner and outer perimeter to:

  1. Protect persons and property.
  1. Prevent any disturbance or further damage to the wreckage or debris, except to preserve life or rescue the injured.
  2. Preserve ground scars and marks made by the aircraft.
  1. Manage the admission and access of public safety and medical personnel to the extent necessary to preserve life or to stabilize hazardous materials.
  2. Maintain a record of persons who enter the accident site.
  1. Consider implementation of an Incident Command System (ICS).
    1. INJURIES AND CASUALTIES

Members should address emergency medical issues and provide care as a first priority.

Those tasked with the supervision of the scene should coordinate with the National Transportation Safety Board (NTSB) prior to the removal of any decedents. If that is not possible, the scene supervisor should ensure documentation of what was disturbed, including switch/control positions and instrument/gauge readings.

    1. NOTIFICATIONS

When an aircraft accident is reported to this department, the responding supervisor shall ensure notification is or has been made to NTSB, the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), and when applicable, the appropriate branch of the military.

Supervisors shall ensure other notifications are made once an aircraft accident has been reported. The notifications will vary depending on the type of accident, extent of injuries or damage, and the type of aircraft involved. When an aircraft accident has occurred, it is generally necessary to notify the following:

  1. Fire department
  1. Appropriate airport tower
  1. Emergency medical services (EMS)
    1. CONTROLLING ACCESS AND SCENE AUTHORITY

Prior to NTSB arrival, scene access should be limited to authorized personnel from the following:

  1. FAA
  1. Fire department, EMS or other assisting law enforcement agencies
  1. Medical Examiner
  1. Appropriate branch of the military, when applicable
  1. Other emergency services agencies (e.g., HAZMAT teams, biohazard decontamination teams, fuel recovery specialists, explosive ordinance disposal specialists)

The NTSB has primary responsibility for investigating accidents involving civil aircraft. In the case of a military aircraft accident, the appropriate branch of the military will have primary investigation responsibility.

After the NTSB or military representative arrives on scene, the efforts of this department will shift to a support role for those agencies. If NTSB or a military representative determines that an aircraft or accident does not qualify under its jurisdiction, the on-scene department supervisor should ensure the accident is still appropriately investigated and documented.

    1. DANGEROUS MATERIALS

Members should be aware of potentially dangerous materials that might be present. These may include, but are not limited to, the following:

  • Fuel, chemicals, explosives, biological, radioactive materials, bombs or other ordnance
  • Pressure vessels, compressed gas bottles, accumulators and tires
  • Fluids, batteries, flares and igniters
  • Evacuation chutes, ballistic parachute systems and composite materials
    1. DOCUMENTATION

All aircraft accidents occurring within the Town of Prince George County shall be documented. At a minimum the documentation should include the date, time and location of the incident; any witness statements, if taken; the names of GPD members deployed to assist; other Town resources that were utilized; and cross reference information to other investigating agencies. Suspected criminal activity should be documented on the appropriate crime report.

      1. WRECKAGE

When reasonably safe, members should obtain the following:

  • Aircraft registration number (N number)
  • Number of casualties
  • Photographs or video of the overall wreckage, including the cockpit and damage, starting at the initial point of impact, if possible
  • Photographs or video of any ground scars or marks made by the aircraft
      1. WITNESSES

Members tasked with contacting witnesses should obtain the following:

  1. Witness location at the time of his/her observation relative to the accident site
  1. Detailed description of what was observed or heard
  1. Names of all persons reporting the accident, even if not yet interviewed
  1. Audio recordings of reports to 9-1-1 regarding the accident and dispatch records

416.9 MEDIA RELATIONS

The Press Information Officer should coordinate a response to the media, including access issues, road closures, detours and any safety information that is pertinent to the surrounding community. Any release of information regarding details of the accident itself should be coordinated with the NTSB, if it is assuming responsibility for the investigation.

The Glenarden Police Department will generally be responsible for any family notifications and the release of victims’ names. The NTSB generally will not assume these tasks.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Field Training Officers

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidelines for field training that ensure standardized training and evaluation, facilitate the transition from the academic setting to the actual performance of general law enforcement duties, and introduce the policies, procedures and operations of the Glenarden Police Department. The policy addresses the administration of field training and the selection, supervision, training and responsibilities of the Field Training Officer (FTO).

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department that all newly hired or appointed officer trainees will participate in field training that is staffed and supervised by trained and qualified FTOs.

    1. FIELD TRAINING

The Department shall establish minimum standards for field training, which should be of sufficient duration to prepare officer trainees for law enforcement duties and in compliance with state-specific Maryland Police Training Commission (MPTC) requirements. The field training is designed to prepare trainees for a patrol assignment and acquire the skills needed to operate in a safe, productive and professional manner, in accordance with the general law enforcement duties of this department (COMAR 12.04.01.17).

To the extent practicable, field training:

  1. Shall include activities designed to familiarize the individual with the duties of the officer position, as defined and administered by this department.
  2. May be conducted in conjunction with an entrance-level training program or a separate training activity provided by a law enforcement agency.
  3. Shall be a minimum of 80 hours in duration.
  4. Shall be monitored by a certified officer, the Chief of Police or the authorized designee.
  5. Should include procedures for:
    1. Issuance of training materials to each trainee at the beginning of his/her field training.
    2. Daily,  weekly  and  monthly  evaluation  and  documentation  of  the  trainee’s performance.
    3. A multi-phase structure that includes:
      1. A formal evaluation progress report completed by the FTOs involved with the trainee and submitted to the Training Coordinator and FTO coordinator.
      2. Assignment of the trainee to a variety of shifts and geographical areas.
      3. Assignment of the trainee to a rotation of FTOs in order to provide for an objective evaluation of the trainee’s performance.
    4. The trainee’s confidential evaluation of his/her assigned FTOs and the field training process.
    5. Retention of all field training documentation in the officer trainee’s training file including:
      1. All performance evaluations.
      2. A  certificate  of  completion  certifying  that  the  trainee  has  successfully completed the required number of field training hours.
    1. FTO COORDINATOR

The Chief of Police shall delegate certain responsibilities to an FTO coordinator. The coordinator shall be appointed by and directly responsible to the Operations Services Lieutenant or the authorized designee.

The FTO coordinator may appoint a senior FTO or other designee to assist in the coordination of FTOs and their activities.

The responsibilities of the coordinator include, but are not limited to:

  1. Assignment of trainees to FTOs.
  2. Conducting FTO meetings.
  3. Maintaining and ensuring FTO and trainee performance evaluations are completed.
  4. Maintaining, updating and issuing department training materials to each FTO and trainee.
  5. Developing ongoing training for FTOs.
  6. Mentoring and supervising individual FTO performance.
  7. Monitoring the overall performance of field training.
  8. Keeping  the  Shift  Supervisor  informed  through  monthly  evaluation  reports  about  the trainees’ progress.
  9. Maintaining liaison with FTO coordinators from other law enforcement agencies.
  10. Maintaining liaison with police academy staff on recruit officer performance during academy attendance.
  11. Other activities as may be directed by the Operations Services Lieutenant.
  12. Completing and submitting a written statement to the MPTC for each recruit upon successful completion of field training (COMAR 12.04.01.17(C)).

The FTO coordinator will be required to successfully complete a training course approved by this department that is applicable to supervision of field training within one year of appointment to this position.

    1. FTO SELECTION, TRAINING AND RESPONSIBILITIES
      1. SELECTION PROCESS

The selection of an FTO will be at the discretion of the Chief of Police or the authorized designee. Selection will be based on the officer’s:

  1. Desire to be an FTO.
  1. Experience, which shall include a minimum of four years of patrol experience, two of which shall be with this department.
  2. Demonstrated ability as a positive role model.
  1. Successful completion of an internal oral interview process.
  1. Evaluation by supervisors and current FTOs.
  1. Possession of, or ability to obtain, department-approved certification.

An FTO must remain in good standing and may be relieved from FTO duties due to discipline, inappropriate conduct or poor performance.

      1. TRAINING

An officer selected as an FTO shall successfully complete the required department-approved FTO course prior to being assigned as an FTO.

All FTOs must complete an FTO update course approved by this department every three years while assigned to the position of FTO.

      1. TRAINING MATERIALS

The FTO shall receive training materials outlining the requirements, expectations and objectives of the FTO position. FTOs should refer to their training materials or the FTO coordinator regarding specific questions related to FTO or field training.

      1. RESPONSIBILITIES

The responsibilities of the FTO include, but are not limited to:

  1. Issuing his/her assigned trainee field training materials in accordance with the Training Policy.
    1. The FTO shall ensure that the trainee has the opportunity to become knowledgeable of the subject matter and proficient with the skills as set forth in the training materials.
    2. The FTO shall sign off all completed topics contained in the training materials, noting the methods of learning and evaluating the performance of his/her assigned trainee.
  2. Completing and reviewing daily performance evaluations with the trainee each day.
  1. Completing and submitting a written evaluation on the performance of his/her assigned trainee to the FTO coordinator on a daily basis.
  2. Completing a detailed weekly performance evaluation of his/her assigned trainee at the end of each week.
  3. Completing a monthly evaluation report of his/her assigned trainee at the end of each month.
  1. Providing the shift supervisor with a verbal synopsis of the trainee’s activities at the end of each day or during any unusual occurrence needing guidance or clarification.

Air Support

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The use of air support can be invaluable in certain situations. This policy specifies situations where the use of air support may be requested and the responsibilities for making a request.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to prioritize requests for air support to enhance law enforcement objectives and provide additional safety to officers and the community.

    1. REQUEST FOR AIR SUPPORT

If a supervisor or officer in charge of an incident determines that the use of air support would be beneficial, a request to obtain air support may be made.

      1. CIRCUMSTANCES FOR REQUESTS

Law enforcement air support may be requested under conditions that include, but are not limited to:

  1. Whenever the safety of officers or the community is in jeopardy and the presence of air support may reduce such hazard.
  2. When the use of air support will aid in the capture of a suspected fleeing felon whose continued freedom represents an ongoing threat to officers or the community.
  3. When air support is needed to locate a person who is lost and whose continued absence constitutes a serious health or safety hazard.
  4. Vehicle pursuits.
  1. Pre-planned events or actions that require air support.
  1. When air support is activated under existing mutual aid agreements.
  1. When the Shift Supervisor or equivalent authority determines a reasonable need exists.
      1. ALLIED AGENCY REQUEST

After consideration and approval of the request for air support, the Shift Supervisor or the authorized designee will call the closest agency having available air support and will apprise that agency of the specific details of the incident prompting the request.

Contacts and Temporary Detentions

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for temporarily detaining but not arresting persons in the field, conducting field interviews (FI), pat-down searches, and the taking and disposition of photographs.

      1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Consensual encounter – When an officer contacts an individual but does not create a detention through words, actions or other means. In other words, a reasonable individual would believe that his/her contact with the officer is voluntary.

Field Interview (FI) – The brief detainment of an individual, whether on foot or in a vehicle, based on reasonable suspicion for the purpose of determining the individual’s identity and resolving the officer’s suspicions.

Field photographs – Posed photographs taken of a person during a contact, temporary detention or arrest in the field. Undercover surveillance photographs of an individual and recordings captured by the normal operation of a Mobile Audio Video (MAV) system or public safety camera when persons are not posed for the purpose of photographing are not considered field photographs.

Pat-down search – A type of search used by officers in the field to check an individual for dangerous weapons. It involves a thorough patting down of clothing to locate any weapons or dangerous items that could pose a danger to the officer, the detainee or others.

Reasonable suspicion – When, under the totality of the circumstances, an officer has articulable facts that criminal activity may be afoot and a particular person is connected with that possible criminal activity.

Temporary detention – When an officer intentionally, through words, actions or physical force causes an individual to reasonably believe he/she is required to restrict his/her movement without an actual arrest. Temporary detentions also occur when an officer actually restrains a person’s freedom of movement.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department respects the right of the public to be free from unreasonable searches or seizures. Due to an unlimited variety of situations confronting the officer, the decision to temporarily detain a person and complete an FI, pat-down search or field photograph shall be left to the officer based on the totality of the circumstances, officer safety considerations and constitutional safeguards.

    1. FIELD INTERVIEWS

Based on observance of suspicious circumstances or upon information from investigation, an officer may initiate the stop of a person, and conduct an FI, when there is articulable, reasonable suspicion to do so. A person, however, shall not be detained longer than is reasonably necessary to resolve the officer’s suspicion.

Nothing in this policy is intended to discourage consensual contacts. Frequent casual contact with consenting individuals is encouraged by the Glenarden Police Department to strengthen community involvement, community awareness and problem identification.

      1. INITIATING A FIELD INTERVIEW

When initiating the stop, the officer should be able to point to specific facts which, when considered with the totality of the circumstances, reasonably warrant the stop. Such facts include, but are not limited to, an individual’s:

  1. Appearance or demeanor suggesting that he/she is part of a criminal enterprise or is engaged in a criminal act.
  2. Actions suggesting that he/she is engaged in a criminal activity.
  1. Presence in an area at an inappropriate hour of the day or night.
  1. Presence in a particular area is suspicious.
  1. Carrying of suspicious objects or items.
  1. Excessive clothes for the climate or clothes bulging in a manner that suggest he/she is carrying a dangerous weapon.
  2. Location in proximate time and place to an alleged crime.
  1. Physical description or clothing worn that matches a suspect in a recent crime.
  1. Prior criminal record or involvement in criminal activity as known by the officer.

419.4   PAT-DOWN SEARCHES

Once a valid stop has been made, an officer may pat a suspect’s outer clothing if the officer has a reasonable, articulable suspicion that the suspect has a dangerous weapon. The purpose of this limited search is not to discover evidence of a crime, but to allow the officer to pursue the investigation without fear of violence. Circumstances that may establish justification for performing a pat-down search include, but are not limited to:

  1. The type of crime suspected, particularly in crimes of violence where the use or threat of weapons is involved.
  2. Where more than one suspect must be handled by a single officer.
  1. The hour of the day and the location or area where the stop takes place.
  1. Prior knowledge of the suspect’s use of force and/or propensity to carry weapons.
  2. The actions and demeanor of the suspect.
  1. Visual indications which suggest that the suspect is carrying a firearm or other dangerous weapon.

Whenever practicable, a pat-down search should not be conducted by a lone officer. A cover officer should be positioned to ensure safety and should not be involved in the search.

419.4.1 LIMITED SEARCH FOR WEAPONS

An officer may make an inquiry and conduct a limited search of a person if, in light of the officer’s observations, information and experience, the officer reasonably believes that (Md. Code CR § 4-206):

  1. A person may be wearing, carrying or transporting a handgun in violation of the law.
  2. Because the person possesses a handgun, the person is or presently may be dangerous to the officer or to others.
  3. Under the circumstances, it is impracticable to obtain a search warrant.
  4. To protect the officers or others, swift measures are necessary to discover whether the person is wearing, carrying or transporting a handgun.
    1. FIELD PHOTOGRAPHS

All available databases should be searched before photographing any field detainee. If a photograph is not located, or if an existing photograph no longer resembles the detainee, the officer shall carefully consider, among other things, the factors listed below.

      1. FIELD PHOTOGRAPHS TAKEN WITH CONSENT

Field photographs may be taken when the subject being photographed knowingly and voluntarily gives consent. When taking a consensual photograph, the officer should have the individual read and sign the appropriate form accompanying the photograph.

      1. FIELD PHOTOGRAPHS TAKEN WITHOUT CONSENT

Field photographs may be taken without consent only if they are taken during a detention that is based upon reasonable suspicion of criminal activity, and the photograph serves a legitimate law enforcement purpose related to the detention. The officer must be able to articulate facts that reasonably indicate that the subject was involved in or was about to become involved in criminal conduct. The subject should not be ordered to remove or lift any clothing for the purpose of taking a photograph.

If, prior to taking a photograph, the officer’s reasonable suspicion of criminal activity has been dispelled, the detention must cease and the photograph should not be taken.

All field photographs and related reports shall be submitted to a supervisor and retained in compliance with this policy.

      1. DISPOSITION OF PHOTOGRAPHS

All detainee photographs must be adequately labeled and submitted to the Shift Supervisor with either an associated FI card or other documentation explaining the nature of the contact. If an individual is photographed as a suspect in a particular crime, the photograph should be submitted as an evidence item in the related case, following standard evidence procedures.

If a photograph is not associated with an investigation where a case number has been issued, the Shift Supervisor should review and forward the photograph to one of the following locations:

  1. If the photograph and associated FI or documentation is relevant to criminal organization/ enterprise enforcement, the Shift Supervisor will forward the photograph and documents to the  designated criminal  intelligence  system  supervisor.  The  supervisor  will  ensure the photograph and supporting documents are retained as prescribed in the Criminal Organizations Policy.
  2. Photographs that do not qualify for retention in a criminal intelligence system or temporary information file, or that are not evidence in an investigation with an assigned case number, shall be forwarded to the Records Division (Prince George County PD).

When a photograph is taken in association with a particular case, the investigator may use such photograph in a photo lineup. Thereafter, the individual photograph should be retained as a part of the case file. All other photographs shall be retained in accordance with the established records retention schedule.

      1. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES

While it is recognized that field photographs often become valuable investigative tools, supervisors should monitor such practices in view of the above listed considerations. This is not to imply that supervisor approval is required before each photograph is taken.

Access to, and use of, field photographs shall be strictly limited to law enforcement purposes.

419.6   WITNESS IDENTIFICATION AND INTERVIEWS

Because potential witnesses to an incident may become unavailable or the integrity of their statements compromised with the passage of time, officers should, when warranted by the seriousness of the case, take reasonable steps to promptly coordinate with an on-scene supervisor and/or criminal investigator to utilize available members for the following:

  1. Identifying all persons present at the scene and in the immediate area.
    1. When feasible, a recorded statement should be obtained from those who claim not to have witnessed the incident but who were present at the time it occurred.
    2. Any potential witness who is unwilling or unable to remain available for a formal interview should not be detained absent reasonable suspicion to detain or probable cause to arrest. Without detaining the individual for the sole purpose of identification, officers should attempt to identify the witness prior to his/her departure.
  1. Witnesses who are willing to provide a formal interview should be asked to meet at a suitable location where criminal investigators may obtain a recorded statement. Such witnesses, if willing, may be transported by department members.
    1. A written, verbal or recorded statement of consent should be obtained prior to transporting a witness. When the witness is a minor, consent should be obtained from the parent or guardian, if available, prior to transport.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Criminal Organizations

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to ensure that the Glenarden Police Department appropriately utilizes criminal intelligence systems and temporary information files to support investigations of criminal organizations and enterprises.

420.1.1   DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Criminal intelligence system – Any record system that receives, stores, exchanges or disseminates information that has been evaluated and determined to be relevant to the identification of a criminal organization or enterprise, its members or affiliates. This does not include temporary information files.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department recognizes that certain criminal activities, including but not limited to gang crimes and drug trafficking, often involve some degree of regular coordination and may involve a large number of participants over a broad geographical area.

It is the policy of this department to collect and share relevant information while respecting the privacy and legal rights of the public.

    1. CRIMINAL INTELLIGENCE SYSTEMS

No department member may create, submit to or obtain information from a criminal intelligence system unless the Chief of Police has approved the system for department use.

Any criminal intelligence system approved for department use should meet or exceed the standards of 28 CFR 23.20.

A designated supervisor will be responsible for maintaining each criminal intelligence system that has been approved for department use. The supervisor or the authorized designee should ensure the following:

  1. Members using any such system are appropriately selected and trained.
  1. Use of every criminal intelligence system is appropriately reviewed and audited.
  1. Any system security issues are reasonably addressed.

420.3.1 SYSTEM ENTRIES

It is the designated supervisor’s responsibility to approve the entry of any information from a report, FI, photo or other relevant document into an authorized criminal intelligence system. If entries are made based upon information that is not on file with this department, such as open or public source documents or documents that are on file at another agency, the designated supervisor should ensure copies of those documents are retained by the Records Division (Prince George

County PD). Any supporting documentation for an entry shall be retained by the Records Division (Prince George County PD) in accordance with the established records retention schedule and for at least as long as the entry is maintained in the system.

The designated supervisor should ensure that any documents retained by the Records Division (Prince George County PD) are appropriately marked as intelligence information. The Records Division (Prince George County PD) may not purge such documents without the approval of the designated supervisor.

    1. TEMPORARY INFORMATION FILE

No member may create or keep files on individuals that are separate from the approved criminal intelligence system. However, members may maintain temporary information that is necessary to actively investigate whether a person or group qualifies for entry into the department-approved criminal intelligence system only as provided in this section. Once information qualifies for inclusion, it should be submitted to the supervisor responsible for consideration of criminal intelligence system entries.

      1. FILE CONTENTS

A temporary information file may only contain information and documents that, within one year, will have a reasonable likelihood to meet the criteria for entry into an authorized criminal intelligence system.

Information and documents contained in a temporary information file:

  1. Must only be included upon documented authorization of the responsible department supervisor.
  2. Should not be originals that would ordinarily be retained by the Records Division (Prince George County PD) or Property and Evidence Section, but should be copies of, or references to, retained documents, such as copies of reports, field interview (FI) forms, the Communications Center records or booking forms.
  3. Shall not include opinions. No person, organization or enterprise shall be labeled as being involved in crime beyond what is already in the document or information.
  4. May include information collected from publicly available sources or references to documents on file with another government agency. Attribution identifying the source should be retained with the information.
      1. FILE REVIEW AND PURGING

The contents of a temporary information file shall not be retained longer than one year. At the end of one year, the contents must be purged.

The designated supervisor shall periodically review the temporary information files to verify that the contents meet the criteria for retention. Validation and purging of files is the responsibility of the supervisor.

    1. INFORMATION RECOGNITION

Department members should document facts that suggest an individual, organization or enterprise is involved in criminal activity and should forward that information appropriately. Examples include, but are not limited to:

  1. Gang indicia associated with a person or residence.
  1. Information related to a drug-trafficking operation.
  1. Vandalism indicating an animus for a particular group.
  1. Information related to an illegal gambling operation.

Department supervisors who utilize an authorized criminal intelligence system should work with the Training Coordinator to train members to identify information that may be particularly relevant for inclusion.

    1. RELEASE OF INFORMATION

Department members shall comply with the rules of an authorized criminal intelligence system regarding inquiries and release of information.

Information from a temporary information file may only be furnished to department members and other law enforcement agencies on a need-to-know basis and consistent with the Records Maintenance and Release Policy.

When an inquiry is made by the parent or guardian of a juvenile as to whether that juvenile’s name is in a temporary information file, such information should be provided by the supervisor responsible for the temporary information file, unless there is good cause to believe that the release of such information might jeopardize an ongoing criminal investigation.

    1. CRIMINAL STREET GANGS

The Prince George County PD supervisor should ensure that there are an appropriate number of department members who can:

  1. Testify as experts on matters related to criminal street gangs, and maintain an above average familiarity with identification of criminal street gangs, criminal street gang members, and patterns of criminal gang activity.
  2. Coordinate with other agencies in the region regarding criminal street gang-related crimes and information.
  3. Train other members to identify gang indicia and investigate criminal street gang-related crimes.
    1. TRAINING

The Training Coordinator should provide training on best practices in the use of each authorized criminal intelligence system to those tasked with investigating criminal organizations and enterprises. Training should include:

  1. The protection of civil liberties.
  1. Participation in a multiagency criminal intelligence system.
  1. Submission of information into a multiagency criminal intelligence system or the receipt of information from such a system, including any governing federal and state rules and statutes.
  2. The type of information appropriate for entry into a criminal intelligence system or temporary information file.
  3. The review and purging of temporary information files.

Shift Supervisor

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidelines for the designation of a Shift Supervisor and, as needed, an acting Shift Supervisor for each shift.

    1. POLICY

Each shift will be directed by a Shift Supervisor capable of making decisions and managing in a manner consistent with the mission of the Glenarden Police Department. To accomplish this, a Lieutenant shall be designated as the Shift Supervisor for each shift.

    1. DESIGNATION AS ACTING WATCHCOMMANDER

With prior authorization from the Operations Services Lieutenant, generally when a Lieutenant is unavailable for duty as Shift Supervisor, a qualified lower-ranking member shall be designated as acting Shift Supervisor in accordance with the terms of applicable memorandums of understanding or collective bargaining agreements.

    1. WATCHCOMMANDER RESPONSIBILITIES

The Shift Supervisor shall have overall responsibility and accountability for the operation of this department on an assigned shift. Duties may include, but are not limited to:

  1. Ensuring at least one uniformed patrol supervisor is deployed during each shift, in addition to the Shift Supervisor.
  2. Ensuring sufficient members are on-duty to accomplish the mission of the Glenarden Police Department.
  3. Providing command-level oversight of major crime scenes, tactical situations or disasters.
  1. Establishing service level priorities.
  1. Providing job-related training and guidance to subordinates.
  1. Acquiring outside resources or providing assistance to other agencies, when applicable.
  1. Handling service inquiries or complaints from the public.
  1. Acting as the Press Information Officer when appropriate.
  1. Managing risk exposure.
  1. Ensuring the security of all department facilities.
  1. Ensuring the proper equipment and vehicles are available for member use.
  1. Representing the Department at community functions.
  1. Serving as a temporary Lieutenant when so designated.

Mobile Audio Video

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The Glenarden Police Department has equipped marked law enforcement vehicles with Mobile Audio Video (MAV) recording systems to provide records of events and to assist officers in the performance of their duties. This policy provides guidance on the use of these systems.

422.1.1   DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Activate – Any process that causes the MAV system to transmit or store video or audio data in an active mode.

In-car camera system and Mobile Audio Video (MAV) system – Synonymous terms that refer to any system that captures audio and video signals, that is capable of installation in a vehicle, and that includes at a minimum, a camera, microphone, recorder and monitor.

MAV technician – Personnel certified or trained in the operational use and repair of MAVs, duplicating methods, storage and retrieval methods and procedures, and who have a working knowledge of video forensics and evidentiary procedures.

Recorded media – Audio-video signals recorded or digitally stored on a storage device or portable media.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to use mobile audio and video technology to more effectively fulfill the mission of the Department and to ensure these systems are used securely and efficiently.

    1. OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES

Prior to going into service, each officer will properly equip him/herself to record audio and video in the field. At the end of the shift, each officer will follow the established procedures for providing to the Department any recordings or used media and any other related equipment. Each officer should have adequate recording media for the entire duty assignment. In the event an officer works at a remote location and reports in only periodically, additional recording media may be issued. Only Glenarden Police Department identified and labeled media with tracking numbers is to be used. At the start of each shift, officers should test the MAV system’s operation in accordance with manufacturer specifications and department operating procedures and training. System documentation is accomplished by the officer recording his/her name, serial number, badge or personal identification number (PIN) and the current date and time at the start and again at the end of each shift. If the system is malfunctioning, the officer shall take the vehicle out of service unless a supervisor requests the vehicle remain in service.

    1. ACTIVATION OF THE MAV

The MAV system is designed to turn on whenever the vehicle’s emergency lights are activated. The system remains on until it is turned off manually. The audio portion is independently controlled and should be activated manually by the officer whenever the officer (Md. Code CJ § 10-402):

  1. Initially lawfully detains a vehicle during a criminal investigation or for a traffic violation.
  1. Is a party to the oral communication.
  1. Has  been  identified  as  a  law  enforcement  officer  to  the  other  parties  of  the  oral communication prior to any interception.
  2. Informs all other parties to the communication of the interception at the beginning of the communication and the oral interception is being made as part of a video tape recording.
      1. REQUIRED ACTIVATION OF THE MAV

This policy is not intended to describe every possible situation in which the MAV system may be used, although there are many situations where its use is appropriate. An officer may activate the system any time the officer believes it would be appropriate or valuable to document an incident.

The video portion of the MAV system should be activated and the audio portion turned off in any of the following situations unless prior consent is obtained by all parties:

  1. All field contacts involving actual or potential criminal conduct within range:
    1. Priority responses
    1. Vehicle pursuits
    1. Suspicious vehicles
    1. Arrests
    1. Vehicle searches
    1. Physical or verbal confrontations or use of force
    1. Pedestrian checks
    1. Driving while impaired (DWI) or driving under the influence (DUI) investigations, including field sobriety tests
    2. Consensual encounters
    1. Crimes in progress
    1. Responding to an in-progress call
  1. All self-initiated activity in which an officer would normally notify the Communications Center
  1. Any call for service involving a crime where the recorder may aid in the apprehension and/ or prosecution of a suspect:
    1. Domestic violence
    2. Disturbance of the peace
    1. Offenses involving violence or weapons
  1. Any other contact that becomes adversarial after the initial contact, in a situation that would not otherwise require recording
  2. Any other circumstance where the officer believes that a recording of an incident would be appropriate

Activation of the MAV system is not required when exchanging information with other officers or during breaks, lunch periods, when not in service or actively on patrol.

      1. CESSATION OF RECORDING

Once activated, the MAV system should remain on until the incident has concluded or as long as is legally acceptable. For the purpose of this section, conclusion of an incident has occurred when all arrests have been made, arrestees have been transported and all witnesses and victims have been interviewed. Recording may cease if an officer is simply waiting for a tow truck or a family member to arrive, or in other similar situations.

      1. SURREPTITIOUS RECORDING

No member of this department may surreptitiously record a conversation of any other member of this department except with a court order or when lawfully authorized by the Chief of Police or the authorized designee for the purpose of conducting a criminal or administrative investigation.

      1. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES

Supervisors should determine if vehicles with non-functioning MAV systems should be placed into service. If these vehicles are placed into service, the appropriate documentation should be made, including notification of the Communications Center.

At reasonable intervals, supervisors should validate that:

  1. Beginning and end-of-shift recording procedures are followed.
  2. Logs reflect the proper chain of custody, including:
    1. The tracking number of the MAV system media.
    2. The date the media was issued.
    3. The name of the department member or the vehicle to which the media was issued.
    4. The date the media was submitted for retention.
    5. The name of the department member submitting the media.
    6. Holds for evidence indication and tagging as required.
  3. The operation of MAV systems by new members is assessed and reviewed no less than biweekly.

When an incident arises that requires the immediate retrieval of the recorded media (e.g., serious crime scenes, officer-involved shootings or deaths, department-involved traffic accidents), a supervisor shall respond to the scene and ensure that the appropriate person properly retrieves the recorded media. The media may need to be treated as evidence and should be handled in accordance with current evidence procedures for recorded media. Supervisors may activate the video of the MAV system remotely to monitor a developing situation, such as a chase, riot or an event that may threaten public safety, officer safety or both, when the purpose is to obtain tactical information to assist in managing the event. Supervisors shall not remotely activate the MAV system for the purpose of monitoring the conversations or actions of an officer.

    1. REVIEW OF MAV RECORDINGS

All recording media, recorded images and audio recordings are the property of the Department. Dissemination outside of the Department is strictly prohibited, except to the extent permitted or required by law.

To prevent damage to, or alteration of, the original recorded media, it shall not be copied, viewed or otherwise inserted into any device not approved by the Department, MAV technician or forensic media staff. When reasonably possible, a copy of the original media shall be used for viewing (unless otherwise directed by the courts) to preserve the original media.

Recordings may be reviewed in any of the following situations:

  1. By officers for use when preparing reports or statements
  1. By a supervisor investigating a specific act of officer conduct
  1. By a supervisor to assess officer performance
  1. To assess proper functioning of MAV systems
  1. By department investigators who are participating in an official investigation, such as a personnel complaint, administrative inquiry or a criminal investigation
  2. By department personnel who request to review recordings
  1. By an officer who is captured on or referenced in the video or audio data, and reviews and uses such data for any purpose relating to his/her employment
  2. By court personnel through proper process or with the permission of the Chief of Police or the authorized designee
  3. By the media through proper process
  1. To assess possible training value
  1. For training purposes. If an involved officer objects to showing a recording, his/her objection will be submitted to the command staff to determine if the training value outweighs the officer’s objection.
  2. As may be directed by the Chief of Police or the authorized designee

Members desiring to view any previously uploaded or archived MAV recording should submit a request in writing to the Shift Supervisor. Approved requests should be forwarded to the MAV technician for processing.

In no event shall any recording be used or shown for the purpose of ridiculing or embarrassing any member.

    1. DOCUMENTING MAV USE

If any incident is recorded with either the video or audio system, the existence of that recording shall be documented in the officer’s report. If a citation is issued, the officer shall make a notation on the back of the records copy of the citation indicating that the incident was recorded.

    1. RECORDING MEDIA STORAGE AND INTEGRITY

Once submitted for storage, all recording media will be labeled and stored in a designated secure area. All recording media that is not booked as evidence will be retained for a minimum of 180 days and disposed of in accordance with the established records retention schedule.

      1. COPIES OF ORIGINAL RECORDING MEDIA

Original recording media shall not be used for any purpose other than for initial review by a supervisor. Upon proper request, a copy of the original recording media will be made for use as authorized in this policy.

Original recording media may only be released in response to a court order or upon approval by the Chief of Police or the authorized designee. In the event that an original recording is released to a court, a copy shall be made and placed in storage until the original is returned.

      1. MAV RECORDINGS AS EVIDENCE

Officers who reasonably believe that a MAV recording is likely to contain evidence relevant to a criminal offense, potential claim against the officer or against the Glenarden Police Department should indicate this in an appropriate report. Officers should ensure relevant recordings are preserved.

    1. SYSTEM OPERATIONAL STANDARDS
  1. MAV system vehicle installations should be based on officer safety requirements and the vehicle and device manufacturer’s recommendations.
  2. The MAV system should be configured to minimally record for 30 seconds prior to an event.
  1. The MAV system should not be configured to record audio data occurring prior to activation.
  1. Unless the transmitters being used are designed for synchronized use, only one transmitter, usually the primary initiating officer’s transmitter, should be activated at a scene to minimize interference or noise from other MAV transmitters.
  2. Officers using digital transmitters that are synchronized to their individual MAVs shall activate video recordings when responding in a support capacity. This is to obtain additional perspectives of the incident scene.
  3. With the exception of law enforcement radios or other emergency equipment, other electronic devices should not be used inside MAV-equipped law enforcement vehicles to minimize the possibility of causing electronic or noise interference with the MAV system.
  4. Officers shall not erase, alter, reuse, modify or tamper with MAV recordings. Only a supervisor, MAV technician or other authorized designee may erase and reissue previous recordings and may only do so pursuant to the provisions of this policy.
  5. To prevent damage, original recordings shall not be viewed or otherwise inserted into any device not approved by the Department, MAV technician or forensic media staff.
    1. MAV TECHNICIAN RESPONSIBILITIES

The MAV technician is responsible for:

  1. Ordering, issuing, retrieving, storing, erasing and duplicating of all recorded media.
  1. Collecting all completed media for oversight and verification of wireless downloaded media. Once collected, the MAV technician:
    1. Ensures it is stored in a secure location with authorized controlled access.
    1. Makes the appropriate entries in the chain of custody log.
  1. Erasing of media:
    1. Pursuant to a court order.
    1. In accordance with the established records retention schedule, including reissuing all other media deemed to be of no evidentiary value.
  1. Assigning all media an identification number prior to issuance to the field:
    1. Maintaining a record of issued media.
  1. Ensuring that an adequate supply of recording media is available.
  1. Managing the long-term storage of media that has been deemed to be of evidentiary value in accordance with the department evidence storage protocols and the established records retention schedule.
    1. TRAINING

All members who are authorized to use the MAV system shall successfully complete an approved course of instruction prior to its use including the limitations of conducting audio recordings under Maryland law.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Mobile Data Terminal Use

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the proper access, use and application of the Mobile Data Terminal (MDT) system in order to ensure proper access to confidential records from local, state and national law enforcement databases, and to ensure effective electronic communications between department members and the Communications Center.

    1. POLICY

Glenarden Police Department members using the MDT shall comply with all appropriate federal and state rules and regulations and shall use the MDT in a professional manner, in accordance with this policy.

    1. PRIVACY EXPECTATION

Members forfeit any expectation of privacy with regard to messages accessed, transmitted, received or reviewed on any department technology system (see the Information Technology Use Policy for additional guidance).

    1. RESTRICTED ACCESS AND USE

MDT use is subject to the Information Technology Use Policy.

Members shall not access the MDT system if they have not received prior authorization and the required training. Members shall immediately report unauthorized access or use of the MDT by another member to their supervisors or Shift Supervisors.

Use of the MDT system to access law enforcement databases or transmit messages is restricted to official activities, business-related tasks or for communications that are directly related to the business, administration or practices of the Department. In the event that a member has questions about sending a particular message or accessing a particular database, the member should seek prior approval from his/her supervisor.

Sending derogatory, defamatory, obscene, disrespectful, sexually suggestive, harassing or any other inappropriate messages on the MDT system is prohibited and may result in discipline.

It is a violation of this policy to transmit a message or access a law enforcement database under another member’s name or to use the password of another member to log in to the MDT system unless directed to do so by a supervisor. Members are required to log off the MDT or secure the MDT when it is unattended. This added security measure will minimize the potential for unauthorized access or misuse.

423.4.1 USE WHILE DRIVING

Use of the MDT by the vehicle operator should generally be limited to times when the vehicle is stopped. When the vehicle is in motion, the operator should only attempt to read messages

that are likely to contain information that is required for immediate enforcement, investigative or safety needs. Short transmissions, such as a license plate check, are permitted if it reasonably appears that it can be done safely. In no case shall an operator attempt to send or review lengthy messages while the vehicle is in motion.

423.5 DOCUMENTATION OF ACTIVITY

Except as otherwise directed by the Shift Supervisor, all calls for service assigned by a dispatcher should be communicated by voice over the police radio and electronically via the MDT unless security or confidentiality prevents such broadcasting.

MDT and voice transmissions are used to document the member’s daily activity. To ensure accuracy:

  1. All contacts or activity shall be documented at the time of the contact.
  1. Whenever the activity or contact is initiated by voice, it shall be documented by a dispatcher.
  1. Whenever the activity or contact is not initiated by voice, the member shall document it via the MDT.
      1. STATUS CHANGES

All changes in status (e.g., arrival at scene, meal periods, in service) will be transmitted over the police radio or through the MDT system.

Members responding to in-progress calls shall advise changes in status over the radio to assist other members responding to the same incident. Other changes in status can be made on the MDT.

      1. EMERGENCY ACTIVATION

If there is an emergency activation and the member does not respond to a request for confirmation of the need for emergency assistance or confirms the need, available resources will be sent to assist in locating the member. If the location is known, the nearest available officer should respond in accordance with the Officer Response to Calls Policy.

Members should ensure a field supervisor and the Shift Supervisor is notified of the incident without delay. Officers not responding to the emergency shall refrain from transmitting on the police radio until a no-further-assistance broadcast is made or if they are handling a different emergency.

    1. EQUIPMENT CONSIDERATIONS
      1. MAL-FUNCTIONING MDT

Whenever possible, members will not use vehicles with malfunctioning MDTs. Whenever members  must  drive  a  vehicle  in  which  the  MDT  is  not  working,  they  shall  notify  the

Communications Center. It shall be responsibility of the dispatcher to document all information that will then be transmitted verbally over the police radio.

      1. BOMB CALLS

When investigating reports of possible bombs, members should turn off their MDTs when in close proximity of a suspected explosive device. Radio frequency emitted by the MDT could cause some devices to detonate.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Portable Audio/Video Recorders

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidelines for the use of portable audio/video recording devices by members of this department while in the performance of their duties. Portable audio/video recording devices include all recording systems whether body-worn, handheld or integrated into portable equipment. This policy does not apply to lawful surreptitious audio/video recording, interception of communications for authorized investigative purposes or to mobile audio/video recordings (see the Investigation and Prosecution and Mobile Audio/Video policies).

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department may provide members with access to portable recorders, either audio or video or both, for use during the performance of their duties. The use of recorders is intended to enhance the mission of the Department by accurately capturing contacts between members of the Department and the public.

    1. MEMBER PRIVACY EXPECTATION

All recordings made by members acting in an official capacity shall remain the property of the Department regardless of whether those recordings were made with department-issued or personally owned recorders. Members shall have no expectation of privacy or ownership interest in the content of these recordings.

    1. MEMBER RESPONSIBILITIES

Prior to going into service, each uniformed member will be responsible for making sure that he/ she is equipped with a portable recorder issued by the Department, and that the recorder is in good working order. If the recorder is not in working order or malfunctions at any time, the member shall promptly report the failure to his/her supervisor and obtain a functioning device as soon as practicable. Uniformed members should wear the recorder in a conspicuous manner or otherwise notify persons that they are being recorded, whenever possible.

Any member assigned to a non-uniformed position may carry an approved portable recorder at any time he/she believes that such a device may be useful and may use it in compliance with the law (Md. Code CJ § 10-402). Unless conducting a lawful recording in an authorized undercover capacity, non-uniformed members should wear the recorder in a conspicuous manner when in use or otherwise notify persons that they are being recorded, whenever possible.

When  using  a  portable  recorder,  the  assigned  member  shall  record  his/her   name, GPD identification number and the current date and time at the beginning and the end of the shift or other period of use, regardless of whether any activity was recorded. This procedure is not required when the recording device and related software captures the user’s unique identification and the date and time of each recording.

Members should document the existence of a recording in any report or other official record of the contact, including any instance where the recorder malfunctioned or the member deactivated the recording. Members should include the reason for deactivation.

    1. ACTIVATION OF THE PORTABLE RECORDER

This policy is not intended to describe every possible situation in which the portable recorder should be used, although there are many situations where its use is appropriate. Members should consider activating the recorder any time the member believes it would be appropriate or valuable to record an incident.

The portable recorder should be activated in any of the following situations:

  1. All enforcement and investigative contacts including stops and field interview (FI) situations
  2. Traffic stops including, but not limited to, traffic violations, stranded motorist assistance and all crime interdiction stops
  3. Self-initiated activity in which a member would normally notify the Communications Center
  4. Any other contact that becomes adversarial after the initial contact in a situation that would not otherwise require recording

Once started, recordings should continue without interruption until the contact ends, if feasible.

Members should remain sensitive to the dignity of all individuals being recorded and exercise sound discretion to respect privacy by discontinuing recording whenever it reasonably appears to the member that such privacy may outweigh any legitimate law enforcement interest in recording. Requests by members of the public to stop recording should be considered using this same criterion. Recording should resume when privacy is no longer at issue unless the circumstances no longer fit the criteria for recording. At no time is a member expected to jeopardize his/her safety in order to activate a portable recorder or change the recording media. However, the recorder should be activated in situations described above as soon as practicable.

  424.5.0    CESSATION OF RECORDING

Once activated, the portable recorder should remain on continuously until the member’s direct participation in the incident is complete or the situation no longer fits the criteria for activation. Recording may be stopped during significant periods of inactivity such as report writing or other breaks from direct participation in the incident.

      1. SURREPTITIOUS USE OF THE PORTABLE RECORDER

Maryland law prohibits any individual from surreptitiously recording any conversation in which any party to the conversation has a reasonable belief that the conversation is private or confidential. However, Maryland law exempts members from some of this prohibition during the course of their regular duties pursuant to Md. Code CJ § 10-402. Nothing in this section is intended to interfere with a member’s right to openly record during any investigation or interrogation pursuant to Md. Code CJ § 10-402 or Md. Code CP § 2-402.

Members shall not surreptitiously record another department member without a court order unless lawfully authorized by the Chief of Police or the authorized designee.

      1. EXPLOSIVE DEVICE

Many portable recorders, including body-worn cameras and audio/video transmitters, emit radio waves that could trigger an explosive device. Therefore, these devices should not be used where an explosive device may be present.

424.5.3             CONSENT REQUIRED FOR ACTIVATION OF THE PORTABLE RECORDER Generally, members are required to first obtain the consent of all parties prior to recording. However, prior consent is not required when (Md. Code CJ § 10-402):

  1. The member is a party to the conversation and:
    1. The recording is in the course of an investigation of one of the offenses listed in Md. Code CJ § 10-402.
    2. The person has created a barricade situation and there is probable cause to believe a hostage may be involved.
  2. The member has detained a vehicle during a criminal investigation or for a traffic violation and:
    1. The member identifies him/herself as a law enforcement officer.
    2. The member is a party to the conversation.
    3. The member informs all other parties of the recording.
    4. The recording is made as part of a video recording.
  3. The member is in uniform or prominently displaying his/her badge or other department insignia, indicating the member is a law enforcement officer and:
    1. The member is a party to the communication.
    2. The member is engaged in his/her regular duties as a law enforcement officer.
    3. All involved parties are notified that they are being recorded as soon as it is safe and practical.
    4. The audio recording is being made as part of a video recording.

Members should provide notice that a recording is being made to any parties joining a conversation after the initial notice of recording has been given as soon as it is safe and practical to do so.

    1. PROHIBITED USE OF PORTABLE RECORDERS

Members are prohibited from using department-issued portable recorders and recording media for personal use and are prohibited from making personal copies of recordings created while on- duty or while acting in their official capacity. Members are also prohibited from retaining recordings of activities or information obtained while on-duty, whether the recording was created with department-issued or personally owned

recorders. Members shall not duplicate or distribute such recordings, except for authorized legitimate department business purposes. All such recordings shall be retained at the Department.

Members are prohibited from using personally owned recording devices while on-duty without the express consent of the Shift Supervisor. Any member who uses a personally owned recorder for department-related activities shall comply with the provisions of this policy, including retention and release requirements.

Recordings shall not be used by any member for the purpose of embarrassment, intimidation or ridicule.

    1. RETENTION OF RECORDINGS

Any time a member records any portion of a contact that he/she reasonably believes constitutes evidence in a criminal case, the member shall record the related case number and transfer the file in accordance with current procedure for storing digital files and document the existence of the recording in the related case report. Transfers should occur at the end of the member’s shift, or any time the storage capacity is nearing its limit.

Any time a member reasonably believes a recorded contact may be beneficial in a non-criminal matter (e.g., a hostile contact), he/she should promptly notify a supervisor of the existence of the recording.

424.7.1   RETENTION REQUIREMENTS

All recordings shall be retained for a period consistent with the requirements of the organization’s records retention schedule but in no event for a period less than 180 days.

424.8   REVIEW OF RECORDINGS

When preparing written reports, members should review their recordings as a resource. However, members shall not retain personal copies of recordings. Members should not use the fact that a recording was made as a reason to write a less detailed report.

Supervisors are authorized to review relevant recordings any time they are investigating alleged misconduct or reports of meritorious conduct or whenever such recordings would be beneficial in reviewing the member’s performance.

Recorded files may also be reviewed:

  1. Upon approval by a supervisor, by any member of the Department who is participating in an official investigation, such as a personnel complaint, administrative investigation or criminal investigation.
  2. Pursuant to lawful process or by court personnel who are otherwise authorized to review evidence in a related case.
  3. By media personnel with permission of the Chief of Police or the authorized designee.
  4. In compliance with a public records request, if permitted, and in accordance with the Records Maintenance and Release Policy.

All recordings should be reviewed by the Custodian of Records prior to public release (see the Records Maintenance and Release Policy). Recordings that unreasonably violate a person’s privacy or sense of dignity should not be publicly released unless disclosure is required by law or order of the court.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Public Recording of Law Enforcement Activity

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidelines for handling situations in which members of the public photograph or audio/video record law enforcement actions and other public activities that involve members of this department. In addition, this policy provides guidelines for situations where the recordings may be evidence.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department recognizes the right of persons to lawfully record members of this department who are performing their official duties. Members of this department will not prohibit or intentionally interfere with such lawful recordings. Any recordings that are deemed to be evidence of a crime or relevant to an investigation will only be collected or seized lawfully.

Officers should exercise restraint and should not resort to highly discretionary arrests for offenses such as interference, failure to comply or disorderly conduct as a means of preventing someone from exercising the right to record members performing their official duties.

    1. RECORDING LAW ENFORCEMENT ACTIVITY

Members of the public who wish to record law enforcement activities are limited only in certain aspects.

  1. Recordings may be made from any public place or any private property where the individual has the legal right to be present.
  2. Beyond the act of photographing or recording, individuals may not interfere with the law enforcement activity.  Examples of interference include, but are not limited to:
    1. Tampering with a witness or suspect.
    2. Inciting others to violate the law.
    3. Being so close to the activity as to present a clear safety hazard to the officers.
    4. Being so close to the activity as to interfere with an officer’s effective communication with a suspect or witness.
  3. The individual may not present an undue safety risk to the officers, him/herself or others.
    1. OFFICER RESPONSE

Officers should promptly request a supervisor respond to the scene whenever it appears that anyone recording activities may be interfering with an investigation or it is believed that the recording may be evidence. If practicable, officers should wait for the supervisor to arrive before taking enforcement action or seizing any cameras or recording media.Whenever practicable, officers or supervisors should give clear and concise warnings to individuals who are conducting themselves in a manner that would cause their recording or behavior to be unlawful. Accompanying the warnings should be clear directions on what an

individual can do to be compliant; directions should be specific enough to allow compliance. For example, rather than directing an individual to clear the area, an officer could advise the person that he/she may continue observing and recording from the sidewalk across the street.

If an arrest or other significant enforcement activity is taken as the result of a recording that interferes with law enforcement activity, officers shall document in a report the nature and extent of the interference or other unlawful behavior and the warnings that were issued.

    1. SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A supervisor should respond to the scene when requested or any time the circumstances indicate a likelihood of interference or other unlawful behavior.

The supervisor should review the situation with the officer and:

  1. Request any additional assistance as needed to ensure a safe environment.
  2. Take a lead role in communicating with individuals who are observing or recording regarding any appropriate limitations on their location or behavior. When practical, the encounter should be recorded.
  3. When practicable, allow adequate time for individuals to respond to requests for a change of location or behavior.
  4. Ensure that any enforcement, seizure or other actions are consistent with this policy and constitutional and state law.
  5. Explain  alternatives  for  individuals  who  wish  to  express  concern  about  the  conduct of Department members, such as how and where to file a complaint.
    1. SEIZING RECORDINGS AS EVIDENCE

Officers should not seize recording devices or media unless (42 USC § 2000aa):

  1. There is probable cause to believe the person recording has committed or is committing a crime to which the recording relates, and the recording is reasonably necessary for prosecution of the person.
    1. Absent exigency or consent, a warrant should be sought before seizing or viewing such recordings. Reasonable steps may be taken to prevent erasure of the recording.
  2. There is reason to believe that the immediate seizure of such recordings is necessary to prevent serious bodily injury or death of any person.
  3. The person consents.
    1. To ensure that the consent is voluntary, the request should not be made in a threatening or coercive manner.
    2. If the original recording is provided, a copy of the recording should be provided to the recording party, if practicable. The recording party should be permitted to be present while the copy is being made, if feasible.

Recording devices and media that are seized will be submitted within the guidelines of the Property and Evidence Section Policy.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Bicycle Patrol

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy establishes guidelines for the Glenarden Police Department to safely and effectively use bicycle patrol for the purpose of enhancing field patrol efforts in the community.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department that patrol bicycles may be used for regular patrol duty, traffic enforcement, parking control or special events. The use of the patrol bicycle will emphasize officer mobility and department visibility in the community.

    1. OPERATIONS

Bicycle patrol has been shown to be an effective way to increase officer visibility in congested areas, and the quiet operation of the patrol bicycle can facilitate a tactical approach to crimes in progress. Patrol bicycles may be deployed to any area, at any hour of the day or night, according to department needs and as staffing levels allow.

Requests for specific deployment of bicycle patrol officers shall be coordinated through the bicycle patrol coordinator or the Shift Supervisor.

    1. SELECTION

Interested officers who have completed the probationary period shall submit a change of assignment request to their appropriate Lieutenants. A copy will be forwarded to the bicycle patrol coordinator. Qualified applicants will then be invited to an oral interview. The oral interview will be conducted by the coordinator and a second person to be selected by the coordinator.

Interested officers shall be evaluated by the following criteria:

  1. Recognized competence and ability as evidenced by performance
  1. Special skills or training as it pertains to the assignment
  1. Good physical condition
  1. Willingness to perform duties using the bicycle as a mode of transportation

426.4.1  OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES

Officers should operate the bicycle in compliance with Maryland traffic laws under normal operation, unless their duties require otherwise (Md. Code TR § 21-1202).

Officers may operate the bicycle without lighting equipment during hours of darkness only when it reasonably appears necessary for officer safety or tactical considerations. Officers must use caution and care when operating bicycles without lighting equipment or when they are operating in violation of the rules of the road.

Officers are exempt from the rules of the road, while using audible and visual signals, under the following conditions (Md. Code TR § 21-106):

  1. In response to an emergency call
  1. In the immediate pursuit of an actual or suspected violator of the law
  1. In response to a fire alarm, but not while returning
    1. BICYCLE PATROL COORDINATOR

The bicycle patrol coordinator shall be appointed by and directly responsible to the Operations Services Lieutenant or the authorized designee.

The coordinator may appoint a senior bicycle patrol officer or other designee to assist in the coordination of bicycle patrol officers and their activities.

The responsibilities of the coordinator include, but are not limited to:

  1. Organizing bicycle patrol training.
  1. Inspecting and maintaining an inventory of patrol bicycles and program equipment.
  1. Inspecting and documenting, no less than every three months, that bicycles which are not in active service are in serviceable condition.
  2. Scheduling maintenance and repairs.
  1. Evaluating the performance of bicycle patrol officers.
  1. Coordinating activities with the Operations Services Prince George County PD.
  1. Other activities as required to maintain the efficient operation of bicycle patrol.
    1. PATROL BICYCLE

Bicycle patrol officers will be assigned a specially marked and equipped patrol bicycle, attached gear bag, two batteries and a charger.

Patrol bicycles shall be primarily black or white in color with a “Police” decal affixed to each side of the crossbar or the bicycle’s gear bag. Every patrol bicycle shall be equipped with:

  1. Front and rear reflectors.
  1. A siren and horn.
  1. A steady or flashing blue and red warning light that is visible from the front, sides or rear of the bicycle.
  2. A rear rack and/or gear bag sufficient to carry all necessary equipment to handle routine patrol calls, including report writing, vehicle storage and citations.
  3. A gear bag that shall include a first-aid kit, tire pump, repair tool, tire tube, security lock, high-visibility vest and equipment information and use manuals. These items are to remain with/on the patrol bicycle at all times.

Patrol bicycles shall be properly secured when not in the officer’s immediate presence.

      1. TRANSPORTING THE PATROL BICYCLE

The patrol bicycle should be transported using a vehicle bicycle rack. Due to possible component damage, transportation of the patrol bicycle in a trunk or on a law enforcement vehicle push- bumper is discouraged.

      1. MAINTENANCE
  1. Bicycle patrol officers shall conduct an inspection of the patrol bicycle and equipment prior to use to ensure proper working order of the equipment.
  2. Officers are responsible for the routine care and maintenance of their assigned equipment (e.g., tire pressure, chain lubrication, overall cleaning).
    1. Each patrol bicycle will have scheduled maintenance twice yearly to be performed by a repair shop or technician approved by the Department.
  3. Officers shall not modify the patrol bicycle or remove, modify or add components to the patrol bicycle except with the express approval of the bicycle patrol coordinator, or in the event of an emergency.
  4. If a needed repair is beyond the ability of the bicycle patrol officer, a repair work order will be completed and forwarded to the coordinator for repair by a technician approved by the Department.
  5. Patrol bicycle batteries shall be rotated on the assigned charger at the end of each tour of duty.
    1. During prolonged periods of non-use, each bicycle patrol officer assigned a patrol bicycle shall periodically rotate the batteries on the respective chargers to increase battery life.
  6. At the end of a patrol bicycle assignment, the bicycle shall be returned clean and ready for the next tour of duty.
    1. UNIFORMS AND EQUIPMENT

Officers shall wear uniforms and safety equipment in accordance with the Uniforms and Civilian Attire Policy.

The uniform consists of the standard short-sleeve uniform shirt or other department-approved shirt, with Glenarden Police Department badge and patches, and department-approved bicycle patrol pants or shorts. Optional attire may include, but is not limited to, a jacket in colder weather and turtleneck shirts or sweaters when worn under the uniform shirt.

Bicycle patrol officers shall carry the same equipment on their duty belts as they would on regular patrol assignments. Assignment-specific safety equipment should include, but is not limited to,

department-approved helmet, a radio headset and microphone, riding gloves, protective eyewear and approved footwear.

Officers will be responsible for obtaining the necessary forms, citation books and other department equipment needed while on bicycle patrol.

    1. TRAINING

Officers must complete an initial department-approved bicycle-training course prior to assignment to bicycle patrol. Thereafter, bicycle patrol officers should receive twice yearly in-service training to improve skills and refresh safety, health and operational procedures. The initial training shall minimally include the following:

  1. Bicycle patrol strategies
  1. Bicycle safety and accident prevention
  1. Operational tactics and techniques using bicycles

Bicycle patrol officers will be required to train and qualify with their duty and secondary firearms while wearing bicycle safety equipment, including the helmet and riding gloves.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Automated License Plate Readers (ALPRs)

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide guidance for the capture, storage and use of digital data obtained through the use of Automated License Plate Reader (ALPR) technology.

427.1.1 DEFINITONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Official law enforcement purpose – The investigation, detection or analysis of a crime; of a violation of the Maryland vehicle laws; of a terrorist operation; or of missing or endangered person searches or alerts (Md. Code PS § 3-509).

    1. POLICY

The policy of the Glenarden Police Department is to utilize ALPR technology to capture and store digital license plate data and images while recognizing the established privacy rights of the public.

All data and images gathered by the ALPR are for the official use of this department. Because such data may contain confidential information, it is not open to public review.

    1. ADMINISTRATION

The ALPR technology, also known as License Plate Recognition (LPR), allows for the automated detection of license plates. It is used by the Glenarden Police Department to convert data associated with vehicle license plates for official law enforcement purposes, including identifying stolen or wanted vehicles, stolen license plates and missing persons. It may also be used to gather information related to active warrants, homeland security, electronic surveillance, suspect interdiction and stolen property recovery.

All installation and maintenance of ALPR equipment, as well as ALPR data retention and access shall be managed by the Administration Lieutenant. The Administration Lieutenant will assign members under his/her command to administer the day-to-day operation of the ALPR equipment and data.

    1. OPERATIONS

Use of an ALPR is restricted to the purposes outlined below. Department members shall not use, or allow others to use, the equipment or database records for any unauthorized purpose.

  1. An ALPR shall only be used for official law enforcement business (Md. Code PS § 3-509).
  2. An ALPR may be used in conjunction with any routine patrol operation or criminal investigation. Reasonable suspicion or probable cause is not required before using an ALPR.
  3. While an ALPR may be used to canvass license plates around any crime scene, particular consideration should be given to using ALPR-equipped vehicles to canvass areas around homicides, shootings and other major incidents. Partial license plates reported during major crimes should be entered into the ALPR system in an attempt to identify suspect vehicles.
  4. No member of this department shall operate ALPR equipment or access ALPR data without first completing department-approved training.
  5. No ALPR operator may access confidential department, state or federal data unless authorized to do so.
  6. If practicable, the officer should verify an ALPR response through the appropriate official law enforcement database before taking enforcement action that is based solely on an ALPR alert.
    1. DATA COLLECTION AND RETENTION

The Administration Lieutenant is responsible for ensuring systems and processes are in place for the proper collection and retention of ALPR data. Data will be transferred from vehicles to the designated storage in accordance with department procedures.

All stored ALPR data should be retained in accordance with the established records retention schedule. Thereafter, ALPR data should be purged unless it has become, or it is reasonable to believe it will become, evidence in a criminal or civil action or is subject to a discovery request or other lawful action to produce records. In those circumstances, the applicable data should be downloaded onto portable media and booked into evidence.

    1. ACCOUNTABILITY

All data will be closely safeguarded and protected by both procedural and technological means. The Glenarden Police Department will observe the following safeguards regarding access to and use of stored data (Md. Code PS § 3-509):

  1. All ALPR data downloaded to the mobile workstation and in storage shall be accessible only through a login/password-protected system capable of documenting all access of information by name, date and time.
  2. Members approved to access ALPR data under these guidelines are permitted to access the data for legitimate law enforcement purposes only, such as when the data relate to a specific criminal investigation or department-related civil or administrative action.
  3. ALPR system audits should be conducted on a regular basis.
    1. This shall include audits of requests made by individual law enforcement agencies and those made by individual law enforcement officers.
    1. RELEASING ALPR DATA

Information gathered by the ALPR is not subject to disclosure under the Public Information Act (Md. Code PS § 3-509). The ALPR data may be shared only with other law enforcement or prosecutorial agencies for official law enforcement purposes or as otherwise permitted by law, using the following procedures:

  1. The agency makes a written request for the ALPR data that includes:
    1. The name of the agency.
    2. The name of the person requesting.
    3. The intended purpose of obtaining the information.
  2. The request is reviewed by the Administration Lieutenant or the authorized designee and approved before the request is fulfilled.
  3. The approved request is retained on file.

Requests for ALPR data by non-law enforcement or non-prosecutorial agencies will be processed as provided in the Records Maintenance and Release Policy.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Homeless Persons

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to ensure that department members understand the needs and rights of the homeless, and to establish procedures to guide them during all contacts with the homeless, whether consensual or for enforcement purposes.

This policy establishes a liaison to the homeless community, addresses the responsibilities of the department member appointed to act as a liaison to the homeless, and details the need for special protection and services for homeless persons.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to protect the rights, dignity and private property of all members of the community, including people who are homeless. Abuse of authority to harass any member of the community will not be permitted. The Glenarden Police Department will address the needs of homeless persons in balance with the overall mission of this department. Homelessness is not a crime and members will not use homelessness as the sole basis for detention or law enforcement action.

    1. LIAISON TO THE HOMELESS COMMUNITY

The Chief of Police shall delegate certain responsibilities to a liaison to the homeless community. The liaison shall be appointed by and directly responsible to the Operations Services Lieutenant or the authorized designee.

The responsibilities of the liaison include, but are not limited to:

  1. Maintaining and making available to all department members a list of assistance programs and other resources that are available to homeless persons.
  2. Meeting  with  social  services  and  representatives  of  other  organizations  that  render assistance to the homeless community.
  3. Maintaining a list of the areas within and near the jurisdiction of this department that are used as frequent homeless encampments.
  4. Remaining abreast of laws dealing with homelessness, including personal property rights.
  1. Being present during any clean-up operation conducted by this department that involves the removal of personal property of the homeless. This is to ensure that the established rights of the homeless are not violated.
  2. Developing training to assist members in understanding current legal and social issues relating to the homeless.
    1. FIELD CONTACTS

Officers are encouraged to contact a homeless person to render aid, offer assistance or to check on the person’s welfare. Officers also will take enforcement action when information supports a reasonable and articulable suspicion of criminal activity. However, such contacts shall not be used for harassment.

When encountering a homeless person who has committed a non-violent misdemeanor and continued freedom is not likely to result in a continuation of the offense or a breach of the peace, officers are encouraged to consider long-term solutions, such as shelter referrals and counseling, in lieu of an arrest and criminal charges.

Officers should provide homeless persons with resource and assistance information whenever it is reasonably apparent that such services may be appropriate.

428.4.1 CONSIDERATIONS

A homeless person will receive the same level and quality of service provided to other members of the community. The fact that a victim, witness or suspect is homeless can, however, require special consideration for a successful investigation and prosecution. When handling investigations involving victims, witnesses or suspects who are homeless, officers should consider:

  1. Documenting alternate contact information. This may include obtaining addresses and telephone numbers of relatives and friends.
  2. Documenting locations the person may frequent.
  1. Providing victim/witness resources, when appropriate.
  1. Obtaining sufficient statements from all available witnesses in the event that a victim cannot be located and is unavailable for a court appearance.
  2. Arranging for transportation for investigation-related matters, such as medical exams and court appearances.
  3. Whether a crime should be reported and submitted for prosecution, even when a victim who is homeless indicates that he/she does not desire prosecution.
  4. Whether the person may be an adult abuse victim, and if so, proceed in accordance with the Adult Abuse Policy.
    1. MENTAL HEALTH ISSUES

When mental health issues are evident, officers should consider referring the person to the appropriate mental health agency or providing the person with contact information for mental health assistance, as appropriate. In these circumstances, officers may provide transportation to a mental health facility for voluntary evaluation if it is requested or offered and accepted by the person, and approved by a supervisor. Officers should consider detaining the person under a mental health evaluation when facts and circumstances reasonably indicate such a detention is warranted (see the Mental Health Evaluations Policy).

    1. PERSONAL PROPERTY

The personal property of homeless persons must not be treated differently than the property of other members of the community. Officers should use reasonable care when handling, collecting and retaining the personal property of homeless persons and shall not destroy or discard the personal property of a homeless person (Md. Code CR § 10-304).

When a homeless person is arrested or otherwise removed from a public place, officers should make reasonable accommodations to permit the person to lawfully secure his/her personal property. Otherwise, it should be collected for safekeeping. If the arrestee has more personal property than can reasonably be collected and transported by the officer, a supervisor should be consulted. The property should be photographed and measures should be taken to remove or secure it. It will be the supervisor’s responsibility to coordinate its removal and safekeeping.

Officers should not conduct or assist in clean-up operations of belongings that reasonably appear to be the property of homeless persons without the prior authorization of a supervisor or the homeless liaison. When practicable, requests by the public for clean-up of a homeless encampment should be referred to the liaison.

Officers who encounter unattended encampments, bedding or other personal property in public areas that reasonably appears to belong to a homeless person should not remove or destroy such property and should inform the liaison if such property appears to involve a trespass, is a blight to the community or the subject of a complaint. It will be the responsibility of the liaison to address the matter in a timely fashion.

    1. ECOLOGICAL ISSUES

Sometimes homeless encampments can have an impact on the ecology and natural resources of the community and may involve criminal offenses beyond mere littering. Officers are encouraged to notify other appropriate agencies or Town departments when a significant impact to the environment has or is likely to occur. A significant impact to the environment may warrant a crime report, investigation, supporting photographs and supervisor notification.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Medical Cannabis

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to provide members of this department with guidelines for investigating the acquisition, possession, transportation, delivery, production or use of cannabis under Maryland’s medical cannabis laws (Md. Code CR § 5-601(c)(3); Md. Code HG § 13-3301 et seq.).

429.1.1   DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include (Md. Code HG § 13-3301; COMAR 10.62.01.01):

30-day supply – 120 grams of usable cannabis or 36 grams of Tetrahydrocannabinol (THC).

Caregiver – A person who has agreed to assist with a qualifying patient’s medical use of cannabis, including the parent or legal guardian of a qualified patient who is under the age of 18.

Certifying physician – An individual who is licensed by the State Board of Physicians and who is approved by the Natalie M. LaPrade Medical Cannabis Commission (Commission) to make cannabis available to patients for medical use.

Commission – The Natalie M. LaPrade Medical Cannabis Commission.

Dispensary – An entity licensed by the Commission that acquires, possesses, processes, transfers, transports, sells, distributes, dispenses or administers cannabis; products containing cannabis; related supplies; related products including food, tinctures, aerosols, oils or ointments; or educational materials for use by a qualifying patient or caregiver.

Dispensary agent – An owner, member, employee, volunteer, officer or director of a dispensary.

Grower – An entity licensed by the Commission that cultivates, manufactures, processes, packages or dispenses medical cannabis or medical cannabis products.

Grower agent – An owner, employee, volunteer, officer or director of a grower.

Identification card – An identification card provided by the Commission to qualifying patients and caregivers.

Processor – An entity that transforms medical cannabis into another product or extract and packages medical cannabis.

Processor agent – An owner, member, employee, volunteer, officer or director of a processor.

Qualifying patient – A resident of Maryland who possesses a written certification by a certifying physician with whom the person has a bona fide physician-patient relationship. If the person is under the age of 18, he/she must have a caregiver.

Written certification – Certification issued by a certifying physician which includes a written statement confirming that, in the physician’s professional opinion, the patient has a condition

justifying the use of medical cannabis and, if appropriate, that a 30-day supply of medical cannabis is not sufficient to meet the patient’s medical needs.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to prioritize resources to avoid making arrests related to cannabis that the arresting officer reasonably believes would not be prosecuted by state or federal authorities.

Maryland medical cannabis laws are intended to provide protection from prosecution to those who possess a written certification by a physician for the use of cannabis for medical use. However, Maryland medical cannabis laws do not affect federal laws and there is no medical exception under federal law for the possession or distribution of cannabis. The Glenarden Police Department will exercise discretion to ensure laws are appropriately enforced without unreasonably burdening both those individuals protected under Maryland law and the resources of the Department.

    1. INVESTIGATION

Investigations involving the possession, delivery, production or use of cannabis generally fall into the following categories:

  1. Investigations when no person makes a medicinal claim.
  2. Investigations when the person is a qualifying patient or caregiver.
      1. INVESTIGATIONS WITH NO MEDICAL CLAIM

In any investigation involving the possession, delivery, production or use of cannabis or drug paraphernalia where no person claims that the cannabis is used for medicinal purposes, the officer should proceed with a criminal investigation. A medicinal defense may be raised at any time, so officers should document any statements and observations that may be relevant to whether the cannabis was possessed or used for medicinal purposes.

      1. INVESTIGATIONS INVOLVING A QUALIFYING PATIENT OR CAREGIVER

A qualifying patient or caregiver shall not be arrested for the medical use or possession of cannabis provided (Md. Code HG § 13-3313):

  1. Any qualifying patient possesses no more than a 30-day supply, unless the patient’s written certification allows for the possession of more.
  2. In the case of a caregiver, he/she is in possession of the cannabis for a qualifying patient he/she has agreed to assist in the use of medical cannabis.

A patient or caregiver identification card should suffice as evidence that a written certification has been issued. Certification or lack of certification should be verified through the Commission’s registry before making an arrest (COMAR 10.62.04.06; COMAR 10.62.06). No arrest should be made if there is reason to believe that the individual has a valid claim to possess.

      1. ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS

Officers  should  consider  the  following  when  investigating  an  incident  involving  cannabis possession, delivery, production or use:

  1. Because enforcement of medical cannabis laws can be complex, time consuming and call for resources unavailable at the time of initial investigation, officers may consider submitting a report to the prosecutor for review, in lieu of making an arrest. This can be particularly appropriate when:
    1. The suspect has been identified and can be easily located at another time.
    2. The case would benefit from review by a person with expertise in medical cannabis investigations.
    3. Sufficient evidence, such as photographs or samples, has been lawfully obtained.
    4. Any  other  relevant  factors,  such  as  available  department  resources  and  time constraints.
  2. Before proceeding with enforcement related to a dispensary agent, grower agent or processor agent, officers should consider conferring with appropriate legal counsel. Licensed dispensary agents, grower agents and processor agents are provided protection from arrest and prosecution under Md. Code HG § 13-3313.
      1. EXCEPTIONS

This policy does not apply to the following offenses; officers may take enforcement action if the person is (Md. Code HG § 13-3314):

  1. Undertaking any task under the influence of cannabis, when doing so would constitute negligence or professional malpractice.
  2. Operating, navigating or being in actual physical control of any motor vehicle, aircraft or boat while under the influence of cannabis.
  3. Smoking cannabis in any public place.
  4. Smoking cannabis in a motor vehicle.
  5. Smoking, which for purposes of this exception does not include vaporizing, cannabis on private property that is:
    1. Rented from a landlord and subject to a policy that prohibits smoking cannabis on the property.
    2. Subject to a condominium or homeowners’ association policy that prohibits the smoking of cannabis on the property of an attached dwelling.
    1. FEDERAL LAW ENFORCEMENT

Officers should provide information regarding a cannabis investigation to federal law enforcement authorities when it is requested by federal law enforcement authorities  or  whenever  the officer believes those authorities would have a particular interest in the information.

    1. PROPERTY AND EVIDENCE SECTION SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBILITIES

The Property and Evidence Section supervisor should ensure that cannabis, drug paraphernalia or other related property seized from a person engaged or assisting in the use of medical cannabis is not destroyed. The Property and Evidence Section supervisor is not responsible for caring for live cannabis plants.

Upon the prosecutor’s decision to forgo prosecution, or the dismissal of charges or an acquittal, the Property and Evidence Section supervisor should return to the person from whom it was seized any useable cannabis, plants, drug paraphernalia or other related property.

The Property and Evidence Section supervisor should not destroy cannabis that was alleged to be for medical purposes except upon receipt of a court order.

The Property and Evidence Section supervisor may release cannabis to federal law enforcement authorities upon presentation of a valid court order or by a written order of the Prince George County PD supervisor.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Medical Aid and Response

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy recognizes that officers often encounter persons in need of medical aid and establishes a law enforcement response to such persons.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department that all officers and other members be trained to provide emergency medical aid and to facilitate an emergency medical response.

    1. FIRST RESPONDING MEMBER RESPONSIBILITIES

Whenever practicable, members should take appropriate steps to provide initial medical aid (e.g., first aid, CPR and use of an automated external defibrillator (AED)) in accordance with their training and current certification levels. This should be done for those in need of immediate care and only when the member can safely do so.

Prior to initiating medical aid, the member should contact the Communications Center and request response by emergency medical services (EMS) as the member deems appropriate.

Members should follow universal precautions when providing medical aid, such as wearing gloves and avoiding contact with bodily fluids, consistent with the Communicable Diseases Policy. Members should use a barrier or bag device to perform rescue breathing.

When requesting EMS, the member should provide the Communications Center with information for relay to EMS personnel in order to enable an appropriate response, including:

  1. The location where EMS is needed.
  2. The nature of the incident
  3. Any known scene hazards.
  4. Information on the person in need of EMS, such as:
    1. Signs and symptoms as observed by the member.
    2. Changes in apparent condition.
    3. Number of patients, sex and age, if known.
    4. Whether the  person  is  conscious,  breathing  and  alert,  or  is  believed  to  have consumed drugs or alcohol.
    5. Whether the person is showing signs or symptoms of excited delirium or other agitated chaotic behavior.

Members should stabilize the scene whenever practicable while awaiting the arrival of EMS. Members should not direct EMS personnel whether to transport the person for treatment.

    1. TRANSPORTING ILL AND INJURED PERSONS

Except in exceptional cases where alternatives are not reasonably available, members should not transport persons who are unconscious, who have serious injuries or who may be seriously ill. EMS personnel should be called to handle patient transportation.

Officers should search any person who is in custody before releasing that person to EMS for transport. An officer should accompany any person in custody during transport in an EMS ambulance when requested by EMS personnel, when it reasonably appears necessary to provide security, when it is necessary for investigative purposes or when directed by a supervisor.

Officers should not escort medical transport or civilian vehicles.

    1. PERSONS REFUSING EMS CARE

If a person who is not under in custody refuses EMS care or refuses to be transported to a medical facility, an officer shall not force that person to receive care or be transported. However, members may assist EMS personnel when EMS personnel determine the person lacks mental capacity to understand the consequences of refusing medical care or to make an informed decision and the lack of immediate medical attention may result in serious bodily injury or the death of the person.

In cases where mental illness may be a factor, the officer should consider proceeding with a mental health hold in accordance with the Mental Health Evaluations Policy.

If an officer believes that a person who is in custody requires EMS care and the person refuses, he/she should encourage the person to receive medical treatment. The officer may also consider contacting a family member to help persuade the person to agree to treatment or who may be able to authorize treatment for the person.

If the person still refuses, the officer will require the person to be transported to the nearest medical facility. In such cases, the officer should consult with a supervisor prior to the transport.

Members shall not sign refusal-for-treatment forms or forms accepting financial responsibility for treatment.

430.5.1   SICK OR INJURED ARRESTEE

If an arrestee appears ill or injured, or claims illness or injury, he/she should be medically cleared prior to booking. If the officer has reason to believe the arrestee is feigning injury or illness, the officer should contact a supervisor, who will determine whether medical clearance will be obtained prior to booking.

If the jail or detention facility refuses to accept custody of an arrestee based on medical screening, the officer should note the name of the facility person refusing to accept custody and the reason for refusal, and should notify a supervisor to determine the appropriate action.

Arrestees who appear to have a serious medical issue should be transported by ambulance. Officers shall not transport the arrestee to a hospital without a supervisor’s approval.

    1. MEDICAL ATTENTION RELATED TO USE OF FORCE

Specific guidelines for medical attention for injuries sustained from a use of force may be found in the Use of Force, Handcuffing and Restraints, Control Devices and Conducted Energy Device policies.

    1. AIR AMBULANCE

Generally, when on-scene, EMS personnel will be responsible for determining whether an air ambulance response should be requested. An air ambulance may be appropriate when there are victims with life-threatening injuries or who require specialized treatment (e.g., gunshot wounds, burns, obstetrical cases), and distance or delays will affect the EMS response.

The Operations Services Lieutenant should develop guidelines for air ambulance landings or enter into local operating agreements for the use of air ambulances, as applicable. In creating those guidelines, the Department should identify:

  • Responsibility and authority for designating a landing zone and determining the size of the landing zone.
  • Responsibility for securing the area and maintaining that security once the landing zone is identified.
  • Consideration of the air ambulance provider’s minimum standards for proximity to vertical obstructions and surface composition (e.g. dirt, gravel, pavement, concrete, grass).
  • Consideration of the air ambulance provider’s minimum standards for horizontal clearance from structures, fences, power poles, antennas or roadways.
  • Responsibility for notifying the appropriate highway or transportation agencies if a roadway is selected as a landing zone.
  • Procedures for ground personnel to communicate with flight personnel during the operation.

One department member at the scene should be designated as the air ambulance communications contact. Headlights, spotlights and flashlights should not be aimed upward at the medevac. Members should direct vehicle and pedestrian traffic away from the landing zone.

Members should follow these cautions when near an air ambulance:

  • Never approach the aircraft until signaled by the flight crew.
  • Always approach the aircraft from the front.
  • Avoid the aircraft’s tail rotor area.
  • Wear eye protection during the landing and take-off.
  • Do not carry or hold items, such as IV bags, above the head.
  • Ensure that no one smokes near the aircraft.
    1. AUTOMATED EXTERNAL DEFIBRILLATOR (AED) USE

A member should use an AED only after he/she has received the required training as provided in COMAR 30.06.02.01.

The Chief of Police shall designate an AED coordinator who shall be responsible for implementing and administering the AED program in accordance with state regulations including registering and receiving certification through the Maryland Institute for Emergency Medical Services Systems (MIEMSS) (Md. Code ED § 13-517; COMAR 30.06.02.01).

      1. AED USER RESPONSIBILITY

Members who are issued AEDs for use in department vehicles should check the AED at the beginning of the shift to ensure it is properly charged and functioning. Any AED that is not functioning properly will be taken out of service and given to the Training Coordinator who is responsible for ensuring appropriate maintenance.

Following use of an AED, the device shall be cleaned and/or decontaminated as required. The electrodes and/or pads will be replaced as recommended by the AED manufacturer.

Any member who uses an AED should contact the Communications Center as soon as possible and request response by EMS.

      1. AED REPORTING

Any member using an AED will complete an incident report detailing its use.

The Maryland Facility AED Report Form shall also be completed and forwarded to MIEMSS for each incident of suspected cardiac arrest. If the AED fails when operated, a copy of the report shall be sent to MIEMSS and to the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) (COMAR 30.06.02.03).

      1. AED TRAINING AND MAINTENANCE

The Training Coordinator should ensure appropriate training, including training in the most recent publication of the American Heart Association Guidelines for CPR and emergency cardiovascular care (ECC), is provided to members authorized to use an AED (COMAR 30.06.02.01).

The Training Coordinator is responsible for ensuring AED devices are appropriately maintained and inspected consistent with the manufacturer’s guidelines, and will retain records of all maintenance and inspections in accordance with the established records retention schedule (COMAR 30.06.02.01).

    1. ADMINISTRATION OF OPIOID OVERDOSE MEDICATION

Members who possess a current and valid certification may administer opioid overdose medication when there is an emergency situation and medical services are not immediately available (Md. Code HG § 13-3107; COMAR 10.47.08.06). Administration shall be in accordance with protocol specified by the physician or nurse practitioner who prescribed the overdose medication for use by the member.

      1. OPIOID OVERDOSE MEDICATION USER RESPONSIBILITIES

Members who are qualified to administer opioid overdose medication, such as naloxone, should handle, store and administer the medication consistent with their training. Members should check the medication and associated administration equipment at the beginning of their shift to ensure they are serviceable and not expired. Any expired medication or unserviceable administration equipment should be removed from service and given to the Training Coordinator.

Any member who administers an opioid overdose medication should contact the Communications Center as soon as possible and request response by EMS.

      1. OPIOID OVERDOSE MEDICATION REPORTING

Any member administering opioid overdose medication should detail its use in an appropriate report.

The Training Coordinator will ensure that the Records Division (Prince George County PD) is provided enough information to meet applicable state reporting requirements (COMAR 10.47.08.06).

      1. OPIOID OVERDOSE MEDICATION TRAINING

The Training Coordinator should ensure training authorized by the Department of Health and Mental Hygiene is provided to members authorized to administer opioid overdose medication (Md. Code HG § 13-3104; COMAR 10.47.08.05).

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

First Amendment Assemblies

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidance for responding to public assemblies or demonstrations.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department respects the rights of people to peaceably assemble. It is the policy of this department not to unreasonably interfere with, harass, intimidate or discriminate against persons engaged in the lawful exercise of their rights, while also preserving the peace, protecting life and preventing the destruction of property.

    1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

Individuals or groups present on the public way, such as public facilities, streets or walkways, generally have the right to assemble, rally, demonstrate, protest or otherwise express their views and opinions through varying forms of communication, including the distribution of printed matter. These rights may be limited by laws or ordinances regulating such matters as the obstruction of individual or vehicle access or egress, trespass, noise, picketing, distribution of handbills and leafleting, loitering. However, officers shall not take action or fail to take action based on the opinions being expressed.

Participant behavior during a demonstration or other public assembly can vary. This may include, but is not limited to:

  • Lawful, constitutionally protected actions and speech.
  • Civil disobedience (typically involving minor criminal acts).
  • Rioting.

All of these behaviors may be present during the same event. Therefore, it is imperative that law enforcement actions are measured and appropriate for the behaviors officers may encounter. This is particularly critical if force is being used. Adaptable strategies and tactics are essential.

The purpose of a law enforcement presence at the scene of public assemblies and demonstrations should be to preserve the peace, to protect life and prevent the destruction of property.

Officers should not:

  1. Engage in assembly or demonstration-related discussion with participants.
  1. Harass, confront, or intimidate participants.
  1. Seize the cameras, cell phones or materials of participants or observers unless an officer is placing a person under lawful arrest.

Supervisors should continually observe department members under their commands to ensure that members’ interaction with participants and their response to crowd dynamics is appropriate.

431.3.1   PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEO RECORDINGS

Photographs and video recording, when appropriate, can serve a number of purposes, including support of criminal prosecutions by documenting criminal acts; assistance in evaluating department performance; serving as training material; recording the use of dispersal orders; and facilitating a response to allegations of improper law enforcement conduct.

Photographs and videos will not be used or retained for the sole purpose of collecting or maintaining information about the political, religious or social views of associations, or the activities of any individual, group, association, organization, corporation, business or partnership, unless such information directly relates to an investigation of criminal activities and there is reasonable suspicion that the subject of the information is involved in criminal conduct.

    1. UNPLANNED EVENTS

When responding to an unplanned or spontaneous public gathering, the first responding officer should conduct an assessment of conditions, including, but not limited to, the following:

  • Location
  • Number of participants
  • Apparent purpose of the event
  • Leadership (whether it is apparent and/or whether it is effective)
  • Any initial indicators of unlawful or disruptive activity
  • Indicators that lawful use of public facilities, streets or walkways will be impacted
  • Ability and/or need to continue monitoring the incident

Initial assessment information should be promptly communicated to the Communications Center, and the assignment of a supervisor should be requested. Additional resources should be requested as appropriate. The responding supervisor shall assume command of the incident until command is expressly assumed by another, and the assumption of command is communicated to the involved members. A clearly defined command structure that is consistent with the Incident Command System (ICS) should be established as resources are deployed.

    1. PLANNED EVENT PREPARATION

For planned events, comprehensive, incident-specific operational plans should be developed. The ICS should be considered for such events.

      1. INFORMATION GATHERING AND ASSESSMENT

In order to properly assess the potential impact of a public assembly or demonstration on public safety and order, relevant information should be collected and vetted. This may include:

  • Information obtained from outreach to group organizers or leaders.
  • Information about past and potential unlawful conduct associated with the event or similar events.
  • The potential time, duration, scope and type of planned activities.
  • Any other information related to the goal of providing a balanced response to criminal activity and the protection of public safety interests.

Information should be obtained in a transparent manner, and the sources documented. Relevant information should be communicated to the appropriate parties in a timely manner.

Information will be obtained in a lawful manner and will not be based solely on the purpose or content of the assembly or demonstration, or the race, ethnicity, national origin or religion of the participants (or any other characteristic that is unrelated to criminal conduct or the identification of a criminal subject).

      1. OPERATIONAL PLANS

An operational planning team with responsibility for event planning and management should be established. The planning team should develop an operational plan for the event.

The operational plan will minimally provide for the following:

  1. Command assignments, chain of command structure, roles and responsibilities
  2. Staffing and resource allocation
  3. Management of criminal investigations
  4. Designation of uniform of the day and related safety equipment (helmets, shields, etc.)
  5. Deployment of specialized resources
  6. Event communications and interoperability in a multijurisdictional event
  7. Liaison with demonstration leaders and external agencies
  8. Liaison with Town government and legal staff
  9. Media relations
  10. Logistics: food, fuel, replacement equipment, duty hours, relief and transportation
  11. Traffic management plans
  12. First aid and emergency medical service provider availability
  13. Prisoner transport and detention
  14. Review of policies regarding public assemblies and use of force in crowd control
  15. Parameters for declaring an unlawful assembly
  16. Arrest protocol, including management of mass arrests
  17. Protocol for recording information flow and decisions
  18. Rules of engagement, including rules of conduct, protocols for field force extraction and arrests, and any authorization required for the use of force
  19. Protocol for handling complaints during the event
      1. MUTUAL AID AND EXTERNAL RESOURCES

The magnitude and anticipated duration of an event may necessitate interagency cooperation and coordination. The assigned Incident Commander should ensure that any required memorandums of understanding or other agreements are properly executed, and that any anticipated mutual aid is requested and facilitated (Outside Agency Assistance Policy).

    1. UNLAWFUL ASSEMBLY DISPERSAL ORDERS

If a public gathering or demonstration remains peaceful and nonviolent, and there is no reasonably imminent threat to persons or property, the Incident Commander should generally authorize continued monitoring of the event.

Should the Incident Commander make a determination that public safety is presently or is about to be jeopardized, he/she or the authorized designee should attempt to verbally persuade event organizers or participants to disperse of their own accord. Warnings and advisements may be communicated through established communications links with leaders and/or participants or to the group.

When initial attempts at verbal persuasion are unsuccessful, the Incident Commander or the authorized designee should make a clear standardized announcement to the gathering that the event is an unlawful assembly, and should order the dispersal of the participants. The announcement should be communicated by whatever methods are reasonably available to ensure that the content of the message is clear and that it has been heard by the participants. The announcement should be amplified, made in different languages as appropriate, made from multiple locations in the affected area and documented by audio and video. The announcement should provide information about what law enforcement actions will take place if illegal behavior continues and should identify routes for egress. A reasonable time to disperse should be allowed following a dispersal order.

    1. USE OF FORCE

Use of force is governed by current department policy and applicable law (see the Use of Force, Handcuffing and Restraints, Control Devices, and Conducted Energy Device policies).

Individuals refusing to comply with lawful orders (e.g., nonviolent refusal to disperse) should be given a clear verbal warning and a reasonable opportunity to comply. If an individual persists in refusing to comply with lawful orders, the Incident Commander shall evaluate the type of resistance and adopt a reasonable response in order to accomplish the law enforcement mission (such as dispersal or arrest of those acting in violation of the law). Control devices and TaserTMs should be considered only when the participants’ conduct reasonably appears to present the potential to harm officers, themselves or others, or will result in substantial property loss or damage. Any use of TaserTM devices must conform to the Conducted Energy Device Policy.

Force or control devices, including oleoresin capsaicin (OC), should be directed toward individuals and not toward groups or crowds, unless specific individuals cannot reasonably be targeted due to extreme circumstances, such as a riotous crowd. Operational circumstances may preclude contemporaneous completion of use of force reports, in which case use of force incidents shall be communicated to the Communications Center for documentation. After-action reports shall include a detailed explanation of all incidents where force was used.

    1. ARRESTS

The Glenarden Police Department should  respond  to  unlawful  behavior  in  a  manner that is consistent with the operational plan. If practicable, warnings or advisements should be communicated prior to arrest. Mass arrests should be employed only when alternate tactics and strategies have been or reasonably appear likely to be unsuccessful. Mass arrests shall only be undertaken upon the order of the Incident Commander or the authorized designee. There must be probable cause for each arrest.

If employed, mass arrest protocols should fully integrate:

  1. Reasonable measures to address the safety of officers and arrestees.
  1. Dedicated arrest, booking and report writing teams.
  1. Timely access to medical care.
  1. Timely access to legal resources.
  1. Timely processing of arrestees.
  1. Full accountability for arrestees and evidence.
  1. Coordination and cooperation with the prosecuting authority, jail and courts (see the Citation Releases Policy).
    1. MEDIA RELATIONS

The Press Information Officer should use all available avenues of communication, including press releases, briefings, press conferences and social media to maintain open channels of communication with media representatives and the public about the status and progress of the event, taking all opportunities to reassure the public about the professional management of the event (see the Media Relations Policy).

    1. DEMOBILIZATION

When appropriate, the Incident Commander or the authorized designee should implement a phased and orderly withdrawal of law enforcement resources. All relieved personnel should promptly complete any required reports, including use of force reports, and account for all issued equipment and vehicles to their supervisors prior to returning to normal operational duties.

    1. POST EVENT

The Incident Commander should designate a member to assemble full documentation of the event, to include the following:

  1. Operational plan
  1. Any incident logs
  1. Any assignment logs
  1. Vehicle, fuel, equipment and supply records
  1. Incident, arrest, use of force, injury and property damage reports
  1. Photographs, audio/video recordings, the Communications Center records/tapes
  1. Media accounts (print and broadcast media)

431.11.1   AFTER-ACTION REPORTING

The Incident Commander should work with Town legal counsel, as appropriate, to prepare a comprehensive after-action report of the event, to include the following:

  1. Date, time and description of the event.
  1. Actions taken and outcomes (injuries, property damage, arrests, etc.).
  1. Problems identified.
  1. Significant events.
  1. Recommendations for improvement; opportunities for training should be documented in a generic manner, without identifying individuals or specific incidents, facts or circumstances.

431.12   TRAINING

Department members should receive periodic training regarding this policy, as well as the dynamics of crowd control and incident management. The Department should, when practicable, train with its external and mutual aid partners.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Civil Disputes

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides members of the Glenarden Police Department with guidance for addressing conflicts between persons when no criminal investigation or enforcement action is warranted (e.g., civil matters), with the goal of minimizing any potential for violence or criminal acts.

The Domestic Violence Policy addresses specific legal mandates related to domestic violence court orders. References in this policy to “court orders” apply to any order of a court that does not require arrest or enforcement by the terms of the order or by Maryland law.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department recognizes that a law enforcement presence at a civil dispute can play an important role in the peace and safety of the community. Subject to available resources, members of this department will assist at the scene of civil disputes with the primary goal of safeguarding persons and property, preventing criminal activity and maintaining the peace. When handling civil disputes, members will remain impartial, maintain a calm presence, give consideration to all sides and refrain from giving legal or inappropriate advice.

    1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

When appropriate, members handling a civil dispute should encourage the involved parties to seek the assistance of resolution services or take the matter to the civil courts. Members must not become personally involved in disputes and shall at all times remain impartial.

While not intended to be an exhaustive list, members should give considerations to the following when handling civil disputes:

  1. Civil disputes tend to be confrontational and members should be alert that they can escalate to violence very quickly. De-escalation techniques should be used when appropriate.
  2. Members should not dismiss alleged or observed criminal violations as a civil matter and should initiate the appropriate investigation and report when criminal activity is apparent.
  3. Members shall not provide legal advice, however, when appropriate, members should inform the parties when they are at risk of violating criminal laws.
  4. Members are reminded that they shall not enter a residence or other non-public location without legal authority.
  5. Members should not take an unreasonable amount of time assisting in these matters and generally should contact a supervisor if it appears that peacekeeping efforts longer than 30 minutes are warranted.
    1. COURT ORDERS

Disputes involving court orders can be complex. Where no mandate exists for an officer to make an arrest for a violation of a court order, the matter should be addressed by documenting any apparent court order violation in a report. If there appears to be a more immediate need for enforcement action, the investigating officer should consult a supervisor prior to making any arrest.

If a person appears to be violating the terms of a court order but is disputing the validity of the order or its applicability, the investigating officer should document the following:

  1. The person’s knowledge of the court order or whether proof of service exists.
  1. Any specific reason or rationale the involved person offers for not complying with the terms of the order.

A copy of the court order should be attached to the report when available. The report should be forwarded to the appropriate prosecutor. The report should also be forwarded to the court issuing the order with a notice that the report was also forwarded to the prosecutor for review.

432.4.1   STANDBY REQUESTS

Officers responding to a call for standby assistance to retrieve property should meet the person requesting assistance at a neutral location to discuss the process. The person should be advised that items that are disputed will not be allowed to be removed. The member may advise the person to seek private legal advice as to the distribution of disputed property.

Members should accompany the person to the location of the property. Members should ask if the other party will allow removal of the property or whether the other party would remove the property.

If the other party is uncooperative, the person requesting standby assistance should be instructed to seek private legal advice and obtain a court order to obtain the items. Officers should not order the other party to allow entry or the removal of any items. If there is a restraining or similar order against the person requesting standby assistance, that person should be asked to leave the scene or they may be subject to arrest for violation of the order.

If the other party is not present at the location, the member will not allow entry into the location or the removal of property from the location.

    1. VEHICLES AND PERSONAL PROPERTY

Officers may be faced with disputes regarding possession or ownership of vehicles or other personal property. Officers may review documents provided by parties or available databases (e.g., vehicle registration), but should be aware that legal possession of vehicles or personal property can be complex. Generally, officers should not take any enforcement action unless a crime is apparent. The people and the vehicle or personal property involved should be identified and the incident documented.

    1. REAL PROPERTY

Disputes over possession or occupancy of real property (e.g., land, homes, apartments) should generally be handled through a person seeking a court order.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Suspicious Activity Reporting

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidelines for reporting and investigating suspicious and criminal activity.

433.1.1   DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Involved party – An individual who has been observed engaging in suspicious activity, as defined in this policy, when no definitive criminal activity can be identified, thus precluding the person’s identification as a suspect.

Suspicious activity – Any reported or observed activity that a member reasonably believes may have a nexus to any criminal act or attempted criminal act, or to foreign or domestic terrorism. Race, ethnicity, national origin or religious affiliation should not be considered as factors that create suspicion (although these factors may be used as specific suspect descriptions). Examples of suspicious activity may include, but are not limited to:

  • Suspected  pre-operational  surveillance  or  intelligence  gathering  (e.g.,  photographing security features, asking questions about sensitive security-related subjects).
  • Tests of security measures and response to incidents (e.g., “dry run,” creating false alarms, attempts to enter secure areas without authorization).
  • Suspicious purchases (e.g., purchasing large quantities of otherwise legal items, such as fertilizer, that could be used to create an explosive or other dangerous device).
  • An individual in possession of such things as a hoax explosive or dispersal device, sensitive materials (e.g., passwords, access codes, classified government information), or coded or ciphered literature or correspondence.

Suspicious Activity Report (SAR) – An incident report used to document suspicious activity.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department recognizes the need to protect the public from criminal conduct and acts of terrorism and shall lawfully collect, maintain, and disseminate information regarding suspicious activities, while safeguarding civil liberties and privacy protections.

    1. RESPONSIBILITIES

The Investigative Services Prince George County PD supervisor and the authorized designee(s) will manage SAR activities. Authorized designees should include supervisors who are responsible for the department participation in Criminal Intelligence System(s) as outlined in the Criminal Organization policy.

The Investigative Services Prince George County PD Supervisor will have the following duties:

  1. Remain familiar with those databases available to the Glenarden Police Department that would facilitate the purpose of this policy.

GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

Suspicious Activity Reporting

 

  1. Maintain adequate training in the area of intelligence gathering to ensure no information is being maintained that would violate the law or civil rights of any individual.
  2. Ensure a process is available that would allow employees to report relevant information. The process should be designed to promote efficient and quick reporting, and should not be cumbersome, duplicative or complicated.
  3. Ensure that Glenarden Police Department personnel are made aware of the purpose and value of documenting information regarding suspicious activity, as well as the databases and other information resources that are available to the department.
  4. Ensure that SAR information is appropriately disseminated to personnel in accordance with their job responsibilities.
  5. Coordinate investigative follow-up, if appropriate.
  1. Coordinate with the appropriate agency or fusion center.
  1. Ensure that, as resources are available, the Glenarden Police Department conducts outreach that is designed to encourage community members to report suspicious activity and that outlines what they should look for and how they should report it (e.g., website, public service announcements).
    1. REPORTING AND INVESTIGATION

Any department member receiving information regarding suspicious activity should take any necessary immediate and appropriate action, including a request for tactical response or immediate notification of specialized entities, when applicable. Any department member who is not a peace officer and receives such information should ensure that it is passed on to an officer in a timely manner.

If the activity is not directly related to a reportable crime, the information will be recorded on a SAR, which will document information about the involved party and the circumstances of the incident. If an officer comes across such information while investigating an unrelated crime or incident, he/ she will make no mention of the suspicious activity in the original incident/arrest report, but will document the suspicious activity on a SAR and include the incident/arrest report number.

    1. HANDLING INFORMATION

Records Division (Prince George County PD) will forward copies of SARs, in a timely manner, to the following:

  • Investigative Services Prince George County PD supervisor
  • Authorized designees
  • Crime Analysis Unit
Chapter 5 – Traffic Operations

Traffic

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidelines for improving public safety through education and enforcement of traffic-related laws.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to educate the public on traffic-related issues and to enforce traffic laws. The efforts of the Department will be driven by such factors as the location and/or number of traffic accidents based on citizen complaints, traffic volume, traffic conditions and other traffic-related needs. The ultimate goal of traffic law enforcement and education is to increase public safety.

    1. DEPLOYMENT

Enforcement efforts may include such techniques as geographic/temporal assignment of department members and equipment, the establishment of preventive patrols to deal with specific categories of unlawful driving, and a variety of educational activities. These activities should incorporate methods that are suitable to the situation, timed to events, seasons, past traffic problems or locations and, whenever practicable, preceded by enforcement activities.

Several factors will be considered in the development of deployment schedules for department members. State and local data on traffic accidents are a valuable resource. Factors for analysis include, but are not limited to the following:

  • Location
  • Time
  • Day
  • Violation factors
  • Requests from the public
  • Construction zones
  • School zones
  • Special events

Department members assigned to uniformed patrol or traffic enforcement functions will emphasize the enforcement of violations that contribute to traffic accidents, and consider the hours and locations where traffic accidents tend to occur. Members will take directed enforcement action on request, and random enforcement action when appropriate, against violators. Members shall maintain high visibility while working general enforcement, especially in areas where traffic accidents frequently occur.

    1. ENFORCEMENT

Traffic enforcement will be consistent with applicable laws and take into account the degree and severity of the violation committed. This department does not establish ticket quotas. The number of arrests or citations issued by any member shall not be used as the sole criterion for evaluating member overall performance. Several methods are effective in the reduction of traffic accidents, including but not limited to:

      1. WARNINGS

Warnings are a non-punitive option that may be considered by the member when circumstances warrant, for example when a minor violation was inadvertent.

      1. CITATIONS

Citations should be issued when a member believes it is appropriate. When issuing a citation for a traffic violation, it is essential that the rights and requirements imposed on motorists be fully explained. At a minimum, motorists should be provided with (Md. Code TR § 26-201):

  1. A copy of the traffic citation.
  1. An explanation of the violation or charge.
  1. The court appearance procedure, including the optional or mandatory appearance by the motorist.
  2. Notice that:
    1. The motorist can enter a plea and pay the fine by mail or at the court.
    1. Acknowledgement of receipt of the citation is not an admission of guilt.
    1. Failure to acknowledge receipt of the citation may subject the motorist to arrest.
      1. PHYSICAL ARREST

Physical arrest can be made for a number of criminal traffic offenses. These cases usually deal with, but are not limited to (Md. Code TR § 26-202):

  1. A violation relating to vehicles transporting hazardous materials (Md. Code TR § 21-1411; Md. Code TR § 22-409).
  2. A violation relating to the failure or refusal to submit a vehicle to a weighing or to remove excess weight from the vehicle (Md. Code TR § 24-111; Md. Code TR § 24-111.1).
  3. The person does not furnish satisfactory evidence of identity.
  1. The person refuses to acknowledge receipt of a traffic citation by signature (Md. Code TR

§ 26-203).

  1. The officer has reasonable grounds to believe that the person will disregard the traffic citation.
  2. A violation for any of the following offenses:
    1. Driving or attempting to drive while under the influence of alcohol, while impaired by alcohol or in violation of an alcohol restriction.
    2. Driving or attempting to drive while impaired by any drug, any combination of drugs, or any combination of one or more drugs and alcohol, or while impaired by any controlled dangerous substance.
    3. Failure to stop, give information or render reasonable assistance as required by state law in the event of an accident resulting in bodily injury to or death of any person (Md. Code TR § 20-102; Md. Code TR § 20-104).
    4. Driving or attempting to drive a motor vehicle without a driver’s license unless exempt or otherwise authorized (Md. Code TR § 16-101).
    5. Driving or attempting to drive a motor vehicle while the driver’s license or privilege to drive is suspended or revoked.
    6. Failure to stop or give information, as required by state law, in the event of an accident resulting in damage to a vehicle or other property (Md. Code TR § 20-103; Md. Code TR § 20-104; Md. Code TR § 20-105).
    7. Any offense that caused or contributed to an accident resulting in bodily injury to or death of any person.
    8. Fleeing or attempting to elude an officer.
    1. Falsifying, manufacturing, possessing or sale of any official document issued by the Maryland Department of Transportation (Md. Code TR § 14-110(b); Md. Code TR § 14-110(c); Md. Code TR § 14-110(d); Md. Code TR § 14-110(e)).
    2. Racing a vehicle that results in serious bodily injury to another person (Md. Code TR § 21-1116(a)).
  1. A person is a nonresident and the officer has probable cause to believe that the person committed a violation that contributed to an accident.
    1. HIGH-VISIBILITY VESTS

The Department has provided American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Class II high- visibility vests to increase the visibility of department members, who may be exposed to hazards presented by passing traffic, maneuvering or operating vehicles, machinery and equipment (23 CFR 655.601).

      1. REQUIRED USE

Except when working in a potentially adversarial or confrontational role, such as during vehicle stops, high-visibility vests should be worn when increased visibility would improve the safety of the department member or when the member will be exposed to the hazards of passing traffic, maneuvering or operating vehicles, machinery and equipment.

Examples of when high-visibility vests should be worn include traffic control duties, traffic accident investigations, lane closures and disaster scenes.

When emergency conditions preclude the immediate donning of the vest, members should retrieve and wear the vest as soon as conditions reasonably permit.

Use of the vests shall also be mandatory when directed by a supervisor.

      1. CARE AND STORAGE

High-visibility vests shall be maintained in the trunk of each patrol and investigation vehicle, in the side box of each police motorcycle and in the gear bag of each patrol bicycle. Each vest should be stored inside a resealable plastic bag to protect and maintain the vest in a serviceable condition. Before going into service, each member shall ensure that a serviceable high-visibility vest is properly stored.

A supply of high-visibility vests will be maintained and made available for replacement of damaged or unserviceable vests. The Training Coordinator should be promptly notified whenever the supply of vests needs replenishing.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Traffic Accidents

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidelines for responding to and investigating traffic accidents.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to respond to traffic accident and render or summon aid to injured victims as needed. The Department will investigate and prepare reports according to established minimum reporting requirements with the goal of reducing the occurrence of accidents by attempting to identify the cause of the accident and through enforcing applicable laws. Unless restricted by law, accident reports will be made available to the public upon request.

    1. RESPONSE

Upon arriving at the scene, the responding member should assess the need for additional resources and summon assistance as appropriate. Generally, the member initially dispatched to the scene will be responsible for the investigation and report, if required, unless responsibility is reassigned by a supervisor.

A supervisor should be called to the scene when the incident:

  1. Is within the jurisdiction of this department and there is:
    1. A life-threatening injury.
    1. A fatality.
    1. A Town vehicle involved.
    1. A Town official or employee involved.
    1. Involvement of an on- or off-duty member of this department.
  1. Is within another jurisdiction and there is:
    1. A Town of Prince George County vehicle involved.
    1. A Town of Prince George County official involved.
    1. Involvement of an on-duty member of this department.

501.3.1 MEMBER RESPONSIBILITIES

Upon arriving at the scene, the responding member should consider and appropriately address:

  1. Traffic direction and control.
  1. Proper placement of emergency vehicles, cones, roadway flares or other devices if available to provide protection for members, the public and the scene.
  2. First aid for any injured parties if it can be done safely.
  3. The potential for involvement of hazardous materials.
  1. The need for additional support as necessary (e.g., traffic control, emergency medical services, fire department, HAZMAT, tow vehicles).
  2. Clearance and cleanup of the roadway.

501.4   NOTIFICATION

If a traffic accident, involves a life-threatening injury or fatality, the responding officer shall notify a supervisor, or if unavailable, the Shift Supervisor. The Shift Supervisor or any supervisor may assign a traffic investigator or other appropriate personnel to investigate the incident. The Shift Supervisor will ensure notification is made to the Traffic Officer, department command staff and Town Administrator in accordance with the Major Incident Notification Policy.

501.4.1   NOTIFICATION OF FAMILY

In the event of a life-threatening injury or fatality, the supervisor responsible for the incident should ensure notification of the victim’s immediate family or coordinate such notification with the Medical Examiner, department chaplain or another suitable person. Notification should be made as soon as practicable following positive identification of the victim.

The identity of any person seriously injured or deceased in a traffic accident should not be released until notification is made to the victim’s immediate family.

501.5   MINIMUM REPORTING REQUIREMENTS

An accident report shall be taken when (Md. Code TR § 20-107):

  1. A fatality, any injury (including complaint of pain), driving under the influence, or hit and run is involved.
  2. An on-duty member of the Town of Prince George County is involved.
  1. The accident results in any damage to any Town-owned or leased vehicle.
  1. The accident involves any other public agency driver or vehicle.
  1. There is damage to public property.
  1. The accident involves a public or private school bus.
  1. There is damage to any vehicle to the extent that towing is required.
  1. Prosecution or follow-up investigation is contemplated.
  1. Directed by a supervisor.

Accidents involving a Maryland Transit Administration (MTA) vehicle should be handled by MTA.

      1. PRIVATE PROPERTY

Generally, reports should not be taken when a traffic accident occurs on private property unless there is an injury or fatality, a hit-and-run violation or other traffic law violation. Members may

provide assistance to motorists as a public service, such as exchanging information and arranging for the removal of the vehicles.

      1. CITY COUNTY VEHICLE INVOLVED

A traffic accident report shall be taken when a Town vehicle is involved in a traffic accident that results in property damage or injury.

A general information report may be taken in lieu of a traffic accident report at the direction of a supervisor when the incident occurs entirely on private property or does not involve another vehicle.

Whenever there is damage to a Town vehicle, a vehicle damage report shall be completed and forwarded to the appropriate Lieutenant. The traffic investigator or supervisor at the scene should determine what photographs should be taken of the scene and the vehicle damage.

      1. INJURED ANIMALS

Department members should refer to the Animal Control Policy and make appropriate notifications when a traffic accident involves the disposition of an injured animal or when learning that a domestic animal has been struck by a vehicle (Md. Code TR § 20-106(b)).

501.6 INVESTIGATION

When a traffic accident meets minimum reporting requirements the investigation should include, at a minimum:

  1. Identification and interview of all involved parties.
  1. Identification and interview of any witnesses.
  1. A determination of whether a violation of law has occurred and the appropriate enforcement action.
  2. Identification and protection of items of apparent evidentiary value.
  1. Documentation of the incident as necessary (e.g., statements, measurements, photographs, collection of evidence and reporting) on the appropriate forms.

501.6.1   INVESTIGATION BY OUTSIDE LAW ENFORCEMENT AGENCY

The Traffic Officer or on-duty Shift Supervisor should request that the Maryland State Police or other outside law enforcement agency investigate and complete a traffic accident investigation when a life-threatening injury or fatal traffic accident/collision occurs within the jurisdiction of the Glenarden Police Department and involves:

  1. An on- or off-duty member of the Department.
    1. The involved member shall complete the department traffic accident form. If the member is unable to complete the form, the supervisor shall complete it.
  1. An on- or off-duty official or employee of the Town of Prince George County.

Department members shall promptly notify a supervisor when any department vehicle is involved in a traffic accident. The traffic accident investigation and report shall be completed by the agency having jurisdiction.

    1. ENFORCEMENT ACTION

After a thorough investigation in which physical evidence or independent witness statements indicate that a violation of a traffic law contributed to the accident, authorized members should issue a citation or arrest the offending driver, as appropriate.

More serious violations, such as driving under the influence of drugs or alcohol, vehicular manslaughter or other felonies, shall be enforced. If a driver who is subject to enforcement action is admitted to a hospital, a supervisor shall be contacted to determine the best enforcement option.

    1. REPORTS

Department members shall utilize forms approved by the Maryland State Police as required for the reporting of traffic accidents. All such reports shall be forwarded to the Prince George County Traffic Unit for approval and filing.

      1. REPORT MODIFICATION

A change or modification of a written report that alters a material fact in the report may be made only by the member who prepared the report, and only prior to its approval and distribution. Once a report has been approved and distributed, corrections shall only be made by way of a written supplemental report. A written supplemental report may be made by any authorized member.

      1. TRAFFICBUREAUMANAGER RESPONSIBILITIES

The responsibilities of the Traffic Officer include, but are not limited to:

  1. Ensuring the monthly and quarterly reports on traffic accident information and statistics are forwarded to the Operations Services Lieutenant or other persons as required.
  2. Forwarding traffic accident reports to the Maryland State Police (Md. Code TR § 20-107(f)).

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Vehicle Towing

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidance related to vehicle towing. Nothing in this policy shall require a member of this department to tow a vehicle.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department will tow vehicles when appropriate and in accordance with the law.

    1. REMOVAL OF VEHICLES DUE TO HAZARD

When a vehicle should be towed because it presents a hazard, the owner or operator should arrange for the towing. Department members may assist by communicating requests through the Communications Center to expedite the process.

If the owner or operator is unable to arrange for towing and the vehicle presents a hazard, the vehicle may be towed at the direction of the department member.

Vehicles that are not the property of the Town should not be driven by department members unless it is necessary to move the vehicle a short distance to eliminate a hazard, prevent the obstruction of a fire hydrant or to comply with posted signs.

    1. ARREST SCENES

Whenever the owner or operator of a vehicle is arrested, the arresting officer should provide reasonable safekeeping by leaving the vehicle secured and lawfully parked at the scene or when appropriate, by having the vehicle towed, such as when the vehicle presents a traffic hazard or the vehicle would be in jeopardy of theft or damage if left at the scene.

Officers are not required to investigate whether alternatives to towing a vehicle exist after an arrest. However, a vehicle should not be towed if reasonable alternatives exist. When considering whether to leave a vehicle at the scene, officers should take into consideration public safety as well as the reasonable safety of the vehicle and its contents.

The following are examples of situations where a vehicle should not be towed:

  • The vehicle can be legally parked, left in a reasonably secure and safe location and the vehicle is not needed as evidence.
  • The vehicle is parked on private property, on which the arrestee or owner is legally residing, or the property owner does not object to the vehicle being parked at that location.
  • The arrestee or owner of the vehicle requests that it be released to a person who is present, willing and able to legally take control of the vehicle.
  • The vehicle is legally parked and the arrestee or owner requests that it be left at the scene. In such cases the requestor should be informed that the Department will not be responsible for theft or damages.
    1. VEHICLES RELATED TO CRIMINAL INVESTIGATIONS

Officers should tow vehicles that are needed for the furtherance of an investigation or prosecution of a case, or that are otherwise appropriate for seizure as evidence. Officers should make reasonable efforts to return a recovered stolen vehicle to its owner rather than have it towed, so long as the vehicle is not needed for evidence.

    1. RECORDS

Records Division (Prince George County PD) members shall ensure that pertinent data regarding a towed vehicle is promptly entered into the appropriate database.

      1. VEHICLE STORAGE REPORT

Department members towing a vehicle shall complete a vehicle tow report. The report should be submitted to the Records Division (Prince George County PD) as soon as practicable after the vehicle is towed.

      1. NOTICE OF TOW

As soon as reasonably possible and within seven days of a vehicle being towed, it shall be the responsibility of the Records Division (Prince George County PD) to send a notice of tow to all registered owners and others having a recorded interest in the vehicle. Notice shall be sent to all such individuals by certified mail. The notice shall include (Md. Code TR § 25-204):

  1. A statement that the abandoned vehicle has been taken into custody.
  1. The location where the vehicle is stored.
  1. A description of the vehicle, including the following:
    1. Color
    1. Manufacturer year
    1. Make and model
    1. License plate number and/or Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
    1. Mileage
  1. The authority and purpose for the removal of the vehicle.
  1. An explanation of the procedure for release of the vehicle and for obtaining a vehicle tow hearing.
  2. Information for the owner, or others having a recorded interest in the vehicle, of the right to reclaim the vehicle within three weeks after the date of the notice, on payment of all towing, preservation and storage charges resulting from taking or placing the vehicle in custody.
  3. A statement that the failure of the owner, or others having a recorded interest in the vehicle, to exercise this right in the time provided is:
    1. A waiver to right, title and interest in the vehicle.
    1. Consent to the sale of the vehicle at public auction.
    1. Consent by the owner, other than a lessor, to the retention of the vehicle for public purposes as provided by state law (Md. Code TR § 25-207).

If the identity or address of the last registered owner, or others having a recorded interest in the vehicle, cannot be determined or the certified notice is returned as undeliverable, the Records Division (Prince George County PD) shall post the notice where the abandoned vehicle was found as provided by state law (Md. Code TR § 25-205(c)).

    1. TOWING SERVICES

Members shall not show preference among towing services that have been authorized for use by the Department. A rotation or other system established by the Department for tow services should be followed.

    1. VEHICLE INVENTORY

The contents of all vehicles towed at the request of department members shall be inventoried and listed on the inventory report. When reasonably practicable, photographs may be taken to assist in the inventory.

  1. An inventory of personal property and the contents of open containers will be conducted throughout the passenger and engine compartments of the vehicle including, but not limited to, any unlocked glove box, other accessible areas under or within the dashboard area, any pockets in the doors or in the back of the front seat, in any console between the seats, under any floor mats and under the seats.
  2. In addition to the passenger and engine compartments as described above, an inventory of personal property and the contents of open containers will also be conducted in any other type of unlocked compartments that are a part of the vehicle, including unlocked vehicle trunks and unlocked car top containers.
  3. Any locked compartments including, but not limited to, locked glove compartments, locked vehicle trunks, locked hatchbacks and locked car-top containers should be inventoried, provided the keys are available and released with the vehicle to the third-party towing company or an unlocking mechanism for such compartment is available within the vehicle.
  4. Closed containers located either within the vehicle or any of the vehicle’s compartments will not be opened for inventory purposes except for the following: wallets, purses, coin purses, fanny packs, personal organizers, briefcases or other closed containers designed for carrying money, small valuables or hazardous materials.

Members should ask the occupants whether the vehicle contains any valuables or hazardous materials. Responses should be noted in the inventory report. If the occupant acknowledges that any closed container contains valuables or a hazardous material, the container shall be opened and inventoried. When practicable and appropriate, such items should be removed from the vehicle and given to the owner, or booked into property for safekeeping.

Any cash, jewelry or other small valuables located during the inventory process will be held for safekeeping, in accordance with the Property and Evidence Section Policy. A copy of the property receipt should be given to the person in control of the vehicle, or if that person is not present, left in the vehicle.

A copy of the vehicle inventory will be given to the tow truck operator.

These inventory procedures are for the purpose of protecting the vehicle owner’s property, providing for the safety of department members and protecting the Department against fraudulent claims of lost, stolen or damaged property.

Towing a vehicle in order to perform an inventory should not be used as a pretext for an evidence search. Nothing in this policy prevents the towing of a vehicle that would occur for reasons independent of any suspicion that the vehicle may contain evidence if it is otherwise justified by law or this policy.

    1. SECURITY OF VEHICLES AND RETRIEVAL OF PROPERTY

If the search of a vehicle leaves the vehicle or any property contained therein vulnerable to unauthorized entry, theft or damage, the department member conducting the search shall take such steps as are reasonably necessary to secure or protect the vehicle or property from such hazards.

Unless it would cause an unreasonable delay in towing the vehicle or create an issue of officer safety, reasonable accommodations should be made to permit the owner, operator or occupant to retrieve small items of value or personal need (e.g., cash, jewelry, cell phone, prescriptions), which are not considered evidence or contraband.

Members who become aware that a vehicle may have been towed by the Department in error should promptly advise a supervisor. Supervisors should approve, when appropriate, the release of the vehicle without requiring the owner or his/her agent to request a hearing to contest the tow.

Vehicle Tow Hearings

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to establish a process for vehicle tow hearings.

    1. POLICY

When a vehicle is towed at the direction of any member of the Glenarden Police Department, a hearing will be conducted upon request.

    1. HEARING OFFICER

The Chief of Police will identify the person who will act as a hearing officer when the decision of a member to tow a vehicle is contested. The hearing officer in any case must be a person other than the member who directed the vehicle to be towed.

    1. HEARING PROCESS

The registered or legal owner of the vehicle or his/her agent may request a hearing when a vehicle is towed or stored at the direction of any member of the Glenarden Police Department.

The failure to request a hearing in a timely manner or to attend a scheduled hearing may be considered a waiver of and satisfaction of the hearing.

A timely requested hearing shall be conducted within 48 hours of the request, excluding weekends and holidays.

Any relevant evidence may be submitted and reviewed by the hearing officer to determine the validity of the tow of the vehicle.

    1. DECISION

After consideration of all the evidence, the hearing officer shall determine whether the Department has established the validity of the tow or storage by a preponderance of the evidence.

  1. If a decision is made that reasonable grounds for the tow have been established, the hearing officer shall advise the requesting party of the decision.
  2. If a decision is made that reasonable grounds for the tow have not been established, the vehicle shall be released immediately. Towing and storage fees will be the responsibility of the Department (Md. Code TR § 26-306).

Under the Influence/Impaired Driving

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy provides guidance to those department members who play a role in the detection and investigation of driving under the influence/driving while impaired (DUI/DWI).

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department is committed to the safety of the roadways and the community and will pursue fair but aggressive enforcement of Maryland’s impaired driving laws.

    1. INVESTIGATIONS

Officers should not enforce DUI/DWI laws to the exclusion of their other duties unless specifically assigned to DUI/DWI enforcement. All officers are expected to enforce these laws with due diligence.

The Traffic Officer will develop and maintain, in consultation with the prosecuting attorney, report forms with appropriate checklists to assist investigating officers in documenting relevant information and maximizing efficiency. Any DUI/DWI investigation will be documented using these forms. Information documented elsewhere on the form does not need to be duplicated in the report narrative. Information that should be documented includes, at a minimum:

  1. The field sobriety tests (FST) administered and the results.
  1. The officer’s observations that indicate impairment on the part of the individual, and the officer’s health-related inquiries that may help to identify any serious health concerns (e.g., diabetic shock).
  2. Sources of additional information (e.g., reporting party, witnesses) and their observations.
  1. Information about any audio and/or video recording of the individual’s driving or subsequent actions.
  2. The  location  and  time  frame  of  the  individual’s  vehicle  operation  and  how  this  was determined.
  3. Any prior related convictions in this state or another jurisdiction.
    1. FIELD TESTS

The Traffic Officer should identify standardized FSTs and any approved alternate tests for officers to use when investigating violations of DUI/DWI laws.

    1. CHEMICAL TESTS

A person implies consent under Maryland law to a chemical test or tests, and to providing the associated chemical sample, when an officer has detained the person on suspicion of driving or

attempting to drive a motor vehicle when the person is (Md. Code TR § 16-205.1(a)(2); Md. Code TR § 16-205.2(a); Md. Code TR § 16-813):

  1. Under the influence of alcohol or impaired by alcohol.
  2. So impaired by any drug, any combination of drugs or a combination of a drug and alcohol that he/she cannot safely drive a vehicle.
  3. Impaired by a controlled dangerous substance.
  4. In violation of an alcohol restriction.
  5. Driving, operating or in physical control of a commercial vehicle with any concentration of alcohol in his/her blood or breath.

If a person withdraws this implied consent, the officer should consider implied consent revoked and proceed as though the person has refused to provide a chemical sample.

A test to determine alcohol concentration shall be taken within two hours after the person is apprehended. A test to determine the presence of a drug or a controlled dangerous substance shall be taken within four hours after the person is apprehended (Md. Code CJ § 10-303).

      1. STATUTORY NOTIFICATIONS Officers shall advise the detained person that:
  1. Neither a refusal nor the taking of a preliminary breath test shall prevent or require a subsequent chemical test (Md. Code TR § 16-205.2(b)).
  2. Upon receipt of a sworn statement from the officer that the person was charged with DUI/DWI and refused to take a test, or was tested and the result indicated an alcohol concentration of
    1. or more, the Motor Vehicle Administration (MVA) shall (Md. Code TR § 16-205.1(b)):
      1. Suspend the person’s driving privilege pursuant to state law.
      1. Disqualify the person’s privilege to operate a commercial vehicle pursuant to state law.

The result of the preliminary breath test shall be used only to decide whether an arrest should be made (Md. Code TR § 16-205.2(c)).

      1. BREATH SAMPLES

The Traffic Officer should ensure that all devices used for the collection and analysis of breath samples are properly serviced and tested, and that a record of such service and testing is properly maintained.

Department members obtaining a breath sample should monitor the device for any sign of malfunction. Any anomalies or equipment failures should be noted in the appropriate report and promptly reported to the Traffic Officer.

A breath test shall be administered at the direction of an officer by a qualified person trained in the use of equipment that has been approved under the Postmortem Examiners Commission. The arresting officer may not administer the breath test (Md. Code CJ § 10-304(b)).

Unless otherwise required by law, a breath test shall be used to determine alcohol concentration (Md. Code CJ § 10-305(a)).

      1. BLOOD SAMPLES

Only a qualified medical person trained in the use of equipment that has been approved under the Postmortem Examiners Commission shall draw blood to collect blood samples. The blood draw should be witnessed by the assigned officer. No officer, even if properly certified, should perform this task (Md. Code CJ § 10-304(c)(1)).

Officers should inform an arrestee that if he/she chooses to provide a blood sample, a separate sample can be collected for alternate testing. Unless medical personnel object, two samples should be collected and retained as evidence, so long as only one puncture is required.

The blood sample shall be packaged, marked, handled, stored and transported as required by the testing facility.

The sample shall be handled as required by the state crime laboratory. A test of blood shall be administered as follows (Md. Code CJ § 10-305):

  1. To determine alcohol concentration when:
    1. The person is unconscious or otherwise incapable of refusing to take a test.
    2. Injuries to the person require removal of the arrestee to a medical facility.
    3. Equipment for administering the test of breath is not available.
    4. An officer has reasonable grounds to believe a person who was involved in a motor vehicle accident that resulted in death or a life-threatening injury to another person was driving while under the influence or impaired by alcohol, pursuant to Md. Code TR § 16-205.1(c)(1)(ii).
  2. In addition to a breath test pursuant to Md. Code TR § 16-205.1(c)(1)(iii)).
  3. To determine drug or controlled dangerous substance content.

If an arrestee cannot submit to a blood draw because he/she has a bleeding disorder or has taken medication that inhibits coagulation, he/she shall not be required to take a blood test. Such inability to take a blood test shall not be considered a refusal. However, that arrestee may be required to complete another available and viable test.

      1. URINE SAMPLES

If a urine test will be performed, the arrestee should be promptly transported to the appropriate testing site. The officer shall follow any directions accompanying the urine evidence collection kit.

Urine samples shall be collected and witnessed by an officer or jail staff member of the same sex as the individual giving the sample. The arrestee should be allowed sufficient privacy to maintain his/her dignity, to the extent possible, while still ensuring the accuracy of the sample.

The sample shall be packaged, marked, handled, stored and transported as required by the testing facility.

504.6   REFUSALS

When an arrestee refuses to provide a chemical sample, officers should (Md. TR § 16-205.1(b)(2)):

  1. Advise the arrestee of the requirement to provide a sample and the administrative sanctions or criminal penalties for refusal (Md. Code TR § 16-205.1(b)(1)).
  2. Audio- and/or video-record the admonishment and the response when practicable and in accordance with the Use of Audio/Video Recorders Policy.
  3. Document the refusal in the appropriate report.

Any person who drives, operates or is in physical control of a commercial motor vehicle and refuses to take a chemical test to determine the alcohol concentration shall be placed out of service for the 24-hour period immediately following the time the officer detects alcohol in the driver’s blood or breath (Md. Code TR § 16-813(b)).

      1. STATUTORY NOTIFICATIONS UPON REFUSAL

Upon refusal to submit to an alcohol concentration test or a drug and controlled dangerous substance test, officers shall (Md. Code TR § 16-205.1(b)(3)):

  1. Confiscate the person’s driver’s license.
  1. Personally serve an order of suspension of the driver’s license on the person.
  1. Issue a temporary license to drive.
  1. Inform the person that the temporary license allows the person to continue driving for 45 days.
  2. Inform the person of his/her rights, as listed on the MVA Advice of Rights form.
      1. BLOOD SAMPLE WITHOU CONSENT

                           A blood sample may be obtained from:

  1. A person who is dead, unconscious or otherwise in a condition that renders him/her incapable of refusing a test, and is deemed not to have withdrawn consent (Md. Code CJ

§ 10-305; Md. Code TR § 16-205.1(d)(1)).

  1. A person who refuses to submit to a chemical test when the officer has reasonable grounds to believe that the person was involved in a vehicle accident while driving under the influence of alcohol or a controlled substance that resulted in serious bodily injury or death of another (Md. Code TR § 16-205.1(c)(1)).
      1. FORCED BLOOD SAMPLE

If an arrestee indicates by word or action that he/she will physically resist a blood draw, the officer should request a supervisor to respond.

The responding supervisor should:

  1. Evaluate  whether  using  force  to  obtain  a  blood  sample  is  appropriate  under  the circumstances.
  2. Ensure that all attempts to obtain a blood sample through force cease if the person agrees to, and completes, a viable form of testing in a timely manner.
  3. Advise the person of his/her duty to provide a sample (even if this advisement was previously done by another officer), and attempt to persuade the individual to submit to providing such a sample without physical resistance.
    1. This dialogue should be recorded on audio and/or video when practicable.
  4. Ensure that the blood sample is taken in a medically approved manner.
  5. Ensure that the forced blood draw is recorded on audio and/or video when practicable.
  6. Monitor and ensure that the type and level of force applied appears reasonable under the circumstances:
    1. Unless  otherwise  provided  in  a  warrant,  force  should  generally  be  limited  to handcuffing or similar restraint methods.
    2. In  misdemeanor  cases,  if  the arrestee  becomes  violent  or  more  resistant,  no additional force will be used and a refusal should be noted in the report.
    3. In  felony  cases,  force  which  reasonably  appears  necessary  to  overcome  the resistance to the blood draw may be permitted.
  7. Ensure the use of force and methods used to accomplish the collection of the blood sample are documented in the related report.

If a supervisor is unavailable, officers are expected to use sound judgment and perform the duties of a supervisor, as set forth above.

      1. PERSON INCAPABLE OF REFUSING TO TAKE A TEST

If an officer determines that a person is unconscious or otherwise incapable of refusing to take a test, the officer shall (Md. Code TR § 16-205.1(d)):

  1. Obtain prompt medical attention for the person.
  2. When necessary, arrange for removal of the person to a nearby medical facility.
  3. If a test would not jeopardize the health or well-being of the person, direct a qualified medical person to withdraw blood for a test.

If the person regains consciousness or otherwise becomes capable of refusing before the taking of a test, the officer shall follow the procedures set forth in this policy for notification and testing.

    1. ARREST AND INVESTIGATION
      1. REPORTING

The Traffic Officer shall ensure that this department complies with all state reporting requirements pursuant to Md. Code TR § 16-205.1(b)(3)(viii)).

      1. TEST ADMINISTERED BY OUTSIDE PHYSICIAN

A person is permitted to have a physician of his/her own choosing administer tests, in addition to the test administered at the direction of an officer. In the event a test was neither offered nor requested by the officer, the person may request, and the officer shall have administered, one or more of the tests provided by state law (Md. Code CJ § 10-304(e)).

    1. RECORDSBUREAU RESPONSIBILITIES

The Records Division (Prince George County PD) will ensure that all case-related records are transmitted according to current records procedures and as required by the prosecuting attorney’s office.

    1. ADMINISTRATIVE HEARINGS

The Records Division (Prince George County PD) will ensure that all appropriate reports and documents related to administrative license suspensions are reviewed and forwarded to the MVA.

Any officer who receives notice of required attendance at an administrative license suspension hearing should promptly notify the prosecuting attorney.

An officer called to testify at an administrative hearing should document the hearing date and the MVA file number in a supplemental report. Specific details of the hearing generally should not be included in the report unless errors, additional evidence or witnesses are identified.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Safety Equipment Repair Orders (SERO), Traffic and Parking Citations

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy outlines the responsibilities for issuing, correcting, voiding and dismissing Safety Equipment Repair Order (SERO), traffic and parking citations.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to enforce traffic laws fairly and equally. Authorized members may issue n SERO, traffic citation, parking citation, written or verbal warning based upon the circumstances of the contact and in the best interest of the motoring public and community safety.

    1. RESPONSIBILITIES

The Records Division (Prince George County PD) shall be responsible for the supply and accounting of all SERO, traffic and parking citation books issued to members of this department using Motor Vehicle Administration (MVA) inventory withdrawal forms (COMAR 11.17.18.01; COMAR 11.17.18.02). Citations and SERO forms will be kept in a secure location and issued to members by the Records Division (Prince George County PD) staff. SERO forms (MSP Form 157) may be obtained from the Maryland State Police (MSP) Automotive Safety Enforcement Division (ASED).

Members will sign for the SERO or citation books when issued or upon return of unused citations. A traffic citation book may not be reassigned to another member or another law enforcement agency without the prior authorization of the MVA. Members may not lend, borrow or share traffic citations (COMAR 11.17.18.03).

The Chief of Police or the authorized designee shall submit a report on official letterhead advising the MVA within five days of any lost, stolen, mutilated or destroyed traffic citation (COMAR 11.17.18.04(B)).

Upon request, the Chief of Police or the authorized designee shall account for the disposition of traffic citations in a format and within the time required by MVA (COMAR 11.17.18.04(D)).

505.3.1 WRITTEN OR VERBAL WARNINGS

Written or verbal warnings may be issued when the department member believes it is appropriate. The Records Division (Prince George County PD) should maintain information relating to traffic stops in which a written warning is issued. Written warnings are retained by this department in accordance with the established records retention schedule.

    1. TRAFFIC CITATIONS

Members of the Glenarden Police Department shall only use Maryland Uniform and Complaint Citation forms (Md. Code CP § 4-101.1(e)).

      1. ISSUANCE

Officers shall not use an individual’s race or ethnicity as the sole justification to initiate a traffic stop. However, this does not alter the authority of an officer to make an arrest, conduct a search or seizure, or otherwise fulfill the officer’s law enforcement obligations (Md. Code CP § 4-101.1(h) (2)).

Upon issuing a traffic citation, members shall ask the person to acknowledge receipt of a copy of the citation and advise the person that failure to acknowledge receipt may lead to the person’s arrest (Md. Code TR § 26-201(b); Md. Code TR § 26-203).

Following issuance of a traffic citation, members shall promptly file an electronic or written copy of the citation with the District Court. If the person acknowledges receipt on a written copy of the citation, members shall keep that copy to produce as evidence if required in court and dispose of the other copies of the citation in accordance with the regulations adopted by the MVA (Md. Code TR § 26-407(b)).

      1. CORRECTIONS

When a traffic citation is issued but is in need of correction, the member issuing the citation shall submit the citation and a letter to his/her immediate supervisor requesting a specific correction. Once approved, the citation and letter shall then be forwarded to the Records Division (Prince George County PD). The Records Division (Prince George County PD) or the authorized designee shall prepare a letter of correction to the District Court having jurisdiction and notify the citation recipient in writing.

      1. VOIDING

Voiding a traffic citation may occur when the citation has not been completed or when it is completed but not issued. All copies of the voided citation shall be presented to a supervisor for approval. The citation and copies shall then be forwarded to the Records Division (Prince George County PD).

      1. DISMISSAL

Members of this department do not have the authority to dismiss a traffic citation once it has been issued. Upon a review of the circumstances involving the issuance of the traffic citation, the Traffic Officer may request the Operations Services Lieutenant to recommend dismissal. If approved, the citation will be forwarded to the appropriate prosecutor with a request for dismissal (Md. Code TR

§ 26-407(c); Md. Code TR § 26-407(g)).

Any request from a recipient to dismiss a citation shall be referred to the District Court (Md. Code TR § 26-408).

Prior to a court hearing, a member may submit a request for dismissal of a traffic citation to his/her supervisor. The request must be in writing and should include the reason for dismissal (i.e., in the interest of justice, prosecution is deemed inappropriate). Upon a review of the circumstances involving the issuance of the traffic citation, the supervisor may forward the request

to the Operations Services Lieutenant to recommend dismissal. If approved, the citation will be forwarded to the appropriate prosecutor with a request for dismissal.

Should a member determine during a court proceeding that a traffic citation should be dismissed in the interest of justice or where prosecution is deemed inappropriate, the member may request the court to dismiss the citation. Upon such dismissal, the member shall notify his/her immediate supervisor of the circumstances surrounding the dismissal and shall complete any paperwork as directed or required, and forward it to the Operations Services Lieutenant for review.

      1. DISPOSITION

The court and file copies of all traffic citations issued by members of this department shall be forwarded to the member’s immediate supervisor for review by the end of each shift. The citation copies shall then be filed with the Records Division (Prince George County PD).

Upon separation from appointment or employment with this department, all members who were issued traffic citations books shall return any unused citations to the Records Division (Prince George County PD).

      1. JUVENILE CITATIONS

Completion of traffic citation forms for juveniles may vary slightly from the procedure for adults. The juvenile’s age, place of residency and the type of offense should be considered before issuing a juvenile a citation.

      1. DATA COLLECTION

Whenever an officer conducts a traffic stop and detains the driver for any period of time for a violation of the Maryland Vehicle Law, he/she shall document the stop as required by law (Md. Code TR § 25-113(d)).

The following are exempt from the reporting requirement:

  • Checkpoint or roadblock stops
  • Stops of multiple vehicles due to a traffic accident or emergency situation requiring vehicles to stop for public safety purposes
  • Stops based on the use of radar, laser or Visual Average Speed Computer and Recorder (VASCAR) technology
  • Stops based on the use of automated license plate reader (ALPR) technology

Traffic stop data shall be reported and reviewed as specified in the Racial or Bias-Based Profiling Policy. The Records Division (Prince George County PD) shall submit records of traffic stops to the Maryland Statistical Analysis Center Race-Based Reporting module of Delta+ or automatically via the Electronic Traffic Information Exchange (E-TIX) (Md. Code TR § 25-113(e)).

    1. PARKING CITATION APPEALS

Parking citations may be appealed in accordance with local and state law.

An appeal of a parking citation must be received by this department at least five days prior to the date of payment set forth on the citation. The Traffic Officer shall forward a copy of the notice of intention to stand trial and a copy of the parking citation to the District Court (Md. Code CJ § 7-302(d); Md. Code TR § 26-303(a)).

If the presence of the member who issued the citation is required at trial and the Department has received notice, the member shall appear at trial. Absent proper notice, the member need not appear at the trial and the copy of the citation bearing the certification of the member is prima facie evidence of the facts stated in it (Md. Code TR § 26-303(b)).

    1. SERO

An officer may issue a SERO for defective safety equipment on all classes of Maryland registered motor vehicles, trailers and semi-trailers except those vehicles displaying historic license plates, interchangeable license plates and temporary registration plates. Specific equipment violations subject to a SERO is maintained by the MSP and are included on the SERO form (Md. Code TR

§ 23-105(a)).

An officer shall complete a visual inspection and certification upon contact by a member of the public or as assigned (Md. Code TR § 23-105(c)).

    1. RECORDS

For each citation issued, this department shall keep:

  1. Every citation, or a record of every citation, for at least three years after issuance (COMAR 11.17.18.04).
  2. A record of the disposition of the charge by the District Court (Md. Code TR § 26-407(e)).

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Disabled Vehicles

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy establishes guidelines for department members who provide assistance to motorists in disabled vehicles within the primary jurisdiction of the Glenarden Police Department.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to assist motorists with disabled vehicles until those vehicles are safely removed from the roadway. Members should take appropriate action to mitigate potential problems when a vehicle constitutes a traffic hazard or the safety of the motorist is a concern.

    1. RESPONSIBILITIES

When an on-duty member of this department sees a disabled vehicle on the roadway, the member should make a reasonable effort to provide assistance. If this is not reasonably possible, the dispatcher should be advised of the location of the disabled vehicle and the need for assistance. The dispatcher should then assign another department member to respond as soon as practicable.

    1. ASSISTANCE

In most cases, a disabled motorist will require assistance. After arrangements for assistance are made, continued involvement by department members will be contingent on the time of day, the location, the availability of department resources and the vulnerability of the disabled motorist.

      1. MECHANICAL REPAIRS

Department members shall not make mechanical repairs to a disabled vehicle. The use of push bumpers, with consent of the owner, to relocate vehicles to a position of safety is not considered a mechanical repair.

      1. RELOCATION OF DISABLED VEHICLES

The relocation of disabled vehicles by members of this department by pushing or pulling a vehicle should only occur when the conditions reasonably indicate that immediate movement is necessary to reduce a hazard presented by the disabled vehicle.

      1. RELOCATION OF DISABLED MOTORIST

The relocation of a disabled motorist should only occur with the person’s consent and should be suggested when conditions reasonably indicate that immediate movement is necessary to mitigate a potential hazard. The department member may stay with the disabled motorist or transport him/ her to a safe area to await pickup.

Chapter 6 – Investigation Operations

Investigation and Prosecution

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to set guidelines and requirements pertaining to the handling and dispositions of criminal investigations.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to investigate crimes thoroughly and with due diligence, and to evaluate and prepare criminal cases for appropriate clearance or submission to a prosecutor.

    1. INITIAL INVESTIGATION
      1. OFFICER RESPONSIBILITIES

An officer responsible for an initial investigation shall complete no less than the following:

  1. Make a preliminary determination of whether a crime has been committed by completing, at a minimum:
    1. An initial statement from any witnesses or complainants.
    2. A cursory examination for evidence.
  2. If information indicates a crime has occurred, the officer shall:
    1. Preserve the scene and any evidence as required to complete the initial and follow- up investigation.
    2. Determine  if  additional  investigative  resources  (e.g.,  investigators  or  scene processing) are necessary and request assistance as required.
    3. If assistance is warranted, or if the incident is not routine, notify a supervisor or the Shift Supervisor.
    4. Make reasonable attempts to locate, identify and interview all available victims, complainants, witnesses and suspects.
    5. Collect any evidence.
    6. Take any appropriate law enforcement action.
    7. Complete and submit the appropriate reports and documentation.
  3. If the preliminary determination is that no crime occurred, determine what other action may be necessary and what other resources may be available, and advise the informant or complainant of this information.
      1. NON-SWORN RESPONSIBILITIES

A non-sworn member assigned to any preliminary investigation is responsible for all investigative steps, except making any attempt to locate, contact or interview a suspect face-to-face or take any enforcement action. Should an initial investigation indicate that those steps are required, the assistance of an officer shall be requested.

600.4   CUSTODIAL INTERROGATION REQUIREMENTS

Suspects who are in custody and subjected to an interrogation shall be given the Miranda warning, unless an exception applies. Interview or interrogation of a juvenile shall be in accordance with the Temporary Custody of Juveniles Policy.

600.4.1   AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDINGS

An officer conducting a custodial interrogation of an individual who is suspected of having committed any violent felony offense, including murder, rape, sexual offense in the first degree or sexual offense in the second degree, shall make reasonable efforts to create an audiovisual recording in its entirety. Regardless of where the interrogation occurs, every reasonable effort should be made to secure functional recording equipment to accomplish such recordings (Md. Code CP § 2-402).

Consideration should also be given to recording a custodial interrogation, or any investigative interview, for any other offense when it is reasonable to believe it would be appropriate and beneficial to the investigation and is otherwise allowed by law.

No recording of a custodial interrogation should be destroyed or altered without written authorization from the prosecuting attorney and the Prince George County PD supervisor. Copies of recorded interrogations or interviews may be made in the same or a different format as the original recording, provided the copies are true, accurate and complete and are made only for authorized and legitimate law enforcement purposes. An audio or audiovisual recording made by a law enforcement unit of a custodial interrogation of a criminal suspect is exempt from the Maryland Wiretapping and Electronic Surveillance Act (Md. Code CP § 2-403).

Recordings should not take the place of a thorough report and investigative interviews. Written statements from suspects should continue to be obtained when applicable.

    1. DISCONTINUATION OF INVESTIGATIONS

The investigation of a criminal case or efforts to seek prosecution should only be discontinued if one of the following applies:

  1. All reasonable investigative efforts have been exhausted, no reasonable belief that the person who committed the crime can be identified and the incident has been documented appropriately.
  2. The perpetrator of a misdemeanor has been identified and a warning is the most appropriate disposition.
    1. In these cases, the investigator shall document that the person was warned and why prosecution was not sought.
    2. Warnings shall not be given for felony offenses or other offenses identified in this policy or by law that require an arrest or submission of a case to a prosecutor.
  3. The case has been submitted to the appropriate prosecutor but no charges have been filed. Further investigation is not reasonable nor has the prosecutor requested further investigation.
  4. The case has been submitted to the appropriate prosecutor; charges have been filed; further investigation is not reasonable, warranted or requested; and there is no need to take the suspect into custody.
  5. Suspects have been arrested, there are no other suspects, and further investigation is either not warranted or requested.
  6. Investigation has proved that a crime was not committed (see the Sexual Assault Investigations Policy for special considerations in these cases).

The Domestic Violence, Child Abuse, Sexual Assault Investigations and Adult Abuse policies may also require an arrest or submittal of a case to a prosecutor.

    1. COMPUTERS AND DIGITAL EVIDENCE

The collection, preservation, transportation and storage of computers, cell phones and other digital devices may require specialized handling to preserve the value of the related evidence. If it is anticipated that computers or similar equipment will be seized, officers should request that computer forensic examiners assist with seizing computers and related evidence. If a forensic examiner is unavailable, officers should take reasonable steps to prepare for such seizure and use the resources that are available.

    1. INVESTIGATIVE USE OF SOCIAL MEDIA AND INTERNET SOURCES

Use of social media and any other Internet source to access information for the purpose of criminal investigation shall comply with applicable laws and policies regarding privacy, civil rights and civil liberties. Information gathered via the Internet should only be accessed by members while on-duty and for purposes related to the mission of this department. If a member encounters information relevant to a criminal investigation while off-duty or while using his/her own equipment, the member should note the dates, times and locations of the information and report the discovery to his/her supervisor as soon as practicable. The member, or others who have been assigned to do so, should attempt to replicate the finding when on-duty and using department equipment.

Information obtained via the Internet should not be archived or stored in any manner other than department-established record keeping systems (see the Records Maintenance and Release and the Criminal Organizations policies).

      1. ACCESS RESTRICTIONS

Information that can be accessed from any department computer, without the need of an account, password, email address, alias or other identifier (unrestricted websites), may be accessed and used for legitimate investigative purposes without supervisory approval.

Accessing information from any Internet source that requires the use or creation of an account, password, email address, alias or other identifier, or the use of nongovernment IP addresses, requires supervisor approval prior to access. The supervisor will review the justification for accessing the information and consult with legal counsel as necessary to identify any policy or legal restrictions. Any such access and the supervisor approval shall be documented in the related investigative report.

Accessing information that requires the use of a third party’s account or online identifier requires supervisor approval and the consent of the third party. The consent must be voluntary and shall be documented in the related investigative report.

Information gathered from any Internet source should be evaluated for its validity, authenticity, accuracy and reliability. Corroborative evidence should be sought and documented in the related investigative report.

Any information collected in furtherance of an investigation through an Internet source should be documented in the related report. Documentation should include the source of information and the dates and times that the information was gathered.

      1. INTERCEPTING ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION

Intercepting social media communications in real time may be subject to federal and state wiretap laws. Officers should seek legal counsel before any such interception.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Sexual Assault Investigations

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the investigation of sexual assaults. These guidelines will address some of the unique aspects of such cases and the effects that these crimes have on the victims. Mandatory notifications requirements are addressed in the Child Abuse and Adult Abuse policies.

      1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Sexual assault – Any crime or attempted crime of a sexual nature, to include, but not limited to, offenses defined in Md. Code CR § 3-301 et seq. (Sexual Crimes).

Sexual Assault Response Team (SART) – A multidisciplinary team generally comprised of advocates, law enforcement officers, forensic medical examiners, including sexual assault nurse examiners (SANEs) if possible, forensic laboratory personnel and prosecutors. The team is designed to coordinate a broad response to sexual assault victims (Md. Code CP § 11-923).

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department that its members, when responding to reports of sexual assaults, will strive to minimize the trauma experienced by the victims, and will aggressively investigate sexual assaults, pursue expeditious apprehension and conviction of perpetrators, and protect the safety of the victims and the community.

    1. QUALIFIED INVESTIGATORS

Qualified investigators should be available for assignment of sexual assault investigations. These investigators should:

  1. Have specialized training in, and be familiar with, interview techniques and the medical and legal issues that are specific to sexual assault investigations.
  2. Conduct follow-up interviews and investigation.
  1. Present appropriate cases of alleged sexual assault to the prosecutor for review.
  1. Coordinate with other enforcement agencies, social service agencies and medical personnel as needed.
  2. Provide referrals to therapy services, victim advocates and support for the victim.
  1. Participate in or coordinate with SART or other multidisciplinary investigative teams as applicable.
    1. INVESTIGATION AND REPORTING

In all reported or suspected cases of sexual assault, a report shall be written and assigned for follow-up investigation. This includes incidents in which the allegations appear unfounded or unsubstantiated.

      1. VICTIM INTERVIEWS

The primary considerations in sexual assault investigations, which begin with the initial call the victim makes to the Communications Center, should be the health and safety of the victim, the preservation of evidence, and preliminary interviews to determine if a crime has been committed and to attempt to identify the suspect.

Whenever possible, a member of SART or the multidisciplinary response team should be included in the initial victim interviews.

An in-depth follow-up interview should not be conducted until after the medical and forensic examinations are completed and the personal needs of the victim have been met (e.g. change of clothes, bathing). The follow-up interview may be delayed to the following day based upon the circumstances. Whenever practicable, the follow-up interview should be conducted by a qualified investigator.

Victims are often reluctant or embarrassed to discuss details. Recanting or changing one or more aspects of a prior statement is not necessarily an indication of false reporting or that the case is unfounded. If the responding officer has reason to believe the incident may be without merit, he/ she should document the evidence and inconsistencies. Due to physical and emotional trauma, and the myths and stereotypes associated with sexual assault, inconsistencies in the victim’s report are not uncommon. No opinions of whether the case is unfounded shall be included in the report.

Victims shall not be asked or required to take a polygraph examination (42 USC § 3796gg-8).

Victims should be apprised of applicable victim’s rights provisions, as outlined in the Victim and Witness Assistance Policy.

      1. COLLECTION AND TESTING OF BIOLOGICAL EVIDENCE

Whenever possible, a SART member should be involved in the collection of forensic evidence from the victim.

An officer shall offer the alleged victim the opportunity to be taken immediately to the nearest medical facility. The offer shall be made without regard for the place of the alleged sexual assault or where it is reported (Md. Code CP § 11-924(b)).

When the facts of the case indicate that collection of biological evidence is warranted, it should be collected regardless of how much time has elapsed since the reported assault.

If a drug-facilitated sexual assault is suspected, it is critical to the investigation that a urine sample from the victim be collected by a medical professional.

Kits or biological evidence from all rape cases, including cases where the suspect is known by the victim, shall be submitted as soon as possible for biological testing (Md. Code PS § 2-504(a) (3)(iii)).

The result of the test and the case information should be entered into state and national registries in a timely manner.

Health care services and biological testing shall be free of charge to the victim (Md. Code CP § 11-925).

      1. DISPOSITION OF CASES

If the assigned investigator has reason to believe the case is without merit, the case may be classified as unfounded only upon review and approval of the Prince George County PD supervisor.

Classification of a rape case as unfounded requires the Prince George County PD supervisor to determine that the facts have significant irregularities with reported information and that the incident could not have happened as it was reported. When a victim has recanted his/her original statement, there must be corroborating evidence to support the recanted information before the case should be determined as unfounded.

      1. AUDITING CASE DISPOSITIONS

The Prince George County PD supervisor will ensure case dispositions are reviewed on a periodic basis using an identified group that is independent of the investigation process. The SART or multidisciplinary response team and/or victim advocates should be considered for involvement in this audit.

      1. VICTIM REQUESTS FOR BIOLOGICAL TEST RESULTS

Within 30 days of any request by the victim, the status and results of a sexual assault evidence kit shall be provided to the victim unless doing so would impede or compromise the investigation (Md. CP § 11-926).

    1. RELEASING INFORMATION TO THE PUBLIC

In cases where the perpetrator is not known to the victim, and especially if there are multiple crimes where more than one appear to be related, consideration should be given to releasing information to the public whenever there is a reasonable likelihood that doing so may result in developing helpful investigative leads. The Prince George County PD supervisor should weigh the risk of alerting the suspect to the investigation with the need to protect the victim and the public, and to prevent more crimes.

    1. TRAINING

Subject to available resources, periodic training will be provided to:

  1. Members who are first responders. This includes, but is not limited to, the following topics:
    1. Initial response to sexual assaults
    2. Legal issues
    1. Victim advocacy
    1. Victim’s response to trauma
  1. Qualified Investigators who should receive advanced training on additional topics. This includes, but is not limited to, the following:
    1. Interviewing sexual assault victim
    1. SART or multidisciplinary response team
    1. Medical and legal aspects of sexual assault investigations
    1. Serial crimes investigations
    1. Use of community and other federal and state investigative resources, such as the Violent Criminal Apprehension Program (VICAP)

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Asset Forfeiture

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy describes the authority and procedure for the seizure, forfeiture and liquidation of property associated with designated offenses.

      1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Fiscal agent – The person designated by the Chief of Police to be responsible for securing and maintaining seized assets and distributing any proceeds realized from any forfeiture proceedings. This includes any time the Glenarden Police Department seizes property for forfeiture or when the Glenarden Police Department is acting as the fiscal agent pursuant to a multi-agency agreement.

Forfeiture – The process by which legal ownership of an asset is transferred to a government or other authority.

Forfeiture reviewer – The department member assigned by the Chief of Police who is responsible for reviewing all forfeiture cases and acting as the liaison between the Department and the forfeiting authority (Md. Code CP § 12-101(f)).

Property subject to forfeiture – Items that may generally be subject to forfeiture include:

  1. Real property, tangible and intangible personal property, money, weapons, vehicles, aircraft or vessels, and items or objects used in connection with a crime under the Controlled Dangerous Substances law (Md. Code CP § 12-102).
    1. Motor vehicles must meet required seizure guidelines (Md. Code CP § 12-204).
  2. A handgun, handgun ammunition or parts in violation of gun laws (Md. Code CP § 12-201).
  3. A regulated firearm in violation of the law (Md. Code PS § 5-135).
  4. Illegal possession of a handgun (Md. Code CR § 4-206).
  5. Firearms used in specific designated crimes (Md. Code CR § 5-621(e)).
  6. Money seized in illegal gambling investigations (Md. Code CP § 13-102).
  7. Vehicles, vessels or aircraft used in violation of explosives laws (Md. Code CP § 13-301).
  1. Motor vehicles, money and real property used in the connection of a violation of human trafficking laws (Md. Code CP § 13-502) or personal property that is directly or indirectly dangerous to health and safety (Md. Code CP § 13-504).
  2. Contraband alcohol, cigarettes and motor fuel, and conveyances used to transport the products (Md. Code TG § 13-835).
  3. Crimes involving telecommunications and electronics (Md. Code CR § 7-310).
  4. Property used or intended for use in the course of a violation of the Mortgage Fraud law (Md. Code CP § 13-402).

Seizure – The act of law enforcement officials taking property, cash or assets that have been used in connection with or acquired by specified illegal activities.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department recognizes that appropriately applied forfeiture laws are helpful to enforce the law, deter crime and reduce the economic incentive of crime. However, the potential of revenue shall not be allowed to jeopardize the effective investigation and prosecution of criminal offenses, officer safety, the integrity of ongoing investigations or any person’s due process rights.

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department that all members, including those assigned to internal or external law enforcement task force operations, shall comply with all state and federal laws pertaining to forfeitures.

    1. ASSET SEIZURE

The following property may be seized for forfeiture as provided in this policy:

      1. PROPERTY SUBJECT TO SEIZURE

The following may be seized upon review and approval of a supervisor and in conjunction with the forfeiture reviewer:

  1. Property subject to forfeiture may be seized on a warrant or court order.
  2. Property subject to forfeiture may be seized without a warrant when:
    1. The seizure is incident to an arrest or a search under a search warrant and the property is subject to forfeiture due to a controlled dangerous substance violation, human trafficking violation or handgun violation (Md. Code CP § 12-202; Md. Code CP § 13-504; Md. Code CP § 13-202).
    2. The seizure is incident to an inspection under an administrative inspection warrant and the property is forfeitable due to a controlled dangerous substance or human trafficking violation (Md. Code CP § 12-202; Md. Code CP § 13-504).
    3. There is probable cause to believe that the property has been used or is intended to be used for a violation of a Controlled Dangerous Substances law (Md. Code CP

§ 12-202).

  1. Property subject to forfeiture that may be lawfully seized as evidence of a crime.
  2. A vehicle, when there is probable cause to believe that it is subject to forfeiture for a violation of human trafficking (Md. Code CR § 11-303) and after considering (Md. Code CP § 13-507):
    1. Evidence that the motor vehicle was acquired with proceeds from pandering.
    2. The circumstances of the arrest.
    3. How the vehicle was used.

Whenever practicable, obtaining a search warrant or court order for seizure prior to making a seizure is the preferred method.

A large amount of money alone is insufficient to establish the probable cause required to make a seizure.

      1. PROPERTY NOT SUBJECT TO SEIZURE Property that should not be seized for forfeiture includes:
  1. Cash and property that does not meet the forfeiture counsel’s current minimum forfeiture thresholds.
  2. Any personal property or vehicle if the officer reasonably knows the owner did not have knowledge of the offense or did not consent to the property’s use (“innocent owner”).
  3. Real property without a court order.
    1. PROCESSING SEIZED PROPERTY FOR FORFEITURE PROCEEDINGS

When property or cash subject to this policy is seized, the officer making the seizure should ensure compliance with the following (Md. Code CP § 12-301 et seq.):

  1. Complete the applicable seizure forms and present the appropriate copy to the person from whom the property is seized. If cash or property is seized from more than one person, a separate copy must be provided to each person, specifying the items seized. When property is seized and no one claims an interest in the property, the officer must leave the copy in the place where the property was found, if it is reasonable to do so (Md. Code CP § 12-305).
  2. Complete and submit a report and original seizure forms within 24 hours of the seizure, if practicable (Md. Code CP § 12-301).
  3. Forward the original seizure forms and related reports to the forfeiture reviewer within two days of seizure (see generally Md. Code CP § 12-206).

The officer will book seized property as evidence with the notation in the comment section of the property form, “Seized Subject to Forfeiture.” Property seized subject to forfeiture should be booked on a separate property form. No other evidence from the case should be booked on this form.

Photographs shall be taken of seized cash and should be taken of other valuable items (Md. Code CP § 12-202(b)(1); Md. Code CP § 13-103; Md. Code CP § 13-505).

Officers who suspect property may be subject to seizure but are not able to seize the property (e.g., the property is located elsewhere, the whereabouts of the property is unknown, it is real estate, bank accounts, non-tangible assets) should document and forward the information in the appropriate report to the forfeiting authority.

    1. MAINTAINING SEIZED PROPERTY

The Property and Evidence Section supervisor is responsible for ensuring compliance with the following:

  1. All property received for forfeiture is reasonably secured and properly stored to prevent waste and preserve its condition (Md. Code CP § 12-203).
  2. All property received for forfeiture is checked to determine if the property has been stolen.
  3. All property received for forfeiture is retained in the same manner as evidence until forfeiture is finalized or the property is returned to the claimant or the person with an ownership interest.
  4. Property received for forfeiture is not used by the Department unless the forfeiture action has been completed.
  5. All money is deposited into the appropriate financial account (Md. Code CP § 12-202; Md. Code CP § 13-103; Md. Code CP § 13-505)
  6. Pending final disposition, money seized for illegal gambling shall be properly accounted for and deposited in an interest-bearing bank account or invested in accordance with Title 17 of the Local Government Article (Md. Code CP § 13-104).
  7. On receipt of an application, the Department shall hold an informal review to determine whether the owner knew or should have known of the use or intended use of a handgun that is seized in violation of Md. Code CR § 4-203 or Md. Code CR § 4-204 (Md. Code CP

§ 13-204).

  1. The Department shall surrender a motor vehicle to the owner upon request if the motor vehicle falls within the purview of a forfeiture exception or the required legal standards are not met (Md. Code CP § 12-207; Md. Code CP § 13-509).
    1. FORFEITURE REVIEWER

The Chief of Police will appoint a forfeiture reviewer as allowed by law. The responsibilities of the forfeiture reviewer include:

  1. Remaining familiar with forfeiture laws, particularly Criminal Procedure Article Title 12 and Title 13.
  2. Serving as the liaison between the Department and the Town Treasurer or Director of Finance (Md. Code CP § 12-101(j)).
  3. Serving as the liaison between the Department and the forfeiting authority and ensuring prompt legal review and filing of all seizures (Md. Code CP § 12-304; Md. Code CP § 13-517).
  4. Making reasonable efforts to obtain annual training that includes best practices in pursuing, seizing and tracking forfeitures.
  5. Reviewing each seizure-related case and deciding whether the seizure is more appropriately made under state or federal seizure laws. The forfeiture reviewer should contact federal authorities when appropriate.
  6. Ensuring that responsibilities, including the designation of a fiscal agent, are clearly established whenever multiple agencies are cooperating in a forfeiture case.
  7. Ensuring that seizure forms are available and appropriate for department use. These should include notice forms, a receipt form and a checklist that provides relevant guidance to officers. The forms should be available in languages appropriate for the region and should contain spaces for:
    1. Names and contact information for all relevant persons and law enforcement officers involved.
    2. Information as to how ownership or other property interests may have been determined (e.g., verbal claims of ownership, titles, public records).
    3. A space for the signature of the person from whom cash or property is being seized.
    1. A tear-off portion or copy, which should be given to the person from whom cash or property is being seized, that includes the legal authority for the seizure, information regarding the process to contest the seizure and a detailed description of the items seized.
  1. Ensuring that who may be involved in asset forfeiture receive training in the proper use of the seizure forms and the forfeiture process. The training should be developed in consultation with the appropriate legal counsel and may be accomplished through traditional classroom education, electronic media, Daily Training Bulletins (DTBs) or General Orders. The training should cover this policy and address any relevant statutory changes and court decisions.
  2. Reviewing each asset forfeiture case to ensure that:
    1. Written documentation of the seizure and the items seized is in the case file.
    1. Independent legal review of the circumstances and propriety of the seizure is made in a timely manner.
    2. The Chief of Police personally reviews and recommends forfeiture of motor vehicles in violation of the Controlled Dangerous Substances or Human Trafficking laws (Md. Code CP § 12-206; Md. Code CP § 13-508)
    3. Notice of seizure has been given in a timely manner to those who hold an interest in the seized property (Md. Code CP § 12-209).
    4. Property is promptly released to those entitled to its return.
    1. All changes to forfeiture status are forwarded to any supervisor who initiates a forfeiture case.
    2. Any cash received is deposited with the fiscal agent.
    3. Assistance with the resolution of ownership claims and the release of property to those entitled is provided (Md. Code CP § 12-203).
    4. Current minimum forfeiture thresholds are communicated appropriately to officers.
    1. This policy and any related policies are periodically reviewed and updated to reflect current federal and state statutes and case law.
  1. Ensuring that a written plan should be available that enables the Chief of Police to address any extended absence of the forfeiture reviewer, thereby ensuring that contact information for other law enforcement personnel and attorneys who may assist in these matters.
  2. Ensuring that the Department disposes of property as provided by law following any forfeiture.
  3. Ensuring that the process of selling or adding forfeited property to department inventory is in accordance with all applicable laws and consistent with the use and disposition of similar property.
  4. Upon completion of any forfeiture process, ensuring that no property is retained by the Glenarden Police Department unless the Chief of Police authorizes in writing the retention of the property for official use.

Forfeiture proceeds should be maintained in a separate fund or account subject to appropriate accounting control, with regular reviews or audits of all deposits and expenditures.

Forfeiture reporting and expenditures should be completed in the manner prescribed by the law and Town financial directives.

    1. DISPOSITION OF FORFEITED PROPERTY

No member of this department may use property that has been seized for forfeiture until the forfeiture action has been completed and the Chief of Police has given written authorization to retain the property for official use. No department member involved in the decision to seize property should be involved in any decision regarding the disposition of the property.

If an order of forfeiture is not entered by the court, the Department shall return to the owner that part of the proceeds and any costs of the forfeiture proceedings paid from the proceeds of the sale (Md. Code CP § 12-503; Md. Code CP § 13-534).

After a full court hearing, if the court determines that the property should not be forfeited, the property shall be promptly returned to the legal owner (Md. Code CP § 12-402; Md. Code CP § 13-534).

Whenever property is forfeited by the court under the Controlled Dangerous Substances or Human Trafficking laws, the property may be kept for official use, destroyed or otherwise disposed of, or the Department may sell the property if the law does not require the property to be destroyed and the property is not harmful to the public (Md. Code CP § 12-403; Md. Code CP § 13-529).

Whenever property is forfeited under a violation of gun laws, the Department may only retain the property for official use, destroy the forfeited property, or sell, exchange or transfer the forfeited property to another law enforcement agency for official use by that agency (Md. Code CP § 13-206(a)).

Shared forfeiture proceeds from a state law enforcement agency under the Controlled Dangerous Substances law shall be deposited in the Town general fund (Md. Code CP § 12-403(e)).

Forfeiture proceeds under the Maryland Mortgage Fraud Protection Act shall be deposited in the state’s general fund (Md. Code CP § 13-407(c)(4)).

Proceeds from a violation of the Human Trafficking laws shall be deposited to the Town General Fund (Md. Code CP § 13-530).

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Informants

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for the use of informants.

      1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Informant – A person who covertly interacts with other individuals or suspects at the direction of, request of, or by agreement with the Glenarden Police Department for law enforcement purposes. This also includes a person agreeing to supply information to the Glenarden Police Department for a benefit (.e.g., a quid pro quo in the form of a reduced criminal penalty, money).

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department recognizes the value of informants to law enforcement efforts and will strive to protect the integrity of the informant process. It is the policy of this department that all funds related to informant payments will be routinely audited and that payments to informants will be made according to the criteria outlined in this policy.

    1. USE OF INFORMANTS
      1. INITIAL APPROVAL

Before using an individual  as  an  informant,  an  officer  must  receive  approval  from  his/her supervisor. The officer shall compile sufficient information through a background investigation and experience with the informant in order to determine the suitability of the individual, including age, maturity and risk of physical harm, as well as any indicators of his/her reliability and credibility.

Members  of  this  department  should  not  guarantee  absolute  safety  or  confidentiality  to  an informant.

      1. JUVENILE INFORMANTS

The use of informants under the age of 13 is prohibited.

Except for the enforcement of laws related to the commercial sale of alcohol or tobacco products, the use of any juvenile 13 years of age or older as an informant is only permitted when authorized by court order.

In all cases, a juvenile 13 years of age or older may only be used as an informant with the written consent of each of the following:

  1. The juvenile’s parents or legal guardians
  1. The juvenile’s attorney, if any
  1. The court in which the juvenile’s case is being handled, if applicable
  1. The Chief of Police or the authorized designee
      1. INFORMANT AGREEMENTS

All informants are required to sign and abide by the provisions of the designated department informant agreement. The officer using the informant shall discuss each of the provisions of the agreement with the informant.

Details of the agreement are to be approved in writing by a supervisor before being finalized with the informant.

    1. INFORMANT INTEGRITY

To maintain the integrity of the informant process, the following must be adhered to:

  1. The identity of an informant acting in a confidential capacity shall not be withheld from the Chief of Police, Lieutenant, Prince George County PD supervisor or their authorized designees.
    1. Identities of informants acting in a confidential capacity shall otherwise be kept confidential.
  2. Criminal activity by informants shall not be condoned.
  1. Informants shall be told they are not acting as police officers, employees or agents of the Glenarden Police Department, and that they shall not represent themselves as such.
  2. The relationship between department members and informants shall always be ethical and professional.
    1. Members shall not become intimately involved with an informant.
    1. Social contact shall be avoided unless it is necessary to conduct an official investigation, and only with prior approval of the Prince George County PD supervisor.
    2. Members shall neither solicit nor accept gratuities or engage in any private business transaction with an informant.
  1. Officers shall not meet with informants in a private place unless accompanied by at least one additional officer or with prior approval of the Prince George County PD supervisor.
    1. Officers may meet informants alone in an occupied public place, such as a restaurant.
  2. When contacting informants for the purpose of making payments, officers shall arrange for the presence of another officer.
  3. In all instances when department funds are paid to informants, a voucher shall be completed in advance, itemizing the expenses.
  4. Since the decision rests with the appropriate prosecutor, officers shall not promise that the informant will receive any form of leniency or immunity from criminal prosecution.

603.4.1 UNSUITABLE INFORMANTS

The suitability of any informant should be considered before engaging him/her in any way in a covert or other investigative process. Members who become aware that an informant may be unsuitable will notify the supervisor, who will initiate a review to determine suitability. Until a determination has been made by a supervisor, the informant should not be used by any member. The supervisor shall determine whether the informant should be used by the Department and, if so, what conditions will be placed on his/her participation or any information the informant provides. The supervisor shall document the decision and conditions in file notes and mark the file “unsuitable” when appropriate.

Considerations for determining whether an informant is unsuitable include, but are not limited to, the following:

  1. The informant has provided untruthful or unreliable information in the past.
  1. The informant behaves in a way that may endanger the safety of an officer.
  1. The  informant  reveals  to  suspects  the  identity  of  an  officer  or  the  existence  of  an investigation.
  2. The informant appears to be using his/her affiliation with this department to further criminal objectives.
  3. The informant creates officer-safety issues by providing information to multiple law enforcement agencies simultaneously, without prior notification and approval of each agency.
  4. The informant engages in any other behavior that could jeopardize the safety of officers or the integrity of a criminal investigation.
  5. The informant commits criminal acts subsequent to entering into an informant agreement.

603.5   INFORMANT FILES

Informant files shall be utilized as a source of background information about the informant, to enable review and evaluation of information provided by the informant, and to minimize incidents that could be used to question the integrity of department members or the reliability of the informant.

Informant files shall be maintained in a secure area within the Prince George County PD. The Prince George County PD supervisor or the authorized designee shall be responsible for maintaining informant files. Access to the informant files shall be restricted to the Chief of Police, Lieutenant, Prince George County PD supervisor or their authorized designees. The Investigative Services Lieutenant should arrange for an audit using a representative sample of randomly selected informant files on a periodic basis, but no less than one time per year. If the Prince George County PD supervisor is replaced, the files will be audited before the new supervisor takes over management of the files. The purpose of the audit is to ensure compliance

with file content and updating provisions of this policy. The audit should be conducted by a supervisor who does not have normal access to the informant files.

603.5.1   FILE SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A separate file shall be maintained on each informant and shall be coded with an assigned informant control number. An informant history that includes the following information shall be prepared for each file:

  1. Name and aliases
  1. Date of birth
  1. Physical description: sex, race, height, weight, hair color, eye color, scars, tattoos or other distinguishing features
  2. Photograph
  1. Current home address and telephone numbers
  1. Current employers, positions, addresses and telephone numbers
  1. Vehicles owned and registration information
  1. Places frequented
  1. Briefs of information provided by the informant and his/her subsequent reliability
    1. If an informant is determined to be unsuitable, the informant’s file is  to  be marked “unsuitable” and notations included detailing the issues that caused this classification.
  1. Name of the officer initiating use of the informant
  1. Signed informant agreement
  1. Update on active or inactive status of informant
    1. INFORMANT PAYMENTS

No informant will be told in advance or given an exact amount or percentage for his/her service. The amount of funds to be paid to any informant will be evaluated against the following criteria:

  • The extent of the informant’s personal involvement in the case
  • The significance, value or effect on crime
  • The value of assets seized
  • The quantity of the drugs or other contraband seized
  • The informant’s previous criminal activity
  • The level of risk taken by the informant

The Prince George County PD supervisor will discuss the above factors with the Operations Services Lieutenant and recommend the type and level of payment, subject to approval by the Chief of Police.

      1. PAYMENT PROCESS

Approved payments to an informant should be in cash using the following process:

  1. Payments of $500 and under may be paid in cash from a Prince George County PD buy/ expense fund.
    1. The Prince George County PD supervisor shall sign the voucher for cash payouts from the buy/expense fund.
  2. Payments exceeding $500 shall be made by issuance of a check, payable to the officer who will be delivering the payment.
    1. The check shall list the case numbers related to and supporting the payment.
    1. A written statement of the informant’s involvement in the case shall be placed in the informant’s file.
    2. The statement shall be signed by the informant verifying the statement as a true summary of his/her actions in the case.
    3. Authorization signatures from the Chief of Police and the Town Administrator are required for disbursement of the funds.
  1. To complete the payment process for any amount, the officer delivering the payment shall complete a cash transfer form.
    1. The cash transfer form shall include the following:
      1. Date.
      1. Payment amount.
      1. Glenarden Police Department case number.
      1. A statement that the informant is receiving funds in payment for information voluntarily rendered.
    1. The cash transfer form shall be signed by the informant.
    1. The cash transfer form will be kept in the informant’s file.
      1. REPORTING OF PAYMENTS

Each informant receiving a cash payment shall be advised of his/her responsibility to report the cash to the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) as income. If funds distributed exceed $600 in any reporting year, the informant should be provided IRS Form 1099 (26 CFR 1.6041-1). If such documentation or reporting may reveal the identity of the informant and by doing so jeopardize

any investigation, the safety of officers or the safety of the informant (26 CFR 1.6041-3), then IRS Form 1099 should not be issued.

In such cases, the informant shall be provided a letter identifying the amount he/she must report on a tax return as “other income” and shall be required to provide a signed acknowledgement of receipt of the letter. The completed acknowledgement form and a copy of the letter shall be retained in the informant’s file.

      1. AUDIT OF PAYMENTS

The Prince George County PD supervisor or the authorized designee shall be responsible for compliance with any audit requirements associated with grant provisions and applicable state and federal law.

At least once every six months, the Chief of Police or the authorized designee should conduct an audit of all informant funds for the purpose of accountability and security of the funds. The funds and related documents (e.g., buy/expense fund records, cash transfer forms, invoices, receipts and logs) will assist with the audit process.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Eyewitness Identification

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy sets forth guidelines to be used when members of this department employ eyewitness identification techniques.

      1. DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include (Md. Code PS § 3-506.1):

Administrator – The person conducting an identification procedure.

Automated computer program – A computer program used for a photographic identification procedure where the administrator does not know which photos the eyewitness is viewing until after the identification procedure is completed.

Blind – When the administrator does not know the identity of the suspect.

Blinded – When the administrator may know who the suspect is but does not know which lineup member is being viewed by the eyewitness.

Eyewitness – A person who observes another person at or near the scene of an offense.

Field identification – A live  presentation  of  a  single  individual  to  a  witness  following  the commission of a criminal offense for the purpose of identifying or eliminating the person as the suspect.

Filler – A person or a photograph of a person who is not suspected of an offense and is included in an identification procedure.

Folder shuffle method – A system for conducting a photo lineup by placing photographs in folders, randomly numbering the folders, shuffling the folders and then presenting the folders sequentially so that the administrator cannot see or track which photograph is being presented to the eyewitness until after the procedure is completed.

Identification procedure – A procedure in which a live lineup is conducted or an array of photographs, including a photograph of a suspect and additional photographs of other persons not suspected of the offense, is displayed to an eyewitness in hard copy form or by computer for the purpose of determining whether the eyewitness identifies the suspect as the perpetrator.

Identification statement – A documented statement from an eyewitness given at the time of an identification procedure made in the eyewitness’s own words and includes the eyewitness’s confidence level that the person identified is the perpetrator of the crime.

Live lineup – A live presentation of individuals to a witness for the purpose of identifying or eliminating an individual as the suspect.

Perpetrator – A person who committed an offense.

Suspect – A person who is suspected of committing an offense.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department will strive to use eyewitness identification techniques, when appropriate, to enhance the investigative process and will emphasize identifying persons responsible for crime and exonerating the innocent (Md. Code PS § 3-506).

    1. INTERPRETIVE SERVICES

Members should make a reasonable effort to arrange for an interpreter before proceeding with eyewitness identification if communication with a witness is impeded due to language or hearing barriers.

Before the interpreter is permitted to discuss any matter with the witness, the investigating member should explain the identification process to the interpreter. Once it is determined that the interpreter comprehends the process and can explain it to the witness, the eyewitness identification may proceed as provided for within this policy.

    1. EYEWITNESS IDENTIFICATION FORM

The Prince George County PD supervisor shall be responsible for the development and maintenance of an eyewitness identification process for use by members when they are conducting eyewitness identifications.

The process and any related forms or reports shall provide:

  1. The date, time and location of the eyewitness identification procedure.
  2. The name and identifying information of the witness.
  3. The name of the person administering the identification procedure.
  4. If applicable, the names of all individuals present during the identification procedure.
  5. An admonishment to the witness that it is as important to exclude innocent persons as it is to identify a perpetrator.
  6. An admonishment to the witness that the investigation will continue regardless of whether an identification is made by the witness.
  7. A space for the witness (or the administrator if the witness cannot write) to document the identification statement.
  8. An instruction that the perpetrator may or may not be among the persons in the identification procedure.
  9. A space to document all identification and non-identification results obtained during the identification procedures or any eyewitness identification of a filler.
  10. A signature line where the witness acknowledges that he/she understands the identification procedures, instructions and identification statement.

The process and related forms should be reviewed at least annually and modified when necessary. The forms and included process shall comply with Md. Code PS § 3-506.1.

    1. EYEWITNESS IDENTIFICATION

Members are cautioned not to, in any way influence a witness as to whether any subject or photo presented in a lineup is in any way connected to the case. Members should avoid mentioning that:

  • The individual was apprehended near the crime scene.
  • The evidence points to the individual as the suspect.
  • Other witnesses have identified or failed to identify, the individual as the suspect.

In order to avoid undue influence, witnesses should view suspects or a lineup individually and outside the presence of other witnesses. Witnesses should be instructed to avoid discussing details of the incident or of the identification process with other witnesses.

Whenever feasible, the eyewitness identification procedure should be audio and/or video recorded and the recording should be retained according to current evidence procedures.

    1. PHOTOGRAPHIC LINEUP AND LIVE LINEUP CONSIDERATIONS

An identification procedure involving photographs shall be conducted by a blind or blinded administrator either through the use of an automated computer program or the folder shuffle method. A live line-up procedure shall be conducted by a blind administrator (Md. Code PS § 3-506.1).

Before an identification procedure is conducted, an eyewitness shall be provided the instructions without other eyewitnesses present (Md. Code PS § 3-506.1).

When identification is made in a live lineup or photo array, the administrator shall document in writing all identification statements made by the eyewitness (Md. Code PS § 3-506.1).

Each filler shall resemble the description of the perpetrator given by the eyewitness in significant physical features, including any unique or unusual features. At least five fillers, in addition to the suspect, shall be included when an array of photographs is displayed to an eyewitness. At least four fillers, in addition to the suspect, shall be included in a live lineup (Md. Code PS § 3-506.1).

If an eyewitness has previously participated in an identification procedure in connection with the identification of another person suspected of involvement in the offense, the fillers in the identification procedure shall be different from the fillers used in any prior identification procedure (Md. Code PS § 3-506.1).

      1. MULTIPLE EYEWITNESSES

When there are multiple eyewitnesses (Md. Code PS § 3-506.1):

  1. The identification procedure shall be conducted separately for each eyewitness.
  2. The  suspect  shall  be  placed  in  a  different  position  for  each  identification  procedure conducted for each eyewitness.
  3. The eyewitnesses may not be allowed to communicate with each other until all identification procedures have been completed.
    1. FIELD IDENTIFICATION CONSIDERATIONS

Field identifications, also known as field elimination show-ups or one-on-one identifications, may be helpful in certain cases, where exigent circumstances make it impracticable to conduct a photo or live lineup identification. A field elimination show-up or one-on-one identification should not be used when independent probable cause exists to arrest a suspect. In such cases a live or photo lineup is the preferred course of action if eyewitness identification is contemplated.

When initiating a field identification, the member should observe the following guidelines:

  1. Obtain a complete description of the suspect from the witness.
  2. Assess whether a witness should be included in a field identification process by considering:
    1. The length of time the Witness observed the suspect.
    2. The distance between the witness and the suspect.
    3. Whether the witness could view the suspect’s face.
    4. The quality of the lighting when the suspect was observed by the witness.
    5. Whether there was distracting noises or activity during the observation.
    6. Any other circumstances affecting the witness’s opportunity to observe the suspect.
    7. The length of time that has elapsed since the witness observed the suspect.
  3. If safe and practicable, the person who is the subject of the show-up should not be handcuffed or in a patrol vehicle.
  4. When feasible, members should bring the witness to the location of the subject of the show- up, rather than bring the subject of the show-up to the witness.
  5. The person who is the subject of the show-up should not be shown to the same witness more than once.
  6. In cases involving multiple suspects, witnesses should only be permitted to view the subjects of the show-up one at a time.
  7. The person who is the subject of the show-up should not be required to put on clothing worn by the suspect, to speak words uttered by the suspect or to perform other actions mimicking those of the suspect.
  8. If a witness positively identifies a subject of a show-up as the suspect, members should not conduct any further field identifications with other witnesses for that suspect. In such instances members should document the contact information for any additional witnesses for follow up, if necessary.
    1. DOCUMENTATION

A thorough description of the eyewitness process and the result of any eyewitness identification shall be documented in the case report. Witness comments of how certain he/she is of the

identification or non-identification should be quoted in the report. If a photographic lineup is utilized, a copy of the photographic lineup presented to the witness shall be included in the case report. In addition, the order in which the photographs were presented to the witness should be documented in the case report. A written record is not required if a video or audio record of the identification procedure is made that captures all of the information specified in Md. Code PS § 3-506.1.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Brady Information

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy establishes guidelines for identifying and releasing potentially exculpatory or impeachment information (so-called “Brady information”) to a prosecuting attorney.

605.1.1   DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Brady information – Information known or possessed by the Glenarden Police Department that is both favorable and material to the current prosecution or defense of a criminal defendant.

    1. POLICY

The Glenarden Police Department will conduct fair and impartial criminal investigations and will provide the prosecution with both incriminating and exculpatory evidence, as well as information that may adversely affect the credibility of a witness. In addition to reporting all evidence of guilt, the Glenarden Police Department will assist the prosecution by complying with its obligation to disclose information that is both favorable and material to the defense. The Department will identify and disclose to the prosecution potentially exculpatory information, as provided in this policy.

    1. DISCLOSURE OF INVESTIGATIVE INFORMATION

Officers must include in their investigative reports adequate investigative information and reference to all material evidence and facts that are reasonably believed to be either incriminating or exculpatory to any individual in the case. If an officer learns of potentially incriminating or exculpatory information any time after submission of a case, the officer or the handling investigator must prepare and submit a supplemental report documenting such information as soon as practicable. Supplemental reports shall be promptly processed and transmitted to the prosecutor’s office.

If information is believed to be privileged or confidential (e.g., informant or protected personnel files), the officer should discuss the matter with a supervisor and/or prosecutor to determine the appropriate manner in which to proceed.

Evidence or facts are considered material if there is a reasonable probability that they would affect the outcome of a criminal proceeding or trial. Determining whether evidence or facts are material often requires legal or even judicial review. If an officer is unsure, the officer should address the issue with a supervisor.

Supervisors who are uncertain about whether evidence or facts are material should address the issue in a written memo to an appropriate prosecutor. A copy of the memo should be retained in the department case file.

    1. BRADY PROCESS

The Chief of Police shall select a member of the Department to coordinate requests for Brady information. This person shall be directly responsible to the Administration Lieutenant or the authorized designee.

The responsibilities of the coordinator include, but are not limited to:

  1. Working with the appropriate prosecutors’ offices and the Town Attorney’s office to establish systems and processes to determine what constitutes Brady information and the method for notification and disclosure.
  2. Maintaining a current list of members who have Brady information in their files or backgrounds (Md. Code PS § 3-106.1).
    1. Updating this list whenever potential Brady information concerning any department member becomes known to the Department or is placed into a personnel or internal affairs file.
    1. DISCLOSURE OF REQUESTED INFORMATION

If Brady information is located, the following procedure shall apply:

  1. In the event that a motion has not already been filed by the criminal defendant or other party, the prosecuting attorney and department member whose file is related to the motion shall be notified of the potential presence of Brady information.
  2. The prosecuting attorney or Town Attorney should be requested to file a motion in order to initiate an in camera review by the court.
    1. If no motion is filed, the Custodian of Records should work with the appropriate counsel to determine whether the records should be disclosed to the prosecutor.
  3. The Custodian of Records shall accompany all relevant personnel files during any in camera inspection and address any issues or questions raised by the court in determining whether any information contained in the files is both material and favorable to the criminal defendant.
  4. If the court determines that there is relevant Brady information contained in the files, only that information ordered released will be copied and released to the parties filing the motion.
    1. Prior to the release of any information pursuant to this process, a protective order should be requested from the court limiting the use of such information to the involved case and requiring the return of all copies upon completion of the case.
  5. If a court has determined that relevant Brady information is contained in a member’s file in any case, the prosecutor should be notified of that fact in all future cases involving that member.
    1. INVESTIGATING BRADY ISSUES

If the Department receives information from any source that a member may have issues of credibility, dishonesty or has been engaged in an act of moral turpitude or criminal conduct, the information shall be investigated and processed in accordance with the Personnel Complaints Policy.

    1. SUBPOENA PROCESSING

The individual processing subpoenas (or the supervisor of the subpoenaed member) shall check the subpoenaed member’s name against the current list of those who are known to have Brady information in their files or background, and shall alert the coordinator if a person on the list is subpoenaed.

    1. TRAINING

Department personnel should receive periodic training on the requirements of this policy.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Unmanned Aerial System (UAS) Operations

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the use of an unmanned aerial system (UAS) and for the storage, retrieval and dissemination of images and data captured by the UAS.

606.1.1   DEFINITIONS

Definitions related to this policy include:

Unmanned Aerial System (UAS) – An unmanned aircraft of any type that is capable of sustaining directed flight, whether preprogrammed or remotely controlled (commonly referred to as an unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV)), and all of the supporting or attached systems designed for gathering information through imaging, recording or any other means.

    1. POLICY

Unmanned aerial systems may be utilized to enhance the department’s mission of protecting lives and property when other means and resources are not available or are less effective. Any use of a UAS will be in strict accordance with constitutional and privacy rights and Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations.

    1. PRIVACY

The use of the UAS potentially involves privacy considerations. Absent a warrant or exigent circumstances, operators and observers shall adhere to FAA altitude regulations and shall not intentionally record or transmit images of any location where a person would have a reasonable expectation of privacy (e.g., residence, yard, enclosure). Operators and observers shall take reasonable precautions to avoid inadvertently recording or transmitting images of areas where there is a reasonable expectation of privacy. Reasonable precautions can include, for example, deactivating or turning imaging devices away from such areas or persons during UAS operations.

    1. PROGRAM COORDINATOR

The Chief of Police will appoint a program coordinator who will be responsible for the management of the UAS program. The program coordinator will ensure that policies and procedures conform to current laws, regulations and best practices and will have the following additional responsibilities:

  • Coordinating the FAA Certificate of Waiver or Authorization (COA) application process and ensuring that the COA is current.
  • Ensuring that all authorized operators and required observers have completed all required FAA and department-approved training in the operation, applicable laws, policies and procedures regarding use of the UAS.
  • Developing uniform protocol for submission and evaluation of requests to deploy a UAS, including urgent requests made during ongoing or emerging incidents. Deployment of a UAS shall require written authorization of the Chief of Police or the authorized designee, depending on the type of mission.
  • Developing  protocol  for  conducting  criminal  investigations  involving  a  UAS,  including documentation of time spent monitoring a subject.
  • Implementing a system for public notification of UAS deployment.
  • Developing an operational protocol governing the deployment and operation of a UAS including, but not limited to, safety oversight, use of visual observers, establishment of lost link procedures and secure communication with air traffic control facilities.
  • Developing a protocol for fully documenting all missions.
  • Developing  a  UAS  inspection,  maintenance  and  record-keeping  protocol  to  ensure continuing airworthiness of a UAS, up to and including its overhaul or life limits.
  • Developing protocols to ensure that all data intended to be used as evidence are accessed, maintained, stored and retrieved in a manner that ensures its integrity as evidence, including strict adherence to chain of custody requirements. Electronic trails, including encryption, authenticity certificates and date and time stamping, shall be used as appropriate to preserve individual rights and to ensure the authenticity and maintenance of a secure evidentiary chain of custody.
  • Developing protocols that ensure retention and purge periods are maintained in accordance with established records retention schedules.
  • Facilitating law enforcement access to images and data captured by the UAS.
  • Recommending  program  enhancements,  particularly  regarding  safety  and  information security.
  • Ensuring that established protocols are followed by monitoring and providing periodic reports on the program to the Chief of Police.
    1. USE OF UAS

Only authorized operators who have completed the required training shall be permitted to operate the UAS.

Use of vision enhancement technology (e.g., thermal and other imaging equipment not generally available to the public) is permissible in viewing areas only where there is no protectable privacy interest or when in compliance with a search warrant or court order. In all other instances, legal counsel should be consulted. Operations should only be conducted during daylight hours and a UAS should not be flown over populated areas without FAA approval.

    1. PROHIBITED USE

The UAS video surveillance equipment shall not be used:

  • To conduct random surveillance activities.
  • To target a person based solely on individual characteristics, such as, but not limited to race, ethnicity, national origin, religion, disability, gender or sexual orientation.
  • To harass, intimidate or discriminate against any individual or group.
  • To conduct personal business of any type. The UAS shall not be weaponized.
    1. RETENTION OF UAS DATA

Data collected by the UAS shall be retained as provided in the established records retention schedule.

    1. RETENTION OF UAS DATA

Data collected by the UAS shall be retained as provided in the established records retention schedule.

 GLENARDEN POLICE DEPARTMENT

Policy Manual

 

Warrant Service

    1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This policy establishes guidelines for the planning and serving of arrest and search warrants by members of this department. It is understood that this policy cannot address every variable or circumstance that can arise in the service of a search or arrest warrant, as these tasks can involve rapidly evolving and unique circumstances. This policy is intended to be used in conjunction with the Operations Planning and DE confliction Policy, which has additional guidance on planning and serving high-risk warrants. This policy is not intended to address the service of search warrants on locations or property already secured or routine field warrant arrests by patrol officers.

    1. POLICY

It is the policy of the Glenarden Police Department to balance the safety needs of the public, the safety of department members, privacy interests and other relevant factors when making decisions related to the service of search and arrest warrants.

    1. OPERATIONS DIRECTOR

The operations director (see the Operations Planning and DE confliction Policy) shall review all risk assessment forms with the involved supervisor to determine the risk level of the warrant service.

The operations director will also have the responsibility to coordinate service of those warrants that are categorized as high risk. DE confliction, risk assessment, operational planning, briefing and debriefing should follow guidelines in the Operations Planning and DE confliction Policy.

    1. SEARCH WARRANTS

Officers should receive authorization from a supervisor before preparing a search warrant application. Once authorization is received, the officer will prepare the affidavit and search warrant, consulting with the applicable prosecuting attorney as needed. He/she will also complete the risk assessment form and submit it, along with the warrant affidavit, to the appropriate supervisor and the operations director for review and classification of risk (see the Operations Planning and DE confliction Policy).

    1. ARREST WARRANTS

If an officer reasonably believes that serving an arrest warrant may pose a higher risk than commonly faced on a daily basis, the officer should complete the risk assessment form and submit it to the appropriate supervisor and the operations director for review and classification of risk (see the Operations Planning and DE confliction Policy). If the warrant is classified as high risk, service will be coordinated by the operations director. If the warrant is not classified as high risk, the supervisor should weigh the risk of entry into a residence

to make an arrest against other alternatives, such as arresting the person outside the residence where circumstances may pose a lower risk.

    1. WARRANT PREPARATION

An officer who prepares a warrant should ensure the documentation in support of the warrant contains as applicable:

  1. Probable cause to support the search or arrest, including relevant dates and times to demonstrate timeliness and facts to support any request for nighttime or no-knock warrant execution.
  2. A clear explanation of the affiant’s training, experience and relevant education.
  3. Adequately supported opinions, when relevant, that are not left to unsubstantiated conclusions.
  4. A nexus between the place to be searched and the persons or items central to the investigation. The facts supporting this nexus should be clear and current. For example, the affidavit shall explain why there is probable cause to believe that a particular person is currently residing at a particular location or that the items sought are present at a particular location.
  5. Full disclosure of known or suspected residents at the involved location and any indication of separate living spaces at the involved location. For example, it should be disclosed that several people may be renting bedrooms at a single location, even if the exact location of the rooms is not known.
  6. A specific description of the location to be searched, including photographs of the location, if reasonably available.
  7. A sufficient description of the items to be seized.
  8. Full disclosure of any known exculpatory information relevant to the warrant application (refer to the Brady Information Policy).
    1. HIGH-RISK WARRANT SERVICE

The operations director or the authorized designee shall coordinate the service of warrants that are categorized as high risk and shall have sole authority in determining the manner in which the warrant will be served, including the number of officers deployed.

The member responsible for directing the service should ensure the following as applicable:

  1. When practicable and when doing so does not cause unreasonable risk, video or photographic documentation is made of the condition of the location prior to execution of a search warrant. The images should include the surrounding area and persons present.
  2. The warrant service is video-recorded when practicable and legal to do so under Md. Code CJ § 10-402. The warrant service may be audio-recorded with the consent of all parties.
  3. Evidence is handled and collected only by those members who are designated to do so. All other members involved in the service of the warrant should alert one of the designated members to the presence of potential evidence and not touch or disturb the items.
  4. Reasonable efforts are made during the search to maintain or restore the condition of the location.
  5. Persons who are detained as part of the warrant service are handled appropriately under the circumstances.
  6. Reasonable care provisions are made for children and dependent adults (see the Child and Dependent Adult Safety Policy).
  7. A list is made of all items seized and a copy provided to the person in charge of the premises if present or otherwise left in a conspicuous place.
  8. A copy of the search warrant is left at the location.
  9. The condition of the property is documented with video recording or photographs after the search.
    1. DETENTIONS DURING WARRANT SERVICE

Officers must be sensitive to the safety risks of all persons involved with the service of a warrant. Depending on circumstances and facts present, it may be appropriate to control movements of any or all persons present at a warrant service, including those who may not be the subject of a warrant or suspected in the case. However, officers must be mindful that only reasonable force may be used and weapons should be displayed no longer than the officer reasonably believes is necessary (see the Use of Force Policy). As soon as it can be determined that an individual is not subject to the scope of a warrant and that no further reasonable suspicion or safety concerns exist to justify further detention, the person should be promptly released. Officers should, when and to the extent reasonable, accommodate the privacy and personal needs of people who have been detained.

    1. ACTIONS AFTER WARRANT SERVICE

The supervisor shall ensure that all affidavits, warrants, receipts and return